**TSRC - 1**

**MSFC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR REPAIRS**

**AND CONSTRUCTION (TSRC-1)**

**14 APRIL 1997**

These specifications shall apply to each minor construction contract
administered by the MSFC Facilities Office except as modified by
drawings for a particular job. Some materials and corresponding
execution specified herein may not be included in every project. In case
of a conflict between the requirements of these specifications and the
drawings, the requirements of the drawings shall govern.

MSFC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR REPAIRS

AND CONSTRUCTION (TSRC-1)

INDEX

[DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS]{.underline}

01011 GENERAL CONDITIONS

01061 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

01330 SUBMITTALS

01350 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE

01355 ASBESTOS PROCEDURES

01420 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS

01450 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY ASSURANCE / QUALITY CONTROL

01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

[DIVISION 2 SITEWORK]{.underline}

02200 SITE PREPARATION

02220 DEMOLITION & REMOVAL

02282 TERMITE CONTROL

02300 EARTHWORK

02315 READY MIXED FLOWABLE FILL

02370 GEOTEXTILE SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL

02500 UTILITY EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

02550 PRE-INSULATED UNDERGROUND STEAM DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

02630 STORM DRAINS

02720 CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

02740 BITUMINOUS TREATMENTS AND PAVEMENTS

02820 STEEL CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES

02920 SODDING AND SEEDING

[DIVISION 3 CONCRETE]{.underline}

03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

[DIVISION 4 MASONRY]{.underline}

04200 UNIT MASONRY

[DIVISION 5 METALS]{.underline}

05100 STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

05210 STEEL JOISTS

05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

05500 METAL FABRICATIONS

[DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS]{.underline}

06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY

06200 FINISH CARPENTRY

06400 CUSTOM ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK

[DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION]{.underline}

07270 FIRESTOPPING

07412 MANUFACTURED STEEL ROOF SYSTEM

07414 MANUFACTURED STEEL SIDING

07510 BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEM

07920 JOINT SEALERS

[DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS]{.underline}

08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

08210 WOOD DOORS

08710 DOOR HARDWARE

[DIVISION 9 FINISHES]{.underline}

09250 GYPSUM DRYWALL

09312 CERAMIC TILE WALL FINISH

09313 CERAMIC TILE FLOOR FINISH

09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

09650 RESILIENT FLOORING

09900 ARCHITECTURAL PAINTING

09970 SURFACE PREPARATION - EXTERIOR STEEL

[DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES]{.underline}

10160 TOILET PARTITIONS

10270 ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM

10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

[DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT]{.underline}

[NONE]{.underline}

[DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS]{.underline}

[NONE]{.underline}

[DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION]{.underline}

13120 PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING

13925 AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

[DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS]{.underline}

[NONE]{.underline}

[DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL]{.underline}

15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

15051 WELDING FOR MECHANICAL UTILITY PIPING

15052 RADIOGRAPHIC INSPECTION OF WELDED PIPING

15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION

15110 VALVES

15125 GAGES

15180 HEATING AND COOLING PIPING

15210 PROCESS AIR AND GAS PIPING

15215 CLEANING FOR PROCESS PIPING SYSTEMS

15405 PLUMBING

15720 AIR HANDLING UNITS

15730 UNITARY AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT

15750 HUMIDITY CONTROL EQUIPMENT

15765 ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS

15810 DUCTS

15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES

15830 FANS

15850 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

15901 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS / UTILITY CONTROL SYSTEM

15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

[DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL]{.underline}

16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING

16070 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

16080 ELECTRICAL TESTING

16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES

16140 WIRING DEVICES

16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

16420 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

16440 PANELBOARDS

16460 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

16500 LIGHTING

16921 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS

16922 COMBUSTIBLE GAS DETECTION & OXYGEN DEFICIENCY

> MONITORING SYSTEM

END OF INDEX

SECTION 01011

GENERAL CONDITIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 EXTENT OF WORK

> A. The work to be performed under each delivery order / FWR consists
> of furnishing all plant, materials, equipment, supplies, labor and
> transportation, including fuel, power, water (except materials,
> equipment, utility or service, if any, specified herein to be
> furnished by the Government), and performing all work in strict
> accordance with the Contract Documents, and including such detail
> drawings as may be furnished by the Contracting Officer from time to
> time during the prosecution of the work in explanation of contract
> requirements.

1.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

> A. In addition to the Agreement between the Government and the
> Contractor, the Contract Documents consist of the conditions of the
> contract (these General Conditions), drawings, specifications, addenda
> issued prior to the execution of the delivery order / FWR, and
> modifications issued after the execution of the delivery order / FWR.

1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT

> A. Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation
> that the Contractor has visited the site, become familiar with local
> conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated
> personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents.
>
> B. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items
> necessary for the proper execution and completion of the work by the
> Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is
> required by one shall be as binding as if required by all.
>
> C. Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and
> articles and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor
> in dividing the work among Subcontractors or in establishing the
> extent of work to be performed by any trade.

1.04 APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS

> A. These specifications shall apply to each delivery order / FWR
> administered by the MSFC Facilities Office except as modified by the
> drawings for a particular delivery order / FWR. Some materials and
> corresponding execution specified herein may not be included in every
> delivery order / FWR. In case of a conflict between the requirements
> of these specifications and the drawings, the requirements of the
> drawings shall govern.
>
> B. The provisions of specification sections in Division 1 (those
> beginning with the number 01xxx) shall apply to and form a part of
> each section of the specifications.

1.05 GENERAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

> A. Maintain in good order at the jobsite, one copy of all applicable
> drawings, specifications, other contract documents and approved shop
> drawings. Provide these documents for review by the Government
> Inspector, A/E, COTR, and other Government authorities.
>
> B. Maintain at the jobsite a notebook in neatly indexed form
> containing approved submittal data. Data shall be available for use
> during the construction period.
>
> C. As work progresses, maintain a complete set of blueline or
> blackline prints of the contract drawings and record work completed
> and changes from contract requirements. At the completion of work
> submit to the Government for approval two marked prints showing an
> accurate record of as-built conditions.

1.06 WORKSITE MAINTENANCE

> A. Maintain the worksite in a safe and clean condition at all times.
>
> B. Maintain weathertightness of occupied structures during renovations
> and modifications.
>
> C. Do not remove or penetrate any portion of the building that cannot
> be replaced with the specified modification by the end of the work day
> or protect by other acceptable measures in the event of rain or other
> inclement weather that might occur. The connection of the installed
> specified system to an existing system shall be made watertight at the
> end of each work day or at the onset of inclement weather that may
> occur during the construction period.
>
> D. Before the commencement of work on the project, submit for review
> by the COTR, the contractor's plan for maintaining watertightness
> throughout the entire period of performance. Include details for
> temporary connection of new work to existing. The Contractor will be
> held responsible for keeping moisture out of the building interior at
> all times during the period of the contract.
>
> E. In the event that there is water penetration, take immediate action
> to provide all materials, equipment, and labor to capture the
> moisture, dispose of the moisture, and protect all contents of the
> building. Work will be allowed to resume once the Contractor has
> prepared an adequate plan of preventative measures to ensure
> watertight conditions throughout the remainder of the contract.
>
> F. Make repairs to stop water penetration at once. The Contracting
> Officer reserves the right to stop work the work if he feels that the
> Contractor is not responsibly executing the work and is allowing any
> water penetration of the building.

1.07 REFERENCED AUTHORITIES

> Where articles, materials and equipment are required to conform to
> standard specifications or tests of the Government or other
> authorities incorporated by reference, they shall conform to the
> respective editions, including amendments, in effect on the date of
> the Invitation for Bids.

1.08 PROTECTION OF MATERIAL AND WORK

> The Contractor shall at all times protect and preserve all materials,
> supplies, and equipment of every description (including property which
> may be Government-furnished or owned) and all work performed. All
> reasonable requests of the Contracting Officer to enclose or
> especially protect such property shall be complied with. If, as
> determined by the Contracting Officer, material, equipment, supplies
> and work performed are not adequately protected by the Contractor such
> property may be protected by the Government and the cost thereof may
> be charged to the Contractor or deducted from any payments due him.

1.09 DISCREPANCIES AND INTERPRETATIONS

> The Contractor shall check all drawings and specifications for
> construction interferences, detail misdescriptions, dimensional
> errors, and other conflicts and shall promptly notify the Contracting
> Officer of any discrepancies. The Contracting Officer will make a
> written interpretation.

1.10 WATER

> All reasonably required amounts of water will be available to the
> Contractor by the Government from such existing water systems,
> outlets, and supplies, without cost to the Contractor for the water he
> consumes. The Contractor shall be responsible for approved disposal of
> waste water. The Contractor shall install and maintain at his own
> expense any necessary supply connections and facilities as may be
> approved by the Contracting Officer. All water shall be carefully
> conserved. Before final acceptance, temporary connections and piping
> installed by the Contractor shall be removed.

1.11 ELECTRICITY

> All reasonably required amounts of electric power will be made
> available to the Contractor by the Government from Government-owned or
> operated electrical systems and supplied without cost to the
> Contractor. The Contractor shall install and maintain at this own
> expense any necessary supply connections and facilities as may be
> authorized by the Contracting Officer. All electricity shall be
> carefully conserved. Before final acceptance, temporary connections
> and facilities installed by the Contractor shall be removed.

1.12 IDENTIFICATION AND ENTRY

> The Contractor will be required to conform to identification and entry
> procedures as directed by the Contracting Officer.

1.13 PORTABLE TOOLS

> All portable electrically-powered tools used on this work shall be
> grounded by means of a 3-wire polarity type grounding system.

1.14 TOILETS

> Pit toilets will not be allowed.

1.15 REVERSE SIGNAL ALARM

> Self-propelled construction equipment, (except light service vehicles)
> crawler-type equipment, such as cranes, power shovels and draglines,
> whether moving alone or in combination shall be equipped with a
> reverse signal alarm. The alarm shall be mounted on the rear of the
> equipment and shall withstand severe wear and tear, adverse weather,
> and unfavorable environmental working conditions and shall be
> certified by the manufacturer as fully meeting the following
> performance standards.
>
> The alarm shall produce a relatively pure tone which shall peak within
> the United Standard Association standard octave passband of 600 to
> 2,400 cycles per second and shall produce a 0.2 to 0.5 second audible
> warning within the initial 3 feet of backward movement of the vehicle
> on which it is mounted and at regular intervals, not to exceed 3
> seconds, throughout the backward movement. The alarm shall
> automatically cut out when the backward movement ceases. The sound
> intensity of the alarm shall range from and not exceed 100 dB at a
> horizontal distance of 5 feet from the alarm.
>
> Actuation of the alarm shall be automatic by direct connection to any
> part of the equipment that moves or acts in a manner distinctive only
> to the rearward movement of the vehicle with no manual controls of any
> kind between the source of actuation and the alarm. Where application
> of this requirement to specific types of equipment has impractical
> application, other means of actuation may be used upon written
> approval of the Contracting Officer.

1.16 EXPLOSIVE AND DISPOSAL AREA PRECAUTION

> The Contractor shall be responsible for alerting personnel, including
> subcontractor personnel, that the site of the work is located on a
> former Ordnance installation. Although there is no record of the
> jobsite for this facility having been used as a disposal area for
> explosive items or toxic materials, personnel should be apprised of
> this fact and in the event old shells or other explosive components or
> suspect materials are encountered in the area, these items should not
> be handled or subjected to any physical abuse. The Contractor shall
> notify the Contracting Officer immediately upon detection of such
> items in order that the Contracting Officer may effect safe disposal
> of these items.

1.17 COOPERATION WITH OTHERS

> During the life of this contract it is anticipated that other
> contractors will be performing operation in the general area where
> work under this contract is being performed. The Contractor shall
> cooperate in all respects wherever necessary for the better
> prosecution of the work. As far as practicable, all persons working in
> the vicinity shall have equal rights to the use of all transportation
> facilities and grounds within the limitations specified in Standard
> Form 1442, Section I, Provision Clause No. 52.236-10. The Contractor
> shall so arrange his operations as to not interfere with work in
> progress. In case of dispute or disagreement regarding use of
> transportation and storage facilities and rights of access, the
> decision of the Contracting Officer will govern.

1.18 RADIOS

> To insure safety to Government personnel on nearby test stands and to
> prevent dangerous radio interference from damaging space vehicle test
> programs underway near site, the Contractor shall not use any radio
> communication on or near site without coordinating with the
> Contracting Officer.

1.19 PERMITS

> Prior to any excavation, demolition, or burning operations, the
> Contractor shall obtain a permit from the Contracting Officer
> authorizing and approving the Contractor's methods of operation.

1.20 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR SPECIAL HOURS OF WORK

> During the period of performance for this contract, the Contractor may
> be prohibited from working in the area approximately two days per week
> during hazardous testing operations. The Contractor shall be furnished
> a weekly tentative Government schedule on the Friday preceding the
> scheduled testing. If a change in the testing schedule should occur,
> the Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor 48 hours in advance
> so the Contractor may schedule other work for that period. The
> Contractor will not receive additional compensation for time lost due
> to testing at a given facility.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01061

GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

The requirements of this Section apply to, and are a component part of,
each section of the specifications.

1.02 REFERENCE

The publications listed below form a part of this section to the extent
referenced:

CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)

29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards

29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction

1.03 SUBMITTALS

The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330
"Submittals," in sufficient detail to shown full compliance with the
specifications:

SD-08 Statements

> Statements shall be submitted for the following items in accordance
> with paragraphs entitled, "Safety Plan" and "Protection Plan," of this
> section.

Safety Plan

Protection Plan

> SD-13 Certificates
>
> License Certificates for Radiation Materials and Equipment shall be
> submitted by the Contractor for all specialized material and equipment
> that could cause fatal harm to construction personnel or to the
> construction project.

. SD-18 Records

Records shall be submitted in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Gas
Protection," of this section.

A. Safety Plan

Contractor shall submit a safety plan to the Contracting Officer for
approval prior to contract award. Compliance with NASA 1700.I (V1) shall
be met. This document will be made available upon request from the
Contracting Officer.

> The Safety plan shall include, as a minimum, the following:
>
> a\. Safety program objectives.

b\. Methods to attain safety objectives.

c\. Responsibility of key personnel for the Contractor.

d\. Safety meetings, surveys, inspections, and reports.

e\. Disaster and emergency programs.

f\. Lists of key personnel to be contacted in times of emergency.

g\. Program to show compliance with Federal OSHA Safety and Health
Standards 29 CFR 1910 and 29 CFR 1926 and various safety requirements of
NASA NHB 1700.1 (V1). The safety plan should include safe methods of
trenching and excavation, personnel protection of personnel traffic
areas (overhead protection for sidewalks that must be used by others
during construction activities), and proper use of an electrical source
for fixed and portable tools."

h\. Methods to comply with the requirement for reporting and
investigation of accidents to the Contracting Officer.

i\. Statement that the Contractor will not invalidate the integrity of
safety systems without proper authorization.

j\. Procedures for emergency actions to be taken to secure dangerous
conditions, to protect personnel, and secure work areas in the event of
accident or an act of nature.

> k\. Procedures for securing the accident site so that the area remains
> secure until arrival of a safety investigator. The accident site will
> remain secured until released by the Contracting Officer.

l\. Personnel Training and Certification (NHB 1700.1 (V1)

m\. Personal Protective Equipment (29 CFR 1910.132)

n\. Control of Hazardous Energy, Lockout/Tagout System (29 CFR 1910.147)
In this section, include an example of the tags the contractor will
use."

o\. Hazard Communication (29 CFR 1910.1200)

"NOTE: During the Pre-Construction Conference, to be arranged by the
Facilities Office, the Industrial Safety Office will discuss common
safety requirements at MSFC and distribute handouts addressing these
requirements."

B. Protection Plan

Structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities
immediately adjacent to excavations shall be protected against damage.

1.04 GENERAL SAFETY PROVISIONS

A. Contractor is subject to applicable federal, state, and local laws,
regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders relating to safety and health
in effect on the date of this Contract.

> B. During the performance of work under this Contract, the Contractor
> is responsible for control and safety of persons visiting the project
> site. Contractor is responsible for his personnel and for
> familiarizing each of his subcontractors with safety requirements.
> Contractor shall advise the Contracting Officer of any special safety
> restriction he has established so that Government personnel can be
> notified of these restrictions.

1.05 SAFETY CLEARANCE PROCEDURES FOR LOCKOUT/TAGOUT SYSTEM

A. Contractor shall ensure that each employee is familiar with and
complies with these procedures, and the lockout/tagout procedures in the
Contractor approved safety plan.

> B. Contracting Officer will, at the Contractor's request, apply
> lockouts/tagouts and take other actions that, because of experience
> and knowledge, are known to be necessary to make the particular
> equipment safe to work on.

C. No person, regardless of position or authority, shall operate any
switch, valve, or equipment that has an official lock or tag attached to
it, nor shall such lock or tag be removed except as provided in this
section.

D. No person shall work on any equipment that requires a lock or tag
less the, his immediate supervisor, project leader, or a subordinate has
in his possession the keys to the locks and the stub of the required
lock or tags.

E. When work is to be performed on electrical circuits, the work shall
be performed only by personnel qualified observing the required safety
clearance.

> F. A supervisor who is required to enter an area protected by a lock
> or tag will be considered a member of the protected group provided he
> notifies the holder of the tag stub and key each time he enters and
> departs from the protected area.

G. Identification markings on building light and power distribution
circuits shall not be relied on for established safe work conditions.

> H. Before clearance will be given on any equipment other than
> electrical (generally referred to as mechanical apparatus), the
> apparatus, valves, or systems shall be secured in a passive condition
> with the appropriate vents, pins, and locks.

I. Pressurized or vacuum systems shall be vented to relieve differential
pressure completely.

J. Vent valves shall be tagged and locked open during the course of
work.

K. Where dangerous gas or fluid systems are involved, or in areas where
the environment may be oxygen deficient, system or areas shall be
purged, ventilated, or otherwise made safe prior to entry.

L. Where tag or lock placement or removal is required, the contractor
shall coordinate with the Government prior to each requirement.

1.06 ACCIDENT TREATMENT AND RECORDS

Contractor shall post emergency first aid and ambulance information at
project site. Contractor employees may utilize Government dispensary
facilities located in building 4249 for injury and emergency medical
treatment. Such treatment shall be recorded by the Contractor on forms
supplied by the Government. Contact Occupational Medicine Services.
Emergency telephone 112, non-emergency telephone 544-5651.

1.07 FIRE PREVENTION AND PROTECTION

A. Open-flame heating devices will not be permitted except by approval
in writing from the Industrial Safety Office. Approval for the use of
open fires and open-flame heating devices will not relieve the
Contractor from the responsibility for any damage incurred because of
fires.

> B. Burn Permits are issued by the Industrial Safety Office and details
> for requesting burn permits will be provided by the Industrial Safety
> Office representative during the Pre-Construction Conference.

C. Burning trash, brush, or wood on the project site shall not be
permitted.

1.08 USE OF EXPLOSIVES

Explosives shall not be permitted on Government Property.

1.09 ELECTRICAL

Contractor shall appoint an individual responsible for the electrical
safety of each work team to restrict entry to dangerous locations to
those authorized by him jointly with the Government.

1.10 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES AND CONFINED SPACE ENTRY

Safety clearance from the Environmental Health and Industrial Safety
office is required before any contractor personnel enters a manhole.
Requirements of MM 1845.3 confined space entry program shall be met.
Contractor shall contact the Contracting Officer for support services at
least 24 hours in advance.

Contractor shall be responsible for removing water and debris before
commencement and during execution of work in manholes.

1.11 RADIATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Loss of radioactive material shall be reported immediately to the
Contracting Officer. Actual exposure of the radiographic film or
unshielding the source shall not be initiated until after 5 p.m. on
weekdays.

In instances where radiography is scheduled near or adjacent to
buildings or areas having limited access or one-way doors, no
assumptions shall be made as to building occupancy. Where necessary the
Contracting Officer will direct the Contractor to conduct an actual
building entry, search, and alert. Where removal of personnel from such
a building cannot be accomplished and it is otherwise safe to proceed
with the radiography, a fully instructed employee shall be positioned
inside such building or area to prevent exiting while external
radiographic operations are in process.

1.12 FACILITY OCCUPANCY CLOSURE

Streets, walks, and other facilities occupied and used by the Government
shall not be closed or obstructed without written permission from the
Contracting Officer.

1.13 PROTECTION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES

> A. Prior to performing any excavation work or any surface penetrations
> 6 inches (150 millimeters) or deeper (such as driving stakes more than
> 6 inches (150 millimeters) in the ground) on any ground surface, the
> Contractor shall obtain from the Facilities Office the current
> subsurface utility drawing of the particular area to be worked on.
> Contractor shall stake out subsurface high voltage cables,
> communication cables, and pipe lines indicated within the scope of the
> work contemplated. After exposure, the Contractor shall obtain
> agreement from the Contracting Officer on how much closer to cable or
> pipe the excavations can be permitted.

B. Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer, 48 hours prior to
the start of excavation work or surface penetration, to enable the
Contracting Officer to review measures being taken to prevent hazard to
employees and possible damage to subsurface utilities. Where emergency
conditions preclude the 48 hours advance notification, the Contractor
shall immediately inform the Contracting Officer of his intention to
initiate work prior to actual start of activity.

C. After obtaining clearance from the Contracting Officer, the
Contractor shall proceed with excavating work, or other surface
penetration work. Contractor, however, shall temporarily halt any
machine excavation work or other surface penetration when approaching
within 10 feet (3 meters) of the staked-out cable or pipe line until the
Contractor has exposed the cable or pipe by hand excavation to fix its
location.

1.14 GAS PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall have one or more employees properly trained in
operation of gas testing equipment and formally qualified as gas
inspectors who shall be on duty during times workmen are in confined
spaces. Their primary functions shall be to test for gas and operate
testing equipment. Unless equipment of constant supervisory type with
automatic alarm is employed, gas tests shall be made at least every 2
hours or more often when character of ground or experience indicates gas
may be encountered. A gas test shall be made before workmen are
permitted to enter the excavation after an idle period exceeding
one-half hour.

B. Readings shall be permanently recorded daily, indicating the
concentration of gas, number and location of drilled piers, point of
test, date, and time of test.

C. Special requirements, coordination, and precautions will apply to
areas that contain a hazardous atmosphere or, by virtue of their use or
physical character, may be oxygen deficient. A check by Government is
required prior to entering confined space. Surveillance and monitoring
shall be required in these types of work spaces by both Contractor and
Government personnel.

1.15 ROOFING AND COATING

At the beginning of each work day the Contractor shall check with the
Contracting Officer before proceeding to work on the roof to ensure safe
work conditions. Roofing and coating work shall adhere to NFPA-241.

1.16 WELDING, FLAME CUTTING, AND MELTING

A. Contractor shall clear welding and cutting operations with the
Industrial Safety Office before operations begin.

B. Contractor shall discontinue burning, welding, or cutting operations
1 hour prior to the end of the normal work day. A workman shall remain
at the site for 1 hour after discontinuing these operations to make
thorough inspection of the area for possible sources of latent
combustion. He shall be equipped with two full 15-pound (6.8 kilogram)
carbon dioxide fire extinguishers. Details for reporting fires will be
provided by the Industrial Safety Office representative during the
Pre-Construction Conference.

C. During operations involving possible fire hazard, the Contractor
shall notify the Contracting Offices and not proceed until clearance is
obtained in writing. Contracting Officer may request a standby from the
Fire Station. This requirement does not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for welding and cutting safety.

1.17 HIGH NOISE LEVEL PROTECTION

Operations performed by the Contractor that involve the use of equipment
with output of high noise levels (jackhammers, air compressors, and
explosive device activated tools) shall be scheduled for weekends or
after duty working hours as directed at the pre construction conference.
Use of any such equipment shall be approved in writing by the
Contracting Officer prior to commencement of work.

1.18 SEVERE STORM PLAN

In the event of a severe storm warning, the Contractor shall:

> a\. Secure outside equipment and materials and place materials
> possible to damage inprotected locations.

b\. Check surrounding area, including roof, for loose material,
equipment, debris, and other objects that could be blown away or against
existing facilities.

c\. Ensure that temporary erosion controls are adequate.

d\. Vacate temporary construction trailers.

1.19 SWINGING SCAFFOLDS

The following shall apply to use of swinging scaffolds on work being
performed under this contract.

a\. Scaffold machines used for hoisting personnel shall be approved by
the Underwriters' Laboratories. Scaffolds shall not be loaded beyond
manufacturer's rated capacity.

b\. Scaffold machines with cast-iron parts or components shall not be
used.

c\. A positive action pawl or brake shall be provided to prevent free
fall of scaffold.

d\. Scaffold machines with latching arrangements for locking out pawls
or brakes shall not be used.

e\. Operation of the scaffold machine shall be performed only from the
working level of the scaffold.

> f\. All personnel working from swing scaffolds shall wear safety belts
> attached to an independently suspended safety line. Independent line
> shall not be attached to any scaffold.

1.20 OPERATIONS ADJACENT TO POWER LINES

Equipment or any part thereof shall not have the capability of coming
within the following minimum clearances from energized power lines.
Positioning and blocking of equipment to assure that no part thereof,
including cables, can come within the following minimum clearances will
be considered an acceptable alternate.

Power Lines Minimum Required

[Nominal System KV]{.underline} [Clearance (Feet)]{.underline}

5 3

15 8

44 10

69 12

115-161 15

A notice of the minimum required clearance shall be posted at the
operator's position.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01330

SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> A. Section Includes:
>
> Submittal Procedures
>
> Drawing Submittals
>
> Data Submittals
>
> Samples
>
> Manufacturer\'s Instructions
>
> Manufacturer\'s Certificates
>
> Submittal Descriptions

1.02 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS

> A. Submittal descriptions (SD\'s) listed in this section give general
> requirements for each type of submittal. Further specific requirements
> may be specified in the pertinent technical specification section.
>
> B. The actual requirement for submittals for each job will be listed
> on the Schedule of Submittals furnished to each Contractor prior to
> bidding. This Schedule of Submittals is a supplement to the Project
> Manual and is a Contract Document.

1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

> A. Transmit each submittal with forms approved by the Contracting
> Officer's Technical Representative (COTR).
>
> B. Sequentially number the transmittal forms. Resubmittals shall have
> original number with an alphabetical suffix.
>
> C. Identify project, Contractor, lower tier contractors or supplier,
> and specification number as appropriate.
>
> D. Apply contractor\'s stamp, signed or initialled, certifying that
> review, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent
> construction work, and coordination of information, is in accordance
> with the requirements of the work and contract documents. Identify
> specific variations from contract requirements in the transmittal
> letter. Failure to point out deviations may result in the Government
> requiring rejection and removal of work at no additional cost to the
> Government.
>
> E. Schedule submittals to expedite the project. No work shall be begun
> until all submittals for that work (such as submittals for materials,
> data, schedules, instructions, procedures, drawings, Material Safety
> Data Sheets, etc.) are either APPROVED or APPROVED AS NOTED.
>
> F. Identify variations from contract documents and product or system
> limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of
> completed work.
>
> G. Provide space for architect/engineer review stamp.
>
> H. Revise and resubmit submittals as required. Identify changes made
> since previous submittal.
>
> I. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties.
> Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with
> provisions.

1.04 CONTRACTING OFFICER\'S REVIEW

> A. The Contracting Officer will review submittals and provide
> pertinent notation within ten working days after date of receipt.
>
> B. Notations will be as follows:
>
> 1\. Submittals marked [approved]{.underline} authorize the contractor
> to proceed with the work covered.
>
> 2\. Submittals marked [approved as noted, resubmittal not
> required]{.underline} authorize the Contractor to proceed with the
> work covered, provided no exception is taken to the correction noted.
> If the Contractor takes exception to the corrections noted, or is
> unable to proceed according to the notations, resubmittals shall be
> required with full explanation.
>
> 3\. Submittals marked [approved as noted, resubmittal
> required]{.underline} require the contractor to re-submit with
> appropriate changes and receive approval before proceeding with the
> work covered.
>
> 4\. Submittals marked [returned for corrections]{.underline} indicate
> noncompliance with the contract requirements. The Contractor shall
> resubmit with appropriate changes and receive approval before
> proceeding with the work covered.
>
> C. If the Contractor considers any correction or notation on the
> returned submittals to constitute a change to the contract
> requirements, notice shall be given to the Contracting Officer.
> Resolution shall be received before proceeding with the work covered.
> Failure to give notice, or proceeding without a resolution,
> constitutes acceptance of the correction or notation with no change in
> the contract.

1.05 DRAWING SUBMITTALS

> A. Submit in the form of one reproducible transparency and four opaque
> reproductions. Transparency with review comments will be returned to
> the Contractor.
>
> B. After receipt, reproduce and distribute in accordance with
> Submittal Procedures above.

1.06 DATA SUBMITTALS

> A. Submit seven copies of all submittals.
>
> B. Mark to identify products, models, options, and other data. Methods
> of marking shall be reproducible by coping machine (no hi-liter).
> Supplement manufacturer\'s standard data to provide information unique
> to this project.
>
> C. Four copies will be returned to the Contractor with review
> comments.
>
> D. After receipt, distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures
> above.

1.07 SAMPLES

> A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic
> characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment
> devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.
>
> B. Submit samples of colors and finishes from full range of
> manufacturer\'s standard colors, textures, and patterns for selection.
> Submit samples of all products and materials for color selection at
> the same time to facilitate selection of compatible colors. Colors
> will not be selected until all samples have been received.
>
> C. Include identification of each sample with full project
> information.
>
> D. Submit the number of samples specified in the individual
> specification sections, one of which will be retained. Reviewed
> samples which may be used in the work are identified in individual
> specification sections.

1.08 PROGRESS SCHEDULES

> A. PROJECT NETWORK ANALYSIS
>
> A project network analysis is generally required for only those
> delivery orders / FWRs for which the Contractor seeks progress
> payments. However, the Contracting Officer reserves the right to
> require a network analysis for any delivery order / FWR.
>
> The Contractor shall submit the initial progress schedule within 21
> days of notice to proceed. The schedule shall be updated and
> resubmitted monthly beginning 7 days after return of the approved
> initial schedule. Updating shall entail complete revision of the
> graphic and data displays incorporating changes in scheduled dates and
> performance periods. Redlined updates will only be acceptable for use
> as weekly status reviews.
>
> The Contractor shall provide a single point contact from his on-site
> organization as his Schedule Specialist. The Schedule Specialist shall
> have the responsibility of updating and coordinating the schedule with
> actual job conditions. The Schedule Specialist shall participate in
> weekly status meetings and present current information on the status
> of purchase orders, shop drawings, off-site fabrication, material
> deliveries, Subcontractor activities, anticipated needs for Government
> furnished equipment, and any problem which may impact the contract
> performance period.
>
> Project network analysis shall include:
>
> a\. The graphic display shall be a standard network or arrow diagram
> capable of illustrating the required data. Drafting shall be computer
> generated on standard 24 by 36 inch (nominal size) drafting sheets or
> on small (11 by 17 inch minimum) sheets with separate overview and
> detail breakouts. Any graphic display system used shall be readily
> legible with a clear, consistent method for continuations and detail
> referencing. The critical path shall be clearly delineated on the
> display. When milestone dates are included in the Contract they shall
> be clearly indicated on the display.
>
> b\. Data shall be presented as a separate printout on paper or, where
> feasible, may be printed on the same sheet as the graphic display.
> Data shall be organized in a logical coherent display capable of
> periodic updating.
>
> c\. Data shall include verbal activity descriptions with a numerical
> ordering system cross referenced to the graphic display. Additionally,
> costs (broken down into separate materials and labor costs), duration,
> early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish
> date, and float shall be detailed for each activity. A running total
> of the percent completion based on completed activity costs versus
> total contract cost shall be indicated. A system for indicating
> scheduled versus actual activity dates and durations shall be
> provided.
>
> d\. The schedule shall be of sufficient detail to facilitate the
> Contractor's control of the job and to allow the Contracting Officer
> to readily follow progress for portions of the work.

1.09 STATUS REPORT ON MATERIALS ORDER

On delivery orders/FWRs requiring a network analysis schedule, within 10
working days after receipt of the delivery order/FWR the Contractor
shall submit, for approval by the Contracting Officer, an initial status
report on materials orders. This report will be updated and re-submitted
at weekly project meetings, or as directed by the Contracting Officer as
the status on material orders changes.

The report shall list, in chronological order by need date, materials
orders necessary for completion of Delivery Order/FWRs. The following
information will be required for each material order listed.

a\. Delivery order/FWR numbers.

b\. Material name, supplier, and invoice number.

c\. Bar chart line item or CPM activity number affected by the order.

d\. Delivery date needed to allow directly and indirectly related work
to be completed within the contract performance period.

e\. Current delivery date agreed on by supplier.

> f\. When item d exceeds item c, the effect that delayed delivery date
> will have on contract completion date.
>
> g\. When item d exceeds item c, a summary of efforts made by the
> Contractor to expedite the delayed delivery date to bring it in line
> with the needed delivery date, including efforts made to place the
> order (or subcontract) with other suppliers.

1.10 MANUFACTURER\'S CERTIFICATES

> A. When noted on the Schedule of Submittals, submit manufacturer\'s
> certificates in quantities specified for product data submittals.
>
> B. Indicate that material or product conforms to, or exceeds,
> specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits,
> and certificates as appropriate.
>
> C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or
> product, but must be acceptable to the Contracting Officer.

1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

> Submit six copies of the manufacturer\'s O & M manuals.

1.12 SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTIONS (SD\'s)

> A. Submittals Description (SD): Drawings, diagrams, layouts,
> schematics, descriptive literature, illustrations, schedules,
> performance and test data, and similar materials to be furnished by
> the Contractor, explaining in detail specific portions of the work
> required by the contract.
>
> B. The following are explanations of the submittal descriptions which
> may be required by the Schedule of Submittals on each contract.

SD-01 DATA

> Submittals which provide calculations, descriptions, or other
> documentation regarding the work.

SD-02 MANUFACTURER\'S CATALOG DATA

> Data composed of catalog cuts, brochures, circulars, specification,
> product data, and printed information in sufficient detail and scope
> to verify compliance with requirements of the contract documents. Mark
> submittals to show model numbers and accessories to be furnished.
> Include catalog number and page number to assist Contracting Officer
> in acquiring additional information if required.

SD-03 MANUFACTURER\'S STANDARD COLOR CHARTS

> Preprinted illustrations displaying choices of color and finish for a
> material or product.

SD-04 DRAWINGS

> Submittals which graphically show relationship of various components
> of the work, schematic diagrams of systems, detail of fabrications,
> layout of particular elements, connections, and other relational
> aspects of the work.

SD-05 DESIGN DATA

> Design calculations, mix design analyses, or other data, written in
> nature, and pertaining to a part of the work.

SD-06 INSTRUCTIONS

> Preprinted material describing installation of a product, system, or
> material, including special notices and material safety data sheets
> (if any), concerning impedances, hazards, and safety precautions.

SD-07 SCHEDULES

> Tabular list of data including location, features, or other pertinent
> information regarding products, materials, equipment, or components to
> be used in the work.

SD-08 STATEMENTS

> A document, required of the Contractor, or through the Contractor by
> way of a supplier, installer, manufacturer, or other lower tier
> contractor, the purpose of which is to further the quality or orderly
> progression of a portion of the work by documenting procedures,
> acceptability of methods or personnel, qualifications, or other
> verification of quality.

SD-09 REPORTS

> Reports of inspections and laboratory tests, including analysis and
> interpretation of test results. Each report shall be properly
> identified. Tests methods used and compliance with recognized test
> standards shall be described.

SD-10 TEST REPORTS

> A report signed by an authorized official of an independent testing
> laboratory that a material, product, or system identical to the
> material, product, or system to be provided has been tested in
> accordance with requirements specified by naming the test methods and
> material. The test report must state that the test was performed in
> accordance with the test requirements; state the test results; and
> indicate whether the material, product, or system has passed or failed
> the test. Testing must have been within three years of the date of
> award of this contract.

SD-11 FACTORY TEST REPORT

> A written report which includes the findings of a test required to be
> performed by the Contractor or manufacturer on an actual portion of
> the work or prototype prepared for this project before it is shipped
> to the job site. The report must be signed by an authorized official
> of the testing organization, must state the test result, and indicate
> whether the material, product, or system has passed or failed the
> test.

SD-12 FIELD TEST REPORT

> A written report which includes the findings of a test made at the job
> site, in the vicinity of the job site, or on a sample taken from the
> job site on a portion of the work, during or after installation. The
> report must be signed by an authorized official of the testing
> organization, must state the test results, and indicate whether the
> material, product, or system has passed or failed the test.

SD-13 CERTIFICATES

> Statements signed by responsible officials of a manufacturer of a
> product, system, or material attesting that it meets specified
> requirements. The statements must be dated after the award of this
> contract, name the project, and list the specific requirements which
> it is intended to address.

SD-14 SAMPLES

> Samples, including both fabricated and unfabricated physical examples
> of materials, products, units of work, or portions of units of work.

SD-15 COLOR SELECTION SAMPLE

> Samples of the available choice of colors, textures, and finishes of a
> product or material, presented over a substrate identical in texture
> to that proposed for the work.

SD-16 SAMPLE PANELS

> An assembly constructed at the project site, in a location acceptable
> to the Contracting Officer, and using materials and methods to be
> employed in the work; completely finished; maintained during
> construction; and removed at the conclusion of the work or when
> authorized by the Contracting Officer.

SD-17 SAMPLE INSTALLATION

> A portion of an assembly or material constructed where directed and,
> if approved, retained as a part of the work.

SD-18 RECORDS

> Documentation to ensure compliance with an administrative requirement
> or to establish an administrative mechanism. Example: As-built
> drawings.

SD-19 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

> Information bound in manual format and grouped by technical sections
> consisting of manufacturer\'s standard brochures, schematics, printed
> instructions, and safety precautions.
>
> Information included in O & M manuals shall include general operating
> procedures, preventative maintenance and inspection recommendations,
> special tools and test equipment required, troubleshooting and repair
> instructions, and spare parts listings.

SD-20 WELDING PROCEDURES

> Detailed specification of a welding procedure including joint design,
> base metals, filler metals, shielding, positions, electrical
> characteristics, welding techniques, preheat, and postweld heat
> treatment. Submit specification for each procedure on a form similar
> to AWS D1.1, Form E-1 (front).

SD-21 WELDING PROCEDURES QUALIFICATION RECORD (PQR)

> Results of independent laboratory testing of specimens welded per
> approved procedures. Results shall include tensile test, guided bend
> tests, visual inspection, radiographic-ultrasonic examinations, and
> fillet weld tests (if applicable). Information shall be tabulated on a
> form similar to AWS D1.1, Form E-1 (back), and shall include the
> welder\'s name and stamp number, the name of the testing agency, and
> the signature of the evaluator.

SD-22 WELDER\'S QUALIFICATION REPORTS

> Submit evidence, satisfactory to the Contracting Officer, that each
> welder employed in the work has been certified for the types and
> positions of welds used in the work. Welders shall carry on their
> person a certification card and present it to the Contracting Officer
> or Government Inspector if so requested. Unless otherwise noted,
> evidence shall consist of a Welder and Welding Operator Qualification
> Test Record Similar to AWS D1.1, Form E-4. The form shall identify the
> welder, welding procedure used, welding process, position, base and
> filler metals, plus test results described in SD-21.

1.13 PRE-APPROVED MATERIALS

> A. Within 90 days of contract award, submit the following materials
> for approval. The approved materials shall be used on all delivery
> orders / FWRs unless substitutions are requested by the Contractor.
>
> B. Requests for global substitutions of additions may be made from
> time to time during the BMMS Contract.

SECTION

01330 SUBMITTALS

None

01350 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE

None

01355 ASBESTOS PROCEDURES

None

01420 REFERENCE STANDARDS & DEFINITIONS

None

01600 PRODUCTS REQUIREMENTS

None

02200 SITE PREPARATION

None

02220 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL

None

02282 TERMITE CONTROL

None

02300 EARTHWORK

None

02315 READY MIXED FLOWABLE FILL

None

02370 GEOTEXTILE SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL

None

02500 UTILITY EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

None

02550 PRE-INSULATED UNDERGROUND STEAM DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

None

02630 STORM DRAINS

None

02720 CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

None

02740 BITUMINOUS TREATMENTS AND PAVEMENTS

None

02820 CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES

None

02920 SODDING AND SEEDING

None

03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

None

04200 UNIT MASONRY

Concrete Masonry Unit

Wall Ties

Masonry Wall Reinforcement

Mortar

Thru-Wall Flashing

05100 STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

None

05210 STEEL JOISTS

None

05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

None

05500 METAL FABRICATION

None

06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY

None

06200 FINISH CARPENTRY

None

06400 CUSTOM ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK

High Pressure Laminate

07270 FIRESTOPPING

Firestopping System

07412 MANUFACTURED STEEL ROOF SYSTEM

Roof System

07414 MANUFACTURED STEEL SIDING

Siding System

07510 BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEM

Roofing System

Walkway Protection Boards

07920 JOINT SEALERS

Material For:

Exterior Joints on Vertical Surfaces

Horizontal Paving Joints

Ceramic Tile, Toilet Fixture Joints

Interior Joints

Acoustical Sealant

Precompressed Sealing Tape

Pavement Joint Filler

Butyl Rubber Sealant

08110 STEEL DOORS & FRAMES

Steel Doors

Hollow Metal Frames

08210 WOOD DOORS

Wood Doors for Transparent Finish

Wood Doors for Painted Finish

08710 HARDWARE

Locksets

Exit Devices

Closures

09250 GYPSUM DRYWALL

Backer Board for Ceramic Tile

Sound Attenuation Insulation

09312 CERAMIC TILE WALL FINISH

Samples and Mfg. literature

09313 CERAMIC TILE FLOOR FINISH

Samples and Mfg. literature

09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

Class A Ceiling System Including:

Ceiling Tiles

Suspension System

09650 RESILIENT FLOORING

Resilient flooring

Rubber Base

09900 ARCHITECTURAL PAINTING

Coating System of Each Type Specified

09990 SURFACE PREPARATION

Exterior Steel

10160 TOILET PARTITIONS

Toilet Partitions

10270 ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM

Access Floor System

10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

Each Type of Accessory Specified

13120 PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING

None

15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

None

15051 WELDING FOR MECHANICAL UTILITY PIPING

Welding Procedures for Carbon Steel Pipe, Sch. 40 and 80

Welding Procedures for Stainless Steel Pipe, Schedule 10

15052 RADIOGRAPHIC INSPECTION OF WELDED PIPING

None

15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

Pipe Hangers and Supports

Tubing Supports

Hydraulic Tubing Supports

Supporting Elements

Structural Attachments

15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

Pipe Markers-2 types

Warning Tape-2 types

15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION

Piping Insulation-4 types

Insulation Jackets-2 types

Fiberglass Duct Wrap Insulation

Rigid Fiberglass Insulation Board

Adhesives, Mastics, Sealants, and Finishes

15110 VALVES

Gate Valves-6 types

Globe Valves-12 types

Check Valves-13 types

Ball Valves-16 types

Butterfly Valves-5 types

Needle Valves-4 types

Solenoid Valves-9 types

Safety/Relief Valves-3 types

Hose Bibbs

Valve Boxes

15125 GAGES

Pressure Gages

Low Pressure Differential Gages

Thermometers-Liquid Filled and Dial Types

Gage Cocks-3 types

Pressure Snubbers

15180 HEATING AND COOLING PIPING

Strainers-Hydronic and Steam

Balancing Valves

Flow Control Valves

Automatic Air Vents-Hydronic and Steam

P/T Ports

Steam Traps-F & T, Inverted Bucket, TD, and Thermostatic

Vacuum Breakers

Steam Relief Valves

Pressure Powered Condensate Pumps

15210 PROCESS AIR AND GAS PIPING

S.S. Tubing and Fittings

S.S. Braided Teflon Hose

Breathing Air Outlets

Shop Air Filter/Regulators

Shop Air Quick Couplings

15215 CLEANING FOR PROCESS PIPING SYSTEMS

Class I, II, and III Cleaning Procedures

15300 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING

None

15405 PLUMBING

Backflow Preventors-3 types

Dielectric Unions and Flanges

Water Hammer Arrestors

Trap Primers-3 types

Vacuum Relief Valves

Floor Drains-2 types

Cleanouts-2 types

Water Closets and Trim-4 types

Urinals and Trim-2 types

Lavatories and Trim-4 types

Sinks and Trim-4 types

Electric Water Coolers-3 types

Water Heaters-4 types

Emergency Eye/Face Wash-2 types

Emergency Showers-3 types

15720 AIR HANDLING UNITS

None

15730 UNITARY AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT

None

15750 HUMIDITY CONTROL EQUIPMENT

None

15810 DUCTS

Duct Liner

Prefabricated Duct Joint System

Duct Sealants

Insulated Flexible Duct

Flexible Exhaust Duct-5 types

15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES

Round Take-Off Fittings

Duct Access Doors

Flexible Duct Connector

Manual Volume Dampers-3 types

Fire Dampers

Backdraft Dampers-2 types

15850 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

Supply Diffusers-5 types

Supply Grilles and Registers-5 types

Return Grilles and Registers-7 types

Door Grilles

Wall Louvers-2 types

15900 CONTROLS

None

15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

None

16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

None

16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING

Ground Rods

Ground Clamps

Ground Wires

16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

Wires

16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES

Rigid Steel and Aluminum Conduit

Electrical Metallic Tubing

Rigid Plastic Conduit

Flexible Metallic Conduit

Liquidtight Flexible Metallic Conduit

Conduit Fittings

Outlet Boxes

16140 WIRING DEVICES

Receptacles

Wall Switches

Device Plates

16265 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

None

16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

None

16420 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

None

16440 PANELBOARDS

None

16460 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

None

16500 LIGHTING

40-Watt Flourescent Lamps

Ballast for Flourescent Fixtures

16660 ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS

None

16921 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS

None

16922 COMBUSTIBLE GAS DETECTION AND OXYGEN DEFICIENCY

MONITORING SYSTEMS

Light

Horn

16930 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS-UTILITY CONTROL SYSTEM

Sensors and Control Devices

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01350

ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCE

> The publications listed below form a part of this section to the
> extent referenced:

STEEL STRUCTURES PAINTING COUNCIL (SSPC)

SSPC Guide 6I (CON) (1993) Guide for Containing Debris Generated During
Paint Removal Operations

1.02 SUMBITTALS

> A. Submit for approval: Items listed in the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

B. In addition, submit the following items:

> SD-06 Instructions
>
> Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and Chemical Inventory Worksheet
> (MSFC Form 4099) for all hazardous materials brought on site shall be
> submitted to the Government.
>
> SD-08 Statements
>
> Submit Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWP3) for approval prior
> to on-site work start.
>
> SD-18 Records
>
> Submit Inspection Records at the end of the project for review and
> approval.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

> A. Inspections: examining satellite accumulation points to ensure
> compliance with the Sate of Alabama Regulations.
>
> B. Waste Stream: A generation of a spent/waste hazardous material that
> requires disposal in accordance with appropriate environmental,
> Federal, State and local laws and regulations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCUMULATION CONTAINERS

> A. Accumulation containers will be provided by the Government. The
> containers shall be requested by the Contractor three days in advance
> of the initial need date.
>
> B. The containers will be labeled by the Government.
>
> C. Ensure that the accumulation containers are secured such that the
> containers shall not be exposed to vehicular traffic.
>
> D. Turn-in the containers when ninety percent (90%) of the rated
> volume of each container is used for liquid waste. Containers of solid
> waste may be filled to hundred percent (100%).
>
> E. At the time of turn-in, identify if a replacement container is
> required.
>
> F. Ensure that hazardous and controlled waste is segregated and
> labeled by type in different accumulation containers.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 HAZARDOUS WASTE GENERATOR NOTIFICATION AND TRAINING.

> A. The Contractor shall designate a person as point of contact (POC)
> and as many as two alternate people for each hazardous and controlled
> waste accumulation site.
>
> B. The POC's shall be responsible for maintaining the Contractor's
> accumulation site in compliance with all applicable Federal, state and
> local laws and regulations.
>
> C. The Contractor shall send the POC to the first available Hazardous
> and Controlled Waste Generator training after initiation of the
> contract. The training is conducted on site by the Government at no
> cost to the Contractor. The training shall be attended annually by all
> POC's and alternates.
>
> D. Government personnel will inspect the accumulation site(s) to
> ensure compliance.

3.02 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL NOTIFICATION AND TRAINING

> A. The Contractor shall submit Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for
> all hazardous materials brought on site to the Government as defined
> by Federal Standard 313. The Contractor shall maintain a copy of all
> MSDS at the job site.
>
> B. The Contractor shall submit a Chemical Inventory Worksheet, MSFC
> For 4099 for all hazardous materials to be brought on site. The
> inventory will be submitted to the Government prior to delivery of
> material on site. MSFC Form 4099 can be obtained from the Government.
> The Contractor shall maintain a copy of all Chemical Inventory
> Worksheets at the job site.
>
> C. The Contractor shall send a POC to the first available Chemical
> Inventory training after initiation of the contract. The training is
> conducted on site by the Government at no cost to the Contractor. The
> training shall be attended annually.

3.03 HAZARDOUS AND CONTROLLED WASTE COLLECTION

> A. The Contractor shall notify the Government of wastes being
> generated. The Government will determine the correct method of
> disposal.
>
> B. The following types of hazardous and controlled waste are commonly
> associated with construction projects; however, it is not necessarily
> an all inclusive list. All wastes shall be collected and placed into
> accumulation containers for disposal.
>
> 1\. Fluorescent light ballast's marked with "CONTAINS PCB's" or are
> unmarked. Ballast's marked "DOES NOT CONTAIN PCB's" shall be disposed
> as a non-hazardous solid waste.
>
> 2\. High Intensity Discharge (HID) mercury bulbs.
>
> 3\. Free oil liquids and oil filters. Oil rags that are not saturated
> (no free liquids dripping) shall be disposed as solid waste.
>
> 4\. Paint cans, paint, and paint thinners.
>
> 5\. Sandblast material from tanks, equipment, and piping.
>
> 6\. Materials used for cleaning and degreasing of equipment, tanks,
> and piping.
>
> 7\. Paint chips from waterblasting operation, scraping, sandblasting,
> grinding, etc. Shall be collected on a daily basis.
>
> 8\. Aerosol cans.
>
> 9\. Process piping system cleaning operations fluids shall be
> collected and disposed as directed.
>
> C. The Contractor shall adhere to Government guidelines for
> inspections, collection, and turn-in of waste materials.

3.04 EMPTY CONTAINER MANAGEMENT

> A. Empty hazardous material containers shall be turned into the
> Government. The Contractor shall ensure the containers are empty using
> practices commonly employed to remove materials from that type of
> container such as pouring, pumping, and aspirating.
>
> B. Clean and purge/triple rinse all empty containers as required by
> the Government.
>
> C. Assure bungs and/or tops are secured prior to storage/turn-in.
>
> D. Empty containers shall not be stacked more than two high for any
> size container on pallets.
>
> E. Containers that are damaged and will not seal shall be taped over
> the damaged area or turned upside down to prevent rainwater
> collection.
>
> F. Empty containers shall be turned in frequently, as determined by
> the Government.

3.05 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION REQUIREMENTS

> A. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWP3)
>
> The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Stormwater Pollution
> Prevention Plan (SWP3) in the format provided in Attachment A, prior
> to work commencing on site. The Contractor shall implement the SWP3
> throughout the duration of the construction.
>
> B. Daily Stormwater Inspection Record
>
> 1\. The Contractor shall perform daily inspections of hazardous waste
> containers, hazardous materials containers, empty containers, and
> vehicles and equipment. The daily inspection shall be documented on a
> form acceptable to the Contracting Officer. The inspection
> documentation shall be maintained and available at the site for
> periodic verification of compliance by the Government and shall be
> submitted to the Government upon completion of construction.
>
> 2\. The Contractor shall inspect hazardous waste, hazardous material,
> empty containers, and vehicles and equipment for:
>
> a\. Containers protected from traffic
>
> b\. Containers labeled.
>
> c\. Storage area neat and orderly
>
> d\. No spillage from material handling
>
> e\. Containers sealed, during inactivity
>
> f\. No damaged pallets
>
> g\. No damaged containers
>
> h\. Spill kits available
>
> i\. Containment system in good condition
>
> j\. Containment valves closed
>
> k\. Containment system water managed appropriately
>
> l\. Fluid leaks from vehicles and equipment.
>
> C. Monthly Stormwater Inspection Record
>
> 1\. The Contractor shall perform monthly inspection of erosion and
> sediment controls for the construction site. The inspection shall be
> documented in a format acceptable to the Contracting Officer. The
> inspection documentation shall be maintained and available at the site
> for periodic verification of compliance by the Government and shall be
> submitted to the Government upon completion of construction.
>
> 2\. The Contractor shall inspect erosion and sediment controls for:
>
> a\. No signs of excessive erosion
>
> b\. Erosion controls are effective and in good condition
>
> c\. No sediment buildup in stormwater structures (inlets, ditches).
>
> D. Deficiencies
>
> All deficiencies shall be corrected promptly to be in compliance with
> the MSFC Stormwater Pollution Prevention Requirements.

3.06 SPILLS OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

> A. The Contractor shall activate the MSFC Emergency Plan by dialing
> 911 with "on-site" phone or by dialing 544-4357 (MSFC Security Office)
> with "off-site" phone for hazardous materials spills that cannot be
> cleaned up with Contractor spill kits. The Contractor is responsible
> for costs incurred in cleaning up spills.
>
> B. The Government will determine the correct disposal method for
> spilled materials.
>
> C. The Contractor shall maintain spill kits for the type of hazardous
> materials used at the construction site.

3.07 HANDLING, DUST CONTROL, AND DISPOSITION OF LEAD COATINGS

> A. The following requirements, except as noted in Paragraph entitled
> "Requirements for Removing Lead Coatings- Small Scale / Short
> Duration," shown below, apply to all work performed in connection with
> the removal of lead-based coatings or materials coated with the
> lead-based materials:
>
> 1\. Worker protection and work practices shall conform with OSHA
> Safety and Health Standards, 29 CFR 1926.62.
>
> 2\. Methods utilized to remove lead-based coatings shall minimize the
> amount of dust generated, and shall be in accordance with the
> Contractor's approved lead coatings safety plan. Engineering controls
> shall be employed to insure that airborne lead exposures do not exceed
> 50 micrograms / cubic meter. Contaminated air shall be filtered before
> it is discharged into the environment away from the source of intake
> air, in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.353.
>
> 3\. All workmen in the controlled lead abatement area shall wear OSHA
> approved asbestos respirators and protective clothing as required and
> determined by an onsite industrial hygienist or other qualified
> professional. Use of respirators shall comply with 29 CFR 1910.134.
>
> 4\. All lead particulate and waste shall be collected and disposed of
> in sealed non-permeable bags with approved CAUTION labels. Wastes
> shall be disposed of at the Solid Waste Management Area (SWMA)
> Sanitary Landfill as directed by the COTR.
>
> 5\. The Contractor shall submit a written detailed plan, for approval,
> which describes the methods and equipment to be used to achieve the
> lead removal in conformance with the requirements listed above. This
> submittal shall, as a minimum, include the following:
>
> Removal, containment and / or ventilation plans and drawings
>
> Plan for protection of ambient air, soil and water
>
> Worker protection programs
>
> Plan for handling and disposal of debris

3.08 REQUIREMENTS FOR REMOVING LEAD COATINGS- SMALL SCALE / SHORT
DURATION

> A. The following minimum requirements shall be followed when removing
> material by grinding, cutting, or welding, which is attached to the
> steel structure.
>
> 1\. Comply with 29 CFR 1926.62.
>
> 2\. Local exhaust must be used to ventilate the area during welding,
> cutting, or burning of lead coatings.
>
> 3\. Personnel required to conduct welding, cutting, or burning of lead
> coatings must be outfitted with a powered air purifying respirator
> (PAPR) equipped with high efficiency filter.
>
> 4\. Personnel required to conduct welding, cutting, or burning of lead
> coatings must wear protective clothing. Contractors shall arrange for
> the laundering of protective clothing; or, if disposable protective
> clothing is used, the Contractor shall maintain an adequate supply at
> the worksite and arrange for its safe disposal according to applicable
> Federal (40 CFR 260) and State regulations.
>
> 5\. Following welding, cutting, or burning of lead coatings, employees
> must exercise good personal hygiene (i.e., washing hands and face)
> since lead can become an ingestion hazard.

**ATTACHMENT A**

**STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWP3)**

[Contact Information]{.underline}

Contractor:
\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_

Address:
\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_­­­­­\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_

Phone:
\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_

Construction Site Contact
Name:\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_

Construction Contract Number:
[NAS8-]{.underline}\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_

[General Information]{.underline}

Briefly describe the planned construction project. Include a description
of amount of disturbed land, expected duration, and location, On a
separate sheet, provide a site map or use the site map included on the
design drawings detailing the construction site including general
drainage areas and gradients, nearby landmarks (buildings, paved areas,
etc.), and erosion control measures.

\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_

\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_

\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_

\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_

\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_

\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_

[Construction Materials]{.underline}

Provide a general list of the types of chemicals, substances that will
be used a t the construction site.

\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_

[Erosion and Sediment Controls]{.underline}

Briefly describe any erosion and sediment controls you would expect to
be necessary. These controls are implemented during the construction
period to prevent or control the loss of soil from the construction
site. The methods could incorporate structural practices, and/or
vegetative stabilization. Examples are mulching, checkdams, temporary
downdrain structures, sediment barriers, etc.

\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_\_

[East Management Practices]{.underline}

The following stormwater pollution prevention Best Management Practices
(BMPs) are to be continually implemented on site whenever construction
is proceeding. The following is a summary of applicable BMPs.

Hazardous Material/Hazardous Waste Storage: The general rule to follow
for hazardous material/hazardous waste storage areas is to minimize the
possibility that any chemical, oil, or waste will come into contact with
the ground, water, or air. The following BMP shall be implemented as
appropriate:

All storage containers shall be in good repair with no signs of leaks,
closed or covered during periods of no use, adequately labeled, and
stored on level ground and away from any type of storm drainage ditch,
grates, etc.

Empty Container Management:

Empty containers shall be turned I frequently to the Government. Prior
to pickup, the containers shall be purged and be triple rinsed (if it
contained a pesticide or acutely toxic). In addition, assure the bungs
and/or tops are in place. Damaged containers that will not seal should
be taped over the damaged area or turned upside down to prevent the
accumulation of rainwater.

Housekeeping:

Good housekeeping practices include proper labeling of significant
materials, maintaining clean, organized work areas, disposing of wastes
promptly, and immediate cleanup of spills.

Waste Disposal:

Hazardous wastes that must be handled by the Government, include, but
are not limited to, the following: organic solvents, acids, caustics,
paints or coatings, aerosol cans, and petroleum products. Waste is to be
collected and maintained at central accumulation points at the
construction sites.

[Recordkeeping and Inspections]{.underline}

While construction is in progress and the construction activities have
the potential to affect the stormwater, the construction site shall be
inspected by the Contractor. When no work is being conducted (e.g.,
weekends, holidays, etc.), no inspection is necessary. The Contractors
inspector shall ensure that the site is in compliance with the intent of
the MSFC's SWP3 by ensuring the above BMPs are successfully and
continuously implemented. Each inspection shall be conducted according
to Paragraph 3.5, "Stormwater Pollution Prevention Requirements," and
documented by the initials of the Contractors inspector on the attached
forms. These records shall be maintained on site. Upon completion of the
construction, the Contractor shall submit a copy of the inspection
records to the Government.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01355

ASBESTOS PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

> A. Procedure to be taken if Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM)
> identified on the drawings may be disturbed in the course of
> construction operations.
>
> B. Procedure to be taken if material suspected of being ACM is
> encountered in the course of construction operations.
>
> C. Procedure to be taken if work is required above ceilings where ACM
> is known or suspected to be present.

1.02 REFERENCES

> A. 29 CFR 1910.1001 - OSHA Asbestos Standard for General Industry
>
> B. 29 CFR 1926.58 - OSHA Asbestos Standard for the Construction
> Industry
>
> C. 40 CFR 61 Subpart M - NESHAP
>
> D. 49 CFR 171, 172 & 173 - Department of Transportation (DOT)

1.03 DEFINITIONS

> Air Monitoring: The process of measuring the fiber content in a
> specific volume of air in a stated period of time.
>
> Asbestos: Chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite, tremolite, anthophyllite
> and actinolite.
>
> ACM: Asbestos Containing Material(s)
>
> OMEH: Occupational Medicine and Environmental Health mission service
> contractor at MSFC.
>
> Friable: Capable of being crumpled or reduced to powder by hand
> pressure.
>
> ADEM: Alabama Department of Environmental Management
>
> EPA: The Environmental Protection Agency
>
> NESHAP: National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants
>
> OSHA: The Occupational Safety and Health Administration
>
> EPA: Environmental Protection Agency

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

> A. Contractors performing work in areas containing ACM shall be
> qualified in accordance with OSHA, EPA, ADEM and other governing
> regulations.
>
> B. Perform all work in accordance with OSHA, EPA, NESHAP, ADEM and
> other governing regulations.
>
> C. Provide evidence acceptable to the COTR that workers in areas
> containing ACM or suspect ACM have been properly fitted with
> respirators and have been properly trained in accordance with 40 CFR
> part 61 (NESHAP) and other governing regulations. Provide evidence
> acceptable to the COTR that workers in areas containing ACM or suspect
> ACM have been properly fitted with respirators and have been properly
> trained in accordance with 40 CFR Part 61 (NESHAP) and other governing
> regulations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS ( not used )

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 MATERIALS IDENTIFIED AS ACM

> A. If ACM is identified on the drawings as a product in a known
> location and the ACM must be removed to accomplish the contract, the
> removal and disposal shall be a part of this contract unless otherwise
> specifically stated in the contract documents. Examples are: 1)
> Asbestos containing pipe insulation where the contract requires
> removal or reworking of the pipe; 2) Asbestos containing siding or
> roof deck which must be removed or penetrated as part of the contract.
>
> B. If nonfriable ACM is identified on the drawings as a product in the
> vicinity of construction operations and which may accidentally be
> disturbed during construction, the contractor shall provide protective
> measures approved by the COTR to prevent its disturbance.
>
> Example: Asbestos containing pipe insulation on pipes which are not to
> be removed or reworked as part of this contract.
>
> C. If friable ACM is identified on the drawings as being present above
> ceilings, proper procedures (specified herein) shall be used before
> removal of any portion of the ceiling.
>
> Example: Sprayed ACM insulation or fireproofing on structure above a
> ceiling.

3.02 MATERIAL SUSPECTED OF BEING ACM

> A. If an unidentified material is suspected of being ACM:
>
> 1\. Do not disturb the suspect material.
>
> 2\. Notify the COTR at once and await instructions. The COTR will
> arrange for sampling and testing by the OMEH and will provide
> instructions concerning barricades and warning signs, etc.

3.03 WORK ABOVE CEILINGS

> If the contract requires any work above a ceiling or removal of a
> ceiling where ACM is known to be or suspected to be present, the
> following procedures shall be followed:
>
> 1\. Notify the COTR of impending operations as soon as practicable
> (but at least one week) before operations are to begin including a
> complete schedule for the work.
>
> 2\. The COTR will arrange for HVAC and other utility outages and other
> coordination with the Government.
>
> 3\. Separate the work area from occupied areas by installing
> \"asbestos\" warning barricade tape and posting \"asbestos\" warning
> signs at entrances to the work area.
>
> 4\. Wear proper respiratory protection and protective clothing at all
> times while working in areas where asbestos may be disturbed.
>
> 5\. Seal the work area as required by OSHA, NESHAP, EPA and other
> requirements. Seals shall remain until area is cleared and approved by
> the COTR.
>
> 6\. Place 6 mil. polyethylene over furniture and floor to collect
> debris that may fall from above the ceiling. Upon completion of each
> activity, remove the polyethylene and dispose of it as controlled
> waste. Ensure that no debris or dust will remain within the room.
> Remove dust and debris that may fall on furniture or floors with a
> vacuum equipped with a HEPA filter and properly dispose of the dust as
> controlled waste. No sweeping or dusting will be allowed.
>
> 7\. COTR will arrange for the Government air monitoring, clearance
> testing and return of HVAC and other utilities to normal operation.

End of Section

SECTION 01420

REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section covers definitions and reference standards which relate
to MSFC projects.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Indicated: The term indicated refers to graphic representations,
notes, or schedules on the Drawings, or other paragraphs or Schedules in
the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents.
Terms such as shown, noted, scheduled, and specified are used to help
the reader locate the reference. Location is not limited.

B. Directed: Terms such as directed, requested, authorized, selected,
approved, required, and permitted mean directed, requested, etc. by the
Contracting Officer or authorized representative such as the A/E.

C. Approved: The term approved, when used in conjunction with the A/E's
action on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, means
approved by the A/E.

> D. Equal: The term "equal" when used in the specifications means equal
> as determined by the A/E or by the Government.

E. Regulations: The term regulations includes laws, ordinances,
statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction,
as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction
industry that control performance of the work.

F. Furnish: The term furnish means supply and deliver to the Project
Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and
similar operations.

G. Install: The term install describes operations at the Project Site
including the actual unloading, unpacking, assembly, erecting, placing,
anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

H. Provide: The term provide means to furnish and install, complete and
ready for the intended use.

I. Installer: An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged
by the Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor
of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including
installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Installers
are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to
perform.

1\. The term experienced, when used with the term Installer, means
having a minimum of 3 previous projects similar in size and scope to
this Project, being familiar with the special requirements indicated,
and having complied with requirements of the authority having
jurisdiction.

J. Trades: Using terms such as carpentry does not imply that certain
construction activities must be premiered by accredited or unionized
individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as carpenter. It also
does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to trades
persons of the corresponding generic name.

K. Assigning Specialists: Specialists are recognized experts in
operations where required by the specifications. Certain Sections of the
Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be
performed by specialists who are recognized experts in those operations.
The specialists shall be engaged for those activities, and their
assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has no option.
However, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling Contract
requirements remains with the Contractor.

L. Project Site: Is the space available to the Contractor for performing
construction activities, either exclusively or in conjunction, with
others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of the
Project Site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical
with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built.

M. Testing Agencies: A testing agency is an independent entity engaged
to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project Site or
elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of
those inspections or tests.

N. A/E: This is the entity responsible for the design of the project,
usually a government employee or government contractor. The A/E may have
duties relating to the interpretation of the Contract Documents or other
duties as designated by the Government.

O. Government Inspector: The Government Agency or contractor responsible
for the day-to-day observation of the project.

> P. Contracting Authority: Any of the designated Government authorities
> responsible for a portion of the administration of the project. This
> authority may be designated Contracting Officer or COTR.
>
> Q. COTR: Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. This
> authority will be identified by the Government at the pre-construction
> conference.
>
> R. Contractor: The Contractor is the person or entity identified as
> such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract
> Documents as if singular in number. The term "Contractor" means the
> Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative.

1.03 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION

A. Specification Format: These specifications are organized into
Divisions and Sections based on the Construction Specifications
Institute's 16-Division format and MASTERFORMAT numbering system.

B. Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions
regarding the style of language and the intended meaning of certain
terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations or
circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows:

1\. Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other
Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be
interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be
interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted
as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as
the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

> 2\. In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit
> modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and
> "an", but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one
> statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the
> interpretation of either statement.
>
> 3\. Imperative and streamlined language is used generally in the
> Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to
> be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the Text,
> subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities
> that shall be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or by others
> when so noted.

4\. The words "shall be" are implied wherever a colon (:) is used within
a sentence or phrase.

1.04 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents
include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry
standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly
into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are
made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with the standards in effect as of the date
of the Contract Documents unless otherwise designated in the Contract
Documents.

C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with 2 or more standards
is specified and where the standards may establish different or
conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, refer
requirements that are different but apparently equal and uncertainties
to the Contracting Officer for a decision before proceeding.

> 1\. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level
> shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The
> actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or
> quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable
> limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values
> are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of the
> requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Contracting Officer for a
> decision before proceeding.
>
> D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the
> Project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable
> to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
> bound with the Contract Documents. Where copies of standards are
> needed to perform a required construction activity, the Contractor
> shall obtain copies directly from the publication source.
>
> E. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of
> general standards are frequently abbreviated. The following acronyms
> or abbreviations, as referenced in Contract Documents, are defined to
> mean the associated names. Names and addresses are subject to change
> and are believed, but not assured, to be accurate and up-to-date as of
> date of the Contract Documents.

AIA The American Institute of Architects

1735 New York Ave., NW

Washington, DC 20006 (202) 626-7300

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc

One East Wacker Drive

Suite 3100

Chicago, IL 60601 (312) 670-2400

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute

1133 15th Street, N.W.

Suite 300

Washington, DC 20005 (202) 452-7100

ALDOT Alabama Department of Transportation

1409 Coliseum Boulevard

Montgomery, AL 36130-3050 (334) 242-6356

AWS American Welding Society, Inc.

550 Lejeune Road N.W.

Miami, FL 33126 (305) 443-9353

ANSI American National Standards Institute

11 West 42nd St., 13th Floor

New York, NY 10036 (212) 642-4900

ASTM American Society for Testing & Materials

1916 Race St.

Philadelphia, PA 19103-1187 (215) 299-5400

> BOCA Building Officials and Code Administrators International

4051 W. Flossmoor Road

Country Club Hills, IL 60477 (312) 799-2300

> GA Gypsum Association

810 First St., NE, Suite 510

Washington, DC 20002 (202) 289-5440

IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America

345 E., 47th St.

New York, NY 10017 (212) 705-7926

MBMA Metal Building Manufacturer's Association

1230 Keith Building

Cleveland, OH 44115 (216) 241-7333

ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association

(A Division of the National Association of

Architectural Metal Manufacturers)

600 S. Federal ST., Suite 400

Chicago, IL 60605 (312) 922-6222

NEC National Electrical Code (from NFPA)

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Assoc.

2101 L St., NW, Suite 300

Washington, DC 20037 (202) 457-8400

NFPA National Fire Protection Assoc.

One Batterymarch Park

P.O. Box 9101 (800) 344-3555

Quincy, MA 02269-9101 (617) 770-3000

NSF National Sanitation Foundation

3475 Plymouth Rd.

P.O. Box 130140 (800) 223-2301

Ann Arbor, MI 48113-0140 (313) 769-8010

PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors of America

3913 Old Lee Highway Suite 33-B

Fairfax, VA 2203 (703) 359-0826

UL Underwriters Laboratories

333 Pfingsten Rd.

Northbrook, IL 60062 (708) 272-8800

> SBCC Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.

900 Montclair Road

Birmingham, AL 35213 (205) 591-1853

> F. Federal Government Agencies: Names and titles of federal government
> standard or specification producing agencies are often abbreviated.
> The following acronyms or abbreviations referenced in the Contract
> Documents indicate names of standard or Specification-producing
> agencies of the federal government. Names and addresses are subject to
> change and are believed, but are not assured, to be accurate and
> up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
>
> CFR Code of Federal Regulations

(Available from the Government Printing Office)

N. Capitol St. Between G and H St. NW

Washington, DC 20402 (202) 783-3238

(Material is usually first published in the "Federal Register")

CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission

5401 Westbard Ave.

Bethesda, MD 20207 (800) 638-2772

EPA Environmental Protection Agency

400 M St., SW

Washington, DC 20460 (202) 382-2090

> HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development

Office of Lead-Based Paint Abatement and Poisoning Prevention

Room B-133

451 7th St., SW, Washington DC 20410

\(202\) 755-1805

MSHA Mine Safety and Health Administration

(U.S. Department of Commerce)

4015 Wilson Blvd.

Arlington, VA 22203 (703) 235-1565

NIOSH National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health

U.S. Dept. of Labor, Room N-3718

200 Constitution Ave, N.W.

Washington, D.C. 20210 (800) 35-NIOSH

NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology

(U.S. Department of Commerce)

Gaithersburg, MD 20899 (301) 975-2000

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

(U.S. Department of Labor)

200 Constitution Ave., NW

Washington, DC 20210 (202) 219-6091

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01450

CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

This specification sets forth quality assurance/quality control
requirements for the provision of materials, equipment, systems,
inspections, tests, services, and construction of facilities and site
improvements. (The quality of work-in-progress and finished work is the
responsibility of Contractor line management.) These requirements
provide for an effective system to ensure that contractual quality
requirements and technical criteria are satisfactorily met.

1.02 RELATION TO OTHER CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

The requirements of this specification shall be fully complied with in
close concert with the detail requirements of the technical
specifications and all other contract documents. Overlapping and
interfacing contractual requirements shall not result in duplication of
Contractor efforts. The quality program shall effectively complement and
support functions required by the technical specifications and other
contract documents.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330
"Submittals," in sufficient detail to shown full compliance with the
specification:

1\. SD-08 Statements

The Base Maintenance Mission Services (BMMS) Contractor, shall submit
the Contractor's Quality Assurance / Quality Control Plan for approval
within 30 days of BMMS Contract award. The plan shall be approved by the
Government prior to start of construction.

2\. SD-18 Records

Provide the following in accordance with the paragraph entitled,
"Records." Deficiency Correction Reports

Non-Conformance Reports Letter of Authority or Delegation

> B. Contractor's Quality Assurance / Quality Control Plan

Describe how the quality requirements of the specifications will be met,
and address each of the following:

1\. Delegation of Contractor's authorized representative responsible for
quality assurance / control of contract work.

> 2\. The Contractor's quality assurance/control plan and procedure for
> accomplishing and reviewing construction methods and controls,
> fabrication controls, certifications, documentation of quality control
> operations, inspections, and test records including those required for
> suppliers and subcontractors. Describe methods to be effected during
> the procurement cycle (order to deliver) for the selection of
> construction materials, suppliers, subcontractor, on-site and off-site
> fabrication and assembly of Contractor-furnished materials and
> equipment, work procedures, workmanship, and testing to ensure full
> compliance with drawings, specifications, codes, regulatory
> requirements, and other contract documents.

The Contractor's program shall provide for a functional system to
document that quality provisions of contract schedules, specifications,
and drawings have been performed.

3\. Training, certification(s), and re-certification(s) of personnel as
required by the specifications.

4\. Certification of materials, processes, or equipment as required by
the specifications.

> 5\. Qualification of procedures as required by the specifications.

6\. Nondestructive testing requirements as required by the
specifications.

7\. Identification of independent certifying and testing laboratories to
be used.

> C. RECORDS
>
> Records shall include all quality control data; factory test
> plans/results, manufacturer's certifications, receiving inspections,
> deficiency reports; non-conformance reports; training /
> certifications; and routine technical test plans / results, i.e.,
> hydrostatics, electrical continuity, grounding, welding, line
> cleaning, etc. Quality records shall be available for examination by
> the designated Government representatives. The Contractor shall
> provide copies of tests plans / reports and data upon request of
> Government's designated representatives. Quality control records shall
> be maintained in a central on-site location. Maintenance of quality
> control records shall not relieve the Contractor from submitting
> samples, test data, detail drawings, material certifications, or other
> information required by each section in the specification. All quality
> records shall be turned over to the Government's designated
> representatives as a file of record at contract completion.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications

When approval or certification of special processes, operating
personnel, and special equipment or procedures is required by the
specifications, the Contractor shall obtain necessary approvals or
certifications prior to starting the work.

B. Management and Organization

Contractor shall ensure effective execution of quality assurance /
quality control functions and provide competent personnel to provide
supervision, inspection, and testing. Contractor shall be responsible
for each of his suppliers and subcontractors. Contractor shall provide
quality assurance oversight of suppliers and subcontractors and ensure
that each provides effective quality control in the execution of their
work.

The program shall encompass management and supervisory actions that
affect quality of all work-in-progress and finished construction work.

The individual designated to direct the program shall report to the
Contractor's management and shall have the necessary authority to
discharge his responsibilities.

C. Identification and Data Retrieval

> The Contractor shall have a identification and data retrieval system.
> Records, drawings, submittals, and equipment shall be identified to
> reference the following:

1\. Contract Number

2\. Contract Specification Number

3\. Contract Drawing Number

4\. Submittal Document Number

5\. Contract Change Number

6\. Contractor's Drawing Number System

D. Procurement

The Contractor shall be responsible for controlling procurement sources
and those of this subcontractors to ensure that each purchase meets
quality requirements.

1\. The Contractor shall ensure that his purchase documents include:

a\. The basic quality requirements, standards, drawings, and
specifications called out in the contract specifications.

b\. Inspection and Test Characteristics.

c\. Inspection and Test Records.

d\. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) manuals, Instructions,
Certifications of Compliance, and such other data as may be required by
the specification.

e\. Preservation, packaging, shipping directions.

> 2\. When Government source inspection is required on a Contractor's
> purchase, the purchase document shall include the following statement:
>
> "All work on this order is subject to inspection and testing by the
> Government at any time and place. The Contracting Officer shall be
> notified immediately upon receipt of this order. The Contacting
> Officer shall be notified 48 hours in advance of the time articles or
> processes are ready for inspection or test."

3\. Procurements that do not require Government source inspection shall
include the following statement:

"The Government reserves the right to inspect any or all of the
materials included on this order at the Contractor's plant."

4\. Required Government source inspections will be determined by the
Contracting Officer. Government source inspections shall not replace
Contractor inspections or relieve the Contractor of his responsibility
for ensuring quality procurements and records verifying quality control
activities.

E. Receiving Inspection System

1\. Contractor shall maintain a receiving inspection system that ensures
procured materials and equipment are inspected and tested as required by
specifications, drawings, and approved submittal documents.

> 2\. Shipping / receiving inspection records will accompany each
> procurement delivery to the construction site. Maintain records of
> contractor's receiving inspections at the construction site by the
> Contractor.
>
> 3\. Records shall show defects, discrepancies, dispositions,and
> waivers, including evidence of Government source inspection.

F. Nonconforming Articles and Material Control

The Contractor shall control nonconformances discovered by the
Contractor, subcontractors, suppliers or Government quality
representatives to prevent their use and to correct deficient
operations.

1\. Contractor shall prepare a "nonconformance" report for each instance
comprising:

a\. A unique and traceable number

b\. Identification of the nonconforming article or material

c\. A description of the nonconformance and the applicable requirement

d\. Cause or reason for the nonconformance

e\. Remedial actions taken or recommended

f\. Disposition of the nonconforming article or material

2\. The Contractor shall identify, mark, and segregate each
nonconforming article for removal from the work area to prevent
inadvertent use.

3\. The Contractor shall monitor and correct deficient operations.

G. Fabrication, Process, and Work Control

1\. The Contractor's procedures and controls shall be derived from
stated requirements in contract specifications and drawings.

2\. The Contractor shall establish in-process inspections, and ensure
compliance with quality requirements that are not readily detectable, or
measurable by inspection and test of finished elements.

3\. Special process may include, but are not limited to, concrete
placement, piping system cleaning, plating, anodizing, nondestructive
testing, welding, and soldering.

H. Drawings and Change Control

1\. Drawing-control system shall be maintained to provide revised
drawings and change distribution and removal of obsolete drawings from
work areas. Changes involving interface with other work areas, or
affecting articles or materials controlled by others shall be controlled
by the Contractor. This system shall be integrated with the document
requirements of the contract.

2\. Drawing changes shall be clearly specified. Accomplished changes
shall be clearly identified and associated drawings shall be revised.
Drawings that have been approved, or approved as noted, by the
Contracting Officer shall be used for fabrication and inspection.

3\. At completion of work, the Contractor shall furnish to the
Government two marked prints and/or sketches showing an accurate record
of as-built conditions for acceptance.

I. Quality Inspection

1\. Government Inspections

a\. Work performed under the general direction of the contracting
Officer will be subject to inspection by authorized representatives. No
representative is permitted to change specifications or drawings without
written authorization from the Contracting Officer.

b\. Government in-process and end-item inspections may, at the
Government's discretion, be performed on site and/or at the Contractor's
or subcontractor's facility by the Government representatives.

> c\. Government shall be notified with sufficient advance notice of
> Contractor work plans which will cover up or make inaccessible
> previously installed work which may require Government inspection,
> i.e., backfilling or encasing of any underground utility, concrete
> placement, etc.
>
> d\. Failure to provide such notification may require the work be
> uncovered to inspect the work. Uncovering and restoration of the work
> shall be at the Contractor's expense.
>
> e\. The Contractor's quality assurance/control program is subject to
> continuous evaluation, review, and verification by the Contracting
> Officer. The Contractor will be notified in writing of any
> noncompliance area and will be given 5 days to correct identified
> deficiencies.

2\. Contractor's Quality Inspections

> Contractor shall implement an inspection system. Documentation shall
> indicate quality control through records of inspections and tests.
> Contractor shall ensure that nonconforming products are discovered,
> documented, and controlled. Procedures eliminating future deficiencies
> shall be implemented.

Contractor's quality assurance system shall include the following:

a\. Single Contractor's representative responsible for on- site /
off-site communication and operation of the inspection program.

b\. Purchasing control system documenting project procurement to
drawings, specifications, and approved submittals.

> c\. Receiving inspection system documenting inspections for each
> procurement verifying material and equipment is compliant with plans
> and specifications.

d\. Documentation for handling and disposing of nonconforming components
and materials.

e\. Inspection records as required for each specific section of the
specification and drawings.

f\. Identification of test(s) to be performed, test procedures, test
plans / reports, records, and independent organization used.

> g\. Documenting and maintaining certification or re-certification of
> procedures, personnel, and equipment.

h\. Management of government-furnished equipment, components, and
materials.

i\. Calibration of gages, tools, measuring instruments, and independent
laboratories used and all associated documentation.

The Contractor shall establish own system of scheduled or random sample
inspections and audits to ensure objectives are met.

J. Manufacturer's Field Services

1\. Responsibility for Inspection and Testing

Contractor is responsible for the performance of inspections and tests.
Each shall be recorded. The Contractor shall utilize independent
inspection and testing laboratories or services that are acceptable to
the Government.

2\. Inspection and Test Records

The Contractor shall provide on-site records of each inspection and test
performed throughout the life of the contract. Records shall include,
but not be limited to, factual evidence that the required inspections or
tests have been performed, including type and number of inspections or
tests involved, identification of operators and inspectors, test plans /
reports, result of inspections or tests, nature of defects, causes for
rejection, proposed remedial action, and corrective actions taken.

1.05 HANDLING AND STORAGE

> A. The Contractor shall provide controls and procedures which meet
> requirements of each section of the specifications.
>
> B. The Contractor shall include documentation with each shipment. The
> data shall consist of documentation required by the contract along
> with specifications required to identify, store, preserve, operate,
> and maintain the items shipped.

1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

> A. Contractor shall notify the Government a minimum of 48 hours prior
> to scheduled inspections and tests.
>
> B. Contractor shall provide 24 hour notice to the Government of the
> date when the contract work will begin at the site.
>
> C. When Contractor suspends work for 5 days or longer prior to
> completions, he shall notify the Contracting Officer. Work shall not
> resume without notification to the Contracting Officer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01600

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Products.

> B. Substitutions

C. Transportation and handling.

> D. Storage and protection

.

1.02 PRODUCTS

> A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment,
> fixtures, and systems forming the work. Does not include machinery and
> equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying or erection of
> the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components
> required for reuse.
>
> B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from the existing
> premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents.

1.03 SUBSTITUTIONS

> A. Unless otherwise noted, all items are specified on an \"Approved
> Equal\" basis.
>
> B. Document each request for substitution with complete data
> substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract
> Documents.
>
> C. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the
> Contractor:
>
> 1\. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or
> exceeds the quality level of the specified product.
>
> 2\. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the
> specified product.
>
> 3\. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which
> may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to
> the Government.
>
> 4\. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may
> subsequently become apparent.
>
> D. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or
> implied on shop drawing or product data submittals without separate
> written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the
> Contract Documents.

1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

> A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer\'s
> instructions.
>
> B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with
> requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.
>
> C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to
> prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

> A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer\'s
> instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store
> sensitive products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures.
>
> B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped
> supports, above ground.
>
> C. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit
> on-site storage or protection.
>
> D. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet
> covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation.
>
> E. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a
> well-drained area. Protect from mixing with foreign matter.
>
> F. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to
> prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.
>
> G. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection.
> Periodically inspect to ensure products are undamaged and are
> maintained under specified conditions.

1.06 REFERENCES

Publications, codes, standards and other documents referred to within
the various Sections of this project manual shall form a part of the
contract documents to the extent referenced and shall have the same
force and effect as if bound into this project manual.

PART 2.0 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3.0 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02200

SITE PREPARATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Construction materials, equipment, and procedures shall be in
accordance with Alabama Department of Transportation \"Standard
Specifications for Highway Construction\" (ALDOT Specs), 1992 edition,
Section 201 - Clearing And Grubbing.

1.02 All trees, shrubs, plants and other items to remain will be
identified on the drawings. Protect all landscaping to remain from
damage during construction.

1.03 Prior to any excavation or digging operation or any surface
penetration 6" or greater on any ground surface, a digging permit shall
be obtained from MSFC Facilities Office, AB24 (phone: 544-9437).

1.04 RELATED SECTIONS

> A. Section 01350, Environmental Compliance
>
> B. Section 01355, Asbestos Procedures

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 Asphaltum base paint and herbicides shall be as approved by
Contracting Officers Technical Representative (COTR).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Clearing

Trees, stumps, roots, brush, and other vegetation in areas to be cleared
shall be cut off flush with or below natural ground.

3.02 Grubbing

All areas within the construction area shall be grubbed of all
objectionable matter on or projecting through the ground surface. All
fill areas shall be grubbed to a depth of at least one foot below the
natural ground.

3.03 Disposal

A. Disposal Plan

> 1\. The Contractor shall submit, prior to beginning work, a plan for
> the satisfactory disposal of material and debris from the clearing and
> grubbing operations for approval by the COTR. Said plan shall provide
> for the satisfactory disposal of perishable materials and rubbish
> within (30 days) after accumulation, unless a longer period is
> authorized in writing by the COTR, to prevent infestation by pests.
> Spoils areas are available on site at the Government's Redstone
> Arsenal Landfill (RSAL). Rules for it\'s use are as follows:
>
> 2\. No garbage is allowed to be mixed in with the construction rubble
> for disposal at the RSAL Sanitary Landfill.
>
> 3\. No liquids of any kind are to be disposed of at the RSAL.
>
> 4\. No ammunition or explosive type material (including training
> devices) is to be disposed of at the RSAL.
>
> 5\. No batteries are to be disposed of at the RSAL.
>
> 6\. No hazardous wastes can be disposed of at the RSAL.
>
> 7\. Large pieces of heavy metal, aluminum, copper, metal shavings,
> etc. will not be disposed of at the RSAL.
>
> 8\. Asbestos shall be segregated and disposed of in accordance with
> Section 01355, Asbestos Procedures
>
> 9\. Cans of 1 gallon or larger that contain paint, solvent, or any
> other liquid shall not be disposed of in the RSAL.
>
> 10\. Empty drums in good condition from 5 gallon containers and up
> shall not be disposed of in the RSAL.
>
> 11\. Empty drums in poor condition must be flattened prior to delivery
> for disposal to the RSAL.
>
> 12\. There shall be no loitering or scrounging at the RSAL.
>
> B. The Government will refuse any material or not allow dumping of any
> material at the site if it does not meet the above requirements. If
> this occurs, the Contractor is responsible to dispose of the waste
> material [offsite]{.underline} at approved landfills at his own
> expense.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02220

DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

> A. Removal of materials and equipment from existing building in
> preparation for remodeling
>
> B. Demolition of structural members
>
> C. Salvage of materials and equipment and delivery to the Government
>
> D. Disposal of debris and equipment

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

> A. Section 01350, Environmental Compliance
>
> B. Section 01355, Asbestos Procedures

1.03 REFERENCES

> A. CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)
>
> 29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction

1.04 DEFINITIONS

> A. Demolition: Removal or disturbance of a structural member or load
> bearing wall.
>
> B. Removal: Relocation or displacement of materials or equipment
> including built-in non structural material.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

Submit for approval: Items listed on the Schedule of Submittals in
accordance with Section 01330, Submittals, in sufficient detail to show
full compliance with the contract requirements. Items listed on the
Schedule of Submittals may include but not necessarily limited to the
following:

> A. SD-08 Statements:
>
> 1\. Demolition Plan: Submit a demolition plan to the A/E for approval
> at least 10 days prior to commencement of work. The plan shall be in
> accordance with OSHA regulations 29 CFR 1926.
>
> 2\. Safety Plan: Submit a Safety Plan specific to this project.

1.06 OCCUPANCY OF BUILDING

> A. The work on this project may be in areas that are to be occupied
> during construction operations. Coordinate with Government personnel
> to allow work to continue as scheduled.
>
> B. If required, barricades and dust barriers shall be erected to
> separate construction areas from other work.
>
> C. Existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the
> Government shall not be interrupted except when approved in writing
> and then only when temporary utility services have been provided and
> approved.
>
> D. Where entire buildings are to be demolished, the Government will
> disconnect and seal utilities prior to the start of demolition.

1.07 PRECAUTIONS AGAINST MOVEMENT

> A. Provide shoring and bracing as required to prevent movement,
> settlement, or collapse of a structure or part of a facility that will
> remain.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not used)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 DUST ABATEMENT

> A. Erect dust barriers to protect adjacent areas from dust and debris
> from construction and demolition operations. Remove upon completion.
>
> B. Dust barriers shall be, as a minimum, six mil polyethylene on a
> wood frame.

3.02 BELOW GRADE CONSTRUCTION

> A. Remove foundations, basement slabs on ground, and other below grade
> construction to a depth shown and remove demolished material.
>
> B. Fill voids created by demolition and removal process with suitable
> approved fill material.

3.03 DISPOSAL OF REMOVED MATERIAL

> A. Remove debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from
> demolition and removal operations. Removed materials shall not be
> stored on the site nor sold on Government property.
>
> B. Material classified as hazardous or controlled waste shall be
> handled and disposed of as specified in Section 01350, Environmental
> Compliance or other appropriate specification Sections.

3.04 SALVAGED MATERIAL

> A. Material and equipment designated to be salvaged shall be delivered
> to the Government as designated on the drawings.
>
> B. Salvageable material and equipment designated to become the
> property of the Contractor shall be removed from Government property
> prior to being cleaned, reconditioned or otherwise worked on. All
> salvageable material and equipment shall remain the property of the
> Government unless specifically noted on the drawings.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02282

TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> Provide termite control treatment for the entire new building or area
> noted on the drawings.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

> A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with
> the manufacturer\'s instructions and recommendations for work,
> including preparation of substrate and application.
>
> B. Product application: By a professional pest control operator,
> licensed in accordance with regulations of the State of Alabama.
>
> C. Use only termiticides which bear a Federal registration number of
> the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.

1.03 JOB CONDITIONS

> A. Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling, and
> grading operations are completed, except as otherwise required in
> construction operations.
>
> B. To insure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to frozen or
> excessively wet soils or during inclement weather.

1.04 PRODUCT WARRANTY

> A. Furnish written warranty certifying that applied soil termiticide
> treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites and that,
> if subterranean activity is discovered during the warranty period,
> Contractor will re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by
> termite infestation.
>
> B. Provide warranty for a period of 5 years from date of treatment,
> signed by Applicator and Contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION

> A. Use an emulsible concentrate termiticide for dilution with water,
> specially formulated to prevent infestation by termites. Fuel oil is
> not permitted as a diluent.
>
> B. Treatment solutions: Submitted by the Applicator for approval by
> the A/E and applicable jurisdictional authorities if indicated on the
> Schedule of Submittals.
>
> C. Apply treatment solutions with utmost care to avoid contamination
> of soils and plantings.
>
> D. Follow all warnings, precautions and instructions as directed by
> the manufacturer\'s product label and jurisdictional authorities.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION

> Remove foreign matter which could decrease effectiveness of treatment
> on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated,
> except previously compacted areas under slabs and foundations.
> Toxicants may be applied before placement of compacted fill under
> slabs, if recommeded by toxicant manufacturer.

3.02 APLICATION RATES

> Apply soil treatment solution as directed by the manufacturer\'s
> product label and all applicable federal, state and local rules and
> regulations.

3.03 POST SIGNS

> Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil
> termiticide treatment has been applied. Remove signs when areas are
> covered by other construction.

3.04 REAPPLICATION OF SOIL TREATMENT

> Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent
> excavation, landscape grading, or other construction activities
> following application.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02282

TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> Provide termite control treatment for the entire new building or area
> noted on the drawings.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

> A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with
> the manufacturer\'s instructions and recommendations for work,
> including preparation of substrate and application.
>
> B. Product application: By a professional pest control operator,
> licensed in accordance with regulations of the State of Alabama.
>
> C. Use only termiticides which bear a Federal registration number of
> the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.

1.03 JOB CONDITIONS

> A. Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling, and
> grading operations are completed, except as otherwise required in
> construction operations.
>
> B. To insure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to frozen or
> excessively wet soils or during inclement weather.

1.04 PRODUCT WARRANTY

> A. Furnish written warranty certifying that applied soil termiticide
> treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites and that,
> if subterranean activity is discovered during the warranty period,
> Contractor will re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by
> termite infestation.
>
> B. Provide warranty for a period of 5 years from date of treatment,
> signed by Applicator and Contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION

> A. Use an emulsible concentrate termiticide for dilution with water,
> specially formulated to prevent infestation by termites. Fuel oil is
> not permitted as a diluent.
>
> B. Treatment solutions: Submitted by the Applicator for approval by
> the A/E and applicable jurisdictional authorities if indicated on the
> Schedule of Submittals.
>
> C. Apply treatment solutions with utmost care to avoid contamination
> of soils and plantings.
>
> D. Follow all warnings, precautions and instructions as directed by
> the manufacturer\'s product label and jurisdictional authorities.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION

> Remove foreign matter which could decrease effectiveness of treatment
> on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated,
> except previously compacted areas under slabs and foundations.
> Toxicants may be applied before placement of compacted fill under
> slabs, if recommeded by toxicant manufacturer.

3.02 APLICATION RATES

> Apply soil treatment solution as directed by the manufacturer\'s
> product label and all applicable federal, state and local rules and
> regulations.

3.03 POST SIGNS

> Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil
> termiticide treatment has been applied. Remove signs when areas are
> covered by other construction.

3.04 REAPPLICATION OF SOIL TREATMENT

> Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent
> excavation, landscape grading, or other construction activities
> following application.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02300

EARTHWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

Earthwork shall include grading, rough and finish, excavating,
backfilling, and compaction for structures, utilities, roadways, and
parking areas. All work under this section shall be in accordance with
Alabama Department of Transportation \"Standard Specifications for
Highway Construction\", 1992 (ALDOT Specs), Sections 201 \"Clearing and
Grubbing\" and 210 \"Excavation and Embankment\".

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 Fill Material

Borrow material shall be selected to meet requirements and conditions of
the particular fill for which it is to be used. Borrow material shall be
AASHTO standard M145 soil types A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, A-3, or others lab
tested and being capable of attaining the required density. Borrow
material shall be responsibility of the Contractor. Structure backfill
shall be crushed Stone No. 57, as specified in ALDOT Specs.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Topsoil shall be removed without contamination with subsoil and
stock piled convenient to areas for later application or at locations
designated. Topsoil shall be removed to full depth and shall be stored
separate from other excavated materials and piled free of roots, stones,
and other undesirable materials.

3.02 Excavation: After all stripping has been completed, excavation of
every description, regardless of material encountered, within the
grading limits of the project shall be performed to the lines and grades
designated. Satisfactory excavation material shall be transported to and
placed in fill areas within the limits of the work. All unsatisfactory
material and surplus material shall be disposed of in areas approved for
surplus material storage.

3.03 Preparation of Ground Surface for Fill: All vegetation, such as
roots, brush, heavy sods, heavy growth of grass, and all decayed
vegetable matter, rubbish, and other unsatisfactory material within the
area upon which fill is to be placed shall be stripped or otherwise
removed before the fill is started. Sloped ground surfaces steeper than
one vertical to four horizontal on which fill is to be placed shall be
plowed, stepped, or broken up as directed, in such manner that the fill
material will bond with the existing surface.

3.04 Fills and Embankments: The completed fill shall conform to the
shape of the typical sections indicated or shall meet the requirements
of the particular case. Fill shall be satisfactory material as defined
in paragraph 2.01 and shall be reasonably free from roots, other organic
material, trash, and stones having a maximum diameter greater than 6
inches. No frozen material will be permitted in the fill. Stones having
a dimension greater than 4 inches will not be permitted in the upper 6
inches of fill or embankment. Fill shall be placed in layers not to
exceed 6 inches compacted thickness.

3.05 Finished Excavation, Fills, and Embankments: All areas covered by
the project, including excavated and filled sections and adjacent
transition areas, shall be uniformly smooth graded. The finished surface
shall be reasonably smooth, compacted, and free from irregular surface
changes.

3.06 Placing Topsoil: On areas to receive topsoil, the compacted
subgrade soil shall be scarified to a 2-inch depth for bonding of
topsoil with subsoil. Topsoil then shall be spread evenly and graded to
the elevations and slopes shown. Topsoil shall not be spread when frozen
or excessively wet or dry.

3.07 Compaction and Density: Requirements are specified as a percentage
of the maximum density obtained by the test procedures of ASTM D
1557-91. Each layer shall be compacted to not less than the percentage
of Modified Proctor Density specified below:

+---------------------+---------------------+-----------+------------+
| > Designation       | > Location          | >         | > Coh      |
|                     |                     |  Cohesive | esion-less |
+---------------------+---------------------+-----------+------------+
| > Fill, Embankment, | > Under             | > 90      | > 100      |
| > And/Or Backfill   | >                   |           |            |
|                     | > proposed          |           |            |
|                     | > structures,       |           |            |
|                     | > building          |           |            |
|                     | >                   |           |            |
|                     | > slabs, steps, and |           |            |
|                     | > paved areas       |           |            |
+---------------------+---------------------+-----------+------------+
| > Fill, Embankment, | > Under sidewalks   | > 85      | > 90       |
| > And/Or Backfill   | > and grassed areas |           |            |
+---------------------+---------------------+-----------+------------+
| > Subgrade          | > Under building    | > 90      | > 95       |
|                     | > slabs, steps, and |           |            |
|                     | > paved areas, top  |           |            |
|                     | > 12 inches         |           |            |
+---------------------+---------------------+-----------+------------+
| > Subgrade          | > Under sidewalks,  | > 85      | > 90       |
|                     | > top 6 inches      |           |            |
+---------------------+---------------------+-----------+------------+

3.08 Test Procedure: Field in-place density shall be determined by
Nuclear Densometer Method. Testing shall be performed by an independant
testing laboratory approved by the COTR.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02315

READY MIXED FLOWABLE FILL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> This work shall consist of placing a flowable mortar fill material
> (\"flowable fill\"). Uses include, but are not limited to, placement
> under existing bridges, around or within box culverts or culvert
> pipes, in open trenches, or at other locations as shown on the
> drawings or as specified.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

> Submit for approval: Items listed in the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

1.03 REFERENCES

> A. The State of Alabama Department of Transportation \"Standard
> Specifications for Highway Construction\", 1992 Edition (ALDOT Specs).
>
> B. American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM C 109-92
>
> C. American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM C 939-94a

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

> A. Flowable fill shall be manufactured and delivered to the site by a
> supplier experienced in \"Ready Mixed Flowable Fill\" work. Job mixed
> shall not be used unless approved by the Contracting Authority.
>
> B. \"Ready Mixed Flowable Fill\" design mix shall be available for
> inspection and/or approval as noted on The Schedule of Submittals.
>
> C. Fluidity Test: Fluidity of the flowable mortar shall be measured by
> the Corps of Engineers flow cone method according to their
> specification CRD-C611-80. Prior to filling the flow cone with
> flowable mortar, the mixture shall be passed through a 1/4-inch
> screen. Time of efflux shall be: 10 to 16 seconds for placement in
> critical locations, such as inside existing culverts and between the
> beams under existing bridges or structures: or 10 to 26 seconds for
> placement in non critical locations, such as for backfilling open
> trenches or placement below the beams under existing bridges.
>
> D. Compressive Strength Test: Make two, 2\" cubes for each truck. One
> cube shall be tested at 7 days and the other at 28 days. Test reports
> shall be submitted as noted on the Schedule of Submittals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

All materials shall meet requirements for the respective items in
accordance with the State of Alabama Department of Transportation
\"Standard Specifications for Highway Construction\", 1992 edition
(ALDOT).

> A. Flowable fill: Ready-mix flowable mortar having a minimum
> compressive strength of 300 psi at 28 days unless otherwise noted on
> drawings.
>
> B. Cement shall be Type 1; Meet the requirements of Section 815.
>
> C. Fly Ash shall meet requirements of Section 806.01 (b).
>
> D. Fine Aggregate for flowable mortar shall be natural sand consisting
> of mineral aggregate particles. The gradation of this material shall
> be as follows:

[Sieve Size]{.underline} [% Passing]{.underline}

3/8 inch 100

No. 8 80-100

No. 16 60-100

No. 30 45- 80

No. 50 12- 40

No. 100 1.5- 25

No. 200 0- 5

> E. It is intended that the sand be a fine sand that will stay in
> suspension in the mortar to the extent required for proper flow. For
> the Contractor\'s information, uniformly graded sand in the following
> gradation range has generally shown good flow characteristics when
> using the normal amount of fly ash (300 pounds per cubic yard). ALDOT
> Section 802 type 105 and 106 are local sands suitable for fine
> aggregate.
>
> F. Mix Design
>
> Mix Design for mortar (flowable fill) is as follows:
>
> [Quantities of Dry Materials Per Cubic Yard]{.underline}

Cement 100 pounds

Fly Ash 300 pounds

Fine Aggregate 2600 pounds

> These quantities of dry materials, with approximately 70 gallons of
> water, will yield approximately 1 cubic yard of flowable mortar of the
> proper consistency. The quantity of water used for the trial mix or at
> the project may require adjustment to achieve proper solids
> suspensions and optimum flowability. For information, volume loss
> during the cure period resulting from surface evaporation, moisture
> migration away from the flowable motor unit, and hydration have been
> observed to be less than 4 percent of the original volume determined
> in the fluid condition.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 DRAINAGE SYSTEM

> The shoulder area shall first be constructed with suitable soil, and
> with a drainage system if shown on drawings. This work shall be done
> in conjunction with the pipe placement.

3.02 PLACEMENT

> A. Flowable fill shall be discharged from the mixer by a reasonable
> means into the remaining area to be filled. Filling operations shall
> proceed simultaneously on both sides of the structure so that the two
> fills are kept at approximately the same elevation at all times.
>
> B. If the pipe starts to float, the filling operation shall cease. An
> external load shall be applied to the pipe, sufficient to hold it in
> place, before the filling is continued. As an alternate, the filling
> may be suspended until the buoyancy effect of the flowable fill has
> ceased.
>
> C. The flowable fill shall be placed to the elevation shown on the
> drawings. When not shown, the flowable fill shall be placed as
> follows:
>
> 1\. At unpaved areas, place flowable fill to 12 inches below subgrade
> elevation if the subgrade elevation is not more than 5 feet over the
> top of the pipe. If the subgrade is more than 5 feet over the top of
> the pipe, flowable fill shall be placed to an elevation 24 inches over
> the top of the pipe, and the remainder shall be backfilled with soil
> or aggregate as designated by the drawings.
>
> 2\. At asphalt paved areas, place flowable fill up to the pavement
> base level. Do not begin paving operations on flowable fill for a
> minimum of eight hours after backfilling.

3.03 LIMITATION OF OPERATION

> A. Flowable fill shall not be placed on frozen ground.
>
> B. Flowable fill batching, mixing, and placing may be started, if
> weather conditions are favorable, when the temperature is at least 34
> degrees F and rising. At time of placement, flowable fill must have a
> temperature of at least 40 degrees F. Mixing and placing shall stop
> when the temperature is 38 degrees F or less and falling.
>
> C. To the extent practicable, each filling stage shall be a continuous
> operation.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02370

GEOTEXTILE SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

This section covers needle punched non-woven geotextile construction
fabric, including product specification, construction procedures, and
inspection procedures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 Fibers used in the manufacture of geotextile, and the threads used
in polymers, composed of at least 85% by weight polyolefins, polyesters,
or polyamides. They shall be formed into a network such that the
filaments or yarns retain dimensional stability relative to each other,
including selvedges. These materials shall conform to the performance
requirements for soil retention, permeability, and clogging resistance
and the physical requirements for constructability, survivability, and
durability of a needle punched non-woven fabric similar to Amoco 4557,
or A/E approved equal.

2.02 Geotextile rolls shall be furnished with suitable wrapping for
protection against moisture, and extended ultra-violet (UV) exposure
prior to placement. Each roll shall be labeled or tagged to provide
product identification sufficient for inventory and quality control
purposes. Rolls shall be stored in a manner which protects them from the
elements. If stored outdoors, they shall be elevated and protected with
a waterproof cover.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Geotextile Exposure Following Placement: Exposure of geotextiles to
the elements between lay down and cover shall be a maximum of 14 days to
minimize damage potential.

3.02 Erosion Control Placement: The geotextile shall be placed and
anchored on a smooth graded surface approved by the Contracting
Authority. The geotextile shall be placed in such a manner that
placement of the overlying materials will not excessively stretch or
tear the fabric. Anchoring of the terminal ends of the geotextile shall
be accomplished through the use of key trenches or aprons at the crest
and toe of slope. See drawings for details.

3.03 Slope Protection Placement

Successive geotextile sheets shall be overlapped in such a manner that
the upstream sheet is placed over the downstream sheet and/or upslope
over downslope. In underwater applications, the geotextile and required
thickness of backfill material shall be placed the same day. The
backfill placement shall begin at the toe and proceed up the slope.

Rip rap and heavy stone filling shall not be dropped onto the geotextile
from the height of more than 1 ft. Slope protection and smaller sizes of
stone filling shall not be dropped onto the geotextile from a height
exceeding 3 ft. Any geotextile damaged during placement shall be
replaced as directed by the Contracting Authority at the Contractor\'s
expense.

3.04 Seams - The geotextile shall be joined by overlapping. All seams
shall be subject to the approval of the Contracting Authority.

Overlapped seams shall have a minimum overlap of 2 ft.

3.05 Repair - A geotextile patch shall be placed over the damaged area
and extend 3 ft. beyond the perimeter of the tear or damage.

3.06 Installation Procedures

> The following general construction considerations apply for the
> riprap-geotextile erosion protection system:
>
> A. Grade area and remove debris to provide smooth, fairly even
> surface.
>
> 1\. Depressions or holes in the slope shall be filled so that the
> fabric will not have to bridge them and possibly be torn when cover
> materials are placed.
>
> 2\. All sharp objects, large stones, limbs and other debris shall be
> removed prior to placement to prevent fabric damage from tearing or
> puncturing during stone placement.
>
> B. Place fabric loosely, with length of fabric placed from top to
> bottom of slope.
>
> C. Overlap fabric as required.
>
> 1\. For overlaps, adjacent rolls of fabric shall be overlapped a
> minimum of 2 ft. Overlaps shall be in the direction of water flow and
> stapled or pinned to hold the overlap in place during placement of
> stone. Pins shall be 3/16 in. diameter, 18 in. long steel pins,
> pointed at one end, and fitted with 1.5 in. diameter washers at the
> other end. Pins shall be spaced along all overlap alignments at a
> distance of approximately 3 ft. center to center.
>
> 2\. The fabric shall be pinned in a loose condition so that it easily
> conforms to ground surface and will \"give\" when the stone is placed.
>
> D. Place revetment (cushion layer and/or riprap) over the geotextile
> width, taking care to avoid puncturing or tearing it.
>
> 1\. Revetment shall be placed on the geotextile within 5 days for
> untreated UV susceptible geotextiles and within 14 days for UV-treated
> and low UV susceptible geotextiles.
>
> 2\. For sloped surfaces, placement shall always start from the base of
> the slope, moving up slope and from the center outwards.
>
> 3\. In no case shall stone weighing more than 100 lb. be allowed to
> roll downslope.
>
> 4\. Field trials shall be performed to determine if placement
> techniques will damage the fabric and to determine the maximum height
> of safe drop without damaging the fabric. For Class A fabrics, height
> of drop for stones less than 250 lb. shall be less than 3 ft. Stones
> greater than 250 lb. shall be placed with no free fall unless field
> trials demonstrate that they can be dropped without damaging the
> fabric.
>
> 5\. Grading of slopes shall be performed during placement of riprap
> and grading shall not be allowed after placement if grading results in
> stone movement directly on the fabric.

3.07 Field Inspection

> A. Pay close attention to the construction procedures. If significant
> movement of stone riprap (greater than 6 in.) occurs during or after
> placement, stone shall be removed to inspect overlaps to make sure
> they are still intact. Field trials shall be performed to demonstrate
> that placement procedures will not damage the geotextile. If damage is
> observed, the Contracting Authority shall be contacted and the
> contractor shall change the placement procedure.
>
> B. For placement adjacent to structures requiring special installation
> procedures, the Contracting Authority shall discuss placement details
> with the engineer, and inspection requirements and inspection methods
> shall be worked out in advance of construction.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02370

GEOTEXTILE SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

This section covers needle punched non-woven geotextile construction
fabric, including product specification, construction procedures, and
inspection procedures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 Fibers used in the manufacture of geotextile, and the threads used
in polymers, composed of at least 85% by weight polyolefins, polyesters,
or polyamides. They shall be formed into a network such that the
filaments or yarns retain dimensional stability relative to each other,
including selvedges. These materials shall conform to the performance
requirements for soil retention, permeability, and clogging resistance
and the physical requirements for constructability, survivability, and
durability of a needle punched non-woven fabric similar to Amoco 4557,
or A/E approved equal.

2.02 Geotextile rolls shall be furnished with suitable wrapping for
protection against moisture, and extended ultra-violet (UV) exposure
prior to placement. Each roll shall be labeled or tagged to provide
product identification sufficient for inventory and quality control
purposes. Rolls shall be stored in a manner which protects them from the
elements. If stored outdoors, they shall be elevated and protected with
a waterproof cover.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Geotextile Exposure Following Placement: Exposure of geotextiles to
the elements between lay down and cover shall be a maximum of 14 days to
minimize damage potential.

3.02 Erosion Control Placement: The geotextile shall be placed and
anchored on a smooth graded surface approved by the Contracting
Authority. The geotextile shall be placed in such a manner that
placement of the overlying materials will not excessively stretch or
tear the fabric. Anchoring of the terminal ends of the geotextile shall
be accomplished through the use of key trenches or aprons at the crest
and toe of slope. See drawings for details.

3.03 Slope Protection Placement

Successive geotextile sheets shall be overlapped in such a manner that
the upstream sheet is placed over the downstream sheet and/or upslope
over downslope. In underwater applications, the geotextile and required
thickness of backfill material shall be placed the same day. The
backfill placement shall begin at the toe and proceed up the slope.

Rip rap and heavy stone filling shall not be dropped onto the geotextile
from the height of more than 1 ft. Slope protection and smaller sizes of
stone filling shall not be dropped onto the geotextile from a height
exceeding 3 ft. Any geotextile damaged during placement shall be
replaced as directed by the Contracting Authority at the Contractor\'s
expense.

3.04 Seams - The geotextile shall be joined by overlapping. All seams
shall be subject to the approval of the Contracting Authority.

Overlapped seams shall have a minimum overlap of 2 ft.

3.05 Repair - A geotextile patch shall be placed over the damaged area
and extend 3 ft. beyond the perimeter of the tear or damage.

3.06 Installation Procedures

> The following general construction considerations apply for the
> riprap-geotextile erosion protection system:
>
> A. Grade area and remove debris to provide smooth, fairly even
> surface.
>
> 1\. Depressions or holes in the slope shall be filled so that the
> fabric will not have to bridge them and possibly be torn when cover
> materials are placed.
>
> 2\. All sharp objects, large stones, limbs and other debris shall be
> removed prior to placement to prevent fabric damage from tearing or
> puncturing during stone placement.
>
> B. Place fabric loosely, with length of fabric placed from top to
> bottom of slope.
>
> C. Overlap fabric as required.
>
> 1\. For overlaps, adjacent rolls of fabric shall be overlapped a
> minimum of 2 ft. Overlaps shall be in the direction of water flow and
> stapled or pinned to hold the overlap in place during placement of
> stone. Pins shall be 3/16 in. diameter, 18 in. long steel pins,
> pointed at one end, and fitted with 1.5 in. diameter washers at the
> other end. Pins shall be spaced along all overlap alignments at a
> distance of approximately 3 ft. center to center.
>
> 2\. The fabric shall be pinned in a loose condition so that it easily
> conforms to ground surface and will \"give\" when the stone is placed.
>
> D. Place revetment (cushion layer and/or riprap) over the geotextile
> width, taking care to avoid puncturing or tearing it.
>
> 1\. Revetment shall be placed on the geotextile within 5 days for
> untreated UV susceptible geotextiles and within 14 days for UV-treated
> and low UV susceptible geotextiles.
>
> 2\. For sloped surfaces, placement shall always start from the base of
> the slope, moving up slope and from the center outwards.
>
> 3\. In no case shall stone weighing more than 100 lb. be allowed to
> roll downslope.
>
> 4\. Field trials shall be performed to determine if placement
> techniques will damage the fabric and to determine the maximum height
> of safe drop without damaging the fabric. For Class A fabrics, height
> of drop for stones less than 250 lb. shall be less than 3 ft. Stones
> greater than 250 lb. shall be placed with no free fall unless field
> trials demonstrate that they can be dropped without damaging the
> fabric.
>
> 5\. Grading of slopes shall be performed during placement of riprap
> and grading shall not be allowed after placement if grading results in
> stone movement directly on the fabric.

3.07 Field Inspection

> A. Pay close attention to the construction procedures. If significant
> movement of stone riprap (greater than 6 in.) occurs during or after
> placement, stone shall be removed to inspect overlaps to make sure
> they are still intact. Field trials shall be performed to demonstrate
> that placement procedures will not damage the geotextile. If damage is
> observed, the Contracting Authority shall be contacted and the
> contractor shall change the placement procedure.
>
> B. For placement adjacent to structures requiring special installation
> procedures, the Contracting Authority shall discuss placement details
> with the engineer, and inspection requirements and inspection methods
> shall be worked out in advance of construction.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02500

UTILITY EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 Description: The work under this section shall consist of the
removal and disposal of all excavated materials of any nature required
for the construction of all box culverts (including bridge type), pipe
culverts (including pipe arches), storm drains, and other minor
structures in accordance with these Specifications and to reasonable
close conformity with the lines and grades shown on the plans or
designated by the Contracting Authority. This section shall further
include backfilling of structure foundations with suitable material in
accordance with plan details or as directed.

1.02 Classification of Materials

> A. Excavation: All excavation for structures below natural ground or
> the designated subgrade, whichever is lower, or the elevation
> designated by the Contracting Authority will be classified as
> Structure Excavation and shall include all materials encountered
> regardless of their nature, exclusive of water or other liquids, which
> will not be classified as excavated material, necessary for the proper
> construction of the structure.
>
> B. Backfill
>
> 1\. Foundation Backfill: Special selected material ordered placed
> under a structure to provide a suitable foundation for the structure
> shall be classified as Foundation Backfill.
>
> 2\. General Backfill: Material used for ordinary backfill shall
> include special material for areas immediately adjacent to weepholes
> and a drainage belt for large masonry structures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 Foundation Backfill: Foundation Backfill is a special selected
material (approved free-draining commercial or local material) suitable
for use as foundation for the structure.

2.02 General Backfill: Material used for General Backfill shall be
compactible soil of acceptable quality except that material for areas
immediately adjacent to weepholes shall be free-draining material
conforming to the following:

> A. Local material shall have a permeability coefficient of at least
> 0.01 cm/sec., measured by the AASHTO T 215 constant head permeameter,
> with 90% passing the 3/4 inch sieve and a maximum of 10% passing the
> No. 8 sieve.
>
> B. Commercial material shall be aggregates meeting the requirements of
> ALDOT #467 or ALDOT #57. Other commercial aggregates will be
> considered and can be used if approved by the Contracting Authority.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 General: The excavation shall include trenching for utility and
foundation drainage systems. Unsatisfactory material shall be removed,
and satisfactory material shall be placed and compacted, as specified by
Section 02300, EARTHWORK. Work shall be done in accordance with Section
214 of the ALDOT Specifications, 1992 Edition.

3.02 Drainage: Excavation shall be performed so that the area of the
site, the area immediately surrounding the site, and the affecting
operations at the site will be continually and effectively drained.

3.03 Utility and Drain Trenches: Trenches for underground utilities
systems and drain lines shall be excavated to the required alignments
and depths. The bottoms of trenches shall be graded to secure the
required slope and shall be tamped if necessary to provide a firm pipe
bed. Unsuitable material shall be removed and replaced with No. 57
stone.

3.04 Borrow: Where satisfactory materials are not available in
sufficient quantity from required excavations, approved materials shall
be obtained from approved sources.

3.05 Excavated Materials: Satisfactory excavated material required for
fill or backfill shall be placed in the proper section of the permanent
work required under this section or shall be separately stockpiled if it
cannot be readily placed.

3.06 Final Grade of Surfaces for Concrete Support: Excavation to final
grade shall not be made until just before concrete is to be placed. Rock
shall be worked down to a satisfactory bed or sidewall.

3.07 Filling and Subgrade Preparation: Satisfactory materials free from
roots, debris, organic materials, or stones larger than 3 inches shall
be used in bringing fills to the lines and grades indicated and for
replacing unsatisfactory materials. When backfilling under paved areas,
crushed aggregate type \"A\" shall be used as specified in Section
02720, \"Crushed Aggregate Base Course\".

3.08 Backfilling and Compaction: Backfilling shall not begin until
construction below finish grade has been approved; underground utilities
systems have been inspected, tested, and approved; forms have been
removed; and the excavation has been cleaned of trash and debris.
Backfill shall be brought to indicated finish grade in 6\" lifts
compacted thickness and shall be compacted to 95% Modified Proctor
Density under roadways and parking areas, and shall include backfill for
outside grease interceptors and underground fuel tanks. Backfill shall
not be placed in wet or frozen areas. Backfill shall not be placed
against foundation walls prior to 7 days after completion of the walls.
As far as practicable, backfill shall be brought up evenly on each side
of the wall and sloped to drain away from the wall. Test for density
requirements shall be performed on the final 2 (two) feet of fill below
subgrade on each lift.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02550

PRE- INSULATED UNDERGROUND STEAM DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A.  Provide pre-insulated underground steam and condensate systems as
    indicated on the drawings, and as specified herein.

> B. Contract Drawings indicate general pipe route only. Contractor is
> responsible for submitting a detailed design layout prepared by the
> system supplier, as noted below.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

> A. Section 02500 Utility Excavation and Backfill
>
> B. Section 15051 Welding for Mechanical Utility Piping
>
> C. Section 15052 Radiographic Inspection of Welded Piping

1.03 SUBMITTALS

> The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330,
> \"Submittals\", in sufficient detail to show full compliance with the
> specification:
>
> A. Steam Distribution and Condensate Return System Drawings (SD-04)
>
> Submit a detailed design layout of the system (plan and elevation
> views) showing size, type, elevations, and location of each component
> to be used in the system. Include, if applicable, transition point
> design to aboveground or other type systems.
>
> B. Work Plan (SD-08)
>
> Submit a proposed schedule of activities indicating when various items
> of work and tests are to be carried out, and when quality control
> inspectors of the pre-insulated system supplier will be present at the
> job site.
>
> C. System Compliance Certification (SD-13)
>
> Upon completion of work, and before final acceptance, submit a
> notarized statement (Certification of Compliance) signed by a
> principal officer of both the manufacturing and contracting firms,
> certifying that the system has been installed satisfactorily and in
> accordance with the Contract Documents and the system supplier\'s
> design.
>
> D. Representative\'s Reports (SD-18)
>
> 1\. Whenever the system supplier's representative is required to be on
> the job site, he shall submit a daily written report. The report shall
> be checked for accuracy, and the original presented, no later than the
> next working day after the work has been performed. One copy shall be
> forwarded to the system supplier\'s main office.
>
> 2\. The report shall be signed by the representative, and shall state
> whether or not the condition and quality of the materials used, and
> the installation of the system are in accordance with the drawings and
> specifications.
>
> 3\. If anything connected with the installation is unsatisfactory, the
> report shall state what corrective action has been taken, or shall
> contain the system supplier\'s recommendations for corrective action.
>
> 4\. The report shall identify any conditions that could result in an
> unsatisfactory installation, including such items as open conduit ends
> left in the trench overnight, improper valve manhole entries, etc.
>
> E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals (SD-19)
>
> The operation and maintenance manuals shall list routine maintenance
> procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting
> guides. Manuals shall include piping and equipment layout of the
> system installed.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

> A. Pre-insulated System
>
> 1\. A complete underground steam distribution and condensate return
> system, including all required components such as conduit, carrier
> pipes and fittings, anchors, pipe supports, and insulation.
>
> 2\. The pre-insulated system shall include all piping and components
> to a point six inches above grade or inside a building or steam pit.
>
> 3\. The pre-insulated system does not include steam pits and the
> piping and equipment inside them.
>
> B. System Supplier
>
> The system supplier is the company responsible for the manufacture of
> the pre-insulated system. This company is also responsible for
> directing the installation of their system, and for having a
> representative on the job site as required.
>
> C. System Supplier\'s Representative
>
> The system supplier\'s representative shall be a person who regularly
> performs the duties specified herein, is certified in writing by the
> system supplier to be technically qualified and experienced in the
> installation of the system, and is authorized by the supplier to make
> and sign the daily reports specified herein.
>
> D. Contractor
>
> The company responsible for the installation of the pre-insulated
> system and all other components of the underground steam and
> condensate systems, including the steam pits and the piping and
> equipment in them. This responsibility includes all of the site work,
> purchase of the pre-insulated system from the system supplier, and
> installation of the system in accordance with the Contract Documents
> and the system supplier\'s instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 STEAM DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

> The steam distribution system shall be one of the following:
>
> A. A fiberglass reinforced resin conduit, with an annular air space of
> at least 1 inch, and insulated Schedule 40 black steel carrier piping.
>
> B. A fiberglass reinforced resin conduit, with insulated black steel
> Schedule 40 carrier piping, and factory applied conduit seals at the
> ends of each piping segment (not to exceed 20 feet).

2.02 CONDENSATE RETURN SYSTEM

> The condensate return system shall consist of one of the following:
>
> A. A fiberglass reinforced resin or PVC conduit, with an annular air
> space of at least 1 inch, and insulated Schedule 80 black steel
> carrier piping.
>
> B. A fiberglass reinforced resin or PVC conduit, with insulated
> Schedule 80 black steel carrier piping, and factory applied conduit
> seals at the ends of each piping segment (not to exceed 20 feet).

2.03 APPURTENANCES

> A. Both systems shall consist of piping as indicated, plus all
> fittings, anchors, seals, and appurtenances necessary for a complete
> and operable system.
>
> B. The design, manufacture, fabrication, installation, and testing of
> the system and its components shall be in accordance with the contract
> specifications and the system manufacturer\'s recommendations.

2.04 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

> A. Site Classification
>
> The system provided shall be approved for continuous contact between
> conduit and groundwater.
>
> B. Operating Characteristics
>
> Unless otherwise noted on drawings, the following operating
> characteristics shall apply.
>
> 1\. The steam system shall be designed for a supply temperature of 353
> degrees F and an operating pressure of 125 psig.
>
> 2\. The condensate return system shall be designed for an operating
> temperature of 180 degrees F and an operating pressure of 20 psig.
>
> C. Underground Connections
>
> 1\. Except as noted below, all field fabricated underground
> connections shall be welded. Piping 2-1/2\" and larger shall be butt
> welded. Piping 2\" and smaller may be socket welded.
>
> 2\. If other than welded connections are to be made between
> underground piping sections, the methods of joining shall be the
> manufacturer\'s standard method as evidenced by catalog cuts or other
> engineering literature, and shall be submitted for approval.
>
> D. Insulation Thickness
>
> 1\. The minimum thickness of insulation for the steam distribution and
> condensate return systems shall be as shown in the following tables.
>
> 2\. The notation N/A indicates that the system is not available in the
> indicated pipe size.
>
> 3\. The composite insulation system described in Table 1 is commonly
> used by Thermal Pipe Systems, Inc.
>
> 4\. Epitherm Delta is a V-grooved mineral wool board insulation as
> provided by NOVA Group.

**TABLE 1**

**MINIMUM PIPE INSULATION THICKNESS IN INCHES**

**FOR STEAM (16 PSIG TO 250 PSIG)**

**[INSULATIONS]{.underline} [COMPOSITE SYSTEMS]{.underline}**

Nominal Kaylo-10

Pipe Size Epitherm Thermo-12 Calcium Polyur-

[(Inches)]{.underline} [Paroc]{.underline} [Delta]{.underline} [Super
Caltemp]{.underline} [Foamglas]{.underline} [Silicate +
ethane]{.underline}

1.0 2.0 2.5 4.0 4.5 N/A N/A

1.5 2.0 2.5 4.0 4.5 N/A N/A

2.0 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.0 N/A N/A

2.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.0 N/A N/A

3.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 1.0 + 1.646

4.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 1.0 + 1.625

5.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 N/A N/A

6.0 3.5 4.5 5.5 6.0 1.5 + 1.797

**TABLE 2**

**MINIMUM PIPE INSULATION THICKNESS IN INCHES**

**FOR CONDENSATE RETURN (LESS THAN 250 DEGREES F)**

Foamglass

Nominal Kaylo-10

Pipe Size Thermo-12

[(inches]{.underline}) [Paroc]{.underline} [Epitherm]{.underline} [Super
Caltemp]{.underline} [Polyurethane]{.underline}

1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 N/A

1.5 1.5 2.0 3.0 N/A

2.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 1.024

2.5 1.5 2.0 3.0 N/A

3.0 2.0 2.5 3.5 1.376

4.0 2.0 2.5 3.5 1.401

5.0 2.0 2.5 3.5 N/A

6.0 2.5 3.0 4.5 1.770

> E. Factory Testing
>
> Each section of carrier piping shall be hydrostatically tested at the
> factory in accordance with ANSI B31.1.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION, INSPECTION, AND TESTING

> A. The pre-insulated system shall be installed, inspected, and tested
> in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications, and
> directions given by the system supplier\'s representative.
>
> B. The system supplier\'s representative shall be present at the job
> site when the following types of work are being performed:
>
> 1\. Inspection and unloading of pre-insulated piping sections.
>
> 2\. Inspection of trench prior to laying of conduit.
>
> 3\. Inspection of concrete thrust blocks prior to cold springing.
>
> 4\. Cold springing.
>
> 5\. Hydrostatic testing of all service lines.
>
> 6\. Field joint closure work.
>
> 7\. Air testing of conduit.
>
> 8\. Patching and repaiir of conduit required for branch line
> connections to mains.
>
> 9\. Initial backfill up to 10 inches above the top of the casing.
>
> 10\. Verification of the slope of the system. Elevation readings
> required by paragraph 3.04 shall be witnessed and recorded.
>
> The Contractor shall not perform any of this work in the absence of
> the system supplier\'s representative.
>
> C. The system supplier\'s representative shall take prompt action to
> return to the factory all damaged or defective material, and to order
> prompt replacement of such material.
>
> D. Anchors shall be installed at each change of direction, at each
> high point in the system, at each point of connection to the
> condensate return line, and where otherwise indicated on the drawings.
>
> E. After installation all carrier piping shall be hydrostatically
> tested for 2 hours (minimum) in accordance with ANSI B31.1.
>
> F. The conduit for systems with annular air spaces shall be tested for
> 1 hour (minimum) at 8 psig with dry nitrogen.

3.02 BURIED UTILITY WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE

> Provide utility warning and identification tape in accordance with
> Section 15075.

3.03 RADIOGRAPHIC INSPECTION

> Provide a 10 percent radiographic examination of field welds in the
> carrier piping in accordance with Section 15052.

3.04 VERIFICATION OF FINAL ELEVATIONS

> A. Prior to covering the top of the casing with backfill material,but
> after all temporary supports have been removed and initial backfilling
> of the conduit system has been accomplished, the Contractor shall
> measure and record the elevation of the top of the casing in the
> trench.
>
> B. Elevations shall be taken at every completed field joint and elbow
> top. These measurements shall be checked against the contract
> drawings, and shall confirm that the conduit system has been installed
> to the elevations shown.
>
> C. The measurements shall be recorded by the Contractor and given to
> the Contracting Officer prior to covering the casing with backfill
> material.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02550

PRE- INSULATED UNDERGROUND STEAM DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A.  Provide pre-insulated underground steam and condensate systems as
    indicated on the drawings, and as specified herein.

> B. Contract Drawings indicate general pipe route only. Contractor is
> responsible for submitting a detailed design layout prepared by the
> system supplier, as noted below.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

> A. Section 02500 Utility Excavation and Backfill
>
> B. Section 15051 Welding for Mechanical Utility Piping
>
> C. Section 15052 Radiographic Inspection of Welded Piping

1.03 SUBMITTALS

> The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330,
> \"Submittals\", in sufficient detail to show full compliance with the
> specification:
>
> A. Steam Distribution and Condensate Return System Drawings (SD-04)
>
> Submit a detailed design layout of the system (plan and elevation
> views) showing size, type, elevations, and location of each component
> to be used in the system. Include, if applicable, transition point
> design to aboveground or other type systems.
>
> B. Work Plan (SD-08)
>
> Submit a proposed schedule of activities indicating when various items
> of work and tests are to be carried out, and when quality control
> inspectors of the pre-insulated system supplier will be present at the
> job site.
>
> C. System Compliance Certification (SD-13)
>
> Upon completion of work, and before final acceptance, submit a
> notarized statement (Certification of Compliance) signed by a
> principal officer of both the manufacturing and contracting firms,
> certifying that the system has been installed satisfactorily and in
> accordance with the Contract Documents and the system supplier\'s
> design.
>
> D. Representative\'s Reports (SD-18)
>
> 1\. Whenever the system supplier's representative is required to be on
> the job site, he shall submit a daily written report. The report shall
> be checked for accuracy, and the original presented, no later than the
> next working day after the work has been performed. One copy shall be
> forwarded to the system supplier\'s main office.
>
> 2\. The report shall be signed by the representative, and shall state
> whether or not the condition and quality of the materials used, and
> the installation of the system are in accordance with the drawings and
> specifications.
>
> 3\. If anything connected with the installation is unsatisfactory, the
> report shall state what corrective action has been taken, or shall
> contain the system supplier\'s recommendations for corrective action.
>
> 4\. The report shall identify any conditions that could result in an
> unsatisfactory installation, including such items as open conduit ends
> left in the trench overnight, improper valve manhole entries, etc.
>
> E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals (SD-19)
>
> The operation and maintenance manuals shall list routine maintenance
> procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting
> guides. Manuals shall include piping and equipment layout of the
> system installed.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

> A. Pre-insulated System
>
> 1\. A complete underground steam distribution and condensate return
> system, including all required components such as conduit, carrier
> pipes and fittings, anchors, pipe supports, and insulation.
>
> 2\. The pre-insulated system shall include all piping and components
> to a point six inches above grade or inside a building or steam pit.
>
> 3\. The pre-insulated system does not include steam pits and the
> piping and equipment inside them.
>
> B. System Supplier
>
> The system supplier is the company responsible for the manufacture of
> the pre-insulated system. This company is also responsible for
> directing the installation of their system, and for having a
> representative on the job site as required.
>
> C. System Supplier\'s Representative
>
> The system supplier\'s representative shall be a person who regularly
> performs the duties specified herein, is certified in writing by the
> system supplier to be technically qualified and experienced in the
> installation of the system, and is authorized by the supplier to make
> and sign the daily reports specified herein.
>
> D. Contractor
>
> The company responsible for the installation of the pre-insulated
> system and all other components of the underground steam and
> condensate systems, including the steam pits and the piping and
> equipment in them. This responsibility includes all of the site work,
> purchase of the pre-insulated system from the system supplier, and
> installation of the system in accordance with the Contract Documents
> and the system supplier\'s instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 STEAM DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

> The steam distribution system shall be one of the following:
>
> A. A fiberglass reinforced resin conduit, with an annular air space of
> at least 1 inch, and insulated Schedule 40 black steel carrier piping.
>
> B. A fiberglass reinforced resin conduit, with insulated black steel
> Schedule 40 carrier piping, and factory applied conduit seals at the
> ends of each piping segment (not to exceed 20 feet).

2.02 CONDENSATE RETURN SYSTEM

> The condensate return system shall consist of one of the following:
>
> A. A fiberglass reinforced resin or PVC conduit, with an annular air
> space of at least 1 inch, and insulated Schedule 80 black steel
> carrier piping.
>
> B. A fiberglass reinforced resin or PVC conduit, with insulated
> Schedule 80 black steel carrier piping, and factory applied conduit
> seals at the ends of each piping segment (not to exceed 20 feet).

2.03 APPURTENANCES

> A. Both systems shall consist of piping as indicated, plus all
> fittings, anchors, seals, and appurtenances necessary for a complete
> and operable system.
>
> B. The design, manufacture, fabrication, installation, and testing of
> the system and its components shall be in accordance with the contract
> specifications and the system manufacturer\'s recommendations.

2.04 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

> A. Site Classification
>
> The system provided shall be approved for continuous contact between
> conduit and groundwater.
>
> B. Operating Characteristics
>
> Unless otherwise noted on drawings, the following operating
> characteristics shall apply.
>
> 1\. The steam system shall be designed for a supply temperature of 353
> degrees F and an operating pressure of 125 psig.
>
> 2\. The condensate return system shall be designed for an operating
> temperature of 180 degrees F and an operating pressure of 20 psig.
>
> C. Underground Connections
>
> 1\. Except as noted below, all field fabricated underground
> connections shall be welded. Piping 2-1/2\" and larger shall be butt
> welded. Piping 2\" and smaller may be socket welded.
>
> 2\. If other than welded connections are to be made between
> underground piping sections, the methods of joining shall be the
> manufacturer\'s standard method as evidenced by catalog cuts or other
> engineering literature, and shall be submitted for approval.
>
> D. Insulation Thickness
>
> 1\. The minimum thickness of insulation for the steam distribution and
> condensate return systems shall be as shown in the following tables.
>
> 2\. The notation N/A indicates that the system is not available in the
> indicated pipe size.
>
> 3\. The composite insulation system described in Table 1 is commonly
> used by Thermal Pipe Systems, Inc.
>
> 4\. Epitherm Delta is a V-grooved mineral wool board insulation as
> provided by NOVA Group.

**TABLE 1**

**MINIMUM PIPE INSULATION THICKNESS IN INCHES**

**FOR STEAM (16 PSIG TO 250 PSIG)**

**[INSULATIONS]{.underline} [COMPOSITE SYSTEMS]{.underline}**

Nominal Kaylo-10

Pipe Size Epitherm Thermo-12 Calcium Polyur-

[(Inches)]{.underline} [Paroc]{.underline} [Delta]{.underline} [Super
Caltemp]{.underline} [Foamglas]{.underline} [Silicate +
ethane]{.underline}

1.0 2.0 2.5 4.0 4.5 N/A N/A

1.5 2.0 2.5 4.0 4.5 N/A N/A

2.0 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.0 N/A N/A

2.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.0 N/A N/A

3.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 1.0 + 1.646

4.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 1.0 + 1.625

5.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 N/A N/A

6.0 3.5 4.5 5.5 6.0 1.5 + 1.797

**TABLE 2**

**MINIMUM PIPE INSULATION THICKNESS IN INCHES**

**FOR CONDENSATE RETURN (LESS THAN 250 DEGREES F)**

Foamglass

Nominal Kaylo-10

Pipe Size Thermo-12

[(inches]{.underline}) [Paroc]{.underline} [Epitherm]{.underline} [Super
Caltemp]{.underline} [Polyurethane]{.underline}

1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 N/A

1.5 1.5 2.0 3.0 N/A

2.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 1.024

2.5 1.5 2.0 3.0 N/A

3.0 2.0 2.5 3.5 1.376

4.0 2.0 2.5 3.5 1.401

5.0 2.0 2.5 3.5 N/A

6.0 2.5 3.0 4.5 1.770

> E. Factory Testing
>
> Each section of carrier piping shall be hydrostatically tested at the
> factory in accordance with ANSI B31.1.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION, INSPECTION, AND TESTING

> A. The pre-insulated system shall be installed, inspected, and tested
> in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications, and
> directions given by the system supplier\'s representative.
>
> B. The system supplier\'s representative shall be present at the job
> site when the following types of work are being performed:
>
> 1\. Inspection and unloading of pre-insulated piping sections.
>
> 2\. Inspection of trench prior to laying of conduit.
>
> 3\. Inspection of concrete thrust blocks prior to cold springing.
>
> 4\. Cold springing.
>
> 5\. Hydrostatic testing of all service lines.
>
> 6\. Field joint closure work.
>
> 7\. Air testing of conduit.
>
> 8\. Patching and repaiir of conduit required for branch line
> connections to mains.
>
> 9\. Initial backfill up to 10 inches above the top of the casing.
>
> 10\. Verification of the slope of the system. Elevation readings
> required by paragraph 3.04 shall be witnessed and recorded.
>
> The Contractor shall not perform any of this work in the absence of
> the system supplier\'s representative.
>
> C. The system supplier\'s representative shall take prompt action to
> return to the factory all damaged or defective material, and to order
> prompt replacement of such material.
>
> D. Anchors shall be installed at each change of direction, at each
> high point in the system, at each point of connection to the
> condensate return line, and where otherwise indicated on the drawings.
>
> E. After installation all carrier piping shall be hydrostatically
> tested for 2 hours (minimum) in accordance with ANSI B31.1.
>
> F. The conduit for systems with annular air spaces shall be tested for
> 1 hour (minimum) at 8 psig with dry nitrogen.

3.02 BURIED UTILITY WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE

> Provide utility warning and identification tape in accordance with
> Section 15075.

3.03 RADIOGRAPHIC INSPECTION

> Provide a 10 percent radiographic examination of field welds in the
> carrier piping in accordance with Section 15052.

3.04 VERIFICATION OF FINAL ELEVATIONS

> A. Prior to covering the top of the casing with backfill material,but
> after all temporary supports have been removed and initial backfilling
> of the conduit system has been accomplished, the Contractor shall
> measure and record the elevation of the top of the casing in the
> trench.
>
> B. Elevations shall be taken at every completed field joint and elbow
> top. These measurements shall be checked against the contract
> drawings, and shall confirm that the conduit system has been installed
> to the elevations shown.
>
> C. The measurements shall be recorded by the Contractor and given to
> the Contracting Officer prior to covering the casing with backfill
> material.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02630

STORM DRAINS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

This specification covers the furnishing and installation of storm
drains. Products shall match existing materials and/or shall be as
directed by the Contracting Authority. Installation procedures shall be
in accordance with the product manufacturer\'s recommendations.
Demolition and removal of materials shall be as required to support the
work. Work shall be in accordance with ALDOT Sections 530, 531, and 533,
1992 Edition.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C 76 or AASHTO M 170.

2.02 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert and Storm Drainpipe: ASTM C 506.

2.03 Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert and Storm Drainpipe: ASTM C
507.

2.04 Nonreinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C 14 or AASHTO M 86, Class 1,
Class 2, Class 3.

2.05 Reinforced Concrete Box Sections: ACI 346.

2.06 Clay Pipe: AASHTO M 65 or ASTM C 700.

2.07 Corrugated Steel Pipe, Pipe Arch, and Couplings: Pipe and coupling
shall conform to Fed. Spec. WW-P-405.

2.08 Structural-Plate Steel Pipe, Pipe Arches, and Arches: Plate and
bolted assembly shall conform to Fed. Spec. WW-P-405.

2.09 Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Pipe, Pipe Arch, and Underdrains: Pipe
shall conform to Fed. Spec. WW-P-402.

2.10 Structural-Plate Aluminum Pipe, Pipe Arches, and Arches: Plate and
bolted assembly shall conform to Fed. Spec. WW-P-402.

2.11 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings:
ASTM D 2751.

2.12 Reinforced Plastic Mortar (RPMP) Sewer Pipe: ASTM D 2992.

2.13 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole: ASTM C 478 or AASHTO M 199.

2.14 Reinforced Plastic Mortar (RPM) Manholes: ASTM D 3840.

2.15. Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Manholes: ASTM D 3753.

2.16 Glass Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Manholes: ASTM D 3841

2.17 Manhole Covers: Covers and frames shall be traffic bearing, 24\"
diameter.

2.18 Manhole Ladders or Steps shall be fabricated of steel or heavy-duty
aluminum, minimum 16 inches in width with 3/4-inch diameter or square
rungs on 12-inch centers. Steel ladders and inserts shall be galvanized
after fabrication.

2.19 Precast Concrete Segmental Blocks shall conform to ASTM C 139, and
shall be not more than 8 inches thick nor less than 8 inches long.

2.20 Brick shall conform to ASTM C 62, Grade SW, ASTM C 55, Grade S-I or
S-II, or ASTM C 32, Grade MS. Brick structures shall be plastered with
1/2-inch or mortar over the entire outside surface of the walls.

2.21 Walls and Headwalls shall be reinforced concrete, plain concrete,
or steel sheeting as indicated.

2.22 Flared End Sections shall be a standard design with pipe
manufacturer and manufactured of the same material as specified for the
pipe.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Excavation:

> A. Where trenches are required under paved areas or driveways, the
> asphalt or concrete shall be sawed or cut in a smooth line 12 inches
> outside the trench width and existing pavement removed prior to trench
> excavation.
>
> B. Trenches: Except where banks are cut back on a stable slope,
> excavation for trenches shall be sheeted, braced, and shored for
> depths of 4\' or more for proper laying of pipe. Care shall be taken
> not to over-excavate. Remove stones as necessary to avoid point
> bearing.
>
> C. Storm Sewers: The width of the trench at and below the top of the
> pipe shall be such that the clear space between the barrel of the pipe
> and the trench wall shall not exceed 8 inches on either side of the
> pipe. The width of the trench above that level shall be as wide as
> necessary for sheeting and bracing and the proper performance of the
> work.
>
> D. Appurtenances: Excavation for manholes and similar structures shall
> be sufficient to leave at least 12 inches in the clear between the
> outer surfaces and the embankment or timber that may be used to hold
> and protect the banks.

3.02 Backfilling:

> A. Subgrade for trench backfill under roadways or parking areas shall
> be compacted to not less than 95% Modified Proctor Density as
> established by ASTM D1557 specifications. Earthfill shall be placed in
> layers not to exceed 6 inches compacted thickness. Subgrade and
> embankment shall be placed at optimum moisture, not to exceed 2%
> deviation below or 3% deviation above optimum.
>
> B. Commerical backfill material shall not be required for class \"C\"
> bedding material. However, the Contractor may use commercial material
> for fine grading and bedding at this own option and expense.
>
> C. The Contractor shall be expected to backfill any excavation
> adjacent to the pavement carrying traffic which would otherwise be
> left exposed overnight. Such backfill shall be brought level with the
> existing pavement of the roadway.

3.03 Installation:

> A. General: Under no circumstances shall pipe be laid in water. No
> pipe shall be laid when trench conditions or weather are unsuitable
> for such work. Diversion of drainage or dewatering of trenches during
> construction shall be provided as necessary.
>
> B. Plastic Pipe and Manholes: Install plastic pipe and manholes in
> compliance with ASTM D 2321, ASTM D 3753, and ASTM D 3839.
>
> C. Concrete: Laying shall proceed upgrade with spigot ends of bell and
> spigot pipe and tongue ends of tongue and groove pipe pointing in the
> direction of the flow.
>
> D. Circular Concrete Pipe with Elliptical Reinforcing: Placement shall
> be such that reference lines designating top of pipes will not be more
> than 5 degrees from the vertical plane through the longitudinal axis
> of the pipe.
>
> E. Corrugated Metal Pipe and Pipe Arch: Laying shall be with the
> separate sections joined firmly together with the outside laps of
> circumferential joints pointing upstream and with longitudinal laps on
> the sides. Suitable markings or properly placed lifting lugs shall be
> provided to ensure placement of factory elongated pipe in a vertical
> plane.
>
> F. Structural-Plate Steel Pipe, Pipe Arches, and Arches: Tighten bolts
> on each section progressively and uniformly, starting at one end of
> the structure after all plates are in place. Repeat the operation of
> ensure that all bolts are tightened to meet the torque requirement of
> 200 foot-pounds, plus or minus 50 foot-pounds.
>
> G. Structural-Plate Aluminum Pipe, Pipe Arches, and Arches: Tighten
> bolts on each plate progressively and uniformly, starting at one end
> of the structure after all plates are in place. Repeat the operation
> to ensure that all bolts are torqued to the minimum of 100 foot-pounds
> on aluminum alloy bolts and a minimum of 150 foot-pounds on galvanized
> steel bolts.
>
> H. Manholes Ladders: Install manhole ladders when the manhole depth
> exceeds 4 feet. Anchor ladder adequately to the wall by means of steel
> inserts spaced not more than 6 feet apart vertically. Provide at least
> 7 inches of space between wall and inside of rungs.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02720

CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

PART 1 GENERAL

Work in this section shall consist of all crushed aggregate used as a
base or sub-base for a controlled fill. Work in this section shall be in
accordance with ALDOT Section 301, 1992 Edition.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 Material shall be type \"A\" or \"B\" as specified by ALDOT
Specifications Section 825, and shall be plant mixed. Material type and
thickness will be shown on drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Subgrade shall be approved before placement of any base or sub-base
will be permitted. The sub-grade shall be checked to insure grade lines
and elevations are correct. Base courses shall be placed in layers of 6
inches compacted thickness or less.

3.02 Each layer of base shall be compacted to not less than 100%
Modified Proctor Density. Base course shall be placed at optimum
moisture. Density test shall be performed on each layer and for each
1200 square yard area.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02740

BITUMINOUS TREATMENTS AND PAVEMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

> This section covers the materials and work required to apply
> bituminous surface treatments and the placement of bituminous concrete
> as a base or a wearing course.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 Surface Treatment Materials shall be in accordance with Alabama
Department of Transportation \"Standard Specifications for Highway
Construction\" (ALDOT Specs) Section 401.02, 1992 Edition.

2.02 The grade of bituminous material shall be within the following
limits unless the type and grade are specified on the plans.

> A. PRIME:
>
> Emulsified Asphalt\...\...AE-P
>
> Tar\...\...\...\...\...\...\...\...\...RT 2 or RT 3
>
> Cutback Asphalt\...\...\...MC30 or MC70 for tight base; MC250, RC70,
> or RC250 for open bases.
>
> B. ASPHALT FLUSH COAT:
>
> Emulsified Asphalt\...\...\...\....RS 1
>
> RS 2
>
> CRS 1
>
> CRS 2
>
> C. LIQUID SEALS AND SURFACE TREATMENTS:
>
> Asphalt Cement\...\....AC5, AC10
>
> Cutback Asphalt\...\...RC 250, RC 800, RC 3000,
>
> MC 800, MC 3000
>
> Emulsified Asphalt\...RS 1
>
> RS 2
>
> CRS 1
>
> CRS 2
>
> Tar\...\...\...\...\...\...\...\...RT 9, RT 10, RT 11, RT 12
>
> D. SURFACE TREATMENT WITH LATEX RUBBER ADDITIVE:
>
> Emulsified Asphalt\...RS 2
>
> CRS 2
>
> Where conditions require the placement of a bituminous plant mix
> overlay over a bituminous surface treatment, a curing period of 3-21
> days will be required before placement of the plant mix overlay,
> unless otherwise authorized by the COTR in writing.

E. AGGREGATE

> Coarse aggregate for bituminous treatments shall be crushed aggregate
> meeting the requirements of ALDOT Section 801. The kind of aggregate
> materials used shall be at the Contractor\'s option within these
> limits: Aggregates for the final application (wearing layer) shall be
> limited to siliceous aggregate such as granite, slag (including
> reclaimed open hearth slag from cold piles approved by COTR), or light
> weight aggregate (expanded clays or shales produced by the Rotary Kiln
> Method). The use of carbonate stone such as limestone or dolomite will
> be permitted.
>
> F. Bituminous Concrete for Leveling, Widening, and Patching shall be
> as specified by ALDOT Specs Section 411.
>
> G. Bituminous Concrete for Binder Layer shall be as specified by ALDOT
> Specs Section 414.
>
> H. Bituminous Concrete for Wearing Course shall be as specified by
> ALDOT Specs Section 416.
>
> I. All Bituminous Concrete Pavements will be specified on plans as to
> mix type.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Equipment and Procedures for Placement shall be specified by the
ALDOT Section 410.

3.02 When patching or adjoining an existing pavement, the existing shall
be saw cut to match the plans and shall be tacked.

3.03 Weather shall be dry and temperature 40 degrees F or above before
placement is permitted. When temperature is 45 degrees F and falling
placement shall be suspended. Rolling and Finishing Operations shall be
completed during daylight hours.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02820

STEEL CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 GENERAL

> This section covers steel fencing, including posts, fabric, gates,
> barbed wire, and miscellaneous accessories.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 General

> A. Fencing materials shall conform to the requirements of FS RR-F-191,
> and be as specified.
>
> B. Pipe sizes indicated are the nominal outside diameter.

2.02 Zinc Coating

> A. Ferrous-metal components and accessories, except as otherwise
> specified, shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
>
> B. The weight of zinc coating shall average 2.0 ounces per square
> foot, and no individual specimen, when tested in accordance with ASTM
> A90, shall show less than 1.8 ounces per square foot, unless otherwise
> specified.
>
> C. Zinc coating shall conform to the requirements of the following:
>
> Pipe: ASTM A53
>
> Hardware and accessories: ASTM A153, Table 1
>
> D. Galvanizing repair material shall be cold-applied zinc-rich coating
> conforming to DOD-P-21035.

2.03 Fabric

> A. Fabric shall consist of No. 9-gage wires woven into a 2-inch
> diamond mesh, with dimensions of fabric and wire conforming to FS
> RR-F-191 and FS RR-F-191/1, Type I with 1.2 ounces per square foot
> zinc galvanizing.
>
> B. Fence heights to 12 feet shall have one-piece fabric widths.

2.04 Top and Bottom Selvages

> A. Fabric over 60 inches high with 2-inch mesh shall be twisted and
> barbed on the top selvage and knuckled on the bottom selvage.
>
> B. Top and bottom selvages shall be knuckled for 1-3/4-inch and 1-inch
> mesh fabric.

2.05 Line Posts

> Minimum acceptable line posts shall be as follows:
>
> Up to 6-feet high: 1-1/2-inch pipe weighing 2.72 pounds per linear
> foot
>
> Over 6-feet high: 2-inch pipe weighing 3.65 pounds per linear foot

2.06 End, Corner, and Pull Posts

> Minimum acceptable end, corner, and pull posts shall be as follows:
>
> Up to 6 feet high: 2-inch weighing 3.65 pounds per linear foot
>
> Over 6 feet high: 2-1/2-inch pipe weighing 5.79 pounds per linear foot

2.07 Sleeves

> Sleeves for setting into concrete construction shall be of the same
> material as post sections. The size shall be 1-inch greater than the
> diameter or dimension of the post, unless otherwise indicated. Flat
> plates shall be welded to each sleeve base to provide anchorage and
> prevent intrusion of concrete.

2.08 Top Rail

> Rails shall be at least 1-1/4-inch pipe weighing 2.27 pounds per
> linear foot. Expansion couplings approximately 6-inches long shall be
> provided at each joint in top rails.

2.09 Central Rails Between Line Posts

> Center rails if required by the drawings,shall be 1-1/4-inch pipe
> weighing 2.27 pounds per linear foot.

2.10 Post-Brace Assembly

> Bracing shall consist of 1-1/4-inch pipe weighing 2.27 pounds per
> linear foot and 3/8-inch-diameter adjustable-length rod.

2.11 Tension Wire

> Wire shall be galvanized, No. 7-gage, coiled spring wire, provided at
> the bottom of the fabric only. Zinc coating shall weigh not less than
> 1.6 ounces per square foot.

2.12 Barbed Wire Supporting Arms

> A. Supporting arms for barbed wire shall be steel, wrought iron, or
> malleable iron, complete with provisions for anchorage to posts and
> for attaching 3 rows of barbed wire to each arm. Supporting arms may
> either be attached to posts or integrated with the post top weather
> cap.
>
> B. The Contractor shall provide a single 45-degree arm for three
> strands of wire for each post where barbed wire is indicated.

2.13 Barbed Wire

> Wire shall conform to FS RR-F-221 and FS RR-F-191/4, two-strand,
> 12-1/2-gage wire with 14-gage 4-point round barbs spaced 5 inches on
> center.

2.14 Stretcher Bars

> Bars shall be one-piece lengths equal to the full height of the fabric
> with a minimum cross section of 3/16 inch by 3/4 inch, in accordance
> with FS RR-F-191.

2.15 Post Tops

> Tops shall be steel, wrought iron, or malleable iron designed as a
> weathertight closure cap. One cap shall be provided for each post,
> unless equal protection is provided by a combination post-cap and
> barbed-wire supporting arm. Caps shall have an opening to permit
> through passage of the top rail.

2.16 Stretcher Bar Bands

> Bar bands for securing stretcher bars to posts shall be steel, wrought
> iron, or malleable iron spaced not over 15 inches on center. Bands may
> also be used in conjunction with special fittings for securing rails
> to posts. Bands shall have projecting edges chamfered or eased.

2.17 Gate Posts

> The Contractor shall provide a gate post for supporting each gate leaf
> as follows:
>
> A. Up to 6-feet wide: Provide 2.875 inch O.D. pipe weighing 5.79
> pounds per linear foot.
>
> B. Over 6-feet and up to 13-feet wide: Provide 4.00 inch O.D. pipe
> weighing 9.11 pounds per linear foot.
>
> C. Over 13-feet and up to 18-feet wide: Provide 6.624 inch O.D. pipe
> weighing 18.97 pounds per linear foot.
>
> D. Over 18-feet wide: Provide 8.625 inch O.D. pipe weighing 24.70
> pounds per linear foot.

2.18 Gates

> A. Perimeter gate frames shall be fabricated of tubular members.
> Additional horizontal and vertical members shall be provided as
> required to ensure proper gate operation and for attachment of fabric
> and hardware. Sizes of frame members listed are minimum; larger sizes
> shall be provided as required.
>
> B. For gate leaves up to 6-feet high or 6-feet wide, perimeter gate
> frames shall be 1.66 inch O.D. pipe weighing 2.27 pounds per linear
> foot.
>
> C. For gate leaves over 6 feet high or 6 feet wide, perimeter gate
> frames shall be 1.90 inch O.D. pipe weighing 2.72 pounds per linear
> foot.
>
> D. Gate frame assembly shall be welded or assembled with special
> malleable or pressed-steel fittings and rivets to provide rigid
> connections. Fabric shall be installed with stretcher bars at vertical
> edges; stretcher bars may also be used at top and bottom edges.
> Stretcher bars and fabric shall be attached to gate frames on all
> sides at intervals not exceeding 15 inches. Hardware shall be attached
> with rivets or by other means that will provide equal security against
> breakage or removal.
>
> E. Where barbed wire is indicated above gates, the end members of gate
> frames shall be extended approximately 1-foot above the top member
> with provision for attaching the wire. Vertical support arms shall be
> provided at intermediate points, spaced the same as line posts.
>
> F. Diagonal cross-bracing, consisting of 3/8-inch-diameter
> adjustable-length truss rods on welded gate frames, shall be provided
> where necessary to obtain frame rigidity without sag or twist.
> Nonwelded gate frames shall have diagonal bracing.
>
> G. Fabric shall be as specified for fences.

2.19 Gate Hardware and Accessories

> A. Gate hardware and accessories shall conform to FS RR-F-191.
>
> B. Hinges shall be malleable iron, forged steel, or pressed steel to
> suit gate size, non-lift-off type, offset to permit 180-degree
> opening.
>
> C. Latch shall permit operation from either side of the gate, with a
> padlock eye provided as an integral part of the latch.
>
> D. Stops and holders of malleable iron shall be provided for vehicular
> gates. Stops shall automatically engage the gate and hold it in the
> open position until manually released.
>
> E. Double gates shall be provided with a cane bolt and ground-set
> keeper, with latch or locking device and padlock eye designed as an
> integral part.
>
> F. Manufacturer\'s standard heavy-duty track ball-bearing hanger
> sheaves, overhead framing and supports, guides, stays, bracing, and
> accessories shall be provided as required for easy operation of manual
> sliding gates.

2.20 Miscellaneous Hardware

> Miscellaneous hardware shall be provided as required and shall be
> hot-dip galvanized.

2.21 Wire Ties

> A. Wires for tying fabric to line posts shall be 16-gage galvanized
> steel wire spaced 12 inches on center. For tying fabric and braces,
> wire ties shall be spaced 24 inches on center. For tying fabric to
> tension wire, 0.105-inch hog rings shall be spaced 24 inches on
> center.
>
> B. The manufacturer\'s standard procedure will be accepted if
> procedures are of equal strength and durability to that specified
> above.

2.22 Concrete

> Concrete shall conform to ASTM C94. The mix shall be designed to
> obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000
> psi.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 General

> The fencing installation shall not begin before the final grading has
> been completed and finish elevations have been established, unless
> otherwise approved.

3.02 Excavation

> A. Excavations for post footings shall be drilled holes in undisturbed
> or compacted soil, of minimum sizes as indicated.
>
> B. Footings shall be spaced for line posts 10 feet on center maximum
> and at closer intervals when indicated.
>
> C. The bottoms of the holes shall be approximately 3-inches below the
> bottoms of the posts. The bottom of each post shall be set not less
> than 36-inches below finished grade when in firm, undisturbed soil.
> Posts shall be set deeper, as required, in soft and problem soils and
> for heavy, lateral loads.
>
> D. Soil from excavations shall be spread uniformly adjacent to the
> fence line or on areas of Government property, as directed.
>
> E. When solid rock is encountered near the surface, the Contractor
> shall drill into the rock at least 12 inches for line posts and at
> least 18 inches for end, pull, corner, and gate posts. Holes shall be
> drilled at least 1 inch in diameter greater than the largest dimension
> of the placed post.
>
> F. If solid rock is below the soil overburden, the Contractor shall
> drill to the full depth required, except that the penetration into
> rock need not exceed the minimum depths specified above.

3.03 Setting Posts

> A. Loose and foreign materials shall be removed from holes and the
> soil moistened prior to placing concrete.
>
> B. Posts shall be centered and aligned in holes 3 inches above the
> bottom of the excavation. Concrete shall be placed around posts in a
> continuous pour and vibrated for consolidation. Each post shall be
> checked for alignment and held in position during placing and
> finishing operations.
>
> C. Tops of footings shall be trowel finished and sloped or domed to
> shed water away from posts. Hold-open devices, sleeves, and other
> accessories shall be set in concrete, as indicated.
>
> D. Exposed concrete shall be kept moist for at least 7 days after
> placement or cured with a membrane curing material, as approved.
>
> E. Posts set in concrete construction shall be set vertically, with
> tops aligned and held in position until concrete has set.

3.04 Concrete Strength

> Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 PSI at 28
> days. Concrete integrity shall be maintained throughout the
> construction of the fence.

3.05 Top Rails

> Top rails shall run continuously through post caps or extension arms,
> bending to radius for curved runs. Expansion couplings shall be
> provided as recommended by the fencing manufacturer.

3.06 Center Rails

> Center rails shall be one piece between posts, where indicated, set
> flush with posts on the fabric side, using special offset fittings
> where necessary.

3.07 Brace Assembly

> A. The Contractor shall provide bracing assemblies at end and gate
> posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts, with the horizontal
> brace located at midheight of the fabric.
>
> B. Brace assemblies shall be installed so that posts are plumb when
> the diagonal rod is under proper tension.
>
> C. Two complete brace assemblies shall be provided at corner and pull
> posts where required for stiffness and as indicated.

3.08 Tension Wire Installation

> Tension wires shall be installed weaving them through the fabric and
> tying them to each post with not less than 7-gage galvanized wire or
> by securing the wire to the fabric with 10-gage ties or clips spaced
> 24 inches on center.

3.09 Fabric Installation

> A. Fabric shall be provided in single lengths between stretch bars
> with bottom barbs placed approximately 1-1/2-inches above the ground
> line. Fabric shall be pulled taut and tied to posts, rails, and
> tension wires with wire ties and bands.
>
> B. Fabric shall be installed on the security side of fence, unless
> otherwise directed.
>
> C. Fabric shall remain under tension after the pulling force is
> released.

3.10 Stretcher Bar Installation

> Stretcher bars shall be threaded through or clamped to fabric 4 inches
> on center and secured to posts with metal bands spaced 15 inches on
> center.

3.11 Barbed Wire Installation

> Three parallel strands of barbed wire shall be installed on the
> security side of the fence as specified or indicated. Wire shall be
> pulled taut and fastened securely to each support arm.

3.12 Gate Installation

> Gates shall be installed plumb, level, and secure, with full opening
> without interference. Ground-set items shall be installed in concrete
> for anchorage as recommended by the fence manufacturer. Hardware shall
> be adjusted for smooth operation and lubricated where necessary.

3.13 Tie Wires

> Tie wires shall be U-shaped to the pipe diameters to which attached.
> Ends of tie wires shall be twisted not less than two full turns and
> bent so as not to present a hazard.

3.14 Fasteners

> Nuts for tension bands and hardware shall be installed on the side of
> the fence opposite the fabric side. Ends of bolts shall be peened to
> prevent removal of nuts.

3.15 Zinc-Coating Repair

> Galvanized surfaces damaged by welding or abrasions, and cut ends of
> fabric, barbed wire, or other cut sections shall be cleaned and
> repaired with specified galvanizing repair material applied in strict
> conformance with the manufacturer\'s printed instructions.

3.16 Tolerances

> Posts shall be straight and plumb within a vertical tolerance of 1/4
> inch after the fabric has been stretched. Fencing and gates shall be
> true to line with no more than 1/2 inch deviation from the established
> centerline between line posts. Defects shall be repaired as directed.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02920

SODDING AND SEEDING

PART 1 GENERAL

Description of work: This specification covers the furnishing and
installation of seed and sod. Products shall match existing material
and/or shall be as directed by the Contracting Officer. Installation
procedures shall be in accordance with the product manufacturer\'s
recommendations. Demolition and removal of materials shall be as
required to support the work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 Seed shall be the latest season\'s crop and shall be delivered in
original sealed packages bearing the producer\'s guaranteed analysis for
percentages of mixtures and pure live seed. Seed shall be labeled in
conformance with U.S. Department of Agriculture rules and regulations
under the Federal Seed Act and applicable ALDOT Spec. Sections 650 -
658. Weed seed shall not exceed 1 percent by weight of the total
mixture.

2.02 Sod shall be nursery grown, field sod, certified sod, or approved
sod as classified in ALDOT Specification Section 654.

2.03 Sprigs shall be healthy living stems, stolons, or rhizomes and
attached roots of grass without adhering soil. Sprigs shall include two
to three nodes, shall be 4 to 6 inches long, and shall be obtained from
approved sources where the sod is heavy and dense. Harvesting and
planting operations shall be coordinated to prevent exposure of sprigs
to the sun for more than 30 minutes before covering and moistening.

2.04 Water shall not contain elements toxic to plant life.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Preparation: Except on slopes steeper than 2 horizontal to 1
vertical, the soil shall be tilled to a depth of at least 4 inches. On
slopes between 2 horizontal to 1 vertical and 1 horizontal to 1 vertical
tillage, depths shall be 2 inches. On slopes steeper than 1 horizontal
to 1 vertical, no tillage will be permitted.

3.02 Application:

> A. Planting Seasons and Conditions: Planting shall not be done when
> the ground is frozen, snow covered, or in an unsatisfactory condition
> for planting.
>
> B. Seed shall be broadcast uniformly. The seed shall be covered to an
> average depth of 1/4 inch.
>
> C. Immediately after seeding the soil shall be moistened to a depth of
> 6 to 8 inches.
>
> D. Sodding shall be accomplished in accordance with the ALDOT
> Specification Section 654.
>
> E. When spot sodding, the sod shall be cut into plugs 2 inches square
> or 2 inches in diameter. The individual pieces of sod shall be placed
> on 12 - inches centers and pressed firmly into the soil by foot
> pressure or by tamping.
>
> F. After sod pieces have been placed in position, the sodded are shall
> be rolled or tampered so that air pockets are eliminated.
>
> G. Water shall be applied to the sodded areas at a rate sufficient to
> ensure thorough wetting of the soil to a depth of at least 4 inches.
>
> H. Sprigging: Sprigs shall be planted in such quantity as to provide a
> minimum of 25 viable sprigs or 108 linear inches of viable sprigs per
> square yard of areas. Immediately after sprigging operations have been
> completed, the planted area shall be firmed with a cultipacker or a
> roller. Water shall be applied at the time of sprigging operations
> wetting the soil to a depth of 4 inches.
>
> I. Protection of Turfed Areas: Immediately after seeding, sodding, or
> sprigging, the area shall be protected against traffic or other use by
> erecting barricades, as required, and approved signs shall be placed
> at appropriate intervals until final acceptance.

3.03 ALDOT specifications shall be applied for general construction and
methods.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 03300

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> A. Ready-mix concrete.
>
> B. Concrete admixtures.
>
> C. Formwork and accessories as shown or as required.
>
> D. Reinforcing as shown.
>
> E. Reinforcement supports.
>
> F. Drainage fill.
>
> G. Joint materials.
>
> H. Curing compound.
>
> I. Vapor barrier under slabs on grade.
>
> J. Subbase under slabs on grade.
>
> K. Water stops as shown.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

Submit for Approval: Items listed in the Schedule of Submittals in
accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

1.03 ABBREVIATIONS/ACRONYMS

> Abbreviations and acronyms of most trade associations and sources of
> standards are listed in Section 01420, Reference Standards and
> Definitions.

1.04 REFERENCES

> ACI 301-96 (1996) Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings
>
> ACI 302.1R-89 (1989) Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
>
> ACI SP66-94 (1994) Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement
>
> ACI 318-95 (1995) Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
>
> ACI 347R-94 (1994) Guide to Formwork for Concrete
>
> ALDOT (1992) Standard Specifications for Highway Construction
>
> ASTM A 82 (1995) Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for
> Concrete Reinforcement
>
> ASTM A 185 (1994) Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric,
> Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement
>
> ASTM A 615 (1995) Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain
> Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
>
> ASTM C 31 (1995) Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
> Specimens in the Field
>
> ASTM C 39 (1994) Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
> Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
>
> ASTM C 94 (1995) Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
>
> ASTM C 143 (1990) Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement
> Concrete
>
> ASTM C 171 (1995) Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for
> Curing Concrete
>
> ASTM C 172 (1990) Standard Practic for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
>
> ASTM C 231 (1991) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly
> Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method
>
> ASTM C 260 (1995) Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures
> for Concrete
>
> ASTM C 309 (1995) Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming
> Compounds for Curing Concrete
>
> ASTM C 494 (1992) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for
> Concrete
>
> ASTM C 1017 (1992) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for
> Use in Producing Flowing Concrete
>
> ASTM C 1018 (1994) Test Method for Flexural Toughness and First-Crack
> Strength of Fiber-Reinforced Concrete (Using Beam with Third-Point
> Loading)
>
> ASTM C 1064 (1993) Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly
> Mixed Portland Cement Concrete
>
> ASTM C 1116 (1995) Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced
> Concrete and Shotcrete
>
> ASTM D 1751 (1991) Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion
> Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
> (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)
>
> ASTM D 1752 (1992) Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber
> and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural
> Construction
>
> ASTM D 4397 (1991) Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting
> for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications
>
> CRSI P1 (1996) Placing Reinforcing Bars
>
> FS S-SS-200 (1993) Sealants, Joint, Two-Component,
> Jet-Blast-Resistant, Cold-Applied, for Portland Cement Pavement

1.05 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

Subgrade preparation - Section 02300, Earthwork

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

> A. All concrete work except slabs on grade shall be in accordance with
> ACI 301 and ACI 318 unless otherwise specified.
>
> B. All concrete slabs on grade work shall be in accordance with ACI
> 301 and ACI 302.1R unless otherwise specified.
>
> C. The Contractor and all Subcontractors associated with concrete
> placement shall review, discuss, and understand concrete mixing,
> transporting, testing, placement, finishing, and curing requirements
> prior to ordering concrete.
>
> D. Notify all Contractor and Government inspection organizations
> associated with concrete work a minimum of 12 hours prior to planned
> time of concrete placement. Concrete placement shall not begin until
> Contractor inspection personnel have performed pre-pour inspections,
> and the Government has had the opportunity to monitor the
> Contractor\'s quality assurance inspections.
>
> E. Concrete shall be manufactured and delivered to the site in
> accordance with ASTM C94 by a supplier experienced in ready-mixed
> concrete work. Job mixed concrete shall not be used unless approved in
> writing by the Contracting Authority.
>
> F. Concrete design mix shall be submitted for approval as noted on the
> Schedule of Submittals.
>
> G. Implement concrete inspection activities which address items
> included in the Concrete Construction Flow Chart, located at the end
> of this section. Perform and document the results of pre-placement,
> placement, and post-placement inspection. Include inspection
> attributes listed on the Sample Inspection Report, located at the end
> of this section.
>
> H. Fresh concrete which is properly sampled, tested, and determined
> non-compliant with specifications, does not qualify for placement. If
> non-conformance conditions are identified and not corrected prior to
> concrete placement, concrete placement activities are considered to
> proceed at risk, with the additional costs of testing, evaluation, and
> repair or replacement assumed by the Contractor in accordance with the
> provisions described in ACI 318-95.
>
> I. Maintain a concrete inspection file (current from the day of
> initial concrete placement operations) with all documentation related
> to concrete inspection activites, including mix designs, delivery
> tickets, batch tickets, inspection reports, test reports, and
> evaluations. File this data in a way that will provide ready access to
> the Government inspector for review.

1.07 CONCRETE SAMPLING AND TESTING

> A. The following tests shall be performed on all concrete work whether
> shown on the Schedule of Submittals or not. For small non-structural
> concrete pads, walks, etc., the Contractor may request a waiver of
> tests five days before preparation for placement. The A/E will make a
> determination and grant or deny the waiver as appropriate.
>
> B. Cylinders for Strength Test: Make and cure 1 set of 4
> representative cylinders for each day\'s pour representing concrete
> placed throughout the day, or every 50 cubic yards, if more than 50
> yards are poured in a single day. Secure composite concrete samples in
> accordance with ASTM C172. Make, cure, protect, and transport
> cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 31. Test cylinders in accordance
> with ASTM C 39. One cylinder shall be tested at 7 days, two cylinders
> shall be tested at 28 days and one cylinder shall be retained as a
> spare. If the average strength of the cylinders falls below the
> specified design strength, the Contracting Officer may require
> corrective action as necessary, in accordance with requirements of ACI
> 318.
>
> C. Slump tests: Upon initial delivery, perform slump test in
> accordance with ASTM C 143, and for each load from which test
> cylinders are made or as required by the Government inspection
> organization. Perform tests in the presence of the Government
> inspection organization at point of placement.
>
> D. Air entrainment tests: Upon initial delivery, perform air
> entrainment test in accordance with ASTM C 231, and for each load from
> which test cylinders are made or as required by the Government
> inspection organization. Perform tests in the presence of the
> Government inspection organization at point of placement.
>
> E. Temperature: Upon initial delivery, perform fresh concrete
> temperature test in accordance with ASTM C 1064, and for each load
> from which test cylinders are made or as required by the Government
> inspection organization. Perform tests in the presence of the
> Government inspection organization at point of placement.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONCRETE

> A. Concrete: Ready-mix concrete conforming to ASTM C 94 having a
> minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days unless noted
> otherwise on drawings.
>
> B. To the extent feasible, and in accordance with ASTM standards and
> applicable codes, use fly ash as a partial replacement for cement in
> concrete.
>
> C. Maximum aggregate size: 3/4 inch or as noted on drawings.
>
> D. Air content, if not noted on drawings : concrete which will be
> exposed to outside atmospheric conditions when put in service, 4 to 7
> percent; concrete which will not be exposed to outside atmospheric
> conditions when put in service, 0 to 4 percent.
>
> E. Test slump in accordance with ASTM C 143. Acceptance criteria
> (unless noted otherwise on drawings): 2 to 4 inches for all
> installations except slabs on grade being 3 to 5 inches. (Note: If a
> superplasticizing admixture is used, slump tests shall be taken as
> specified in Section 2.02.)
>
> F. Maximum water-cement ratio by weight: Conform to ACI 318, Chapter
> 5. Unless provisions are indicated on an approved batch ticket, the
> addition of water to the batch is not permitted. Perform the addition
> of water to the batch in accordance with ASTM C94.
>
> G. Fresh concrete temperature and provisions for placement in hot or
> cold surroundings: Conform to ACI 301, Chapters 7 & 8.

2.02 CONCRETE ADMIXTURES

> A. Air-entraining admixtures: Conform to ASTM C 260
>
> B. Superplasticizer admixture: A superplasticizer admixture conforming
> to ASTM C 494 or C 1017 may be used to achieve flowable concrete.
> Conditions are as follows:
>
> 1\. The submitted concrete design mix includes superplasticizer data
> and is approved.
>
> 2\. A qualified technical representative provided by the concrete
> supplier shall be present at the job site during mixing and pouring
> operations to ensure proper application and mixing of admixture.
>
> 3\. The concrete shall be batched and delivered with a pre-dose slump
> of 2 to 4 inches.
>
> 4\. Immediately prior to discharge the required quantity of
> superplasticizer shall be added and properly mixed to achieve a post
> dose slump of 6 to 8 inches.
>
> 5\. In no case shall water be added to the concrete after the
> superplasticizer has been added.
>
> 6\. Slump tests shall be taken before and after the addition of
> superplasticizer to the mix.
>
> 7\. Air entrainment tests and concrete test cylinders shall be made
> after the superplasticizer is added to the mix.
>
> C. Fibrous concrete reinforcement conforming to ASTM C 1018 and ASTM C
> 1116 may be used in lieu of welded wire fabric. Conditions are as
> follows:
>
> 1\. The concrete design mix submitted for and receiving approval
> includes fibrous concrete reinforcement data, including the fiber
> manufacturer, recommended volume of reinforcement per cubic yard, and
> mixing & placing instructions.
>
> 2\. Fibrous concrete reinforcement consists of 100 percent virgin
> polypropelene, fibrillated fibers containing no reprocessed olefin
> materials and is specifically manufactured to an optimum gradation for
> use as concrete secondary reinforcement.
>
> 3\. The volume of fibrous reinforcement per cubic yard of concrete
> shall equal a minimum of 0.1 percent (1.5 pounds).
>
> 4\. The concrete is mixed and placed in accordance with fibrous
> reinforcement manufacturer\'s instructions for uniform and complete
> distribution.
>
> D. No admixtures containing chlorides are allowed, unless approved by
> the Contracting Authority.

2.03 FORMS

Forms: wood, steel or other approved material.

2.04 REINFORCING MATERIALS

> A. Reinforcing bars, except number 3 size bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60
> and ACI 318.
>
> B. Deformed number 3 bars: ASTM A 615 Grade 40 or 60.
>
> C. Wire: ASTM A 82.
>
> D. Welded wire reinforcing: ASTM A 185. Furnish in flat sheets, not
> rolls, unless approval for rolls is given by the Contracting
> Authority. Designation: 6X6 - W2.0 x W2.0 WWR unless otherwise noted
> on drawings.

2.05 SUPPORTS FOR REINFORCEMENT

> A. Supports in contact with formwork: wire bar type conforming to CRSI
> P1, Chapter 9, Class 3.
>
> B. Legs of supports in contact with formwork: hot-dip galvanized or
> plastic coated after fabrication; or stainless steel.
>
> C. Supports in contact with ground: precast concrete blocks having a
> nominal 2\" x 2\" bearing area, and a minimum compressive strength
> equivalent to concrete being placed.
>
> D. Alternate supports conforming to requirements of ACI 301 may be
> submitted for approval.

2.06 DRAINAGE FILL

> Drainage fill for slabs on grade: AHD No. 57 stone washed and
> uniformly graded. No organic debris shall be present.

2.07 JOINT MATERIALS

> A. Preformed joint filler strips for exterior walks and slabs:
> Non-extruding resilient bituminous type conforming to ASTM D 1751.
>
> B. Preformed joint filler strips for interior slabs on grade:
> Non-extruding and resilient non-bituminous type conforming to ASTM
>
> D 1752, Type I or II.
>
> C. Joint sealant compound: Cold applied, 2 component, elastomeric
> polymer type conforming to FS SS-S-200.

2.08 CURING COMPOUND

Conform to ASTM C 309, TYPE 1

2.09 VAPOR BARRIER

Vapor barrier: Clear polyethylene sheeting, 6 mil thickness, conforming
to ASTM D 4397.

2.10 SUBBASE

> Granular material for subbase shall be sand, sand-gravel, crushed
> stone, or a combination of these materials, meeting the following
> requirements:
>
> maximum aggregate size: 1-1/4 inch
>
> passing no. 200 sieve: 15% maximum
>
> plasticity index: 6 maximum
>
> liquid limit: 25 maximum

2.11 WATER STOPS

> A. Type: Dumbell type unless otherwise shown.
>
> B. Accessories: Use factory made splices at corners, tees, etc.
>
> C. Field splices: Field splice at straight runs only.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SUBBASE

> Compact subbase to a minimum of 95% maximum density at optimum
> moisture determined by soil compaction tests in accordance with ASTM D
> 698.

3.02 FORM WORK

> A. Construct forms to withstand construction loads without deformation
> in accordance with ACI 347.
>
> B. Chamfer all exposed concrete edges 3/4 inch.
>
> C. Arrange internal ties so that when forms are removed, metals will
> be not less than 2 inches from concrete surfaces.
>
> D. Coat forms with a non-staining oil or approved release agent
> shortly before placing concrete.

3.03 REINFORCEMENT

> A. Reinforcement: Free from loose, flaky rust and scale, and free from
> oil, grease, or other coating which might destroy or reduce bond of
> reinforcement with the concrete.
>
> B. Shop fabricate steel reinforcing. Bend cold in accordance with ACI
> SP66, and in conformance to ACI 318.
>
> C. Minimum cover for reinforcement: Conform to ACI 318, Chapter 7.
>
> D. Splices: Lapped and securely wired together. Splice welded wire
> fabric by lapping not less than one spacing of cross wires and
> securely wiring the lapped ends together. Unless otherwise noted on
> the drawings, splice reinforcing bars in accordance with ACI 318.
>
> E. Prior to placement of concrete, securely fasten all embedded items
> and provide support for reinforcement to resist displacement. Embedded
> items shall be free of oil or foreign matter which will impede
> bonding. No wood shall be embedded unless specifically authorized.
>
> F. If fibrous concrete reinforcement is substituted for welded wire
> fabric, mix & place in accordance with manufacuter\'s written
> instructions.

3.04 CONCRETE PLACING

> A. Deliver, convey , and place concrete by methods which will prevent
> segregation or loss of ingredients.
>
> B. Place concrete within 90 minutes after mixing on clean damp
> surfaces free from water, ice, frost, mud, debris or objectionable
> coatings. Consolidate concrete with internal type mechanical vibrating
> equipment supplemented by hand spading and tamping. Vibrating
> equipment shall be of the internal type.
>
> C. Place concrete in horizontal layers with a maximum lift of 18
> inches and at a rate that will prevent formation of cold joints. Slabs
> shall be placed in one lift.
>
> D. Do not place concrete during rain, sleet, or snow, unless adequate
> protection is provided and acceptance by the Contracting Authority is
> obtained.

3.05 FINISHING

> A. Patch and repair defective concrete and voids left by tie rod
> removal immediately after removal of forms. Cut out unsatisfactory
> material and place new concrete which shall be secured with keys,
> dovetails or anchors. Patch small voids with dry patching mortar.
>
> B. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings concrete shall have the
> following finishes:
>
> 1\. Interior slabs: Smooth steel trowel finish.
>
> 2\. Exterior walks and slabs: Light broom finish. Broom walks
> perpendicular to the direction of travel.
>
> 3\. Exposed formed surfaces: Smooth rubbed finish conforming to ACI
> 301. Exposed surfaces extending below grade shall be rubbed a minimum
> of eight inches below the finished grade.
>
> 4\. Surfaces concealed in the finished building: Remove sharp
> irregularities and patch defective areas as required to protect
> reinforcing steel or ties, otherwise no finish.
>
> C. No dusting of mortar or cement on concrete for trowel or rubbed
> finish will be allowed.
>
> D. Protect finished surfaces from damage by construction equipment,
> materials or methods, by application of curing procedures, and by rain
> or running water.

3.06 CURING AND HARDENING

> A. To seal in moisture required for desired concrete properties, begin
> curing immediately after initial set, using curing materials and
> methods which will not damage finish.
>
> B. For concrete surfaces not in contact with forms, one of the
> following curing procedures shall be applied immediately following
> finishing:
>
> 1\. Application of a curing compound conforming to ASTM C 309, Type 1,
> at the rate and by the method recommended by the manufacturer. After
> curing, apply a second coat in accordance with the manufacturer\'s
> recommendations for hardening of the concrete. Protect concrete from
> damage at all times.
>
> 2\. Cover all exposed surfaces of concrete with wet burlap and
> maintain in continuous moist condition for a minimum of 7 days by use
> of a sprinkler system.
>
> 3\. Cover finished, wetted concrete slab surface with polyethylene
> sheeting conforming to ASTM C 171. Lap a minimum of 3 inches at
> adjoining sheets. Prevent displacement of cover during curing period
> of 7 days minimum. Patch holes in cover with waterproof tape. Keep
> slab surface wet during curing period.
>
> 4\. In lieu of the above, an alternate procedure conforming to
> requirements of ACI 301 may be submitted for approval.
>
> C. Vertical surfaces placed against forms: Optionally cure by allowing
> form work to remain in place for 7 days. Forms exposed to drying
> conditions shall be kept wet until they can be removed or for the 7
> day minimum.
>
> D. No backfill shall be placed against newly constructed concrete for
> a period of seven days unless authorized by the Contracting Authority.

[CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION FLOW CHART]{.underline}

  ------------ --- -------------- --- ------------ --- ------------ --- ------------ --- ------------
                                                                                         

  PRE-POUR     ⇒   NOTIFICATION   ⇒   PRE-POUR     ⇒   CONCRETE     ⇒   POST-POUR        
  SUBMITTALS /     OF READINESS       INSPECTION       PLACEMENT/       INSPECTION       
  APPROVALS        (12 HR MIN)                         INSPECTION       OF CURING /      
                                                                        PROTECTION       

                                                                                         

                                                       ⇓                                 

                                                       CONCRETE     ⇒   CYLINDER     ⇒   TEST RESULTS
                                                       SAMPLING /       TESTING /        / EVALUATION
                                                       CYLINDERS        REPORT           
                                                                        SUBMITTALS       
  ------------ --- -------------- --- ------------ --- ------------ --- ------------ --- ------------

[SAMPLE INSPECTION REPORT]{.underline}

The following inspections shall be in accordance with Project
Specifications and applicable drawings.

  ------ -------------------------------- ------ ------ ------ ------- ------
  ITEM   INSPECTION ATTRIBUTE             S      U      N/A    INIT.   DATE

                                                                       

  1\.    SUBMITTALS                                                    

         Required submittals received                                  

         Submittals have been approved                                 

  2\.    FORMWORK                                                      

         Formwork type                                                 

         Form surfaces are true to line                                
         and grade; mortar joint is tight                              
         and rigid                                                     

         Surface preparation                                           

         Form release agent                                            

  3\.    PREPLACEMENT                                                  

         Size, configuration and location                              

         Embedments installation is                                    
         complete                                                      

         Fabrication, splicing and                                     
         support of rebar                                              

         Size/spacing of rebar                                         

         Wire fabric and installation                                  

         Water vapor barrier subgrade                                  
         cover                                                         

         Cleanliness and clearances in                                 
         form work                                                     

         Reinforcement cleanliness                                     
  ------ -------------------------------- ------ ------ ------ ------- ------

S - Satisfactory U - Unsatisfactory N/A - Not Applicable INIT. -
Inspector\'s Initials

  ------ -------------------------------- ------ ------ ------ ------- ------
  ITEM   INSPECTION ATTRIBUTE             S      U      N/A    INIT.   DATE

                                                                       

  4\.    PLACEMENT                                                     

         Ready‑mix concrete manufacturer                               
         meets qualifications                                          

         Contractor submits appropriate                                
         batch tickets and has an                                      
         approved testing laboratory                                   
         conducting concrete testing                                   

         Batch tickets confirm required                                
         concrete mix design is placed                                 

         Aggregates, cement,                                           
         air‑entrainment, water reducing                               
         admixtures, pozzolan, and water                               
         adequately mixed                                              

         General placement requirements                                

         Conveying methods (do not cause                               
         segregation or loss of                                        
         ingredients)                                                  

         Time limits, consolidation and                                
         cleanliness                                                   

         Lifts of placed concrete                                      

         Use of vibrating equipment                                    

         Finish                                                        

  5\.    POST PLACEMENT                                                

         Minimum form release time is                                  
         maintained                                                    

         Curing methods and time periods                               

         Chemical‑hardener treatment is                                
         properly applied as required                                  

         Form removal                                                  

         Absence of cold joints, cracks,                               
         honeycomb, and other defects                                  

         Defective concrete is repaired                                
         properly                                                      

  6\.    TESTING                                                       

         Sampling and testing                                          
         requirements meet the project                                 
         specifications                                                
  ------ -------------------------------- ------ ------ ------ ------- ------

S - Satisfactory U - Unsatisfactory N/A - Not Applicable INIT. -
Inspector\'s Initials

END OF SECTION

SECTION 04200

UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Face brick

B. Concrete masonry units (CMU) and concrete brick

C. Mortar

D. Masonry ties and wall reinforcement

E. Flexible Flashing integrally installed with masonry

F. Accessories

1.02 RELATED ITEMS

> Reinforcing bars are specified in Section 03300, Cast-In-Place
> Concrete.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

Submit for approval: Items listed in the Schedule of Submittals in
accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FACE BRICK

Brick shall be the type and color shown on the drawings. Size shall be
modular.

2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT

A. Concrete masonry units shall be of modular dimensions and shall
include all special shapes and sizes to complete the work as shown.
Units shall be sound and free from cracks, chipped edges, or other
defects that would interfere with their proper setting or impair the
strength or durability of the construction. Where used as the finished
surface of exposed masonry walls, units shall be free from surface
defects that would be noticeable and objectionable at a distance of 12
feet from the finished wall.

B. All concrete masonry units shall be delivered to the job in an
air-dry condition when tested according to ASTM C427 or shall have
moisture content less than 35 percent of total absorption.

C. Hollow regular concrete masonry units shall conform to ASTM C90, Type
I, Grade N. The units shall have a medium texture.

2.03 CONCRETE BRICK

Concrete brick shall conform to ASTM C55.

2.04 MORTAR

All mortar shall conform to ASTM C270, Types M or S, as well as to the
requirements of the applicable building codes, except that plastic
mortar may be used at the Contractor\'s option. Plastic mortar shall be
the manufacturer\'s standard product consisting of Portland cement
interground with carefully selected additives and plasticizers. Plastic
mortar shall have the same strength specified for regular mortar. The
manufacturer\'s name and pounds per package shall be on each bag. When
plastic or waterproof cement is used, hydrated lime or lime putty may be
used but not in excess of one-tenth the volume of cement.

2.05 MASONRY WALL REINFORCEMENT

Reinforce all masonry walls with continuous galvanized wire truss type
masonry wall reinforcing. Longitudinal wires shall be 9 gauge and cross
wires shall be 12 gauge. Furnish in flat sections, not rolls. Width of
the reinforcement shall be sized for the width of the wall.

2.06 WALL TIES

Ties for brick veneer: 9\" long by 3/4 inch wide 12 gauge straps in
combination with rectangular or triangular 3/16 inch wire ties. Attach
to metal studs with No. 12 screws through sheathing. Ties and straps
shall be hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel.

2.07 GROUT

Grout shall be of fluid consistency to permit pouring without
segregation and shall be mixed in a ratio of 1 part air-entraining
cement, 2 parts fine aggregate, and 2 parts pea-gravel. The fine
aggregate and pea-gravel shall conform to the requirements for fine
aggregate size No. 2 and course aggregate size No. 8, respectively, as
given in Aggregates for Masonry Grout, ASTM C404.

2.08 FLASHING

Thru-wall flashing shall consist of a sheet of copper weighing 5 oz. per
square foot bonded on both sides to heavy asphalt saturated kraft paper
which is reinforced with glass fibers. Bed flashing in mortar.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 MORTAR MIXING & PLACING

> A. Mortar shall be thoroughly machine mixed for a period of at least 5
> minutes after all materials are in a mixer designed for this purpose.
> The requirement shall not be waived except for minor jobs and then
> only upon written approval of the COTR.
>
> B. All mortar shall be used and placed in final position within 1-1/2
> hours after mixing when air temperature is 80 degrees F or higher and
> within 2-1/2 hours when air temperature is less than 80 degrees F.
> Mortar not used within these time limits shall be discarded.
>
> C. Mortars that have stiffened within the allowable time because of
> evaporation of moisture from the mortar may be retempered to restore
> workability by adding water as frequently as needed. As much water may
> be added as necessary to produce proper workability.

D. Mortar shall be same type and brand for the entire job.

E. Masonry work shall not be done when the temperature is below 40oF or
likely to freeze within 12 hours of placement.

3.02 LAYING UNIT MASONRY

A. Unit Masonry shall be laid dry and cut accurately to fit other
construction. All cutting of units shall be done with power saws with
abrasive blades.

B. Masonry work shall be plumb, level, and true to line and grade to the
best standards of the masonry trade.

C. A running bond pattern shall be used, except where indicated
otherwise on the drawings.

D. Mortar joints shall be 3/8 inch thick tooled concave joints. Full
mortar coverage of bed joints shall be provided at shells and webs.

E. Relaid masonry shall be cleaned of mortar and laid in fresh mortar.

F. Weepholes: Provide fully open head joints at 2\'-0\" o.c. above all
ledges, flashings and lintels.

G. Provide expansion joints no greater than 30\'-0\" o.c. at approved
locations.

3.03 PROTECTION

Cover the top of all walls with a waterproof material such as
polyethylene at all times except when laying masonry to prevent the
entry of excessive water during construction.

3.04 INSTALLING HORIZONTAL WALL REINFORCEMENT

A. Install continuous horizontal masonry wall reinforcement in all
masonry walls. Space reinforcement 16 inches on centers measured
vertically.

B. Where masonry wall consists of two wythes, the wall reinforcement
shall span across the cavity to reinforce both wythes.

3.05 INSTALLING WALL TIES

A. Install wall ties in all brick veneer walls.

B. Space ties 16 inches on centers vertically and horizontally.

3.06 GROUTING

A. Where grouting of cells is indicated, cells shall be grouted solid in
maximum 4-foot lifts. The pour shall be stopped 1-1/2 inches below the
top of the block. Anchors, bolts, inserts, metal door frames, etc.,
shall be solidly grouted in place.

B. Fill head and jambs of metal door frames with mortar as the work
progresses.

3.07 CURING, PROTECTION, AND CLEANING

A. Curing by saturation with water will not be permitted. Exposed
exterior surfaces shall be protected from sun and heat with light fog
spray for a period of 3 days.

B. Exposed masonry surfaces shall be protected from mortar droppings.

C. Grout or mortar stains shall be cleaned by removing immediately with
clear water, stiff fiber brushes, or wooden scrapers and rinsed.

D. Muriatic acid shall not be used to clean masonry. Clean in strict
accordance with brick manufacturer\'s written instructions.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05100

STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS

> A. Submit for Approval: Items listed on the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.
>
> B. Fabrication/Erection/Installation drawings shall indicate shop and
> erection details, including cuts, copes, connections, holes, bolts,
> and welds. Indicate welds, both shop and field, in accordance with
> ANSI/AWS A2.4.
>
> 1\. Indicate on shop drawings the members and connection areas not to
> be painted and indicate size, length, and type of each weld and an
> erection procedure that includes sequence and temporary bracing.
>
> 2\. Do not deliver material prior to receiving approved shop drawings.
>
> C. Welder\'s Certificates: Submit certificate(s) for the type of welds
> required if so noted in the Schedule of Submittals.

1.02 ABBREVIATIONS/ACRONYMS

> Abbreviations and acronyms of most trade associations and sources of
> standards are listed in Section 01420, Reference Standards and
> Definitions.

1.03 REFERENCES

> ASTM A36 (1996) Standard Specification for Structural Steel
>
> ASTM A53 (1996) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and
> Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
>
> ASTM A307 (1994) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and
> Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength
>
> ASTM A325 (1996) Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel,
> Heat-Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
>
> ASTM A500 (1993) Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and
> Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
>
> ASTM A501 (1993) Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and
> Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing
>
> AISC M016 (1989) Manual of Steel Construction, ASD, Ninth Edition
>
> AWS D1.1 (1996) Structural Welding Code - Steel
>
> ANSI/AWS A2.4 (1993) Standard Specification for Welding, Brazing and
> Nondestructive Examination

1.04 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY

> A. Fabricate and assemble in the shop to the greatest extent possible.
>
> B. Weld shop connections unless noted otherwise.
>
> C. Bolt field connections unless noted otherwise.
>
> D. Shop prime steel with metal primer conforming to Section 09900,
> Architectural Painting, except surfaces of steel to be encased in
> concrete, surfaces to be welded, contact surfaces to be high-strength
> bolt connected, and surfaces of crane rails.

1.05 PAINTING

Conform to requirements of Section 09900, Architectural Painting.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

> A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36.
>
> B. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B or ASTM A501.
>
> C. Structural Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B, Type S.
>
> D. Bolts: ASTM A325.
>
> E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade A.
>
> F. Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36.
>
> G. Grout: Non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of
> non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing
> additives, capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of
> 7,000 psi at 28 days.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

> A. Fabricate, erect, and provide quality control of structural steel
> members in accordance with provisions of the AISC Manual of Steel
> Construction, Chapter M.
>
> B. Weld in accordance with AWS D1.1-96.
>
> C. Structural connections not detailed on the drawings shall be
> designed under direct supervision of and certified by a registered
> Professional Engineer experienced in design of this work.

3.02 INSPECTION

> A. Determine that field conditions are acceptable and ready for work.
>
> B. Beginning work means erector accepts existing conditions.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF ANCHOR BOLTS

> Bolts and anchors shall be accurately located and built onto
> connecting work and shall be preset by the use of templates or other
> methods as may be required to locate bolts and other connections.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF COLUMN BASES OR BEARING PLATES

> A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces.
>
> B. Support and align base or bearing plate with steel wedges or shims.
>
> Wood shims are not acceptable.
>
> C. Install grout using forms to retain grout until sufficiently hard
> to support itself.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS

> A. Erect structural steel members in a suitable and safe manner for
> workmen and in accordance with the AISC Manual of Steel Construction,
> ASD, Part 5, Code of Standard Practice for Buildings and Bridges, with
> modifications and additional requirements as specified.
>
> B. Erect and maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment
> through completion of work.
>
> C. Do not field cut or alter new or existing structural members
> without written approval of the Contracting Authority.
>
> D. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, high-strength bolted
> connections are bearing type and shall be tightened to the snug tight
> condition as defined in AISC Manual of Steel Construction, ASD, Part
> 5, RCSC Specification for Structural Joints, Section 8.(c).
>
> E. Inspect high-strength bolted connections in accordance with AISC
> Manual of Steel Construction, ASD, Part 5, RCSC Specification for
> Structural Joints, Section 9.

3.06 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STEEL

> Select and fabricate materials for best appearance. Cut, fit and
> assemble steel with surfaces smooth, square and with complete contact
> at joints. Clean bearing surfaces and surfaces in permanent contact
> before assembly. Welds: continuous; grind smooth and flush.

3.07 TOUCHUP PAINTING

> After erection of structural steel, touch up bolt heads and nuts,
> field welds, and abrasions in the shop coat.

3.08 TOLERANCES

> Tolerances in fabrication and erection shall be in accordance with
> AISC Manual of Steel Construction, ASD, Part 5, Code of Standard
> Practice for Buildings and Bridges.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05210

STEEL JOISTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> A. Open web steel joists with bridging, attached seats, and anchors.
>
> B. Perform work in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications, Load
> Tables, and Weight Tables, including supplementary framing.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

> A. Submit for Approval: Items listed on the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.
>
> B. Fabrication/Erection/Installation drawings shall indicate shop and
> erection details, including cuts, copes, connections, holes, bolts,
> and welds. Indicate welds, both shop and field, in accordance with
> ANSI/AWS A2.4.
>
> 1\. Indicate on shop drawings the members and connection areas not to
> be painted and indicate size, length, and type of each weld and an
> erection procedure that includes sequence and temporary bracing.
>
> 2\. Do not deliver material prior to receiving approved shop drawings.
>
> C. Welder\'s Certificates: Submit certificate(s) for the type of welds
> required if so noted in the Schedule of Submittals.

1.03 REFERENCES

ASTM A 108 - Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality

ASTM A 153 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

ASTM A 307 - Carbon Steel Threaded Standard Fasteners

ASTM A 325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints

AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code

FS TT-P-636 - Primer Coating, Alkyd, Wood and Ferrous Metal

SJI - Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists

SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council

1.04 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY

> A. Fabricate and assemble in the shop to the greatest extent possible.
>
> B. Shop prime steel with metal primer conforming to Section 09900,
> \"Architectural Painting\", except surfaces of steel to be encased in
> concrete or surfaces to be welded in field.

1.05 PAINTING

Conform to requirements of Section 09900, Architectural Painting.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

> A. Structural Steel used in chord and web members shall conform to one
> of the ASTM Specifications listed in SJI Standard Specifications.
>
> B. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307. Bolts 3/4\" and larger: ASTM
> A325.
>
> C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade A.
>
> D. Structural Steel for Supplementary Framing and Joist Leg
> Extensions: ASTM A 36.
>
> E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1, latest edition; type required for
> materials being welded.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

> A. Determine that field conditions are acceptable and ready for work.
>
> B. Beginning work means erector accepts existing conditions.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF STEEL JOISTS

> A. Provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain framing safe,
> plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and
> installation of permanent bridging and bracing.
>
> B. Do not field cut or alter new or existing structural members
> without written approval of COTR.
>
> C. Erect and bear joists on supports.
>
> D. Frame openings greater than 18 inches (450 mm) with supplementary
> framing.
>
> E. Erection of decking shall not begin until joists are in place and
> secured.
>
> F. After erection, prime scarred surfaces and surfaces not shop
> primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS

Coordinate placement of anchors for securing bearing plates or angles.

3.04 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STEEL

Select and fabricate materials for best appearance. Cut, fit, and
assemble steel with surfaces smooth, and with complete contact at
joints. Clean bearing surfaces and surfaces in permanent contact before
assembly. Welds: continuous; grind smooth and flush.

3.05 TOUCHUP PAINTING

After erection of structural steel, the Contractor shall touch up bolt
heads and nuts, field welds, and abrasions in the shop coat.

3.06 TOLERANCES

Tolerances in fabrication and erection shall be in accordance with SJI.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05400

COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> A. Load bearing formed steel stud wall framing.
>
> B. Formed steel joist framing and bridging.
>
> C. Metal building components and cladding.
>
> D. System shall accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of
> building structural members, and clearances of intended openings.
>
> E. System shall provide for movement of components without damage,
> failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other
> detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic temperature
> ranges.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

Section 09250, Gypsum Drywall

Section 13120, Pre-Engineered Building

1.03 SUBMITTALS

> Submit for Approval: Items listed on the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

1.04 REFERENCES

ASTM A 90 - Test method for weight of coating on zinc-coated
(galvanized) iron or steel articles.

ASTM A 446 - Steel sheet, zinc coated (galvanized) by hot dip process,
physical (structural) quality.

ASTM A 570 - Hot-rolled carbon steel sheet and strip. Structural
quality.

ASTM A 611 - Steel, cold-rolled sheet, carbon, structural.

AISI - Specifications for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural
Members

FS TT-P-645 - Primer, paint, zinc-chromate, alkyd type.

1.05 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY

> Fabricate and assemble in the shop to the greatest extent possible.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

> A. Load Bearing Studs: Sized for placement and loading application in
> accordance with AISI \"Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed
> Steel Structural Members\", 1986 edition with 1989 addendum.
>
> B. Formed steel joist framing and bridging: Sized for placement and
> loading applications in accordance with AISI \"Specification for the
> Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members\", 1986 edition with
> 1989 addendum.
>
> C. Metal building components and cladding: Conforming to requirements
> of Section 13120, Pre-Engineered Building.
>
> D. Track: Channel-shaped, same width as studs, tight fit, solid web,
> sized to meet application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

> A. Determine that field conditions are acceptable and ready for work.
>
> B. Beginning work means erector accepts existing conditions.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF STUDDING

> A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer\'s instructions.
>
> B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall or partition layout.
> Secure in place with fasteners or welding at maximum 24 inches on
> center. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor tracks (and
> ceiling tracks where applicable).
>
> C. Place studs at 16 inches o.c.; not more than 2 inches from abutting
> walls at each side of openings.
>
> D. Construct corners using minimum three studs. Double stud at wall
> opening, door, and window jambs.
>
> E. Erect load bearing studs one piece full length. Splicing of studs
> is not permitted.
>
> F. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall
> stud spacing.
>
> G. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below
> horizontal building framing for non-load bearing framing.
>
> H. As a minimum, provide horizontal bracing spaced a maximum of 48"
> o.c. (measured vertically) consisting of cold rolled steel channels
> for axially loaded studs and provide gypsum board or sheathing both
> sides of laterally loaded studs.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF OTHER COLD METAL FRAMING

> Install components and cladding in accordance with manufacturer\'s
> instructions.

3.04 TOUCHUP

> After erection, touch up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces
> with primer.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05500

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

Shop fabricated ferrous metal items; galvanized and prime painted.

1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION

> A. Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete: Placement of metal
> fabrications in concrete.
>
> B. Section 04200, Unit Masonry: Placement of metal fabrications in
> masonry.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05100, Structural Metal Framing.

B. Section 05210, Steel Joists.

C. Section 09900, Architectural Painting.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A36- Structural Steel.

> B. ASTM A53- Hot Dipped, Zinc - Coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe.
>
> C. ASTM A123- Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated
> From Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip.

D. ASTM A153- Zinc Coating (Hot- Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

E. ASTM A283- Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars.

F. ASTM A307- Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.

G. ASTM A325- High strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.

H. ASTM A386- Zinc- Coating (Hot- Dip) on Assembled Steel Products.

> I. ASTM A500- Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural
> Tubing in Round and Shapes.
>
> J. ASTM A501- Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural
> Tubing.

K. ASTM B177- Chromium Electroplating on Steel for Engineering Use.

L. AWS A2.0- Standard Welding Symbols.

M. AWS D1.1- Structural Welding Code.

N. SSPC- Steel Structures Painting Council.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

Submit for approval: Items listed in the Schedule of Submittals in

accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings:

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36.

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. ASTM A501.

C. Plates: ASTM A283.

D. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B unless indicated otherwise on drawings.

> E. Fasteners: Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325, or A307 or
> galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized components.
>
> F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being
> welded.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical section,for delivery to
site.

B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.

> C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface.
> Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed
> edges to small uniform radius.
>
> D. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts;
> unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except
> where specifically noted otherwise.
>
> E. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications, Fabricate
> anchors and related components of same material and finish as
> fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.

2.03 FINISHES

> A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to
> finishing.
>
> B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where
> field welding is required.
>
> C. Prime paint items in accordance with Section 09900, Architectural
> Painting.
>
> D. Galvanize in accordance with ASTM A123, structural steel members.
> Provide minimum 1.25 oz/sq ft. (380 g/sq m) galvanized coating.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.O1 EXAMINATION

> A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to
> receive work.

B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

> Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metals where site welding
> is required. Supply items required to cast into concrete or embedded
> in masonry with setting templates, to appropriate sections.

3.03 INSTALLATION

> A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from
> distortion or defects.
>
> B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to
> maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation
> of permanent attachments.
>
> C. Field weld components indicated on drawings and/or shop drawings.

D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.

> E. Obtain COTR approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments
> not scheduled.
>
> F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop
> primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete.

3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES

> A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per 10FT, (2 mm per meter)
> non-cumulative.

B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

END OF SECTION

SECTION 06100

ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

> A. Light framing lumber and studs.
>
> B. Structural framing lumber.
>
> C. Nailers, Blocking and Furring.
>
> D. Underlayment
>
> E. Fasteners.
>
> F. Wood decking and Sheathing.

1.02 RELATED ITEMS

> A. Section 09250: Gypsum Board
>
> B. Section 06200: Finish Carpentry
>
> C. Section 09900: Architectural Painting

1.03 SUBMITTALS

> Submit for approval: Items listed in the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 BOARD MATERIALS

> A. Each piece of framing lumber, board lumber, and plywood shall bear
> the trademark and grade identification of the manufacturer\'s
> association or the authorized inspection bureau under rules of which
> the lumber is manufactured and graded.
>
> B. Structural framing lumber shall be surfaced 4 sides, stress graded,
> and stamped to indicate the grade and the fiber stress in bending.
>
> C. LIGHT-FRAMING MATERIALS
>
> Light framing materials and studs over 10 feet in length

[SPECIES GRADE]{.underline}

Southern yellow pine No. 2KD dimension, SPIB

Douglas fir, coast region: Standard grade,

Western larch: west coast WCLIB No. 16 and

hemlock, white fir, ponderosa WWPA Grading

pine, Western red cedar, Idaho Rules.

white pine, sugar pine.

Sitka spruce, Standard grade

Western red cedar WCLIB No. 16

Redwood Construction grade, RIS

> D. STUD FRAMING MATERIALS
>
> Stud-framing materials for 2-by4-inch studs, 10 feet or less in
> length:

[SPECIES GRADE]{.underline}

Southern yellow pine No. 2KD stud grade, SPIB

Douglas fir, coast region, West Coast Studs,

western larch, WCLIB No. 16. No. 2

western hemlock and better, WWPA

Grading Rules

> Sitka Spruce Standard grade
>
> WCLIB No. 16
>
> E. BOARD MATERIALS

[SPECIES GRADE]{.underline}

Southern yellow pine No. 2 boards, SPIB

Western red cedar, west coast Utility grade boards,

hemlock, Douglas fir, larch WCLIB No. 16

White fir, ponderosa pine, Utility grade, WWPA

Western cedar, incense cedar Grading Rules

Idaho white pine, sugar pine

> F. FASTENERS
>
> Fasteners and Anchors: Hot dipped galvanized or Zinc electroplated
> steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel
> elsewhere. See drawings for specification application and type of
> fasteners and anchors.

2.02 PLYWOOD

> A. Floor decking: APA rated 32/16, Exposure 1.
>
> B. Roof decking: APA rated 32/16, exterior exposure.

C. Combination subfloor/underlayment: APA Sturd-I-Floor, exposure 1.

D. Wall sheathing: APA sheathing, C-D plugged, exterior exposure.

E. Backing panels: APA C-D plugged. Interior exposure.

2.03 BUILDING PAPER

> Asphalt saturated felt, non-perforated, ASTM D226, type 1.

2.04 AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER

> Six mil polyethylene fabric which permits passage of water vapor;
> DuPont Tyvek or approved equal.

2.05 TREATMENT

> A. Structural and light framing lumber and plywood shall be fire
> retardant treated to a flame spread of 25 or less in accordance with
> AWPA standard C20 and tested in accordance with ASTM standard E-84 and
> dried after treatment in accordance with AWPA standard C20 for lumber
> and C27 for plywood.
>
> B. Wood in contact with masonry, concrete or steel shall be
> pressure-preservative treated in accordance with AWPA, LP-2 and shall
> be dried to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent after treatment.
> Cut surfaces shall be brush coated with two coats of the same
> preservative used in pressure treatment.

2.06 MOISTURE CONTENT

> A. Boards and dimension lumber 2\" thick and less: maximum 15 percent.
>
> B. Other lumber: Conform to rules of the lumber association or
> inspection bureau under which the lumber is graded.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

> A, Provide nailers, blocking and grounds where required. Set work
> plumb, level and accurately cut.
>
> B. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer\'s
> instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in
> proper relation with adjacent construction. Coordinate with work of
> other sections.
>
> C. Comply with manufacturer\'s requirements for cutting, handling,
> fastening and working treated materials.
>
> D. Restore damaged components. Protect work from damage.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 06200

FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide finish carpentry for woodwork items exposed to view:

1\. Exterior running and standing trim.

> 2\. Interior running and standing trim, including door and window
> casing.
>
> 3\. Plywood panels.
>
> 4\. Wood shelving and closet accessories.

1.02 RELATED ITEMS

> A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry
>
> B. Section 08210: Wood Doors
>
> C Section 09900: Architectural Painting

1.03 SUBMITTALS

> Submit for approval: Items listed in the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

> A. Quality standard for fabrication and products: Architectural
> Woodwork Institute Quality Standards, Custom grade unless noted
> otherwise.
>
> B. Exterior finish carpentry:
>
> 1\. Trim and boards for painted finish: Softwood suitable for exposure
> and loading. Use decay resistant species, such as redwood or western
> cedar,for exposure conditions requiring repeated wettings.
>
> 2\. Plywood for painted finish: APA rated exterior, medium density
> overlay plywood.
>
> C. Interior finish carpentry:
>
> 1\. Trim, boards, and plywood for transparent finish: Specified on
> drawings.
>
> 2\. Trim, boards, and plywood for painted finish: Softwood suitable
> for exposure and use.
>
> D. Shelving: Hardwood, medium density particleboard, or fir plywood
> with hardwood edge bands.
>
> E. Closet bars: Telescoping steel with chrome finish.
>
> F. Wood treatment:
>
> 1\. Preservative treatment: Pressure-treated with waterborne
> preservatives for items in contact with roofing, flashing,
> waterproofing, masonry, concrete, or the ground. Vehicle for
> preservative compatible with finish.
>
> 2\. Fire-retardant treatment: ASTM E 84, Class A, where required by
> drawings. Vehicle for preservative compatible with finish.
>
> G. Fasteners and anchorages:
>
> 1\. Provide nails, screws and other anchoring devices of the type
> size, material, and finish required for secure attachment of finish
> materials inidicated ondrawings. Conceal where possible.
>
> 2\. Where finish carpentry is exposed to exterior or in areas of high
> relative humidity fasteners and anchors shall be hot-dipped galvanized
> (ASTM A 153).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

> A. Back prime work and install plumb, level and straight with tight
> joints; scribe work to fit.
>
> B. Install trim with minimum number of joints. Cope at returns and
> miter corners. Scarf end to end joints. Stagger joints in adjacent and
> related members.
>
> C. Anchor exposed work with concealed fasteners or fine finishing
> nails countersunk and filled.

3.02 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING, AND PROTECTION

> A. Repair or replace damaged work to eliminate functional and visual
> defects.
>
> B. Clean and touch up work to provide a completely finished job.
>
> C. Protect all work until final acceptance.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 06400

CUSTOM ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

> A. Casework for transparent finish
>
> B. Casework for opaque finish
>
> C. Casework, laminate clad
>
> D. Casework hardware
>
> E. Casework tops

1.02 RELATED ITEMS

> A. Section 06100: Rough carpentry
>
> B. Section 06200: Finish carpentry
>
> C. Section 09900: Architectural Painting

1.03 SUBMITTALS

> Submit for approval: Items listed in the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 QUALITY

> All work under this section shall be in accordance with Architectural
> Woodworking Institute (AWI) Quality Standards, for custom grade work
> unless more or less stringent standards are called for on the
> drawings.

2.02 CASEWORK FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

> A. AWI quality grade: Custom
>
> B. Construction: Details shall conform to reveal overlay design
>
> C. Exposed parts shall be of a species and cut as called for on the
> drawings
>
> D. Semi-exposed parts as governed by custom grade AWI standards

2.03 CASEWORK FOR OPAQUE FINISH

> A. AWI quality grade: Custom
>
> B. Construction: Details shall conform to reveal overlay design
>
> C. Exposed solid wood parts: Any species permitted by AWI custom grade
> standard
>
> D. Exposed panel product parts: Any species and substrate permitted by
> AWI custom grade standard
>
> E. Semi-exposed parts as governed by AWI custom grade standards

2.04 CASEWORK, LAMINATE CLAD

> A. AWI quality grade: Custom
>
> B. Construction: Details shall conform to reveal overlay design
>
> C. Exposed surfaces shall be finished with solid color, suede finish,
> high pressure laminate materials in thicknesses determined by AWI
> custom grade standard. Acceptable manufacturers are Formica,
> Textolite, Wilson Art, Nevamar or equal. Colors as shown on drawings.
>
> D. Semi-exposed surfaces as governed by AWI custom grade standards

2.05 CASEWORK HARDWARE

> A. All cabinet hardware shall be furnished and installed by the
> casework manufacturer.
>
> B. Hardware shall be as scheduled or described on the drawings. In the
> absence of hardware information the casework manufacturer shall
> furnish his standard hardware consistent with the quality and
> anticipated normal use of the cabinet work supplied.

2.06 TOPS

> A. AWI quality grade: Custom
>
> B. Tops to be finished with high pressure laminates, in thicknesses as
> determined by AWI standards. Acceptable manufacturers are Formica,
> Textolite, Wilson Art, Nevamar or equal. Colors and textures as shown
> on drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

> A. Install cabinet work plumb, level, true and straight. Shim as
> required using concealed shims.
>
> B. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work.
>
> C. Anchor cabinets to walls and floors with concealed fasteners. Use
> fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush
> with woodwork, and matching final finish where transparent finish is
> indicated.
>
> D. Tops shall be anchored securely to base units and other support
> system as indicated.

3.02 FINISHING AND ADJUSTING

> A. Finishes shall conform to AWI quality standards for grades and
> finishes specified. Painting shall be done in accordance with Section
> 09900.
>
> B. Cabinet finishes, including painting, should be done in the shop
> prior to installation.
>
> C. Field touch-up shall be the responsibility of the installing
> contractor and shall include the filling and touch-up of exposed job
> made nail or screw holes, refinishing of raw surfaces resulting from
> job fittings, repair of job inflicted scratches and mars, and final
> cleaning up of the finished surfaces.
>
> D. Adjust all operating parts for smooth operation and good fit.
> Adjust hinges, latches, drawer glides etc. so that doors and drawers
> are centered on openings and aligned with each other.
>
> E. Clean all exposed and semi-exposed surfaces after installation and
> touch-up is complete.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 07270

FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> A. Provide fire and smoke barrier penetration seals for openings in
> floors,walls and other elements of construction.
>
> B. Provide at all penetrations, through fire rated construction, and
> additionally where noted.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

> Section 03300: Cast-in-place Concrete.
>
> Section 04200: Unit Masonry
>
> Section 07920: Joint Sealers
>
> Section 09250: Gypsum Drywall
>
> Section 15050: Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
>
> Section 16050: Basic Electrical Materials and Methods

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) publications:

1\. E 814-83 Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire
Stops.

> 2\. E 119-83 Methods of Fire Tests of Building Construction and
> Materials.
>
> 3\. E 84-84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics
> of Building Materials.
>
> 4\. C 719.86 Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under
> Cyclic Movements.
>
> 5\. C920-86 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
>
> B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Publications:
>
> 1\. UL 1479 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops
>
> 2\. UL 263 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
>
> 3\. UL 723 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
>
> 4\. Underwriters Laboratories \"Fire Resistance Directory\" (Current
> Year).
>
> C. Factory Mutual Corporation (FM) Publications:
>
> 1\. Factory Mutual Approval Guide (Current Year)

1.04 DEFINITIONS

> A. Fire Rated Assembly: Includes all fire walls, floors, floor/ceiling
> and roof systems assemblies. Rating shall be per ASTM E 119-83
> \"Methods of Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials\" or UL
> 263 \"Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.\"
>
> B. Firestop System: Through-Penetration Firestop Systems are designed
> to prevent the spread of fire through openings in fire rated
> assemblies for a specified period of time. Incorporating the use of
> specific products installed in a specific manner, they shall only be
> installed in configurations for which they have been specifically
> tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or Factory Mutual
> (FM) per ASTM E 814 or UL1479.
>
> C. Flame Spread/Smoke Developed Ratings: Numerical Value of a material
> when tested in accordance with E84-84 \"Standard Test Method for
> Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.\"

1.05 SUBMITTALS

> Submit for approval: Items listed in the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

> A. Manufacturer: Use Firestop Systems, for the entire project from a
> single Manufacturer to the greatest extent possible, For installations
> or configurations not covered by a tested Firestop System, submit a
> recommendation from the Manufacturer for the specific application.
>
> B. Contractor Qualification: A minimum of two years experience
> installing UL listed or Factory Mutual approved Firestop Systems in
> similar type construction.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

> A. Do not proceed with installation of Firestop Systems when job site
> conditions are outside the limits permitted by the Manufacturer.
>
> B. Do not use materials that show signs of damage.
>
> C. Do not use materials that are beyond their shelf life.

1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

> A. Sequence: Perform work of this and other sections in proper
> sequence to prevent damage to the Firestop Systems and to ensure that
> their installation will occur prior to enclosing or concealing work.
>
> B. Install all Firestop Systems after voids and joints are prepared
> sufficiently to accept the applicable Firestop System.
>
> C. Do not cover Firestop Systems until they have been properly
> inspected and accepted by the Government Inspector.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

> A. Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide products of
> one of the following manufacturers.
>
> 1\. Dow Corning Corporation.
>
> 2\. Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company. (3M)

B. Other manufacturers will be approved provided the firestopping system
and product is listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory.

2.02 MATERIALS

> A. Provide materials classified by UL to provide Fire Barrier equal to
> time rating of construction being penetrated.
>
> B. Provide asbestos free materials that comply with applicable codes
> and have been tested in accordance with UL 1479 or ASTM E-814.

2.03 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM

> A. Firestopping system shall be as listed in the UL Fire Resistance
> Directory, latest edition or approved by Factory Mutual.
>
> B. All components of the system for each opening shall be the product
> of the same manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

> A. Examine openings, voids or joints where firestop systems are to be
> installed. Beginning work means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

> A. Follow manufacturer\'s instructions for surface preparation.
>
> B. Prevent system materials from contaminating adjacent surfaces.
>
> C. Clean surfaces to be in contact with penetration seal materials, of
> dirt, grease, oil, loose materials, rust, or other substances that may
> affect proper fitting, adhesion, or the required fire resistance.

3.03 INSTALLATION

> A. Install firestop system in accordance with manufacturer\'s
> instruction and UL Fire Resistance Directory or as approved by Factory
> Mutual.
>
> B. Seal holes or voids to ensure an effective smoke barrier.
>
> C. Where floor openings without penetrating items are more than four
> inches in width and subject to traffic or loading. Install fire
> stopping materials capable of supporting same loading as floor.
>
> D. Protect installed system from damage.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

> A. Examine firestop system installation before concealing or enclosing
> to ensure proper installation.
>
> B. Keep installation accessible until inspection by the Government and
> other authorities.
>
> C. Patch and repair installation damaged during construction.

3.05 CLEANING

> A. Remove construction debris and clean adjacent surfaces of excess
> sealant.
>
> B. Clean area whether concealed or exposed in finished building.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 07412

MANUFACTURED STEEL ROOF SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

> A. Manufactured standing seam roof panel system.
>
> B. Gutters, fascias, trim, etc. furnished with metal roof system.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

> A. Section 13120, Pre-Engineered Building: Roof system furnished as a
> component of a pre-engineered building system.
>
> B. Section 07414, Manufactured Steel Siding.
>
> C. Section 07920, Joint Sealants.

1.03 REFERENCES

> A. ANSI/ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the
> Hot-Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality.
>
> B. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip
> Process, General Requirements.
>
> C. ASTM A606 - Steel Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled,
> High-Strength, Low-Alloy, with Improved Corrosion Resistance.
>
> D. ASTM A792 - Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot-Dip
> Process, Structural (Physical) Quality.

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

> A. System: Standing seam steel roof system preformed and prefinished;
> site assembled.
>
> B. System is for installation in a design which is not a component of
> a pre-engineered building system.

1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

> A. Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused
> by negative wind pressure (uplift) and actual dead loads and code
> required live loads.
>
> B. Maximum allowable deflection of panel; 1/180 span.
>
> C. System shall accommodate, without damage to components or
> deterioration of seals, planned movement within the system,
> anticipated movement between system and perimeter components subjected
> to seasonal temperature cycling, dynamic loading and unloading, and
> deflection of structural framing.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

> Submit for approval: Items listed in the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

1.07 WARRANTY

> Provide twenty year warranty against panel finish fading, chalking,
> blistering, peeling or cracking when exposed to normal atmospheric
> conditions. Provide five year weathertightness and workmanship
> warranty. Warranties shall include the cost of labor and material.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

> A. Material: 24 ga. steel; 50 ksi min. yield strength.
>
> B. Design: Standing seam with 3 inch high rib. and minimum 24 inch
> coverage.
>
> C. Coating: Hot-dip coating with 50% aluminum and 50% zinc
> (galvalume).
>
> D. Panel length: Furnish full length without end laps.

2.02 FINISH

> A. Finish: KYNAR Fluorocarbon resin, oven baked over an epoxy primer
> for a total thickness of one mil.
>
> B. Back surface: Wash coat of silicon polyester over an epoxy primer
> for a total thickness of one half mil.
>
> C. Color: Selected from manufacturer\'s standards.

2.03 ATTACHMENT

> A. Standard practice: Attach to structure with concealed clips.
>
> B. Clips: allow for 1 inch of thermal movement in two directions (2
> inch slot).

2.04 ACCESSORIES

> A. Provide all accessories required for a complete installation
> including compressible and metal closures, metal trim, fascia,
> gutters, etc.
>
> B. Exposed metal trim: match roof panel in color. If the project
> includes new wall panels, downspouts shall match wall panels.

2.05 FASTENERS

> A. Panel to secondary member connection: Self-drilling structural
> fasteners.
>
> B. Panel to panel connectors: Self-tapping screws.
>
> C. Standard fastener system: concealed system. Where exposed fasteners
> are unavoidable, fasteners shall have colored heads to match color of
> the material being fastened.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

> A. Verify that framing members are ready to receive roof panel system.
>
> B. Beginning installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

Protect adjacent materials from damage during construction.

3.03 ERECTION

> A. Install panels in accordance with manufacturer\'s instructions.
>
> B. Size, space, and install fasteners as directed by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 07414

MANUFACTURED STEEL SIDING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

> A. Manufactured steel siding panels
>
> B. Liner panels.
>
> C. Trim and accessories furnished with steel siding.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

> A. Section 07412, Manufactured Steel Roof System
>
> B. Section 13120, Pre-engineered Building: Wall system furnished as a
> component of a pre-engineered building system.

1.03 REFERENCES

> A. ANSI/ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the
> Hot-Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality.
>
> B. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip
> Process, General Requirements.
>
> C. ASTM A606 - Steel Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled,
> High-Strength Low-Alloy, with Improved Corrosion Resistance.
>
> D. ASTM A792 - Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot-Dip
> Process Structural (Physical) Quality.

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

> A. System: Preformed and pre-finished steel siding system of vertical
> profile; site assembled.
>
> B. System is for a design which is not a component of a pre-engineered
> building system.

1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

> A. Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused
> by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall
> as calculated in accordance with the Uniform Building Code.
>
> B. Maximum allowable deflection of panel: 1/180
>
> C. System shall accommodate, without damage to components or
> deterioration of seals, planned movement within the system,
> anticipated movement between system and perimeter components subjected
> to seasonal temperature cycling, dynamic loading and unloading, and
> deflection of structural framing.
>
> D. For moisture entering or condensation occurring within panel
> system, provide channel to exterior drainage system.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

> Submit for approval: Items listed in the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

1.07 WARRANTY

> A. Provide ten year warranty against exterior panel finish chalking,
> fading or cracking when exposed to normal atmospheric conditions.
>
> B. Provide five year warranty against interior panel finish chalking,
> fading, or cracking when exposed to normal atmospheric conditions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

> A. Material: 24 gauge steel; 50 ksi min. yield strength.
>
> B. Design: Preformed to profile shown on drawings.
>
> C. Panel Length: Furnish full length without end laps.

2.02 FINISH

> A. Primer: Oven baked epoxy on exterior and interior.
>
> B. Finish: Silicone polyester coating baked over the primer.
>
> C. Exposed Finish Thickness: One mil.
>
> D. Unexposed Finish Thickness: One-half mil.
>
> E. Primer and finish for liner panels: Same as for exterior panels.

2.03 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

> A. Gauge: Min. 26 gauge (greater if required by design)
>
> B. Finish: Same as wall panels.
>
> C. Color: Match wall panels.

2.04 ATTACHMENT

> Standard practice: Attach to structure with concealed fastening
> system.

2.05 FASTENERS

> A. Panel to secondary member connection: Self-drilling structural
> fasteners.
>
> B. Panel to Panel Connectors: Self-tapping screws.
>
> C. When exposed fasteners are unavoidable, fasteners shall have
> colored heads to match color of the material being fastened.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

> A. Verify that framing members are ready to receive wall panel system.
>
> B. Beginning installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

> Protect adjacent materials from damage during construction.

3.03 ERECTION

> A. Install panels in accordance with manufacturer\'s instructions.
>
> B. Size, space, and install fasteners as directed by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

.

SECTION 07510

BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> A. Provide bituminous built-up roofing system, asphalt bitumen type
> with base flashings.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

> A. Submit for approval: Items listed in the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

1.03 WARRANTY

> A. Provide 10 year warranty from roofing manufacturer. Warranty shall
> cover leaks which result from either material or workmanship defects,
> shall not be subject to a deductable, and shall not be pro-rated.
> Warranty shall include repairs to the roofing system to the extent
> necessary to return the roofing system to a watertight condition.
>
> B. Provide a two-year workmanship warranty from the installer.

1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

> A. Roofing system shall have Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
> Class A Fire Hazard Classification.
>
> B. For application on metal roof deck the roof assembly shall have
> Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM) Class 1 Construction, wind
> uplift requirement of 190 in accordance with FM Construction Bulletin
> 1-28.

PART 2.0 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

> A. Asphalt system; Celotex Corp, TAMKO, Nord, Manville, or approved
> equal:
>
> 1\. Base ply: 1 ply perforated asphalt saturated glass fiber felt
> appropriate to use on the existing roof deck type.
>
> 2\. Ply felts: 2 plies No. 25 perforated asphalt saturated glass fiber
> felts.
>
> 3\. Interply bitumen: Roofing asphalt, ASTM D 312, type as required by
> slope.
>
> 4\. SBS granulated modified bitumen cap sheet.
>
> B. Aggregate: Clean, smooth river gravel, ASTM D 1863.
>
> C. Walkway protection boards: UL B/U Label, 250 gram/square meter
> polyester mat, SBS modified asphalt-coated, ceramic granular-surfaced,
> 160 mils thick. Color selected from manufacturer\'s standard colors.
>
> D. Store felts and insulation off the ground and covered from rain but
> well ventilated to prevent damage from condensation.

PART 3.0 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

> A. Inspect substrate and report unsatisfactory conditions in writing.
> Beginning work means acceptance of substrate. Coordinate installation
> with other trades, including carpentry, flashing and penetrating work.
>
> B. Clean, prime and prepare substrate and metal flashing directly
> exposed to asphalt.
>
> C. Install insulation in at least two layers in parallel courses and
> staggered joints with tightly butted end joints and neatly fitted
> around penetrations.
>
> D. Install walkway protection membrane at locations indicated and
> where required to provide access to roof mounted equipment.
>
> E. Comply with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual (latest edition)
> and manufacturer\'s installation instructions.
>
> F. Restore or replace damaged components. Protect work from damage.
>
> G. Work only in dry weather. No ice, frost or standing water shall be
> on the roof during installation. Store felts and membranes above 40
> degrees F. during cold weather.
>
> H. Remove and install new materials in an area no larger than can be
> completed in the same day.
>
> I. Do not heat asphalt above 525 degrees F. or manufacturers recommend
> temperature whichever is lower. Apply to roof at a minimum temperature
> of 400 degrees F. Felts must fully absorb the asphalt during
> installation.

3.02 CANTS

> A. Fiber cants and pressure treated wood cants shall have a minimum
> installed height of 5 inches.
>
> B. Curbs shall be a minimum of 8 inches high. Felts and membranes
> shall be continuous to top of curbs. Flashing against parapets shall
> be a minimum of 8 inches high.

3.03 PENETRATIONS

> A. Pipe penetrating through the existing roof shall be a minimum of 8
> inches high. If not high enough, extend the pipe to the proper height
> with couplings and pipe of similar materials.
>
> B. Cover all pipe penetrations with a lead boot of the smallest size
> that fits the pipe.
>
> C. Where pipes are continuous or higher than can be covered with a
> boot, install sheet metal pitch pockets overfilled with fiberous
> roofing mastic to slope water away from the pipe.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 07920

JOINT SEALERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> A. Provide sealants at intersection of building components.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

> Section 07270, Firestopping

1.03 SUBMITTALS

> A. Submit for approval: Items listed on the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

> A. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in
> satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced
> installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with
> manufacturer\'s instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

> A. Joints designed for expansion and movement conditions at site:
>
> 1\. Exterior joints on vertical surfaces: Non-sag polyurethane; Pecora
> Dynatrol II or Tremco Dymeric or approved equal.
>
> 2\. Horizontal paving joints, interior and exterior: Self-leveling
> polyurethane; Tremco TAC 900 or approved equal.
>
> 3\. Ceramic tile, toilet fixture joints: Dow 786, acrylic latex
> w/silicone, or approved equal.
>
> 4\. Interior joints, joints at mirrors: Acrylic latex; Tremco Acrylic
> Latex or approved equal.
>
> 5\. Acoustical sealant: Tremco Acoustical sealant, non-drying, or
> approved equal. For unexposed joints only.
>
> 6\. Precompressed expanding sealant tape: Illbruck \"Will-Seal\" 150,
> or approved equal.
>
> 7\. Pavement joint filler: Resilient, premolded asphalt impregnated
> fiberboard.
>
> 8\. Primers, bond breakers, and backer rods: compatible with sealant
> and adjacent surfaces.
>
> 9\. Fire-retardant sealant: See Section 07270, Firestopping.
>
> 10\. Butyl Rubber: Protective Treatments Inc. 757 Butyl Sealant or
> approved equal.

2.02 COLORS

> A. Colors will be selected from manufacturer\'s standards.
>
> B. Submit color samples as listed on Schedule of Submittals.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

> A. Verify that joint openings are ready to receive work and field
> measurements are shown on drawing and recommendation by the
> manufacturer.
>
> B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing
> substrate.

3.02 PREPARATION

> A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer\'s
> instructions.
>
> B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair
> adhesion of sealant.

3.03 INSTALLATION

> A. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer\'s instructions.
>
> B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required
> width/depth ratios.
>
> C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than
> 1/3 the joint width.
>
> D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
>
> E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges.
> Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these
> temperature ranges.
>
> F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter,
> ridges, and sags.

E. Tool joints concave.

3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIRING

> A. Clean work upon completion prior to final acceptance.
>
> B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
>
> C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of
> this section.

3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

Protect sealants until cured.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 08110

STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> A. Provide steel doors.
>
> B. Provide hollow metal door frames.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

> A. Submit for approval: Items listed in the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

> A. Doors: 1-3/4\" thick seamless flush doors.
>
> 1\. Interior doors: 18 gage ASTM A 568 cold-rolled steel.
>
> 2\. Exterior doors: Insulated 16 gage ASTM A 526 steel with ASTM A 525
> G60 galvanizing. Insulate exterior doors with polystyrene core giving
> a R value of R-7 or better unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
>
> B. Frames: Welded construction with mitered corners; gage as follows:
>
> 1\. Interior frames: 16 gage up to 5\' wide, 14 gage over 5\' wide.
>
> 2\. Exterior frames: 14 gage.
>
> C. Knocked-down frames may be installed in existing non load bearing
> gypsum board interior walls. All new walls, all load bearing walls,
> and all exterior walls shall have welded frames.
>
> D. Louvers: Sightproof, stationary type, 24 gage cold rolled steel in
> 20 gage frame.
>
> E. Finish: Rust-inhibiting primer.
>
> F. Fire rating: UL labelled, fire-rated assembly where required.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

> A. Fabricate work to be rigid, neat and free from seams, defects,
> dents, warps, buckles, and exposed fasteners. Install doors and frames
> in compliance with SDI-100 and NFPA 80.
>
> B. Hardware: Prepare doors and frames to receive hardware on final
> schedule. Provide for 3 silencers on single door frames; 2 on double
> door frames.
>
> C. Shop Finish: Clean, treat and prime paint all work with
> rust-inhibiting primer comparable with finish paint specified in
> Section 09900. Provide asphalt emulsion sound deadening coating on
> concealed frame interiors.
>
> D. Touch-up damaged coatings and leave ready to receive finish
> painting

END OF SECTION

SECTION 08210

WOOD DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide wood doors.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit for approval: Items listed on the Schedule of Submittals in
accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Wood doors for transparent finish: Solid core flush wood door with
particleboard core for interior use; AWI custom grade.

1\. Face: Birch

B. Wood doors for painted finish: Solid core flush wood door with
particleboard core for interior use; AWI custom grade.

1\. Face: Birch or gum

C. Laminate Faced Doors: Solid core flush door with particleboard core
for interior use, AWI premium grade, with plastic laminate face, NEMA
LD-3, 0.050\" thick, solid color.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NWMA I.S.-1 and AWI quality standard. Prefit doors to
frames. Premachine doors for hardware listed on final schedules. Factory
bevel doors.

B. Install doors with not more than 1/8\" clearance at top and sides,
1/4\" at bottom. Comply with NFPA 80 for rated assemblies.

C. Shop Finish: Sand and provide 1st coat of finish system specified in
Section 09900, Architectural Painting. Wrap and protect.

D. Adjust, clean, and protect.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 08710

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

> A. Hardware for wood and hollow steel doors.
>
> B. Threshold

1.02 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED BY OTHERS

> A. Cylinders and keys will be furnished by the government.

1.03 RELATED WORK

> A. Section 08210, Wood Doors
>
> B. Section 08110, Steel Doors and Frames

1.04 REFERENCES

> A. ANSI/A117.1 - Specification for Making Buildings and Facilities
> Accessible to an Usable by Physically Handicapped People.
>
> B. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
>
> C. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute.
>
> D. BHMA - Builder\'s Hardware Manufacturers Association.
>
> E. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute.
>
> F. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
>
> G. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
>
> H. SDI - Steel Door Institute

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

> A. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware
> Consultant (AHC), or approved qualified person to assist in the work
> of this Section.
>
> B. The consultant (AHC) shall prepare a detailed hardware schedule
> including all items required to meet applicable codes and provide a
> complete hardware installation.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

> A. Submit for approval: Items listed on the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

> A. Locksets, Latches and Exit Devices: SARGENT, no substitution.
>
> B. Other hardware items: Manufacturer as approved.

2.02 PRODUCTS

> A. Locksets and Latches: Series 7700 or 8100 as listed on schedule. If
> neither is listed furnish 8100 series.
>
> B. Exit devices: Series 8900
>
> C. Other products: As specified on the hardware schedule.

2.03 FINISHES

> A. As specified on the hardware schedule.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

> A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work.
>
> B. Verify that power supply is available to power operating devices.
>
> C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 INSTALLATION

> A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer\'s instructions
> and requirements of BHMA.
>
> B. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
>
> C. Conform to ANSI A117.1 for positioning requirements for the
> handicapped.

3.03 SCHEDULE

> A. The Hardware Schedule shall be as shown on the drawings.
>
> B. The schedule will list basic items only. Provide all accessories
> and incidental items to produce a complete workable installation and
> meet applicable codes.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09250

GYPSUM DRYWALL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> Provide gypsum drywall work including metal support systems, interior
> walls,partitions and ceilings as shown.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

> A. Section 05400, Cold Formed Metal Framing: Load bearing cold formed
> metal framing.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

> A. Submit for approval: Items listed in the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01300, Submittals.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

> A. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in
> satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced
> installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with
> manufacturer\'s instructions.
>
> B. Tolerances: Not more than 1/16\" difference in true plane at joints
> between adjacent boards before finishing. After finishing, joints
> shall be invisible. No gaps or voids between gypsum board units or
> between drywall and adjacent work, unless detailed otherwise. Not more
> than 1/8\" in 10\' deviation from true plane plumb and level in
> finished work.
>
> C. Furnish each type of gypsum board and related joint treatment
> materials from a single manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Gypsum board:

> 1\. Interior use: ASTM C 36, 1/2\" thick regular for walls 5/8\" thick
> regular for ceilings; U.S. Gypsum or approved equal.
>
> 2\. Fire rated use: ASTM C 36, 5/8\" thick fire rated types; U.S.
> Gypsum or approval equal.
>
> 3\. Moisture resistant gypsum board (MR Board): ASTM C630.
>
> B. Backer boards: Glass mesh reinforced portland cement backer board
> for ceramic tile; Durock, Wonderboard or approved equal.
>
> C. Steel studs: Screw-type steel studs, ASTM C 645, 16 inches o.c. 25
> gage or heavier gage as required by the drawings.
>
> D. Drywall ceiling suspension and furring materials: A complete system
> consisting of 12 ft long main tees with 4 ft long cross tees spaced 2
> ft o.c. Maximum deflection: 1/360 span.
>
> E. Joint reinforcement: ASTM C 587 paper tape and ready-mixed vinyl
> compound.
>
> F. Accessories: Galvanized steel corner beads, casing beads, control
> joints.
>
> G. Acoustical insulation and sealant: Unfaced mineral fiber blanket or
> batts cut to full center-to-center stud dimension; U.S. Gypsum
> Acoustical Sealant or approved equal.
>
> H. Insulation between exterior wall studs and between roof joists :
> Mineral fiber flexible blankets or batts with a vapor barrier facing
> the winter-heated side of the wall. R-rating shall be R-11 for walls
> and R-19 for roof unless shown otherwise. Vapor barrier shall be
> vinyl, .0032 inch thick with a flame spread of 25 or less and a smoke
> developed rating of 50 or less.
>
> I. Sound attenuation insulation between studs of interior walls:
> Unfaced mineral fiber blankets with an NRC rating of .95 unless shown
> otherwise.
>
> J. Vapor barrier membrane: 4 Mil polyethylene film.
>
> K. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of type material, size, corrosion
> resistance, holding power and other properties required to secure
> materials to subtrates involved. Comply with standards specified and
> manufacturer\'s instructions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

> A. Comply with ASTM C840; except as otherwise indicated, extend fire
> rated partitions to underside of deck above ceiling.
>
> B. Install framing system at 16\" o.c., including blocking for grab
> bars, accessories and similar items.
>
> C. Install vapor barrier to inside of face of studs of exterior walls.
> Seal joints with vapor barrier tape at perimeter of insulation
> cutouts, end joints between batts and tears or ruptures in membrane
> facing.
>
> D. Provide fire-rated systems where indicated.
>
> E. Install boards vertically. Position joints to fall over framing
> members.
>
> F. Install trim and joint treatment in strict compliance with
> manufacturer\'s instructions and recommendations. Sand smooth and
> leave ready for finish painting.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09312

CERAMIC TILE WALL FINISH

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> A. Glazed Wall Tile installed by the thinset application method.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

> Section 09313 - Ceramic Tile Floor Finish

1.03 REFERENCES

> A. ANSI/TCA 108.5 - Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Set Portland
> Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
>
> B. ANSI/TCA 108.10 - Installation of Grout in Tile work.
>
> C. ANSI/TCA A118.4 - Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
>
> D. ANSI/TCA A118.6 - Ceramic Tile Grouts.
>
> E. ANSI/TCA 137.1 - Ceramic Tile.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

> A. Submit for approval: Items listed in the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, Submittals
>
> B. Submit one sample tile for each color, pattern and type of tile
> intended to be used. Obtain approval of job sample submittals before
> delivering any products to the job site.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

> A. Conform to ANSI/TCA A137.1
>
> B. Conform to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS

> A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of products
> specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
>
> B. Installer: Company specializing in applying the work of this
> Section with minimum three years experience.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

> A. Deliver products to the site under provisions of Section 01600.
>
> B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.

1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

> A. Maintain temperature at 50°F (10°C) minimum during tile work and
> for 7 days after completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CERAMIC TILE

> A. Furnish only Standard Grade glazed wall tile meeting ANSI/TCA
> A137.1, conforming to the following:
>
> Size 4 1/4 x 4 1/4 x 1/4 inch
>
> Surface Finish Bright Glazed
>
> Color See Drawings

2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS

> A. Mortar: ANSI/TCA A118.4 Latex Portland Cement Mortar: Used as a
> bond coat for setting tiles.

2.03 GROUT MATERIALS

> A. Grout: ANSI/TCA A118.6 Ceramic Tile Grouts. Latex-Portland cement
> grout.
>
> B. Color Admixture: Color as selected.

2.04 MORTAR MIX AND GROUT MIX

> A. Mix and proportion pre-mix setting bed and grout materials in
> accordance with manufacturer\'s instructions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

> A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
>
> B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts condition of
> existing surfaces.

3.02 PREPARATION

> A. Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration.
>
> B. Vacuum clean existing surfaces and damp clean.
>
> C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler.
>
> D. Apply sealer to surfaces as recommended by adhesive manufacturer.

3.03 INSTALLATION - THIN SET METHOD

> A. Install dry-set mortar bond coat, tile, and grout in accordance
> with manufacturer\'s instructions.
>
> B. Lay tile in accordance with ANSI/TCA A108.5 Ceramic Tile installed
> with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
>
> C. Lay out all tile work so as to minimize cuts less than one-half
> tile in size.
>
> D. Use all products in strict accordance with latest ANSI Standard
> Specifications.
>
> E. Smooth all exposed cut tile edges.
>
> F. All cut tile edges shall be clean before installing.
>
> G. Locate tile cuts in both walls and floors so as to be least
> conspicuous.
>
> H. Align all wall joints to give straight uniform grout lines, plumb
> and level.
>
> I. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in
> tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight without voids,
> cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.
>
> J. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
>
> K. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.
>
> L Grout tile joints in accordance with ANSI/TCA A108.10.
>
> M. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and at
> junction of dissimilar planes.

3.04 CLEANING

> A. Clean tile surfaces. Be sure all tile work is free of grout film
> upon completion.

3.05 PROTECTION FROM TRAFFIC

> A. Protect finished installation.
>
> B. Protect all tile walls from damage prior to final completion.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09313

CERAMIC TILE FLOOR FINISH

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> A. Ceramic floor tile and base shall be installed by the thin set
> application method.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

> A. Section 09312 - Ceramic Tile Wall Finish

1.03 REFERENCES

> A. ANSI/TCA A108.5 - Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Set Portland
> Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
>
> B. ANSI/TCA A108.10 - Installation of Grout in Tile work.
>
> C. ANSI/TCA A118.1 - Dry-Set Mortar
>
> D. ANSI/TCA A118.6 - Ceramic Tile Grouts
>
> E. ANSI/TCA A137.1 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

> A. Submit for approval: Items listed in the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, Submittals
>
> B. Submit one sample panel approximately 12\" square for each color,
> pattern and type of tile intended to be used. Obtain approval of job
> sample submittals before delivering any products to the job site.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

> A. Conform to ANSI/TCA A137.1
>
> B. Conform to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS

> A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of products
> specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
>
> B. Installer: Company specializing in applying the work of this
> Section with minimum three years experience.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

> A. Deliver products to the site under provisions of Section 01600.
>
> B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.

1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

> A. Maintain temperature at 50°F (10°C) minimum during tile work and
> for 7 days after completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CERAMIC TILE MATERIAL

> A. Furnish only Standard Grade Ceramic base and floor tile meeting
> ANSI/TCA A137.1, conforming to the following:
>
> Size 1 x 1 x 1/4 in. and 2 x 2 x 1/4 in.
>
> Surface Finish Unglazed
>
> Color See Drawings
>
> B. Base: Match mosaic floor tile for moisture absorption, surface
> finish, and color; 4 x 4 tile size with coved internal corners and
> bullnose top edge.

2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS

> A. Mortar: ANSI/TCA A118.1 Dry-Set Mortar: Used as a bond coat for
> setting tiles.

2.03 GROUT MATERIALS

> A. Grout: ANSI/TCA A118.6 Ceramic Tile Grouts. Latex-Portland cement
> grout.
>
> B. Color Admixture: Color as selected.

2.04 MORTAR MIX AND GROUT MIX

> A. Mix and proportion pre-mix mortar and grout materials in accordance
> with manufacturer\'s instructions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

> A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
>
> B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts condition of
> existing surfaces.

3.02 PREPARATION

> A. Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration.
>
> B. Vacuum clean existing surfaces and damp clean.
>
> C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler.
>
> D. Apply sealer to surfaces as recommended by adhesive manufacturer.

3.03 INSTALLATION -THIN SET METHOD

> A. Install bond coat, tile, and grout in accordance with
> manufacturer\'s instructions.
>
> B. Lay tile in accordance with ANSI/TCA A108.5 Ceramic Tile installed
> with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
>
> C. Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile. Form corners
> and bases neatly. Align floor, base, and wall joints.
>
> D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in
> tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight without voids,
> cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.
>
> E. Lay out all tile work so as to minimize cuts less than one-half
> tile in size.
>
> F. Use all products in strict accordance with latest ANSI Standard
> Specifications.
>
> G. Smooth all exposed cut tile edges.
>
> H. All cut tile edges shall be clean before installing.
>
> I. Locate tile cuts in both walls and floors so as to be least
> conspicuous.
>
> J. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
>
> K. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.
>
> L. Grout tile joints in accordance with ANSI/TCA A108.10.
>
> M. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and
> junction of dissimilar planes.

3.04 CLEANING

> A. Clean tile surfaces. Ensure all tile work is free of grout film
> upon completion.

3.05 PROTECTION FROM TRAFFIC

> A. Protect finished installation.
>
> B. Prohibit all foot traffic from using newly tiled floors for at
> least 7 days.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09510

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> A. New ceiling systems: exposed grid, suspended, lay-in type.
>
> B. Entire system shall be class A rated as installed.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

> Submit for approval: Items listed in the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CEILING

> A. Tile: 5/8\" thick mineral fiber sized as shown.
>
> B. NRC Range : .50 - .60
>
> C. STC Range: 30 - 34
>
> D. Light reflectance: LR-1 (75% or over)
>
> E. Flame spread:0-25 (ASTM E84)
>
> F. Appearance: Equal to Armstrong Minaboard \"Designer\" pattern

2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM

> A. Suspension system: intermediate duty fire rated steel system
> consisting of 1-1/2\" high x 12\' long main tees with single
> controlled expansion point combined with 1 inch or 1-1/2\" high fire
> rated cross tees listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
> Finish shall be pre-painted white.
>
> B. Provide hold-down clips where required for fire rated
> classification.
>
> C. Support the suspension system from the structure above with no. 12
> gauge hanger wire located 6\" from the ends and a maximum spacing of
> 4\'-0\" O.C.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

> Examine the area where ceilings are to be installed for conditions
> which will adversely effect installation. Do not start work until
> unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

> A. Install acoustical material and suspension system square and true.
> Level the system to within 1/8\" in 12\'-0\".
>
> B. Measure and layout to avoid less than 1/2 panel units.
>
> END OF SECTION

SECTION 09650

RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> A. Provide resilient flooring
>
> B. Provide rubber base

1.02 SUBMITTALS

> A. Submit for approval: Items listed in the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

> A. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in
> accordance with manufacturer\'s instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

> A. Tile flooring:
>
> 1\. Vinyl composition tile: 12\" by 12\" by 1/8\"; Armstrong Contract
> Interiors, Imperial Excelon. Color No. 51858 Sandrift White or
> approved equal.
>
> B. Accessories:
>
> 1\. Wall base: 4\" high, 1/8\" thick, rubber base.
>
> 2\. Outside corners: preformed.
>
> 3\. Color: Flexco Rubber Base, Color:WF-037, Dark Beige
>
> 4\. Adhesive: Waterproof.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

> A. Comply with manufacturer\'s instructions and recommendations.
>
> B. Prepare surfaces by cleaning, leveling and priming. Level to 1/8\"
> in 10\' tolerance.
>
> C. Install tile with tight joints and with two-way pattern. Scribe cut
> and fit resilient flooring to permanent fixtures, built-in furniture
> and cabinets, pipes, outlets and permanent colums, walls, and
> partitions. Lay out to prevent less than 1/2 tile units.
>
> D. Install base and trim accessories to minimize joints.
>
> E. Clean, polish, and protect.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09900

ARCHITECTURAL PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> A. Provide painting and finishing work within the area encompassed by
> the contract.
>
> B. The term [paint]{.underline} as used herein or on the drawings
> includes emulsions, paint, stains, varnishes, sealers, surface
> filler-sealer and coatings whether used as prime, intermediate or
> finish coats.
>
> C. Existing surfaces which presently have transparent or natural
> finish shall be finished with transparent or natural finish rather
> than opaque finish even if the term [paint]{.underline} is used herein
> except where an opaque finish is specifically designated.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

Submit for approval: Items listed in the Schedule of Submittals in
accordance with Section 01330,Submittals.

1.03 WORK INCLUDED

> Paint all surfaces of all items within the area covered by the
> contract unless specifically excluded. The following items are
> specifically included:
>
> 1\. Items on walls ceilings and structures such as pipes, conduit,
> hangers, duct and pipe covering brackets, supports, wiremold, etc.
>
> 2\. Interior of cabinets.
>
> 3\. Remove chalkboards, whiteboards, tackboards, bulletin boards,
> signs, room numbers, etc. before painting the wall. Replace after
> painting.
>
> 4\. Repaint or replace all safety markings such as floor striping,
> warning signs, numbers, lettering and identification of all kinds
> which require repainting or are painted over or damaged in the work in
> this contract.

1.04 WORK NOT INCLUDED

> Do not paint the following items unless specifically noted on the
> drawings:
>
> 1\. Glass, unless previously painted.
>
> 2\. Vinyl wall covering, unless previously painted.
>
> 3\. Prefinished paneling, laminated plastic, ceramic tile.
>
> 4\. Items with factory finish such as mechanical equipment, diffusers,
> grilles, furniture, toilet partitions.
>
> 5\. Flooring of all types, rubber, vinyl or aluminum base.
>
> 6\. Acoustical ceilings.
>
> 7\. Electrical equipment such as switches, panels, fire alarm panels,
> lights, receptacle covers.
>
> 8\. Surfaces permanently concealed from view such as the backs of
> built-in cabinets, items above the ceiling, etc.

1.05 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

> Section 05100: Structural Metal Framing
>
> Section 05500: Metal Fabrications
>
> Section 06200: Finish Carpentry
>
> Section 07920: Sealants and Caulking

1.06 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE

> A. Materials shall be delivered in their original containers bearing
> manufacturer\'s name, label, product identification, batch number, and
> paint formulation. Containers shall be new and unopened.
>
> B. Coating materials shall be stored in tightly closed containers in a
> covered, well-ventilated area where they will not be exposed to
> excessive heat, sparks, flame or direct sunlight. Water-based coatings
> shall be protected against freezing or temperatures above 90 degrees
> F.
>
> C. Paint solvents, thinners, and cleaners shall be stored with the
> same care as the coating materials.

1.07 FIELD TESTS

> The Contracting officer may take dry-film tests on finished surfaces.
> Provide additional coatings to surfaces where there is less than the
> minimum specified dry-film thickness, as directed by the Contracting
> Officer (at no additional cost).

1.08 INSPECTION OF SURFACES

> Before starting any work, examine surfaces to receive paint finishes
> for defects which cannot be corrected by the procedures specified
> herein under \"PREPARATION OF SURFACES\" and which might prevent
> satisfactory painting results. Work shall not proceed until such
> damages are corrected. The commencing of work in a specific area shall
> be construed as acceptance of the surfaces, and thereafter the
> contractor shall be fully responsible for satisfactory work as
> required herein.

1.09 PROTECTION AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

> A. Protect adjacent materials and equipment against damage from
> cleaning, spillage, dripping and spatter. Leave building materials and
> equipment clean, with damaged surfaces corrected. Post \"WET PAINT\"
> signs, to indicate newly painted surfaces.
>
> B. Dispose of rags used to wipe up coating materials, solvents, and
> thinners by drenching them with water and placing in a metal container
> with a tight fitting metal cover at the end of each day.
>
> C. Spray painting and sandblasting on exteriors will be permitted only
> when wind conditions are acceptable as determined by the Contracting
> Officer. Obtain prior approval for all spray painting and sandblasting
> from the Contracting Officer before commencement of each day\'s work.
> The Contractor shall be liable for any and all damage caused by him to
> automobiles or other property of third parties.
>
> D. Take necessary precautions in accordance with OSHA regulations to
> ensure safety of personnel engaged in these operations and personnel
> who may be affected by such operations. Some of the materials to be
> handled may be combustible or toxic, or both. Using material safety
> information provided by the Manufacturer, the Contractor shall be
> responsible for providing equipment as required for safe application
> and instructing the users regarding the hazards and proper handling
> procedures to prevent health hazards or possible explosion.

1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

> Turn over to the Contracting Officer, at final inspection, one gallon
> of each type and final color of paint used on the project with the
> location where used properly indicated.

1.11 JOB, WEATHER AND TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS

> A. Apply paint only when surface temperatures meet the paint
> manufacturer\'s written instruction.
>
> B. Do not apply paint outdoors when there is a threat of rain or when
> humidity is 90 percent or higher.

1.12 PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION

> The personnel assigned to the work shall be certified to have had
> adequate previous experience in the successful application of paints
> and coatings similar to those specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PAINT MATERIALS

> A. The Coating Systems in this Specification mention specific
> manufacturer\'s paint products followed by the phrase \"or approved
> equal\". Paint products submitted \"as equal\" to those specified must
> be reviewed and approved by the Contracting Officer; Contracting
> Officer will use the following criteria to determine if those
> submitted paint products are equal to the manufacturer\'s paint
> products specified:
>
> 1\. Vehicle
>
> 2\. Solids content (weight and volume percentages)
>
> 3\. Drying time
>
> 4\. Percentage of Titanium Dioxide
>
> 5\. Viscosity
>
> 6\. Color
>
> NOTE: Contracting Officer reserves the right to require that the above
> criteria for a submitted paint product be certified by an independent
> testing lab.
>
> B. All painting materials shall be approved by the Contracting Officer
> prior to the commencement of work.
>
> C. Paint shall not be badly settled, caked or thickened in the
> container, shall be readily dispersed with a paddle to a smooth
> consistency and shall have excellent application properties.
>
> D. Paint shall arrive on the job color-mixed except for tinting of
> undercoats and possible thinning.
>
> E. All thinning and tinting materials shall be as recommended by the
> manufacturer for the particular material thinned or tinted.
>
> F. It shall be the responsibility of the applicator to see that all
> mixed colors match the color selections.

2.02 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT

> Application equipment is not required to be new, but shall be adequate
> for the work and workmanship required herein.

2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIAL

> Furnish all required ladders, scaffolding, drop cloths, maskings,
> scrapers, tools, dusters, cleaning solvents and waste containers,
> required to perform the work and achieve the results herein specified.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 WORKMANSHIP, GENERAL

> A. Employ Only skilled mechanics. Application may be by brush, roller
> or spray. (Spray application is restricted as specified in Paragraph
> entitled \"Application, Restriction\" and \"Protection and Safety
> Precautions\" of this Section).
>
> B. Protect the work at all times, and protect all adjacent work and
> materials by suitable covering or other method during progress of the
> work.
>
> C. Protect hardware, accessories, device plates, lighting fixtures,
> factory finished work, and similar items.
>
> D. Apply materials under adequate illumination, evenly spread and
> apply smoothly to avoid runs, sags, holidays, brush marks, air bubbles
> and excessive roller stipple.
>
> E. Coverage and hide shall be complete. When color, stain, dirt or
> undercoats show through final coat of paint, cover the surface with
> additional coats until the paint film is of uniform finish, color
> appearance and coverage, at no additional cost to the Government.
>
> F. All coats shall be dry to manufacturer\'s written recommendations
> before applying succeeding coats.
>
> G. Doors shall have tops, bottoms and side edges finished the same as
> the faces of these doors.
>
> H. Check compatibility of new coating system with the existing coating
> by applying coating to a small area and allowing it to cure. Then make
> cross-hatch cuts through the coating and check adhesion by firmly
> applying masking tape to cross-hatched area and removing with a fast
> pull. If the coating remains intact and there is no wrinkling,
> lifting, blistering, or any other sign of incompatibility present,
> coating work may then proceed. Contracting Officer must be present for
> this test. (If there are signs of incompatibility, Contracting Officer
> will provide information for new coating system to be used.)
>
> I. Each of the coats within the particular coating systems for
> individual substrates shall be by the same manufacturer. Mixing of
> manufacturer\'s products within a coating system will not be allowed.
> Install coating system in strict accordance with paint manufacurer\'s
> instructions.
>
> J. The unit measure for paint is installed dry mils. Number of coats
> necessary to meet this specification shall be in accordance with the
> paint manufacturer\'s instructions. The Contracting Officer, will at
> his discretion inspect the paint thickness with Tooke Scratch Gauges
> and Magnetic Film Thickness Indicators. Contractor shall retouch all
> test scratches.
>
> K. Provide regulators and gauges in good working order on both air and
> material lines. Use operation pressures in accordance with those
> indicated for the particular product.
>
> L. Hold spray guns perpendicular to the surface being painted and
> handle and adjuste in such a manner that dry overspray is kept to a
> minimum.
>
> M. Avoid contamination of cleaned surfaces, and avoid between coat
> contamination. Clean surfaces contaminated before applying the next
> coat.
>
> N. Work each application of material into corners, crevices, joints,
> etc., and distribute evenly over flat surfaces. Use spray techniques
> that result in a uniform wet pattern and avoid dry spraying. Remove
> dry spray prior to applying sound coating.

3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES, GENERAL

> A. Clean, dry and adequately protect surfaces from dampness.
>
> B. Remove any foreign materials which will adversely affect adhesion
> or appearance of applied coating.
>
> C. Remove mildew and neutralize the surface per the coating
> manufacturer\'s recommendations.
>
> D. Correct efflorescence on any area before painting.
>
> E. After surface has been patched and loose paint has been removed,
> all edges of remaining paint shall be feathered (by sanding) so that a
> uniform finish coat will not show evidence of any previous paint coats
> or patching.
>
> F. Remove all unused nails, screws, brackets and other obsolete
> protrusions.
>
> G. Fill all cracks, pits, holes, and other similar surface
> imperfections with a material appropriate to the surface (per paint
> manufacturer\'s recommendations). Once dry, sand these materials flush
> with the existing surface. All surfaces shall have a slight tooth.
>
> H. All priming shall be done on the same day as cleaning to prevent
> re-rusting and contamination.

3.03 PREPARATION OF SURFACES, METHODS

> A. The following surface preparation specifications shall be used in
> accordance with Volume 2, \"Systems and Specifications, Third
> Edition\", by the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC):
>
> Solvent Cleaning: SSPC-SP-1-63
>
> Hand Tool Cleaning: SSPC-SP-2-63
>
> Power Tool Cleaning: SSPC-SP-3-63
>
> Commercial Blast Cleaning: SSPC-SP-6-63
>
> Brush Blast Cleaning: SSPC-SP-7-63

B. Waterblast Cleaning

> 1\. The Waterblast Cleaning equipment shall be capable of operating at
> a minimum pressure of 3,000 psi continuously. The nozzle shall be able
> to produce a cone pattern or a flat fan pattern to make it suitable
> for all types of cleaning operation.
>
> 2\. Capacity of the waterblasting equipment shall be in the range of 6
> to 10 gallons per minutes. The water supply shall be clean potable
> water without any extraneous matter that would be detrimental to
> coating adhesion. The waterblasting shall remove all surface
> contaminants and loose paint. Paint films that are properly adhered
> and not embrittled need not be removed.
>
> 3\. All surfaces cleaned by waterblasting shall be thoroughly dry
> before painting can be started; Contracting Officer will determine if
> surfaces are dry.
>
> C. Abrasive material used in Commercial Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP-6-63)
> and Brush Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP-7-63) shall contain no more than 1.0
> percent free silica. Only \"virgin\" abrasive materials shall be used.

3.04 APPLICATION, RESTRICTION

> Do not use the spray method of application for exterior painting when
> the wind is measured at greater than 5 miles per hour at the level of
> application and is blowing in the direction of a parking lot or an
> occupied area; the Contracting Officer will make the decision.
> Contractor will not receive additional compensation for time lost due
> to adverse wind conditions.

3.05 EXTERIOR COATING SCHEDULE

> A. Exterior Wood Surfaces
>
> 1\. Surface Preparation: Clean previously painted surfaces by method
> SSPC-SP-2-63. Areas with heavy paint build-up shall be cleaned by
> method SSPC-SP-63.15
>
> Seal knots with a mixture of equal parts of shellac and alcohol.
>
> Patch and fill all holes and cracks with putty or plastic wood;
> fillers must be compatible with coating system.
>
> Feather, by sanding, all edges of patched areas and edges of remaining
> paint.
>
> Backprime all new wood prior to installation; after installed, prime
> exposed surface(s).
>
> Dull all glossy or smooth surfaces by sanding in order to provide a
> \"tooth\".
>
> 2\. Coating System: Only bare or unpainted wood shall be primed.
>
> [Primer]{.underline} = Alkyd type; \"Glidden\" Y-1951 Base Coat or
> approved equal; minimum film thickness shall be 1.8 dry mils.
>
> Do not begin finish coat until Contracting Officer has reviewed
> completed prime coat.
>
> [Finish Coat]{.underline} = Alkyd type; \"Glidden\" Y-1901 House and
> Trim or approved equal; minimum film thickness shall be 5 dry mils.
>
> 3\. Application: Apply coating system by brush method.
>
> B. Exterior Galvanized Metal Surfaces
>
> 1\. Surface Preparation: Clean surface by method SSPC-SP-2-63, then
> use method SSPC-SP-3-63 to remove all contaminants and loose paint on
> previously painted surfaces. Next, use method SSPC-SP-3-63 to remove
> heavy rust and areas where heavy build-up of paint exists on
> previously painted surfaces.
>
> Patch holes less than 1 inch in diameter with a sealant. (Sealant must
> be compatible with coating system); patch holes greater than 1 inch in
> diameter with a material identical to the surface being patched.
> Mechanically fasten \"patch\" to surface; caulk, with sealant around
> patch.
>
> Feather, by sanding, all edges of remaining paint.
>
> Clean all new or unpainted galvanized metal surfaces by method
> SSPC-SP-1-63 [only]{.underline}.
>
> Dull all glossy or smooth surfaces by sanding in order to provide a
> \"tooth\".
>
> 2\. Coating System: Only bare or unpainted galvanized metal shall be
> primed.
>
> [Primer]{.underline} = Alkyd type; \"Sherwin Williams\" Zinc Chromate
> Primer or approved equal; minimum film thickness shall be 2 dry mils.
>
> Do not begin finish coat until Contracting Officer has reviewed
> completed prime coat.
>
> [Finish Coat]{.underline} = Alkyd Resin type; \"Sherwin Williams\"
> Metalistic II Enamel or approved equal; minimum film thickness shall
> be 3 dry mils.
>
> 3\. Application: Apply coating system by brush method.
>
> C. Exterior Metal Siding Surfaces
>
> 1\. Surface Preparation: Clean previously painted surfaces by the
> Waterblast Cleaning method. Use method SSPC-SP-7-63 to remove rust and
> heavy build-up of paint.
>
> Do not paint siding which has a factory-painted finish.
>
> Holes less than 1/2 inch in diameter shall be patched with a sealant
> (Sealant must be compatible with coating system); holes greater than
> 1/2 inch in diameter shall be patched with a material identical to the
> surface being patched. Mechanically fasten \"patch\" to surface;
> caulk, with sealant, around patch.
>
> Feather, by sanding, all edges of remaining, existing paint.
>
> Clean bare or unpainted siding by method SSPC-SP-1-63 if surface
> contaminants exist.
>
> Dull all glossy or smooth surfaces by sanding in order to provide a
> \"tooth\".
>
> 2\. Coating System: Same as for Exterior Galvanized Metal
>
> 3\. Application: Method of application shall be jointly decided by
> Sub-Contractor and paint manufacturer; paint manufacturer\'s written
> approval for type of application method is required.
>
> D. Exterior Ferrous Metal (Steel and Iron) Surfaces
>
> 1\. Surface Preparation: Clean previously painted surfaces by method
> SSPC-SP-6-63. After the completion of the above cleaning method,
> substrate shall be inspected by the Contracting Officer; if areas of
> heavy build-up of paint and/or rust exist, method SSPC-SP-7-63 or
> SSPC-SP-3-63 will be used to prepare those problem areas.
>
> Any significant cracks or signs of structural member failure shall be
> brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer.
>
> Feather edges of existing paint so that a uniform coating system can
> be achieved.
>
> Dull all glossy or smooth surfaces by sanding in order to provide a
> \"tooth\".
>
> 2\. Coating System: Prime [all]{.underline} ferrous metal surfaces.
>
> [Primer]{.underline} = Glidden Y-4570 Red Oxide or Approved equal.
> Minimum film thickness = 2 dry mils.
>
> Do not begin finish coat until the Contracting Officer has reviewed
> completed prime coat.
>
> [Finish Coat]{.underline} = Glidden Y - 4550 Industrial Alkyd Gloss
> Equal. Minimum film thickness = 4 dry mils. Will require 2 coats
> minimum.
>
> 3\. Application: Method of application shall be jointly decided by
> contractor and paint manufacturer; paint manufacturer\'s written
> approval for type of application method is required.
>
> E. Exterior Concrete and Masonry Surfaces
>
> 1\. Surface Preparation: Clean previously painted surfaces by
> waterblast cleaning method. Use method SSPC-SP-7-63 to remove stains
> and heavy build-up of paint.
>
> Patch all holes with a non-shrink grout. Patched areas shall be flush
> with adjacent areas and shall resemble adjacent areas in appearance.
>
> Dull all glossy or smooth surfaces by sanding to provide a \"tooth\".
>
> 2\. Coating System: Finish coat shall not begin until Contracting
> Officer has reviewed completed prime coat (if primer is required).
>
> [Primer (for previously painted surfaces)]{.underline} = Epoxy ester
> type; \"MAB\" Four Seasons Exterior Surface Conditioner or approved
> equal; minimum film thickness shall be 2 dry mils.
>
> [Primer (for unpainted surfaces)]{.underline} = Acrylic Latex,
> non-cementicious type; \"MAB\" Architectural Block Filler or approved
> equal; minimum film thickness shall be 8 dry mils.
>
> [Finish Coat]{.underline} = Acrylic Resin Emulsion type; \"MAB\" Four
> Seasons Acrylic Latex or approved equal; minimum film thickness shall
> be 4 dry mils.
>
> 3\. Application: Method of application shall be jointly decided by
> Sub-Contractor and paint manufacturer; paint manufacturer\'s written
> approval for type of application method is required.
>
> F. Exterior Cement Asbestos Panel Surfaces
>
> 1\. Surface Preparation: Clean surface by the Waterblast Cleaning
> method. DO NOT SANDBLAST!!
>
> Patch holes with sealant that is compatible with the coating system.

2\. Coating System: Prime all cement asbestos siding surfaces.

> [Primer]{.underline} = Synthetic Rubber Resin type; \"Pittsburgh
> Paint\" Speedhide Alkali Resistant Primer or approved equal; minimum
> film shall be 2 dry mils.
>
> Do not begin finish coat until the Contracting Officer has reviewed
> the completed prime coat.
>
> [Finish Coat]{.underline} = Vinyl Emulsion type; \"Pittsburgh Paint\"
> Speedhide Emulsion Masonry Paint or approved equal; minimum film
> thickness shall be 5 dry mils.
>
> 3\. Application: Method of application shall be jointly decided by
> Sub-Contractor and paint manufacturer; paint manufacturer\'s written
> approval for type of application method is required.
>
> G. Exterior Water Tanks and Chain Link Fence Surfaces
>
> 1\. Surface Preparation: Clean previously painted surfaces by method
> SSPC-SP-6-23. Supplement cleaning for areas of heavy rust and paint
> build-up shall be accomplished by method SSPC-SP-7-23.
>
> Any significant cracks or signs of structural failure shall be brought
> to the attention of the Contracting Officer.
>
> Feather edges of existing paint (except on fence fabric) by sanding,
> so that a uniform coating system can be achieved.
>
> Dull all glossy or smooth surfaces by sanding in order to provide a
> \"tooth\".
>
> 2\. Coating System: Prime all surfaces.
>
> [Primer]{.underline} = Alkyd chlorinated Rubber type;
> \"Sherwin-Williams\" Kem Kromik Metal Primer or approved equal;
> minimum film thickness shall be 3 dry mils.
>
> Do not begin finish coat until the Contracting Officer has reviewed
> the completed prime coat.
>
> [Finish Coat]{.underline} = \"Sherwin-Williams\" Silver-Brite Heavy
> Duty Rust Resistant Aluminum Paint or approved equal; minimum film
> thickness shall be 3 dry mils.
>
> 3\. Application: Method of application for tanks and chain link fence
> shall be limited to roller and/or brush methods.
>
> H. Exterior Gypsum Wallboard Surfaces
>
> 1\. [Surface Preparation]{.underline}: Clean previously painted
> surfaces by method SSPC-SP-2-63. Avoid breaking the outer layer of
> paper; if broken, repair by taping, mudding and sanding (sand flush
> with adjacent surface).
>
> Replace damaged joint tape and patch all damaged areas (on existing
> surfaces).
>
> 2\. Coating System: Prime all gypsum wallboard surfaces.
>
> [Primer]{.underline} = Alkyd type; \"Glidden\" Y-1951 Base Coat or
> approved equal; minimum film thickness shall be 2 dry mils.
>
> Do not begin finish coat until Contracting Officer has reviewed
> completed prime coat.
>
> [Finish Coat]{.underline} = Alkyd type; \"Glidden\" Y-1901 House and
> Trim or approved equal; minimum film thickness shall be 5 dry mils.
>
> 3\. Application: Method of application optional.

3.06 INTERIOR COATING SCHEDULE

A. Interior Wood Surfaces (Painted)

> 1\. Surface Preparation: Same as for Exterior Wood Surfaces.
>
> 2\. Coating System: Only bare or unpainted wood shall be primed.
>
> [Primer]{.underline} = Pigmented Alkyd type; \"Sherwin Williams\" Wall
> and Wood Primer or approved equal; minimum film thickness shall be 2
> dry mils.
>
> [Finish Coat]{.underline} = Soya Alkyd type; \"Sherwin Williams\"
> Pro-Mar Alkyd Eg-Shel Enamel or approved equal; minimum film thickness
> shall be 4 dry mils.
>
> 3\. Application: Apply coating system by brush method.
>
> B. Interior Wood Surfaces (Stained Bare Wood)
>
> 1\. Surface Preparation: Surfaces shall be dry and free of dirt,
> grease, wax, and marks.
>
> Patch and fill all holes, cracks, and open grains with wood putty
> filer; filler must be compatible with coating system.
>
> Sand wood smooth.
>
> 2\. Coating System: [Stain]{.underline} = Oil base type; \"Minwax\"
> Stain or approved equal.

Stained surface shall be uniform in appearance.

> [Finish Coat]{.underline} = Polyurethane type; \"Minwax\" Polyurethane
> Satin finish or approved equal; minimum film thickness shall be 2 dry
> mils.
>
> 3\. Application: Method of application shall be decided by
> Sub-Contractor and approved by coating manufacturer.
>
> C. Interior Gypsum Wallboard, Vinyl Wallcovering, and Plaster
>
> 1\. Surface Preparation: Remove all contaminants, patch all holes, and
> repair all imperfections.
>
> Sand all surfaces smooth.
>
> 2\. Coating System: Only bare or unpainted surfaces shall be primed.
>
> [Primer]{.underline} = Vinyl Emulsion type; \"MAB\" Fresh Kote Vinyl
> Primer or approved equal; minimum film thickness shall be 2 dry mils.
>
> [Finish Coat (on Corridor & Restroom Surfaces)]{.underline} = Alkyd
> Resin type; \"MAB\" Fresh Kote Alkyd Semi-Gloss or approved equal;
> minimum film thickness shall be 4 dry mils.
>
> [Finish Coat (on all other surfaces)]{.underline} = Vinyl-Acrylic
> Latex Emulsion type; Glidden Lifemaster 2000 Latex ( egshell ) or
> Benjamin Moore Pristine interior latex or approved equal; minimum film
> thickness shall be 4 dry mils.
>
> 3\. Application: Method of application must be approved by the
> Contracting Officer.
>
> D. Interior Concrete and Masonry Surfaces
>
> 1\. Surface Preparation: Remove all contaminants, patch all holes, and
> repair all imperfections to match adjacent surfaces.
>
> Clean heavy build-up of paint on previously painted surfaces by method
> SSPC-SP-2-63 or method SSPC-SP-3-63.
>
> Feather edges of existing paint by sanding, so that a uniform coating
> system can be achieved.
>
> 2\. Coating System: Only bare or unpainted surfaces shall be primed.
>
> [Primer]{.underline} = Acrylic Latex, non-cementitious type; \"MAB\"
> Architectural Block Filler or approved equal; minimum film thickness
> shall be 8 dry mils.
>
> [Finish Coat (on corridor and restroom surfaces)]{.underline} = Alkyd
> Resin type; \"MAB\" Fresh Kote Alkyd Semi-Gloss or approved equal;
> minimum film thickness shall be 4 dry mils.
>
> [Finish Coat (on all other surfaces)]{.underline} = Vinyl-Acrylic
> Latex Emulsion type; \"MAB\" Fresh Kote Latex Flat or approved equal;
> minimum film thickness shall be 4 dry mils.
>
> 3\. Application: Method of application must be approved by the
> Contracting Officer.
>
> E. Interior Metal Surfaces
>
> 1\. Surface Preparation: Clean previously painted surfaces by method
> SSPC-SP-2-63; if areas of heavy paint build-up and/or rust exist,
> method SSPC-SP-3-63 shall be used to prepare those problem areas.
>
> Remove all contaminants, patch all holes, and repair all imperfections
> to match adjacent surfaces.
>
> Feather edges of existing paint so that a uniform coating system can
> be achieved.
>
> Dull all glossy or smooth surfaces by sanding in order to provide a
> \"tooth\".
>
> Immediately before painting, clean surfaces with mineral spirits.
>
> 2\. Coating System: Only bare or unpainted surfaces shall be primed.
>
> [Primer]{.underline} = Oil-Alkyd type; \"Glidden\" Glid-Guard
> All-Purpose Metal Primer No. 5229 or approved equal; minimum film
> thickness shall be 1.5 dry mils.
>
> [Finish Coat]{.underline} = Alkyd type; \"Glidden\" Spred Lustre
> Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 4600 Series or approved equal; minimum film
> thickness shall be 3 dry mils.
>
> 3\. Application: Apply coating system by brush method.

3.07 ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS

A. Clean-Up Responsibilities

> Upon completion of the work, remove all paint spots and paint chips
> from glass and other unpainted surfaces. Remove from the premises, all
> rubbish and accumulated materials of whatever nature not caused by
> others and leave the work in a clean, orderly and acceptable
> condition.
>
> B. Rejection
>
> Work with poor workmanship will be rejected. Poor workmanship is
> defined as inadequate drying or curing, dirt or other foreign material
> imbedded in the coating film, overspray, pinholes, runs, sags, or
> other inadequate film build up. Correct rejected work at no additional
> cost.
>
> Acceptable finish work shall be free of abrasions and shall be uniform
> in color and appearance.
>
> C. Repairing
>
> Damaged and unacceptable portions of completed work shall be removed
> and replaced with new work at no additional cost to the Government.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09970

SURFACE PREPARATION - EXTERIOR STEEL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

> A. Surface preparation of exterior steel which is painted with
> lead-containing paint.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

> Section 01093, Reference Standards and Definitions - Lead Based Paint
>
> Section 01094, Codes, Regulations and Standards - Lead Based Paint
>
> Section 01302, Submittals
>
> Section 01556, Respiratory Protection - Lead Based Paint
>
> Section 02067, Disposal of Waste Materials - Lead Based Paint
>
> Section 02090, Removal of Lead Containing Paint
>
> Section 09951, Coating System For Steel

1.03 REFERENCES

> The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
> extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by
> the basic designation only.
>
> AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

ANSI Z88.2 1992 Respiratory Protection

> CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)

29 CFR 1910.134 Respiratory Protection

29 CFR 1926.59 Hazard Communication

29 CFR 1926. 62 Lead - Construction Industry

29 CFR 1926.57 Ventilation

29 CFR 1910.95 Occupational Noise Exposure

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. (UL)

UL 586,1990 High - Efficiency Particulate Air Filter Units

> SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council, 4400 Fifth Ave. Pittsburgh, PA
> 15213

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. ACTION LEVEL

> Employee exposure, without regard to use of respirators, to an
> airborne concentration of lead of 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air
> averaged over an 8 - hour period.
>
> B. LEAD CONTROL AREA
>
> An enclosed area or structure with full containment to prevent the
> spread of lead dust, paint chips, or debris of lead-containing paint
> removal operations. The lead control area shall be isolated by
> physical boundaries to prevent unauthorized entry of personnel.
>
> C. AREA MONITORING
>
> Sampling of air to determine lead concentrations within the lead
> control area.

D. PHYSICAL BOUNDARY

> Area physically roped or partitioned off around an enclosed lead
> control area to limit unauthorized entry of personnel.

E. CERTIFIED INDUSTRIAL HYGIENIST (CIH)

> As used in this section, refers to an Industrial Hygienist who is
> employed by the Contractor and is certified by the American Board of
> Industrial Hygiene in comprehensive practice.

F. CHANGE ROOMS AND SHOWER FACILITIES

> Rooms within the designated physical boundary around the lead control
> area equipped with separate storage facilities for clean protective
> work clothing and equipment and for street clothes to prevent
> cross-contamination.
>
> G. DECONTAMINATION ROOM
>
> Room for removal of contaminated personal protective equipment (PPE).
>
> H. EIGHT - HOUR TIME WEIGHTED AVERAGE (TWA)
>
> Airborne concentration of lead averaged over an 8 - hour period.
>
> I. HIGH EFFICIENCY PARTICULATE AIR (HEPA) FILTER EQUIPMENT
>
> HEPA filtered vacuuming or exhaust ventilation equipment with a UL 586
> filter system capable of collecting and retaining lead-contaminated
> paint dust. A high efficiency particulate filter means 99.97 percent
> efficient against 0.3 micron size particles.
>
> J. LEAD
>
> Metallic lead, inorganic lead compounds, and organic lead soaps.
> Excluded from this definition are other organic lead compounds.
>
> K. LEAD PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LIMIT (PEL)
>
> Fifty micrograms per cubic meter of air as an 8 - hour time weighted
> average as determined by 29 CFR 1926.62. If an employee is exposed for
> more than 8 hours in a work day, the PEL shall be determined by the
> following formula:
>
> PEL (micrograms/cubic meter of air) = 400/No. hrs. worked per day.
>
> L. PERSONAL MONITORING
>
> Sampling of lead concentrations within the breathing zone of an
> employee to determine the 8 - hour time weighted average concentration
> in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62. Samples shall be representative of
> the employee\'s work tasks. Breathing zone shall be considered an area
> within a hemisphere, forward of the shoulders, with a radius of 6 to 9
> inches and the center at the nose or mouth of an employee.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

> A. In addition to the detailed requirements of this specification,
> comply with laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations of federal,
> state, and local authorities regarding removing, handling and storing
> of lead waste materials. Comply with the applicable requirements of
> the current issue of 29 CFR 1926.62. Submit matters regarding
> interpretation of standards to the Contracting Officer for resolution
> before starting work. Where specification requirements and the
> referenced documents vary, the most stringent requirement shall apply.
>
> B. MEDICAL EXAMINATIONS
>
> Before exposure to lead-contaminate dust, provide workers with a
> comprehensive medical examination as required by 29 CFR 1926.62 and 29
> CFR 1910.1200.
>
> C. MEDICAL RECORDS
>
> Maintain complete and accurate medical records of employees for a
> period of at least 40 years or for the duration of employment plus 20
> years, whichever is longer.
>
> D. TRAINING
>
> 1\. Train each employee performing paint removal, disposal, and air
> sampling operations prior to the time of initial job assignment, in
> accordance with 29 CFR 1926.59.
>
> 2\. Submit certifications signed and dated by the Contractor and by
> each employee stating that the employee has received training. Certify
> that the training course meets EPA requirements for the catagory of
> work assigned to the employee.
>
> E. RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM
>
> 1\. Furnish each employee required to wear a negative pressure or
> other appropriate type respirator with a respirator fit test at the
> time of initial fitting and at least each 6 months thereafter as
> required by 29 CFR 1926.62.
>
> 2\. Establish and implement a respiratory protection program as
> required by 29 CFR 1910.134 and 29 CFR 1926.62.
>
> F. HAZARD COMMUNICATION PROGRAM
>
> Establish and implement a Hazard Communication Program as required by
> 29 CFR 1910.1200.

1.06 DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS WASTE.

> A. At the end of each day\'s work or prior to leaving the work site,
> collect lead containing dust, abrasive materials and removed debris
> and seal in containers furnished by the Government. Clean site of
> lead-containing dust by using vacuums equipped with HEPA filters or by
> using wet methods to prevent lead containing particles from becoming
> airborne.
>
> B. The Government will remove and properly dispose of containers as
> controlled or hazardous waste.

1.07 SAFETY AND HEALTH COMPLIANCE

> A. In addition to the detailed requirements of this specification,
> comply with laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations of federal,
> state, and local authorities regarding removing, handling and storing
> of lead waste materials. Comply with the applicable requirements of
> the current issue of 29 CFR 1926.62. Submit matters regarding
> interpretation of standards to the Contracting Officer for resolution
> before starting work. Where specification requirements and the
> referenced documents vary, the most stringent requirement shall apply.

1.08 SUBMITTALS

> A. Submit for approval items listed in the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, SUBMITTALS.
>
> B. In addition, submit the following for approval:
>
> 1\. SD-06: Manufacturer\'s instructions for use of paint removal
> materials including material safety data sheet (MSDS).
>
> 2\. SD-08: Rental equipment notification
>
> 3\. SD-08: Respiratory protection program
>
> 4\. SD-08: Hazard communication program
>
> 5\. SD-08: Hearing conservation program
>
> 6\. SD-08: Lead-containing paint removal plan. Submit a job-specific
> plan of the work procedures to be used in removal of lead-containing
> paint. Include as a minimum the following:
>
> a\. Sketch on the site plan the location of decontamination room,
> change room and shower facilities. Supplement with written description
> as required.
>
> b\. Detailed Description of mechanical ventilation.
>
> c\. Eating, drinking, smoking and restroom procedures.
>
> d\. Sequencing of work.
>
> e\. Waste water collection plan, if applicable.
>
> f\. Personal monitoring of air samples and personal blood monitoring.
>
> g\. Worker training.
>
> h\. Method of containment to ensure that airborne concentrations of
> lead do not exceed 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air outside the
> lead control area.
>
> i\. Collection of blast media.
>
> 7\. SD-18: RECORDS
>
> a\. Certification of worker medical examinations
>
> b\. Certification of employee training
>
> c\. Employee exposure notification
>
> 8\. SD-08: SAFETY PLAN

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PAINT REMOVAL PRODUCTS

> A. Submit material safety data sheets (MSDS) for approval of paint
> removal products prior to use.
>
> B. The soluble metal content and total metal content of abrasive
> materials shall not exceed values which would cause the material to be
> classified as hazardous waste.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

> A. Have available for the A/E two complete sets of personal protective
> equipment (PPE) daily as required for entry into lead control area if
> needed. PPE shall include disposable whole body covering including
> foot, head, and hand protection.
>
> B. Furnish workers appropriate NIOSH approved respirators for use in
> atmospheres containing lead dust. Comply with 29 CFR 1926.62 and 29
> CFR 1910.134.
>
> C. Furnish personal protective equipment (PPE) to workers exposed to
> lead-contaminated dust. PPE shall include whole body covering, foot
> covering and disposable plastic or rubber gloves.
>
> D. The A/E and inspectors will provide their own respirators as
> required.
>
> E. If rental equipment is used during lead-containing paint removal,
> handling and disposal, notify the rental agency in writing concerning
> the intended use of the equipment. Furnish a copy of the notification
> to the A/E.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

> A. Examine the facility and site to determine existing conditions.
>
> B. Report conditions that differ from those described in the contract
> documents.

3.02 PROTECTION

> A. Establish a lead control area approved by the A/E around each work
> site where surface preparation is being performed.
>
> B. If surface preparation operations produce exposure to lead dust in
> excess of the PEL, provide containment which, together with powered
> negative air pressure inside the enclosure, will prevent
> lead-containing dust from entering the atmosphere outside the lead
> control area and which shall facilitate collection of dust and debris
> for disposal. The containment enclosure may be localized or enclose
> the entire work area.
>
> C. Provide a change room, shower facility and hand washing facility
> for personnel exiting from the lead control area.
>
> D. Protect adjacent facilities and area from damage and contamination
> by lead-contaminated dust. Clean, repair and restore surroundings to
> original condition or better.
>
> E. Provide physical boundaries around work area designated on the
> drawings in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62.

3.03 MECHANICAL VENTILATION SYSTEM

> A. Use adequate ventilation to control personnel exposure to lead in
> accordance with 29 CFR 1926.57.
>
> B. To the extent feasible, use fixed local exhaust ventilation
> connected to HEPA filters approved by the A/E. Local exhaust
> ventilation systems shall be designed, constructed, installed, and
> maintained in accordance with ANSI 29.2.

3.04 WARNING SIGNS

> Provide warning signs at each approach to the lead control area.
> Follow 29 CFR 1926.62. Signs shall read:

WARNING

LEAD WORK AREA

POISON

NO SMOKING OR EATING

3.05 WORK PROCEDURES

> A. Perform work in accordance with approved removal plan.
>
> B. Provide engineering controls to limit exposure to lead.
>
> C. Provide worker protection including work practice controls and
> administrative controls.
>
> D. Provide a CIH or \"Competent Person\" trained in lead abatement
> procedures, health effects of lead, OSHA and EPA regulations. The CIH
> or Competent Person shall be present while work is being performed and
> shall ensure that all regulations are being properly carried out. Such
> person shall have the authority to stop work and make proper
> corrections if improper or unsafe conditions occur.

3.06 INITIAL EXPOSURE ASSESSMENT

> A. Prior to beginning work assume that the worker exposure to lead
> dust will be in excess of 50 micrograms per cubic meter (PEL).
>
> B. Perform personal monitoring of employees within the lead control
> area representative of a full shift including at least one sample for
> each job classification in each work area either for each shift or for
> the shift with the highest exposure level. Follow 29 CFR 1926.62
>
> C. Until the actual exposure is determined by personal monitoring,
> provide interim protection in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62 as
> follows:
>
> 1\. Appropriate respiratory protection.
>
> 2\. Appropriate personal protective clothing.
>
> 3\. Change areas.
>
> 4\. Hand washing facilities.
>
> 5\. Biological monitoring to consist of blood sampling and analysis
> for lead and zinc protoporphyrin levels.
>
> 6\. Training
>
> 7\. Hazard communication

3.07 CONTINUAL MONITORING

> A. If initial monitoring indicates exposure to lead in excess of the
> PEL, perform continual monitoring as required by 29 CFR 1926.62.
>
> B. Conduct additional monitoring whenever there is a change of
> equipment, process, control, personnel or a new task initiated.

3.08 EMPLOYEE NOTIFICATION

> A. Within 5 working days after completion of the exposure assessment
> notify each employee in writing the results which represent that
> employee\'s exposure.
>
> B. Follow 29 CFR 1926.62.

3.09 HEARING PROTECTION

> A. Provide hearing protection for employees exposed to noise levels in
> excess of 85 dBA over an 8 hour time weighted average.
>
> B. Follow 29 CFR 1910.95.

3.10 METHODS OF COMPLIANCE

> A, Provide engineering and work practice controls including
> administrative controls to reduce and maintain employee exposure to
> lead to or below the PEL to the extent that such controls are
> feasible. Supplement the engineering controls by the use of
> respiratory protection complying with 29 CFR 1926.62.
>
> B. Establish and implement a written compliance program to achieve
> compliance with these specifications.
>
> C. Follow 29 CFR 1926.62.

3.11 PERSONNEL EXITING PROCEDURES

> A. Whenever personnel exit the lead control area, ensure that they
> perform the following:
>
> 1\. Vacuum themselves off with HEPA filtered vacuums
>
> 2\. Remove protective clothing in the decontamination room and place
> them in an approved impermeable disposal bag.
>
> 3\. Shower and wash hands and face
>
> 4\. Change into clean clothing in the change room prior to leaving the
> physical boundary of the job site.

3.12 EATING FACILITIES

> A. Provide a lead free environment area outside the lead control area
> for eating and drinking.
>
> B. Prior to entering the eating area ensure that employees perform the
> personal exiting procedures listed above. Showering is not required
> except at the end of the shift.
>
> C. Ensure that no eating, drinking, chewing or smoking is allowed
> within the lead control area or decontamination area.

3.13 MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE

> A. Provide initial medical surveillance of employees including
> biological monitoring in the form of blood sampling and analysis for
> lead and zinc protoporphyrin levels prior to exposure to lead.
>
> B. Provide continuing biological monitoring of employees exposed to
> lead in excess of the action level in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62.
>
> C. Temporarily remove employees whose blood lead level is at or above
> 50 microgram per deciliter of whole blood. Removal, medical
> surveillance and return of removed employees shall be in accordance
> with 29 CFR 1926.62 including required medical removal protection
> benefits.

3.14 SURFACE PREPARATION

> A. Clean surfaces of dirt, loose rust, and other gross contamination
> by any method outlined in SSPC-SP 1, Solvent Cleaning, or pressure
> water washing.
>
> B. Remove loose rust by SSPC-SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning, or SSPC-SP 3,
> Power Tool Cleaning. Feather edges around rust spots to produce a
> smooth painted surface. When using methods SP 2 or SP 3, contain and
> collect paint dust and debris using vacuums equipped with HEPA
> filters.
>
> C. Spot prime rusted areas immediately after removing loose rust
> applying the specified primer at the specified thickness.
>
> D. Roughen the entire existing paint surface with abrasive paper, hand
> wire brushing, power wire brushing or other approved method to produce
> a tooth for adhesion of new paint as required by the specified coating
> system. Contain and collect paint dust by using vacuums equipped with
> a HEPA filter.

3.15 INSPECTION

> A. Notify the Government Inspector when surfaces are ready for
> inspection at the following stages of preparation:
>
> 1\. After removing rust before spot priming
>
> 2\. After final surface preparation before applying finish coating
> system
>
> B. Do not proceed until approved by the Government Inspector.

3.16 ALTERNATE SURFACE PREPARATION

> A. Rust may be removed and existing paint surface roughened by method
> SSPC-SP 7, Brush-off Blast Cleaning, provided the following are met:
>
> 1\. Contain and collect abrasives, paint dust and debris using a
> closed cycle vacuum recovery system equipped with HEPA filters.
>
> 2\. Handle and dispose of abrasives, paint dust and debris as
> specified in Section 02067, Disposal of Waste Materials.
>
> 3\. Ensure that no visible emissions of lead-containing dust escape
> the enclosed vacuum recovery system.
>
> 4\. Place two layers of 6 mil polyethylene under each work area
> extended twenty feet minimum beyond the work area in all directions to
> collect dust and debris that may escape the enclosed recovery system.
> Remove and dispose of the top layer as hazardous waste at the end of
> each shift. Contain and protect hazardous materials from escaping the
> lead control area due to wind or other means. Remove both layers of
> polyethylene upon completion.

3.17 CLEAN - UP

> A. Upon completion of the work, thoroughly clean the site of
> construction debris, lead contaminated debris, containment, barricades
> etc.
>
> B. For phased construction, clean each phase as completed.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 10160

TOILET PARTITIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> A. [Extent]{.underline} of toilet partitions is indicated on drawings.
>
> B. [Types]{.underline} of toilet compartments include:

Plastic laminate finish.

> C. [Styles]{.underline} of toilet compartments include:

Floor-anchored, overhead braced.

> D. [Styles]{.underline} of screens include:
>
> Floor-anchored.
>
> Wall-hung.
>
> E. [Toilet Accessories]{.underline}, such as toilet paper holders,
> grab bars, purse shelves, are specified in Section 10800, Toilet and
> Bath Accessories.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

> Submit for approval: Items listed on the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, SUBMITTALS.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

> A. [Field Measurements]{.underline}: Take field measurements prior to
> preparation of shop drawings and fabrication where possible, to ensure
> proper fitting of work.
>
> B. [Coordination]{.underline}: Furnish inserts and anchorages which
> must be built into other work for installation of toilet partitions
> and related work; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

> A. [Plastic Laminate]{.underline}: NEMA Std. LD-3, minimum 0.050\"
> thick, color and pattern as indicated or, if not indicated, as
> selected by COTR from manufacturer\'s standards.
>
> B. [Core Material for Plastic Laminate]{.underline}: Manufacturer\'s
> standard particleboard, in thickness to provide nominal dimension of
> 1\" minimum for all components.
>
> C. [Pilaster Shoes]{.underline}: ASTM A 167, Type 302/304 stainless
> steel, not less than 3\" high, 20 gage, finished to match hardware.
>
> D. [Panel Brackets]{.underline}: Manufacturer\'s continuous full
> length heavy duty brackets for attaching panels to walls and
> pilasters, either chromium-plated non-ferrous cast alloy (\"Zamac\")
> or anodized aluminum.
>
> E. [Hardware and Accessories]{.underline}: Manufacturer\'s standard
> design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories of
> chromium-plated non-ferrous cast alloy (\"Zamac\").
>
> F. [Overhead-Bracing]{.underline}: Continuous extruded aluminum,
> anti-grip profile, with clear anodized finish.
>
> G. [Anchorages and Fasteners]{.underline}: Manufacturer\'s standard
> exposed fasteners of stainless steel, chromium-plated steel, or brass
> finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant type heads and nuts.
> For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized, cadmium-plated, or
> other rust-resistant protective-coated steel.

2.02 FABRICATION

> A. [General]{.underline}: Furnish standard doors, panels, screens, and
> pilasters fabricated for partition system, unless otherwise indicated.
> Furnish units with cutouts, drilled holes, and internal reinforcement
> to receive partition-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as
> indicated.
>
> B. [Doors Dimensions]{.underline}: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish
> 24\" wide inswinging doors for ordinary toilet stalls and 32\" wide
> (clear opening) outswinging doors at stalls equipped for use by
> handicapped.
>
> C. [Plastic Laminate Partitions and Screens]{.underline}:
>
> 1\. [General]{.underline}: Pressure-laminate one-piece face sheets to
> core material with no splices or joints, and with edges straight and
> sealed. Seal exposed core material at cutouts to protect against
> moisture.
>
> 2\. [Overhead-Braced Partitions]{.underline}: Furnish galvanized steel
> supports and leveling bolts at pilasters, as recommended by
> manufacturer to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for securing
> continuous extruded aluminum anti-grip overhead-bracing at top of each
> pilaster. Furnish shoe at each pilaster to conceal supports and
> leveling mechanism.
>
> 3\. [Wall-Hung Screen]{.underline}: Furnish panel units in sizes
> indicated, of same construction and finish as partition system panels.
>
> 4\. [Floor-Supported Screens]{.underline}: Furnish pilasters not less
> than 1\" thickness, panels and pilasters of same construction and
> finish as toilet partitions. Furnish galvanized steel anchorage
> devices, complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling
> adjusting nuts at pilasters, to permit structural connection to floor.
> Furnish shoe at pilaster to conceal anchorage.
>
> D. [Hardware]{.underline}: Furnish hardware for each compartment in
> partition system, as follows:
>
> 1\. [Hinges]{.underline}: Cutout inset type, adjustable to hold door
> open at any angle up to 90 degrees. Provide gravity type,
> spring-action cam type, or concealed torsion rod type, to suit
> manufacturer\'s standards.
>
> 2\. [Latch and Keeper]{.underline}: Manufacturer\'s standard
> surface-mounted latch unit, designed for emergency access, with
> combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper.
>
> 3\. [Coat Hook]{.underline}: Manufacturer\'s standard unit,
> combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door
> hitting mounted accessories.
>
> 4\. [Door Pull]{.underline}: Manufacturer\'s standard unit for
> out-swing doors.
>
> 5\. [Wall Bracket for Screen]{.underline}: Continuous wall bracket for
> wall-mounted screens.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

> A. [General]{.underline}: Comply with manufacturer\'s recommended
> procedures and installation sequence. Install partitions rigid,
> straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2\"
> between pilasters and panels, and not more than 1\" between panels and
> walls. Secure panels to walls with not less than two stirrup brackets
> attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so that
> holes for wall anchorages occur in masonry or tile joints. Secure
> panels to pilasters with not less than two stirrup brackets located to
> align with stirrup brackets at wall. Secure panels in position with
> manufacturer\'s recommended anchoring devices.
>
> B. [Overhead-Braced Partitions]{.underline}: Secure pilaster to floor
> and level, plumb, and tighten installation with devices furnished.
> Secure overhead-brace to each pilaster with not less than two
> fasteners. Hang doors and adjust so that tops of doors are parallel
> with overhead-brace when doors are in closed position.
>
> C. [Screens]{.underline}: Attach with continuous brackets recommended
> by manufacturer to suit supporting structure. Set units to provide
> support and to resist lateral impact.

3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN

> A. [Hardware Adjustment]{.underline}: Adjust and lubricate hardware
> for proper operation. Set hinges on inswinging doors to hold open
> approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set
> hinges on outswinging doors (and entrance swing doors) to return to
> fully closed position.
>
> B. [Clean]{.underline} exposed surfaces of partition systems using
> materials and methods recommended by manufacturer, and provide
> protection as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of
> construction period.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 10270

ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> Furnish and install a complete access floor system consisting of wood
> core floor panels, adjustable pedestals, a rigid grid type stringer
> system and all accessories required for a complete installation.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

> Submit for approval: Items listed on the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

1.03 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

> Perform field measurements required for the preparation of shop
> drawings, fabrication and installation of the system.

1.04 SYSTEM DESIGN

> A. The design of the access floor system shall be one of the following
> options:
>
> 1\. Structural floor panels supported by adjustable pedestals which
> are laterally braced by a rigid grid system.
>
> 2\. Floor panels supported by a rigid grid system which is supported
> by and provides lateral bracing to adjustable pedestals.
>
> B. The stringers shall be rigidly fastened to the pedestals with bolts
> or screws.

1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

> A. Access Floor Panels: The elevated floor panels shall be capable of
> supporting a uniform live load of a minimum 250 pounds per square foot
> with a deflection not to exceed 0.040 inch. Floor shall also be
> capable of supporting a minimum 1,000-pound load concentrated on 1
> square inch at any point on the panel area without deflecting more
> than 0.080 inch with a safety factor of not less than 3 based on yield
> strength of the material being used. Floor system shall be laterally
> stable in all directions whether panels are in place or not. Finished
> assembly shall be rigid and free of vibration and rocking panels.
>
> B. Pedestals: Each pedestal with components as assembled for the
> specified heights shall be capable of carrying a 5,000-pound axial
> load without permanent deformation.
>
> C. Bonding Strength of Pedestal Adhesive: Adhesive for anchoring
> pedestal bases shall have a bonding strength capable of resisting an
> overturning moment of 1,000 inch-pounds when a force is applied to the
> top of the pedestal in any direction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

> A. The floor, as installed, shall be completely planar within plus or
> minus 0.060 inch in 10 feet, 0.100 inch for the entire floor, and
> 0.030 inch across panel joints.
>
> B. Floor-panel joint-width tolerances shall be 0.008 inch as measured
> with a feeler gage at any point in any joint when the panels are in
> the pressure contact required in final installation.

2.02 PANELS

> Panels shall consist of a 1-inch thick particle board core, totally
> encased by a galvanized steel top sheet and bottom pan or top and
> bottom sheets welded to 16 gauge perimeter channels. Floor panels
> shall be surfaced with a 1/8 inch thick high-pressure laminate.

2.03 REGISTERS AND GRILLES

> Registers and grilles shall be furnished and installed where indicated
> and shall be the dimensions and free-area sizes shown. Construction
> shall be extruded aluminum, in mill finish, to sustain point loads of
> 250 pounds per vane without failure or permanent deformation. No part
> of a grille or register shall project more than 1/8 inch above the
> floor.

2.04 CUTOUTS

> A. The indicated cable cutouts shall be finished with rigid
> polyvinylchloride or molded polypropylene edging to conform to the
> appearance level of the floor surface and to cover raw edges of the
> cutout panel. This extrusion shall be of a configuration to permit its
> effective and convenient use when new cable openings are required. At
> least 24 feet of additional extrusion shall be provided for future
> use.
>
> B. Cutting of panels, including cutouts, shall be performed outside of
> the building.
>
> C. If size of cutout reduces the performance requirement of panel, the
> Contractor shall provide intermediate stringers adjacent to cutouts.

2.05 STRINGERS

> Stringers shall be roll-formed painted or galvanized steel channel
> sections or extruded aluminum channels, having either vinyl rib or a
> flat vinyl gasket cemented on top surface of stringers to effect a
> complete air seal between the panels and the stringers and prevent
> slippage of floor panels horizontally.

2.06 EDGE STRIPS

> An extruded rigid polyvinylchloride or vinyl edge strip shall be
> mechanically and adhesively secured to the panel in a manner to
> preclude detachment under foot and wheel traffic. The top of the strip
> shall be flush with the top of the floor covering. Dimensional
> accuracy of the floor panel with the edge strip in place shall be such
> that, when installed, jointing shall be characterized by the
> interference fit of panel to panel.

2.07 PEDESTALS

> A. Pedestals shall consist of a square steel base at least 4 by 4
> inches that is designed to be attached to the subfloor with the
> manufacturer\'s recommended epoxy adhesive or by mechanical fasteners
> for the intended installation.
>
> B. Vertical adjustment of pedestals shall be by threaded steel rod
> with a positively locking elevating nut to control the height of the
> pedestal head.
>
> C. Pedestal rods shall be cast-in with the base or welded to the base.
> Mechanical connections will not be permitted. All sliding surfaces in
> the elevating mechanism, such as threads, collars, sockets, and
> shafts, shall be machined to an interference fit.
>
> D. Pedestal components, except rods and bearing pads, shall be diecast
> aluminum alloy or steel. Rods shall be rustproofed, after machining,
> by galvanizing in accordance with manufacturer\'s standards.
>
> E. Pedestal cap shall be of cast aluminum with integral slots for
> fastenings for securing floor stringers to caps, or a flat steel
> bracket cap with suitable arrangement for fastening floor stringers.
> Cast aluminum shall conform to ASTM B26/B26M. Steel cap shall conform
> to ASTM A36/A36M.
>
> F. Any nonmetallic pads used on pedestal heads as bearing surfaces for
> floor panels shall be rigid conductive polyvinylchloride or vinyl.
>
> G. Bolts, nuts, washers, and screws shall be cadmium-plated items.
>
> H. At the periphery of the floor, full support shall be provided to
> the floor\'s extreme edge to ensure continuance of the specified
> strengths. The support system provided for this purpose shall not
> interfere with the free removal of affected panels.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

> A. The layout for the installation shall keep to a minimum the number
> of cut panels at the floor\'s periphery.
>
> B. The panel assembly shall be scribed into place at the periphery so
> that no voids occur between the floor panels and the contiguous
> vertical surface trim. The position of every pedestal shall be
> accurately located, and any necessary changes in subfloor surfaces
> shall be made before other installation work is started.
>
> C. Before installation proceeds, the subfloor shall be cleared of dust
> and construction debris, including a final cleaning with high-suction
> industrial vacuum equipment. No cutting, trimming, or other
> debris-producing operation shall be conducted within the room where
> the floor is being installed. As the installation of floor panels
> proceeds, the area under the installed floor shall be vacuum cleaned
> as each row of panels is completed. Cleaning shall extend at least 4
> feet back from the completed edge where possible.
>
> D. Pedestals shall be installed with an epoxy adhesive recommended by
> the access floor manufacturer. The installation shall provide a full
> bearing of the pedestal base on the subfloor. Where the contour of the
> floor does not permit this, the floor and the base shall be primed
> with adhesive, a grout made by filling adhesive with clean sand shall
> be applied over the primed floor area, and the pedestal base shall be
> firmly seated in the grout.
>
> E. Installation shall be such that a surveyor\'s level shall show the
> floor to be level within 0.10 inch.
>
> F. After installation has been completed, the floor shall be vacuum
> cleaned and covered with a continuous sheet of paper or plastic of
> sufficient strength to withstand traffic which may be imposed upon the
> floor before the final acceptance. Should any break in this covering
> occur. the covering shall be immediately repaired by cementing a sheet
> over the damaged area; otherwise the entire covering shall be
> immediately replaced.

3.02 ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS

> A. Repairing: Damaged and unacceptable portions of the completed work
> shall be removed and replaced with new work.
>
> B. Cleaning: Surfaces of the work, and adjacent surfaces soiled as a
> result of the work, shall be cleaned in an approved manner. Equipment,
> surplus materials, and rubbish from the work shall be removed from the
> site.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 10800

TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> A. Extent of each type of toilet accessory is indicated on drawings
> and schedules.
>
> B. Types of toilet accessories which may be required include the
> following:
>
> Paper towel dispenser.
>
> Toilet tissue dispenser.
>
> Waste receptacle.
>
> Grab bar.
>
> Sanitary napkin disposal unit.
>
> Soap dispenser.
>
> Seat cover dispenser.
>
> Combination utility shelf unit
>
> Mirrors

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

> Toilet partitions are specified in Section 10160, Toilet Partitions.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

> A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which
> must be set in concrete or built into masonry; coordinate delivery
> with other work to avoid delay.
>
> B. Accessory Locations: Coordinate accessory locations with other work
> to avoid interference and to assure proper operation and servicing of
> accessory units.
>
> C. Products: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of
> accessory unit and for units exposed in same areas.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

> Submit for approval: Items listed on the Schedule of Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIAL, GENERAL

> A. Stainless Stee[l]{.underline}: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No.
> 4 finish, 22 gage (.034\") minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
>
> B. Brass: Leaded and unleaded, flat products, FS QQ-B-613; Rods,
> shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges, RS QQ-B-626.
>
> C. Sheet Steel: Cold-rolled, commercial quality ASTM a 366, 20-gage
> (.040\") minimum, unless otherwise indicated. Surface preparation and
> metal pretreatment as required for applied finish.
>
> D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 527, G60.
>
> E. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposition on base
> metal, ASTM B 456, Type SC 2.
>
> F. Baked Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, gloss white, baked acrylic
> enamel coating.
>
> G. Mirror Glass: FS DD-G-451, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, 1/4\"
> thick, with silver coating, copper protective coating, and
> non-metallic paint coating complying with FS DD-M-411.
>
> H. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized
> after fabrication.
>
> I. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as
> accessory unit or of galvanized steel where concealed.

2.02 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS

Surfaced-Mounted Towel Dispensers: Furnished and installed by
Contractor. Equal to Bobrick, B-262.

2.03 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS

Furnished and installed by Contractor. Equal to Bobrick,B-6867.

2.04 WASTE RECEPTACLES

> Surface-Mounted Waste Receptacle: Fabricate of stainless steel with
> seamless exposed walls and continuously welded bottom pan. Furnish
> heavy-duty vinyl removable liner, secured to receptacle at not less
> than 4 points by means of grommets, stainless steel hooks; minimum
> 20.0 gallon capacity. Equal to Bobrick B-275.

2.05 GRAB BARS:

> A. Stainless Steel Type: Provide grab bars with wall thickness not
> less than 18 (.050\") gage.
>
> B. Mounting: Exposed, manufacturer\'s standard flanges and anchorages.
>
> C. Clearance: 1-1/2\" clearance between wall surface and inside face
> of bar.
>
> D. Gripping Surfaces: Smooth, satin finish.
>
> E. Size: Outside diameter of 1-1/2\".

2.06 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL UNITS

> One of the following types as shown on the drawings.
>
> A. Recessed Type: Fabricate of stainless steel for nominal 4\" wall
> depth. Provide self-closing door and removable stainless steel
> receptacle of all-welded construction.
>
> B. Partition-Mounted Dual-Access Type: Fabricate of stainless steel
> equipped with adjustable flanges to permit partition mounting to
> service 2 toilet compartments. Provide self-closing door and
> all-welded stainless steel receptacle removable from one side.
>
> C. Surface-Mounted Type: Fabricate of stainless steel with seamless
> exposed walls, tightly self-closing top cover and locking bottom panel
> with continuous stainless steel piano hinge.

2.07 SOAP DISPENSERS

> Furnished by Contractor, installed by contractor.

2.08 SEAT COVER DISPENSERS

> Furnished by Contractor, installed by contractor.

2.09 MIRRORS

> A. Stainless steel framed mirrors of size shown on drawings.
>
> B. Frame to be 302/304 stainless steel meeting FS DD-M-411.
>
> C. Glass: mirror glass meeting FS DD-G-45lb type 1 class 1. Guarantee
> 15 years against silver spoilage.
>
> D. Where shelf is shown, it shall be stainless steel 18 ga. weld to
> full width of frame. Width 5 inches.

2.10 FABRICATION

> A. General: Only an unobtrusive stamped logo of manufacturer, as
> approved by COTR, is permitted on exposed face of toilet or bath
> accessory units. On either interior surface not exposed to view or
> back surface, provide additional identification by means of either a
> printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate, indicating
> manufacturer\'s name and product model number.
>
> B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise
> indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges
> rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless steel
> piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible.
>
> C. Recessed Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise
> indicated, fabricate units of all welded construction, without mitered
> corners. Hang doors or access panels with full-length stainless steel
> piano hinge. Provide anchorage which is fully concealed when unit is
> closed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

> A. Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturers\'
> instructions, using fasteners which are appropriate to substrate and
> recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level,
> firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
>
> B. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
>
> 1\. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that
> mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items.
>
> 2\. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing temporary
> labels and protection coatings.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 13120

PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> A. Pre-engineered building shall include the frame, walls, roof deck,
> bracing, connections and accessories required for a complete building.
>
> B. Walls and roof system shall be engineered with the building frame
> for complete structural integrity.

1.02 ABBREVIATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

> Refer to Section 01420, Reference Standards and Definitions for
> abbreviations and codes applicable to this work.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

> Submit for approval: Items listed in the Schedule for Submittals in
> accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA

> A. The pre-engineered metal building structure shall be designed in
> accordance with the requirements of the section entitled, \"Design
> Practices\" of the MBMA-01 Low Rise Building Systems Manual, building
> use category I.
>
> B. Allowable stresses may be increased one-third for design-load
> combinations involving wind.
>
> C. Structural steel members shall be designed in accordance with AISC
> M017 and AISI SG 673.
>
> D. Standard frame type: Clear span, rigid frame, tapered column
> tapered beam.

E. [Design Loads]{.underline}

> 1\. Live Load: 20 PSF without tributary area reduction
>
> 2\. Wind Load:

Basic Wind Velocity - 70 MPH

Importance Factor - 1

> 3\. Seismic Load; Zone - 1

Importance Factor - 1

> 4\. Collateral Load: 12 PSF
>
> Additional dead load above the dead weight of the steel structure and
> building components (light fixtures, piping, etc.).
>
> 5\. Snow Load: 10 PSF Ground snow load

F. [Maximum Allowable Deflections]{.underline}

> 1\. [Live load]{.underline}: Roof Purlins - span/180
>
> 2\. [Wind load]{.underline}: Girts - span/240

G. Design of structural steel sections and welded plate members shall be
based upon the applicable specifications of AISC Specifications for the
Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings as
determined by the manufacturer.

H. Light-gage, cold-formed structural members and exterior coverings
shall be designed based upon the applicable sections of AISI
Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members as
determined by the manufacturer.

I. Bracing in the plane of the roof and vertical wall bracing shall be
round rods or angle bracing as determined by the building manufacturer.
Bracing shall be located such that it does not interfere with window or
door openings. In walls where cross bracing would interface with
openings, portal braces or portal frames may be used.

J. End bays shall be framed with the same rigid frame as the interior
bays to facilitate future expansion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 STRUCTURAL

> A. Structural steel shall generally conform to ASTM A529, ASTM A572,
> and/or ASTM A36.
>
> B. Cold-formed structural steel shall generally conform to ASTM A570
> or A607 and shall have a minimum yield strength of 50 KSI.
>
> C. [Bolts]{.underline}. Bolts and nuts shall conform to ASTM A325 for
> high strength bolts, and ASTM A307 for common bolts.
>
> D. [Anchor Bolts]{.underline}. Anchor bolts shall be designed using
> allowable loads for A36 threaded parts per AISC.

2.02 METAL ROOFING

> A. Roofing: Roof panels shall be 24 ga. standing seam roof panels with
> minimum 3\" high rib and 24 inch minimum coverage. The clips shall
> allow for + or -1 in. of thermal movement (2 in. slot) Panels shall be
> furnished in full lengths without endlaps. Panels shall be 50 KSI
> minimum yield steel.
>
> B. Roof panel shall be sheet steel hot dip coated with aluminum or 50%
> aluminum and 50% zinc (Galvalume) and finished with KYNAR fluorocarbon
> resin oven baked over an epoxy primer for a total thickness of one
> mil. Back surface shall have a wash coat of silicon polyester over an
> epoxy primer for a total thickness of one half mil. Panel finish shall
> be warranted for 20 years against chalking, fading, blistering,
> peeling, or cracking when exposed to normal atmospheric conditions.

2.03 METAL SIDING

> A. Wall panels shall be 24 ga. with profile as shown on the drawings.
>
> B. Wall panels shall be galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A525 class
> G90. Base metal shall have a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi and
> shall conform to ASTM A446.
>
> C. Wall panel finish shall have an oven baked epoxy primer on both
> surfaces. The exposed finish shall have a silicone polyester coating
> baked over the primer for a total dry film thickness of not less than
> one mil. The unexposed side of the panel shall have a silicone
> polyester coating baked over the primer for a total thickness of one
> half mil. The finish shall be warranted for a period of 10 years
> against chalking, fading or cracking when exposed to normal
> atmospheric conditions.

2.04 INTERIOR LINER PANELS

> Interior liner panels shall be 26 ga. with profile as shown on the
> drawings. Finish shall be the same as wall panels except warranty
> period shall be 5 years.

2.05 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

> Exposed flashings and trim shall be a minimum of 26 gauge and shall be
> of the same finish as the walls. Color shall match the wall.

2.06 FASTENERS

> Fasteners shall be self-drilling structural fasteners for panel to
> secondary member connections. Panel to panel connectors shall be
> self-tapping screws. A concealed fastening system shall be used for
> roof and wall panels; however, where exposed fasteners are
> unavoidable, the fasteners shall have colored heads to match the color
> of the material being fastened.

2.07 ROOF INSULATION

> A. Thermal value: R-24
>
> B. Insulation system shall be as shown on the drawings or approved
> equal.
>
> C. Facing material: polypropylene - scrim - kraft paper
>
> D. Flame spread: 25 or less; smoke developed: 50 or less per UL723 and
> ASTM E-84.

2.08 WALL INSULATION

> A. Thermal value: R-19
>
> B. Insulation system shall be as shown on the drawings or approved
> equal.
>
> C. Facing material: polypropylene - scrim - kraft paper.
>
> D. Flame spread: 25 or less; smoke developed: 50 or less per UL723 and
> ASTM E-84.

2.09 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

> A. Door and frames shall conform to SDI 100.
>
> B. Doors and frames shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A525,
> G90.
>
> C. Preparation for hardware shall be in accordance with ANSI A115 and
> the manufacturer\'s standards. Doors and frames shall be prepared for
> the specified locksets.
>
> D. Doors shall be 3\' x 7\' x 1-3/4\".

2.10 FINISH HARDWARE

> A. Hardware shall be the manufacturer\'s standard except locksets, and
> conform to BHMA A156.1, BHMA A156.2, BHMA A156.3, BHMA A156.4, BHMA
> A156.6, and BHMA A156.8.
>
> B. Finishes shall conform to BHMA A156.18.
>
> C. Locksets shall be as shown on drawings.

2.11 WEATHERSTRIPPING

> Weatherstripping for the heads, jambs, meeting stiles, and sills of
> exterior doors shall be the manufacturer\'s standard.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FABRICATION

> A. Steel fabricators shall have been engaged in steel fabrication for
> the past 10 years, and must be a member of the Metal Building
> Manufacturers Association. Fabricators shall also have on staff a
> qualified Professional Engineer registered in the State of Alabama in
> charge of engineering.
>
> B. Fabrication shall be based on approved drawings in accordance with
> AISC Code of Standard Practice.
>
> C. Light gage cold formed sections shall be manufactured by precision
> roll or brake forming.
>
> D. Structural steel shall be detailed and fabricated in accordance
> with the MBMA Code of Standard Practice.
>
> E. The detailing and fabrication of anchor bolt assemblies shall be in
> accordance with AISC.
>
> F. All welders shall be AWS Certified in the positions and type of
> welding they will be performing during fabrication.

3.02 SHOP PAINTING

> Shop prime primary members with a lead - free rust inhibitive primer
> compatible with the finish to be applied.

3.03 ASSEMBLY

> A. Erection shall be done by a Contractor who has a minimum of 5 years
> experience in the erection of pre-engineered buildings. The building
> shall be erected in accordance with the MBMA Code of Standard
> Practice.
>
> B. Side laps for siding shall be one full corrugation.
>
> C. Accessories for roofing or siding, necessary for a complete
> installation, and as shown, shall be furnished and installed with the
> roofing and siding. Cutouts and flashing shall be provided for vents,
> ventilator ducts, roof hatches and all other penetrations as shown and
> required. Joints shall be caulked as shown and required for a
> weathertight installation. Field-cut edges of roofing and siding,
> including penetrations, shall be touched up with manufacturer\'s
> coating compatible with sheet finish.
>
> D. Doors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer\'s
> reviewed specifications, reviewed engineering document submittals, and
> as shown. Doors shall operate freely and easily, shall be properly
> aligned and balanced and shall be true and square with the openings.

3.04 TOUCH-UP PAINTING

> A. Structural steel connections and all areas damaged subsequent to
> shop painting shall be repaired, cleaned and touch-up painted, prior
> to roofing/siding installation.
>
> B. Damaged or stained areas of roofing, siding, and accessories shall
> be touched up with the manufacturer\'s coating in accordance with
> manufacturer\'s current published instructions.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 13925

AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL

> A. The type, extent, and hazard classification of each fire protection
> system will be indicated on the drawings.
>
> B. Fire protection systems shall be designed and installed by a
> contractor who is licensed by the State of Alabama for the type of
> system specified.
>
> C. Fire protection systems shall be designed and installed in
> accordance with all applicable sections of the NFPA National Fire
> Codes.
>
> D. Hydraulic calculations shall be based on available flow and
> pressure data provided by the Government.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

> A. Section 02500 Utility Excavation and Backfill
>
> B. Section 15075 Mechanical Identification

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

> All products and materials for fire protection systems shall comply
> with applicable requirements of the NFPA National Fire Codes. In
> addition, all components other than pipe and fittings shall be Factory
> Mutual approved or UL listed for fire protection applications.

2.02 EXTERIOR PIPING

> A. Exterior water supply piping and valves shall be selected in
> accordance with NFPA 24.
>
> B. Valve boxes shall be cast iron, 3-piece, adjustable, with drop
> cover marked \"Water\".
>
> C. Exterior valves, boxes, and indicator posts shall Stockham,
> Kennedy, Mueller, or equal.

2.03 INTERIOR PIPING

> A. Interior valves, pipe, fittings, and associated components shall be
> selected in accordance with NFPA 13.
>
> B. Manufacturers shall be Grinnell, Viking, Central, or equal.
>
> C. Butterfly valves shall not be used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXTERIOR PIPING

> A. Provide all trenching, excavation, shoring, pumping, and
> backfilling required for this installation.
>
> B. Provide valves and indicator posts where shown on the drawings.
>
> C. Provide a valve box for each buried valve, except post indicator
> valves.
>
> D. Provide thrust blocks, clamps, and tie rods in accordance with NFPA
> 24 to prevent pipe movement and fitting separation. Protect clamps and
> tie rods with an asphaltic coating.
>
> E. Hydrostatically test piping per NFPA 24. The Government Inspector
> shall witness testing.
>
> F. Paint exposed piping and supports per Section 09900. Color shall be
> red unless otherwise noted.
>
> G. Provide concrete splash blocks where drains, water motor gong
> outlets, and inspector's test stations are drained to grade in unpaved
> areas.

3.02 INTERIOR PIPING

> A. Provide pipe hangers and supports per NFPA 13.
>
> B. Flush and test the system per NFPA 13. Testing shall be witnessed
> by the Government Inspector.
>
> C. Where piping is exposed to view in finished areas, and where
> otherwise noted on the drawings, paint piping and supports per Section
> 09900. Color shall be red unless otherwise noted.

D. Furnish to the Government a stock of spare sprinkler heads with
appropriate wrenches and storage cabinet, in accordance with NFPA 13.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15050

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> This section applies to, and is a component part of, each section in
> Division 15, Mechanical.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

> Furnish all labor, material, equipment, and services to construct,
> install, and test the complete mechanical systems and related work as
> indicated and specified.

1.03 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATONS

> A. It is the intent of these specifications and the contract drawings
> to provide a complete and workable facility.
>
> B. Design drawings are diagrammatic and do not show all offsets,
> bends, elbows, or other specific elements which may be required for
> proper installation of the work. Such work shall be verified at the
> site.
>
> C. Except where shown in dimensional detail, the locations of
> plumbing, mechanical equipment, ducts, piping, and fittings are only
> approximate; the exact locations shall be field determined, subject to
> approval.
>
> D. The physical dimensions of equipment indicated are approximate.
> Before installing any equipment, obtain the exact requirements for the
> items furnished and install plumbing, piping, fittings, supports, and
> other items of the correct size and type for the equipment to be
> installed.
>
> E. Plumbing and piping sizes and equipment ratings shall be taken as
> minimums, and shall not be reduced without approval.

1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS

> A. Equipment design, fabrication, testing, installation and system
> performance shall, unless shown or specified otherwise, comply with
> the referenced publications to the extent indicated by the references
> thereto.
>
> B. References to codes and standards shall be understood to mean the
> latest revision in force at the time of contract award.

1.05 COORDINATION AND INTERFERENCES

> A. Coordinate the work of the different trades so that interference
> between piping, equipment, structural, and electrical work is avoided.
>
> B. All necessary offsets in piping and all fittings, etc., required to
> properly install the work shall be furnished complete in place without
> additional cost to the Government.
>
> C. If interference develops, the COTR will decide which equipment
> shall be relocated, regardless of which was installed first.

1.07 APPROVAL REQUIREMENTS

> A. Except as otherwise specified, approval of materials and equipment
> will be based on manufacturer\'s published data. The Contractor shall
> submit for approval, proof that the items furnished conform to the
> specified requirements as indicated below and in Section 01330,
> SUBMITTALS.
>
> B. UL Compliance Requirements
>
> 1\. Where materials and equipment are specified to conform to the
> standards of the Underwriter\'s Laboratories, the label of, or listing
> with re-examination in, UL PUB. REF. NO. 2, and UL PUB. REF. No. 3
> will be acceptable as sufficient evidence of conformance with UL
> requirements.
>
> 2\. In lieu of such label or listing, the Contractor may submit a
> written certificate from any nationally recognized testing agency,
> adequately equipped and competent to perform such services, stating
> that the items have been tested and conform to the specified
> requirements. Certificate shall include a description of the methods
> of testing used.
>
> C. Where materials or equipment are specified to be constructed and/or
> tested in accordance with specific industry or government standards, a
> manufacturer\'s certificate of compliance for each item will be
> acceptable as proof of compliance.
>
> D. Conformance with specified standards does not free the item from
> being in compliance with any other requirements of these
> specifications.

1.08 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

All equipment and materials stored at the site shall be fully protected
from damage, dirt, debris, and weather per Section 01600, PRODUCT
REQUIREMENTS.

1.09 PREVENTION OF CORROSION

> A. All metallic materials shall be corrosion resistant, or shall be
> protected against corrosion.
>
> B. Equipment enclosures shall be given rust-inhibiting treatment and
> standard finish by the manufacturer.
>
> C. Aluminum shall not be used in contact with earth, and where
> connected to dissimilar metal, shall be protected by approved fittings
> and treatment.
>
> D. All ferrous parts such as anchors, bolts, braces, boxes, bodies,
> clamps, fittings, guards, nuts, pins, rods, shims, thimbles, washers,
> and miscellaneous parts not of stainless steel or nonferrous materials
> shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 or ASTM A153.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 STANDARD PRODUCTS

> Mechanical materials and equipment to be provided under this contract
> shall be standard catalog products of manufacturers regularly engaged
> in the manufacture of the products, except as herein modified, and
> shall duplicate material and equipment that have been in satisfactory
> use for at least 2 years.

2.02 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

> Mechanical material and equipment shall meet the requirements
> indicated and specified, and shall be suitable for the installation
> shown. Where two or more units of the same equipment class are
> furnished, the equipment shall be from the same manufacturer and shall
> be interchangeable. All materials and equipment shall be new and free
> from defects.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

> A. Install all materials and equipment in accordance with the
> requirements of the contract drawings and approved recommendations of
> the manufacturers. If the two conflict, request direction from the A/E
> by filing a Request for Information (RFI).
>
> B. The installation shall be so made that there is no degradation of
> fire ratings of walls, floors, or ceilings.
>
> C. Install emergency switches and alarms in conspicuous and accessible
> locations.
>
> D. Install equipment with manufacturer\'s recommended clearances so
> that all parts requiring service are accessible.

3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING

> A. Install work in such a manner, and at such time as will require a
> minimum of cutting and patching of the building structure.
>
> B. All holes in or through existing masonry walls and floors in
> exposed locations shall be drilled or sawed. The use of a jack hammer
> will be permitted only where specifically approved. The edges of
> trenches in concrete floors shall be sawcut. Material between cuts may
> be broken up with a jackhammer to facilitate removal.
>
> C. Do not cut, or weld to, building structural members unless
> indicated on the drawings, or approved in advance by the A/E.

3.03 CLEANING

> A. Exposed surfaces of piping and equipment which have become covered
> with dirt, plaster, or other material during handling and construction
> shall be thoroughly cleaned before such surfaces are prepared for
> final finish/painting or are enclosed within the building structure.
>
> B. Before final acceptance, all mechanical equipment including piping,
> ductwork, and fixtures shall be clean and free from dirt, debris, oil,
> grease, and finger marks.

3.05 DEMOLITION

> A. The extent of piping and ductwork removal shall be as shown on
> drawings. Remove piping, duct, hangers, and attachments to points
> shown and cap or blank off.
>
> B. Where removed pipes pass through a wall, floor, or ceiling, patch
> holes, refinish, and repaint to match existing construction.
>
> C. Remove equipment as shown on drawings, including all associated
> anchor bolts, pads, hangers, etc.
>
> D. All removed materials and equipment not designated to be salvaged
> by the Government shall be disposed of at no additional cost to the
> Government.
>
> E. Removed materials and equipment designated for salvage shall be
> turned over to the Government at the location specified by the
> Government Inspector. All piping, electrical, and ductwork connections
> on salvaged equipment shall be capped or sealed prior to turn-over.
> Salvaged equipment shall be protected from the weather.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15051

WELDING FOR MECHANICAL UTILITY PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> A. This section specifies the requirements for welding of carbon steel
> and corrosion resistant (stainless) steel pipe for mechanical utility
> services.
>
> B. Qualified welders and welding procedures are required for all work,
> unless otherwise noted on the drawings, or in other sections of these
> specifications.

1.02 WELDING PERMIT

> Prior to performing any welding, the Contractor shall obtain a welding
> permit from the MSFC Facilities Office.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

> SECTION 15052 Radiographic Inspection of Welded Piping

1.04 PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION

> A. Except as noted in paragraph 1.05 below, Welding Procedures (SD-20)
> shall be submitted for approval [prior]{.underline} to procedure
> qualification testing.
>
> B. Procedures shall conform to applicable regulatory codes including
> AWS D1.1, ASTM A423, ASTM A370, and The ASME Boiler and Pressure
> Vessel Code, Section IX.
>
> C. Welding procedure qualification testing shall be performed by the
> Contractor at no cost to the Government. The procedure testing shall
> include all types of welding to be used by the Contractor. Procedure
> Qualification Records (SD-21) and radiographs (SD-18) shall be
> submitted for approval.
>
> D. Copies of the approved procedures shall be retained by the
> Contractor, and shall be available for examination by the Government
> Inspector and other authorized personnel. Deviation from the approved
> procedure will not be permitted without resubmittal of the procedure
> for approval, as specified above.
>
> E. No welding shall be performed until the Contractor has received the
> approved procedures.
>
> F. Approval of the procedures does not relieve the Contractor of
> responsibility to meet the required quality of the welding.

1.05 WELDER AND WELDING OPERATOR QUALIFICATION

> A. Before a welder or welding operator is assigned to do any work he
> shall pass qualification tests using the same base metals, equipment,
> positions, and procedures that will be encountered in his work.
>
> B. All welders and welding operators employed shall be qualified for
> each project, except that a prior qualification may be submitted for
> approval provided that:
>
> 1\. The qualifications submitted comply with requirements specified
> herein.
>
> 2\. Qualification tests have been taken within 6 months.
>
> 3\. The welder or welding operator has been employed as a certified
> welder on work for MSFC within the past 60 days.
>
> C. Qualification tests to weld piping shall conform to the
> requirements of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX. All
> welds shall be full penetration welds. Backing rings are not
> permitted.
>
> D. Materials for pipe joint test coupons shall be as follows:
>
> 1\. Wall thickness less than .25 inches- fabricate from sections of 6
> inch or larger pipe of the material, wall thickness, and end
> preparation to be used on the job.
>
> 2\. Wall thickness .25 inch and greater -fabricate from 6 to 8 inch
> long sections of pipe, .760 inch minimum wall thickness, of the
> material to be used on the job.
>
> E. For each type of welding to be performed, the welder or welding
> operator shall fabricate test coupons as follows:
>
> 1\. Steel stencil stamp the numbers 1-4 at 90- degree intervals around
> the test sections. Begin welds at #1.
>
> 2\. Weld one coupon each in the \"2-G\" and \"5-G\" positions, or weld
> a single coupon in the \"6-G\" position.
>
> a\. For the \"2-G\" test, the pipe axis shall be fixed in the vertical
> position.
>
> b\. For the \"5-G\" test, the pipe axis shall be fixed in the
> horizontal position, with the #1 weld position on the bottom.
>
> c\. For the \"6-G\" test, the pipe axis shall be fixed at 45- degrees
> from vertical, with the #1 weld position on the bottom.
>
> F. The Government Inspector and COTR reserve the right to witness all
> qualification tests. The Contractor shall notify the Government
> Inspector in advance, and shall not proceed with testing until the
> witnesses are present, or until the right to witness testing has been
> waived.
>
> G. All test coupons shall be inspected and evaluated by an independent
> testing agency. Testing and reporting requirements are specified in
> Section 01330, SUBMITTALS, under submittal descriptions SD-21 and
> SD-22.
>
> H. Welder Qualification Reports (SD-22) and radiographs (SD-18) shall
> be submitted on each welder and welding operator for approval.

1.06 WELDER\'S CERTIFICATES

> A. Upon successful completion of the applicable qualification tests,
> each welder shall be provided with a certificate by the Contractor,
> certifying to the type of welding for which he is qualified, the code
> under which he is qualified, and the firm or individual certifying the
> qualification tests.
>
> B. The certificate and a copy of the approved Welder Qualification
> Report shall be kept on file at the job site by the Contractor, and
> shall be presented for examination upon request of the Government
> Inspector or Contracting Officer's Representative. The certificate
> will remain in effect for the duration of the job, except when
> cancellation is required due to questionable workmanship.

1.07 WELDER\'S IDENTIFICATION

> A. The Contractor shall assign each welder an identifying number,
> letter, or symbol which shall be used by the welder to identify all
> welds made by him. For identification, the welder shall lightly stamp
> his symbol adjacent to the weld by means of a metal stamp.
>
> B. When more than one welder is employed to complete a weld, the stamp
> for the stringer pass welder shall be located on the left side of
> vertical welds, and on the bottom side of horizontal welds.

1.08 RECERTIFICATION OF WELDERS

> A. The Contracting Officer may, at any time after initial
> qualification, require the requalification of any welder doing
> questionable work.
>
> B. Testing required for requalification shall be conducted at no
> additional expense to the Government.
>
> C. If the welder fails the requalification test, he shall be removed
> from the project.

1.09 WELDING PROCESS ABBREVIATIONS

> A. SMAW = Shielded Metal Arc Welding
>
> B. GTAW = Gas Tungsten Arc Welding, also known as \"TIG\"
>
> C. GMAW = Gas Metal Arc Welding , also known as \"MIG\"

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 BASE MATERIALS

> Base (pipe) materials for each service shall be as specified on the
> drawings, or in the applicable sections of these specifications.

2.02 ELECTRODES AND FILLER METALS

> Electrodes and filler metals for each process shall be selected in
> accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.

2.03 SHIELD AND PURGE GAS

> Shield and purge gas for GMAW and GTAW processes shall be high purity
> welding grade argon.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

> A. Unless otherwise noted, all pipe welds shall be full penetration.
>
> B. The use of backing rings will not be permitted.
>
> C. Safety Precautions:
>
> 1\. All necessary precautions shall be taken and maintained to
> minimize the possibility of injury to personnel and existing
> facilities.
>
> 2\. Confined areas shall be ventilated where required. Shields and
> drapes shall be provided as eye protection, and to control air
> currents and drafts.
>
> 3\. All items in areas where welding is performed shall be protected
> from damage by weld spatter.

3.02 MOISTURE CONTROL

> A. Electrode moisture control shall conform to the applicable
> requirements of AWS D1.1, except that the dry and baking period for
> low-hydrogen type electrodes shall be for two hours at 450 to 500
> degrees F.
>
> B. At the time of removal from sealed container, low-hydrogen
> electrodes shall contain not more than 0.8% moisture by weight.
>
> C. The Contractor has the option of storing the electrodes in a
> holding oven at 250 degrees F in lieu of the specified requirements.
>
> D. The electrode manufacturer shall furnish moisture control
> recommendations. If these recommendations are more stringent than
> those specified above, the Contractor shall conform to the
> manufacturer\'s recommendations at no additional cost to the
> Government.
>
> E. All filler metals shall be properly identified, and stored in dry
> areas or containers.

3.03 JOINT PREPARATION

> A. The work to be welded shall be accurately cut to size and shape by
> mechanical methods.
>
> B. Flame cutting will be permitted, provided that the cut is ground
> back to remove oxidation before welding.
>
> C. Machine-beveled pipe ends shall be protected with sheet metal caps,
> or other approved means, during transit and storage.
>
> D. Joint preparation and fit-up for all piping shall be in accordance
> with ANSI/ASME B31.1.
>
> E. Pipe ends shall be securely held in alignment during welding, but
> shall not be forced into alignment.

3.04 CLEANING

> A. Prior to fit-up, the surfaces to be joined shall be thoroughly
> cleaned to remove all foreign material, and degreased to remove all
> oil or other hydrocarbons.
>
> B. Scale or surface oxides shall be removed by grinding, wire
> brushing, or by rubbing with an abrasive cloth.
>
> C. After welding operations are completed, the Contractor shall clean
> all pipes, vessels, containers, etc., of all pieces of welding rods,
> trimmings, filings, and other pieces of metal and trash.
>
> D. Final passes of all welds shall be thoroughly cleaned.

3.05 WORKMANSHIP

> A. Deposited metal shall be thoroughly fused with the base metal at
> all sections of the weld.
>
> B. Remove all slag, flux, spatter, cracks, blow-holes, inclusions,
> surface oxides, and foreign matter from each bead before depositing
> additional weld metal. Flame cleaning will not be permitted. Remove
> craters and cracks by grinding the full width of the puddle.
>
> C. Heat-sink (suck-back) or burn-through in the root pass shall be
> controlled to avoid concavity and excessive metal beyond the root side
> of the weld joint. The deposited metal shall not project more than
> 3/32 inch beyond the inside wall of the pipe.
>
> D. Mechanical peening of welds will not be permitted.
>
> E. The finished weld shall have an even and regular overlay, free from
> undercuts, and merging smoothly into the base metal.

3.06 HEAT TREATMENT

> A. All welds on carbon steel pipe with wall thickness exceeding 3/4
> inch (or if otherwise required by the approved procedure) shall be
> preheated and stress relieved in accordance with MSFC Local
> Specification Section 15958, \"Heat Treating and Thermal Stress
> Relieving.\" Copies of this document will be provided to the
> Contractor by the A/E upon request.
>
> B. Heat treatment procedures shall be qualified in conjunction with
> the related welding procedures.
>
> C. Preheating and annealing are not required for stainless steel
> piping unless specifically noted on the drawings, or on approved
> welding procedures.

3.07 INERT GAS SHIELD AND PURGE

> A. Shield GTAW and GMAW welding with argon gas at flow rates
> sufficient to create an inert envelope around the molten metal.
>
> B. Take care to avoid drafts and air movements which may disrupt the
> protective atmosphere around the arc and cause porosity in the weld.
>
> C. Provide an argon gas purge inside piping when GTAW or GMAW root
> passes are being welded.

3.08 APPLICATION OF WELDING PROCESSES

> A. Welding for carbon and stainless steel piping may be accomplished
> by either SMAW, GTAW, or GMAW processes, except as specified below.
>
> B. Piping with wall thickness .250 inch and greater, and piping to be
> cleaned to Class I, II, or III, shall be welded by one of the
> following processes.
>
> 1\. GTAW root and filler passes.
>
> 2\. GMAW root and filler passes.
>
> 3\. GTAW or GMAW root pass with SMAW filler passes.

3.09 EXAMINATION AND ACCEPTANCE

> A. When noted on the drawings or in other sections of these
> specifications, the Contractor shall provide radiographic inspection
> services.
>
> B. In addition, the Government reserves the right to inspect welding,
> at its own expense, by any or all of the following methods.
>
> 1\. Dye Penetrant Inspection
>
> 2\. Radiographic Inspection
>
> 3\. Magnetic Particle Inspection
>
> 4\. Ultrasonic Inspection
>
> a.. The Contractor shall supervise the preparation of reference blocks
> from material and labor furnished by the Government. The blocks will
> be of the same material, thickness, and joint design, and shall be
> fabricated by the same procedure as the weldments to be inspected.
>
> b\. The reference blocks shall be used to adjust the sensitivity level
> of the equipment, and shall be compatible with the degree of weld
> discontinuity established by mutual agreement at the outset of each
> inspection job.
>
> c\. At the completion of the work the test blocks will become the
> property of the Government, and shall be delivered to the Contracting
> Officer or his representative.
>
> C. Final decisions about the acceptance or rejection of welds will
> rest with the Contracting Officer, based on the requirements of the
> contract documents and applicable industry standards.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15052

RADIOGRAPHIC INSPECTION OF WELDED PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> A. This section specifies the requirements for radiographic inspection
> of welded piping in all mechanical utility services.
>
> B. The degree of radiographic inspection for each service will be
> identified on the drawings, or in other sections of these
> specifications.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

Section 15051 Welding for Mechanical Utility Piping

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NONE)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL NOTES AND REQUIREMENTS

> A. The Contractor shall notify, schedule, and coordinate all X-ray
> work with the Government Inspector.
>
> B. The Contractor shall maintain all the necessary precautions and
> safeguards to minimize the possibility of radiation injury to
> personnel.
>
> C. When required, the Contractor shall, at no additional cost to the
> Government, make test shots to prove that the technique to be used
> will be satisfactory.

3.02 RADIOGRAPHIC INSPECTION TECHNIQUES

> A. The welds to be inspected shall be radiographed by an X-ray or
> gamma ray technique which has sufficient sensitivity to indicate the
> features of the penetrameter.
>
> B. The dimensions of the film shall conform to standard industry
> practice, and be suitable for the size of the weld and the diameter of
> the fabrication to be inspected.
>
> C. Radiographic inspection shall be performed in accordance with ANSI
> B31.1 and the references therein (namely, Section V of the ASME Boiler
> and Pressure Vessel Code). In addition to the standards for weld
> acceptability, all radiographic requirements of Article 2, Section V,
> shall be strictly adhered to.
>
> D. Welds in pipe or tubing up to 2-1/2 inch diameter shall be X-rayed
> vertically and horizontally at angles that are sufficient to show the
> entire weld area. The minimum number of radiographs shall be two at 90
> degrees for superimposed radiographs or three at 120 degrees for
> elyptical radiographs.
>
> E. Welds in material larger than 2-1/2 inch diameter shall be X-rayed
> in sequence around the circumference of the fabrication.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION OF WELDS

All welds that require radiographic inspection shall be permanently
identified with the prefix \"X\" and the assigned number from the weld
map. The Contractor shall assign weld numbers beginning with the number
1, and continuing in a numerical sequence that includes all welds for
the subject contract. The piping shall be marked with the weld
identification numbers as follows:

> A. Material having a wall thickness of 3/16 inch and up shall be steel
> stencil stamped adjacent to the weld. Weld identifying stamps shall
> not be sharp edged (V-tool), but shall be rounded edge,
> non-stress-inducing type.
>
> B. Material having a wall thickness of 1/8 inch and less shall be
> temporarily identified with a non-soluble ink. After completion of all
> radiographic inspection, the Contractor shall permanently identify the
> approved welds with a stainless steel tag (3/8\" x 1\" x 1/16\"). The
> tag shall be steel stencil stamped with the assigned weld number, and
> tack welded adjacent to the weld.
>
> D. All sectional film views of welds shall be marked in non-soluble
> ink around the circumference of the weld joint alphabetically (i.e.,
> \"A-B\", \"B-C\", \"C-D\", \"D-E\", etc., returning to view \"A\").

4.  EVALUATION

> A. Developed film showing water marks, blemishes, distortion,
> darkness, or any other condition that interferes with the
> interpretation of the weld will not be accepted.
>
> B. Acceptability of welding shall be determined in accordance with the
> standards referenced in Section 15051, "Welding for Mechanical Utility
> Piping."
>
> C. Production and evaluation of radiographs shall be performed by an
> independent testing agency regularly engaged in such work. The testing
> agency's report shall include all pertinent information regarding
> welds that have been judged unacceptable.

D.  All radiographs, including those that show weld defects, shall be
    submitted to the Government. Films shall be marked to identify the
    inspection agency's name, the date, the weld and view numbers, and
    the piece or part number (if more than one requires inspection).

> E. Final acceptance of all radiographs will be determined by the
> Government.

3.05 PROGRESSIVE EXAMINATION

When random radiography (i.e. less than 100% inspection) reveals
defective welds, the progressive examination criteria of ANSI B31.3
shall be followed.

3.06 DEFECTIVE WELDS

> A. Repair or replace defective welds and provide additional
> radiographic inspection at no additional cost to the Government.
>
> B. Identify X-ray film for such welds with the prefix \"R\" added to
> the weld number.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15060

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

Work specified in this section includes the following:

> A. Hangers, supports, supporting elements, and structural attachments
> for mechanical piping and tubing.
>
> B. Pipe sleeves, seals, and escutcheons.
>
> C. Concrete support pads for mechanical equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 STANDARDS

> A. Type numbers specified below refer to those identified in
> Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSSP) Standard SP-69.
>
> B. Hangers, supports, and attachments shall be Factory Mutual approved
> or UL listed.

2.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPE AND TUBING

> A. [Pipe Hangers]{.underline}: Malleable iron or carbon steel,
> adjustable, Type 1 (Clevis) or Type 6 (Split ring); Grinnell Figures
> 104, 260,and 300, or equal.
>
> B. [Vertical pipe supports]{.underline}: Riser clamp, Type 8, black
> carbon steel; Grinnell Figure 261 or equal.
>
> C. [Trapeze hangers]{.underline}: For multiple parallel piping -
> carbon steel channel, properly sized to support the intended load;
> Grinnell Figure 46 or equal.
>
> D. [Roller supports]{.underline}: Adjustable, cast iron roll and
> sockets, steel roll rod, Type 41; Grinnell Figures 175 and 177, or
> equal.
>
> E. [Tubing supports]{.underline}: 12 gage steel channel, 1-5/8\"
> square, factory applied finish, with compatible tubing clamps;
> Unistrut or equal.
>
> F. [Tubing cushion]{.underline}: Elastomeric tubing wrap for vibration
> and temperature isolation, for use with tubing clamps; Unistrut
> \"Unicushion\" P-2600 or equal.
>
> G. [High-pressure tubing clamps]{.underline}: Interlocking split-block
> type, aluminum alloy body; as manufactured by the V-G Interlocking
> Tube Clamp Company or equal.
>
> H. [Hydraulic tubing clamps]{.underline}: Galvanized steel clamps with
> molded resilient elastomer inserts; as manufactured by Hydrazorb, ZSI
> "Cush-a-Clamp," Hydro-craft, or equal.
>
> I. [Insulation protection shields]{.underline}: Type 40, galvanized
> carbon steel, minimum 18 gage, minimum 12 inch length, for use with
> pipe hangers; Grinnell Figure 167 or equal.
>
> J. [Insulation protection saddles]{.underline}: Type 39A or 39B,
> steel, minimum 12 inch length, for use on hot pipes with roller
> supports; Grinnell Figures 160 thru 166A, or equal.
>
> K. Other types of hangers and supports may be submitted for approval.

2.03 SUPPORTING ELEMENTS

> A. [Threaded rod]{.underline}: Carbon steel, threaded one end, both
> ends, or continuous; Grinnell Figures 140 and 146 or equal.
>
> B. [Turnbuckle]{.underline}: Forged steel, Type 13; Grinnell Figure
> 230 or equal.
>
> C. [Clevis]{.underline}: Forged steel, Type 14; Grinnell Figure 299 or
> equal.
>
> D. [Angle brackets]{.underline}: Carbon steel, welded construction,
> type selected according to the supported load; Grinnell Figures 194,
> 195, and 199 or equal.

2.04 STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS

> A. [Welded attachments]{.underline}: Carbon steel, Type 22 (Grinnell
> Figure 66), Type 57 (Grinnell Figure 55), or equal.
>
> B. Beam Attachments
>
> 1\. [C-Clamps]{.underline}: For piping 1 1/2\" and smaller, black
> malleable iron body with hardened steel set screw; Type 23, with
> retaining clip for I-beams or locknut for channel; Grinnell Figures 86
> and 87 or equal.
>
> 2\. [Beam Clamps]{.underline}: Malleable iron, center loading, Type
> 21, 28, 29, or 30; Grinnell Figures 131, 228, 229, and 292 or equal.
>
> C. Masonry Attachments
>
> 1\. [Concrete inserts]{.underline}: Cast-in-place, single point,
> carbon steel, Type 18, Grinnell Figure 285 or equal.
>
> 2\. [Concrete inserts]{.underline}: Cast-in-place, continuous, carbon
> steel; Unistrut Series P-3200 or equal.
>
> 3\. [Anchor bolts]{.underline}: Cast-in-place, carbon steel, with
> steel pipe sleeve; B-Line Figure B3022 or equal.
>
> 4\. [Concrete anchors]{.underline}: For cast concrete; self-drilling,
> wedge or expansion sleeve type; Phillips \"Red-head\" or equal.
>
> 5\. [Masonry anchors]{.underline}: For brick and concrete block, full
> length expansion sleeve type; ITW Ramset \"Dynabolt\" or equal.

2.05 SUGGESTED MANUFACTURERS

> A. Pipe hangers, supports, supporting elements and attachments shall
> be as manufactured by ITT Grinnell, Michigan Hanger Co., Elcen,
> B-line, Unistrut, or approved equal.
>
> B. Masonry attachments shall be as manufactured by Phillips, ITW
> Ramset, HILTI, Molly Fastening Systems, Rawl-Plug Co., or approved
> equal.

2.06 SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL

> Supplementary steel for pipe and equipment supports shall be ASTM A36
> structural shapes or commercial strut systems (Unistrut or equal).

2.07 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

> A. Vibration isolators for mechanical equipment shall be
> rubber-in-shear or spring type as manufactured by Vibration Mounting
> and Controls Inc. or equal.
>
> B. Unless otherwise specified, vibration isolators for mechanical
> equipment shall be selected and provided by the equipment manufacturer
> for the specific type of installation indicated.

2.08 PIPE SLEEVES AND RELATED PRODUCTS

> A. [Sleeves for masonry walls and floors]{.underline}: Standard weight
> PVC or galvanized steel pipe.
>
> B. [Escutcheons, interior, up to 4\" NPS]{.underline}: One or
> two-piece, chromed steel, sized to conceal the pipe penetration.
>
> C. [Escutcheons, exterior, and interior above 4\" NPS]{.underline}:
> Cast iron, black (interior) or galvanized (exterior) with set screws;
> Grinnell Figure 395 or equal.
>
> D. [Wall sleeve seals:]{.underline} Watertight mechanical compression
> seal consisting of EPDM rubber links with glass reinforced plastic
> pressure plates and galvanized steel bolting; MetraFlex "MetraSeal" or
> equal.

2.09 EQUIPMENT PADS

> A. Concrete for equipment pads shall have a minimum compressive
> strength of 3000 psi at 28 days.
>
> B. Reinforcement shall be 6x6 W1.4xW1.4 steel wire mesh, or #4 rebar
> laid on 6 inch centers each way.
>
> C. Equipment pads shall have a minimum height of 4 inches above grade
> or finished floor, and shall be sized to provide a minimum 6 inch
> clear margin all around the equipment, unless otherwise noted.
>
> D. Outdoor pads shall extend a minimum of 4 inches below grade, except
> as noted in paragraph 3.05.
>
> E. Provide a 3/4 inch, 45 degree chamfer on exposed edges.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

> A. Support horizontal piping within one foot of each elbow, and at
> maximum intervals specified below.
>
> 1\. [Steel Pipe]{.underline}

Nominal Maximum Hanger rod

> [Pipe Size Spacing, Ft.]{.underline} [Diam., In.]{.underline}

1/2 6 3/8

3/4 to1-1/2 8 3/8

2 & 2 -1/2 10 3/8 & 1/2

3 12 1/2

4 14 5/8

6 18 3/4

8 20 7/8 10 & 12 22 7/8

> 2\. [Copper Pipe (Water Tube)]{.underline}

Nominal Maximum Hanger rod

[Size, In. Spacing, Ft.]{.underline} [Diam., In.]{.underline}

1/2-1 6 3/8

1 1/4-2 1/2 8 3/8

3 10 1/2

4 12 1/2

> 3\. [PVC Pipe]{.underline} - Support spacing shall be as shown below.
> For temperatures other than those listed, use spacing for the next
> highest listed temperature. Spacing is shown in feet.

FLUID TEMPERATURE, oF

  ---------------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
  PIPE SIZE        40      60      80      100     120     140     160

  1/2 & 3/4        5.5     5.5     5       4.5     4       3       1.5

  1 & 1-1/4        6.5     6       5.5     5.5     4.5     3.5     2

  1-1/2 & 2        7       6.5     6       5.5     5       3.5     2

  2-1/2 & 3        8       7.5     7       6.5     5.5     4.5     2.5

  4                8.5     8       7.5     7       6       4.5     2.5

  6                9       8.5     8       7.5     6.5     5       3

  8 & 10           10.5    10      9       8.5     7       5.5     3

  12               11      10.5    10      9       8       6       3.5
  ---------------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------

> B. Support piping so that connected equipment does not bear piping
> loads.
>
> C. Provide additional supports near heavy components (valves, filters,
> in-line pumps, etc.) to minimize load on pipe.
>
> D. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2-inch clear space between
> finished covering and adjacent work.
>
> E. Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 1-1/2 inch minimum
> after piping is erected.
>
> F. Size hangers on insulated piping to accommodate insulation. Use
> galvanized steel shields to protect the insulation. Where the
> insulation is soft and will not support the piping without being
> crushed, install wood blocking or rigid insulation in the shield.
>
> G. Where several pipes can be installed parallel and at the same
> elevation, trapeze hangers may be used.
>
> H. Where possible, support riser piping independent of connected
> horizontal piping. In multi-story buildings, support risers at each
> floor.
>
> I. Hangers for uninsulated copper piping shall be copper plated or
> plastic coated.

3.02 TUBING SUPPORTS

> A. Support stainless steel tubing (except hydraulics) within one foot
> of bends, elbows, and tees, and at maximum intervals specified below.
>
> Nominal Horizontal Vertical
>
> [Tube O.D.]{.underline} [Tubing Runs]{.underline} [Tubing
> Runs]{.underline}
>
> Up to 3/8" 4 Ft 5 Ft
>
> 1/2"-3/4" 6 Ft 7 Ft
>
> 1" 9 Ft 10 Ft
>
> B. Where multiple tubing runs are supported together on common
> supports, the spacing shall be as specified for the smallest tubing
> size supported.
>
> C. "V-G" clamps are [required]{.underline} only if specified on the
> drawings. However, they may be used at the Contractor's discretion for
> supporting all tubing except hydraulics.
>
> D. Support hydraulic tubing with steel strut and hydraulic clamps.
> Support spacing shall be as follows.
>
> 1\. Spacing shall not exceed 60 tubing diameters.
>
> 2\. On straight runs of tubing exceeding 20 feet, vary the spacing
> between supports by approximately 15% to break up and change vibration
> frequency.
>
> 3\. Support tubing as close as possible to each side of bends.
>
> 4\. Support tubing within one foot of connections to flexible hoses.
>
> 5\. Support tubing adjacent to all in-line valves.

3.03 CONCRETE INSERTS

> Provide a 1-foot (minimum) length of 1/2-inch rebar to anchor each
> single point insert.

3.04 SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL

> Welding of supplementary steel shall be in accordance with the
> procedures described in AWS D1.1. Welder qualification testing is not
> required unless noted on the drawings or Schedule of Submittals.

3.05 PIPE SLEEVES

> A. Provide sleeves where piping penetrates walls or floors with the
> following exceptions.
>
> 1\. Sleeves are not required where penetrations are core drilled
> through cast concrete.
>
> 2\. Sleeves are not required for interior partition (frame) walls
> unless indicated on the drawings to preserve fire rating.
>
> 3\. Where piping passes through new concrete slab floors, 1/2 inch
> thick closed cell foam insulation, extending two inches above and
> below slab, may be used in lieu of a sleeve.
>
> B. Fill voids in pipe sleeves as follows:
>
> 1\. Interior fire rated walls and floors - provide a fire barrier
> system per the drawing details and Section 07270, "Firestopping."

2.  Exterior walls above grade - pack with fiberglass insulation and
    seal ends with a minimum 1/2 inch depth of silicone sealant.

> 3\. Exterior walls below grade - provide a mechanical seal per
> paragraph 2.08.D.
>
> C. Provide escutcheons where piping penetrates ceilings, walls, or
> floors into finished areas, or to visible areas of the building
> exterior.

3.06 EQUIPMENT PADS

> A. When pouring a pad on an existing concrete slab, roughen the
> surface of the slab to improve bonding with the new concrete. Provide
> concrete anchors or 1/2-inch rebar dowels on 24-inch centers (maximum)
> to anchor the new pad to the existing slab.
>
> B. When pouring a pad in an asphalt paved area, sawcut and remove the
> asphalt in the new pad location. Compact, and pour new concrete on top
> of, the existing gravel subbase.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15075

MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1. GENERAL

1.01 This section specifies the products and methods for identification
of mechanical systems.

1.02 Piping identification systems shall be in accordance with ANSI
A13.1.

PART 2. PRODUCTS

2.01 All materials used in mechanical identification shall be waterproof
and corrosion resistant.

2.02 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

> A. [Pipe markers]{.underline} - Vinyl, self-adhering; Seton, Emed, or
> equal.
>
> B. [Pipe markers]{.underline} - Snap-on type, preformed, acrylic
> plastic with clear overlaminate; Seton \"Setmark\", Emed
> \"Kwik-koil\", or equal.
>
> C. [Valve tags]{.underline} - Brass or aluminum, 1-1/2 inch minimum
> diameter, stamped or engraved, attached to the valve with #12 AWG wire
> (galvanized or stainless steel) or with chain (galvanized or brass).
>
> D. [Equipment tags]{.underline} - Engraved laminated plastic, white
> letters on black, minimum 3 inch x 1 inch tag with 1/4-inch lettering,
> unless otherwise noted.

E.  [Underground Warning Tapes:]{.underline}

F.  For [metallic]{.underline} piping - color coded polyethylene film, 6
    inches wide, with legend identifying the utility below; Seton, Emed,
    or equal.

> 2\. For [non-metallic]{.underline} piping - color coded metallic foil
> tape, 6 inches wide, with legend identifying the utility below; Seton,
> Emed, or equal.

PART 3. EXECUTION

3.01 PIPING IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS

> A. Identify contents and flow direction of all new piping unless
> otherwise indicated. Acceptable methods of identification are as
> follows.

1\. Pipe and covering less than 3/4-inch O.D.

a\. Vinyl pipe markers adhered to non-ferrous plates. Suspend the plates
from the piping with galvanized or stainless steel wire.

b\. Paint color bands on the pipe. At each band, provide a non-ferrous
plate with a stenciled identifying legend. Suspend plate from piping
with galvanized or stainless steel wire.

2\. Pipe and covering 3/4-inch O.D. and larger.

a\. Snap-on pipe markers.

b\. Vinyl pipe markers secured at each end with pressure sensitive tape
wrapped completely around the pipe and overlapped.

c\. Painted color band with stenciled legend.

B. Minimum dimensions of identification markings shall be as follows.

O.D. of Pipe Band Letter

[and Covering]{.underline} [Length]{.underline} [Height]{.underline}

3/4\" to1-1/4\" 8\" 1/2\"

1-1/2\" to 2\" 8\" 3/4\"

2-1/2\"to 6\" 12\" 1-1/4\"

8\" to 10\" 24\" 2-1/2\"

over 10\" 32\" 3-1/2\"

C. Color coding of identification markings shall be as follows.

Band Legend

[Service]{.underline} [Legend]{.underline} [Color]{.underline}
[Color]{.underline}

Potable water, cold Potable Water Green White

Domestic Cold Water

Potable water, hot Potable Water, Hot Yellow Black

Domestic Hot Water

Industrial water Industrial Water Green White

Fire protection water Fire Protection Water Red White

> Sprinkler Water

Chilled water Chilled Water Supply Green White

Chilled Water Return

Heating water Hot Water Supply Yellow Black

> Hot Water Return

Cooling tower water Condensing Water Green White

Supply, Condensing

> Water Return

Drain Drain Green White

Sanitary sewer Sanitary Sewer Green White

> Sanitary Vent

Shop air (\<100 psi) Shop Air or Blue White

(100+psi) Compressed Air Yellow Black

High purity air (\<100 psi) High Purity Air Blue White

(100+psi) Yellow Black

Breathing air Breathing Air Blue White

Steam Steam Yellow Black

Steam condensate Steam Condensate Yellow Black

> Condensate

Band Legend

[Service]{.underline} [Legend]{.underline} [Color]{.underline}
[Color]{.underline}\_\_

Refrigerants Refrigerant Liquid Green White

> Refrigerant Suction
>
> Refrigerant Hot Gas

Argon (\<100 psi) Argon Blue or Grn White

(100+ psi) Yellow Black

Helium (\<100 psi) Helium Blue or Grn White

> (100+ psi) Yellow Black

Hydrogen Hydrogen or GH2 Yellow Black

Nitrogen (\<100 psi) Nitrogen or GN2 Blue or Grn White

> (100+ psi) Yellow Black

Oxygen Oxygen Yellow Black

Liquid Argon Liquid Argon Yellow Black

Liquid Helium Liquid Helium Yellow Black

Liquid Hydrogen Liquid Hydrogen Yellow Black

or LH2

Liquid Nitrogen Liquid Nitrogen Yellow Black

or LN2

Liquid Oxygen Liquid Oxygen or LOX Yellow Black

> D. Pipe identification markings shall be located as follows.
>
> 1\. Adjacent to each valve or group of valves.
>
> 2\. At each side of wall or floor penetrations.
>
> 3\. At each equipment connection.
>
> 4\. On long piping runs, at 20-foot maximum intervals.
>
> E. Provide flow direction markings at each identification point. In
> addition, indicate maximum system pressure for all steam, air, and
> compressed gas piping.

F.  Where pipelines are located more than nine feet above floor level,
    place the lettering below the horizontal centerline of the pipe.

> G. Mark piping which presents a bumping or tripping hazard with black
> and yellow stripes at the point of hazard.
>
> H. Clean and degrease surfaces to receive adhesive markers. Prior to
> painting on steel pipe, remove rust and provide one coat of primer.

3.02 VALVE AND EQUIPMENT TAGS

> Identification requirements and tag numbers for valves and equipment
> will be indicated on the drawings, if required.

3.03 WARNING TAPE

Place warning tape above all buried piping, approximately one foot below
grade. [Note that different warning tapes are required for metallic and
non-metallic utilities.]{.underline}

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15080

MECHANICAL INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

This section specifies insulation systems for mechanical piping and
ductwork, except acoustical ductliner, which is specified in Section
15810, "Ducts."

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIAL PROPERTIES AND QUALITY

> A. Insulation materials containing asbestos shall not be used.
>
> B. All insulation systems shall be certified in accordance with ASTM
> E84, and shall have the following surface burning characteristics.
>
> 1\. Maximum flame spread rating of 25, without evidence of continued
> progressive combustion.
>
> 2\. Maximum smoke development rating of 50.

C.  Insulation materials and related products shall be as manufactured
    by Armstrong, Certainteed, Owens-Corning, Knauf, Pabco, Foster
    Products, or equal.

```{=html}
<!-- -->
```
D.  Insulation material "k-values" specified below are given in units of

> Btu-inch/hr-ft^2^-°F, and are rated at 75 degrees F mean temperature
> unless otherwise noted.

2.02 PIPING INSULATION

> A. [Fiberglass]{.underline}: Preformed, with white reinforced kraft
> and foil general service jacket, maximum k=0.25; Knauf, Certainteed,
> or equal.
>
> B. [Calcium Silicate]{.underline}: Fiber-reinforced, preformed,
> maximum k=0.40 at 200 degrees F, color-coded to indicate
> asbestos-free; Pabco \"Super Cal-Temp Gold,\" Owens-Corning "Kaylo",
> or equal.
>
> C. [Closed Cell Foam]{.underline}: Flexible foamed elastomer, maximum
> k=0.27, maximum water vapor transmission rating of .17 perms;
> Armstrong \"AP Armaflex,\" Rubatex R-180-FS, Normaco "Normagard," or
> equal.
>
> D. [Cellular Glass]{.underline}: Rigid closed-cell structure, maximum
> k=0.35, fabricated per ASTM C585; Pittsburgh Corning \"Foamglas\" or
> equal.

E.  [Fitting Covers:]{.underline} Preformed PVC, 10 mil thickness, UV
    resistant; CEEL-CO 300 Series, Proto "LoSMOKE," or equal.

> F. [Weather Jacket]{.underline}: .016-inch-thick aluminum with
> moisture barrier; Pabco "Surefit" or equal.
>
> G. [Direct-Burial Jacketing]{.underline}: Prefabricated laminate,
> consisting of an asphalt-impregnated fabric and a 1 mil aluminum foil
> sandwiched between 3 layers of bituminous mastic; with heat sealable
> edges; Pittsburgh Corning \"Pittwrap\" or equal.
>
> H. [Gypsum Cement]{.underline}: Water-based, for fabrication of
> cellular glass; U.S. Gypsum Co. \"Hydrocal B-11\" or equal.
>
> I. [Joint Sealant]{.underline}: Non-hardening butyl sealant for
> cellular glass; Pittsburgh Corning \"Pittseal 444\" or equal.
>
> J. [Adhesive]{.underline}: For closed cell foam, rubber based, UL
> listed; Armstrong 520 or equal.
>
> K. [Finish]{.underline}: For closed cell foam, white vinyl lacquer
> based; Armstrong \"Armaflex Finish\" or equal.

2.03 DUCTWORK INSULATION

> A. [Rigid fiberglass board]{.underline}: 1\" thick, 3 pounds/cubic
> foot density, maximum k=0.24, with factory applied reinforced foil
> vapor barrier; Knauf, Certainteed, Owens-Corning, or equal.
>
> B. [Duct wrap]{.underline}: 1-1/2\" thick flexible fiberglass, 0.75
> pounds/cubic ft. density, maximum k=0.30, with factory applied
> reinforced aluminum foil vapor barrier; Knauf, Certainteed,
> Owens-Corning, or equal.
>
> C. [Spotter pins]{.underline}: Welded, steel; Duro-Dyne PN-250 or
> equal.
>
> D. [Spotter clips]{.underline}: Duro-Dyne PC-1 or equal.
>
> E. [Adhesive]{.underline}: Non-flammable, quick-setting, rubber-based;
> Foster \"Spark-Fas\" or equal.
>
> F. [Tape]{.underline}: Pressure sensitive, reinforced foil vapor
> barrier material, minimum 3 inches wide.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

> A. Install insulation in accordance with the manufacturer\'s
> recommendations.
>
> B. Install insulation to provide the full specified thickness on all
> surfaces.
>
> C. Surfaces shall be clean, dry, and oil-free before insulation is
> applied.
>
> D. Insulation shall not be applied to piping, ducts, and equipment
> until all required testing has been completed, and all necessary
> repairs have been made.
>
> E. Where a vapor barrier jacket is specified, make the vapor barrier
> continuous. Seal punctures of the barrier with overlapping patches of
> matching material and adhesive before concealing the insulation.

F.  Insulation surface finishes shall be extended to protect all
    surfaces, ends, and raw edges of insulation.

> G. Insulation shall be continuous through wall, floor, or ceiling
> penetrations unless otherwise noted.
>
> H. Insulation that becomes wet for any reason shall be removed, and
> new insulation shall be provided at no additional cost to the
> Government.
>
> I. Unless specific insulation types are noted on the drawings, the
> Contractor may select insulation type for each service from the
> schedule in 3.02.M. However, only one type shall be used per service.
>
> J. All new fiberglass and calcium silicate insulation shall be
> identified as non-asbestos. The identification markings shall be
> stenciled with black paint on the finished surface, and shall consist
> of the following:
>
> 1\. 2\"-wide bands at the extremities of the new installation.
>
> 2\. Arrows indicating the direction of placement
>
> 3\. The legend \"Non-Asbestos\" in 1 inch-high letters at each band
> and at maximum 20-foot intervals.

3.02 PIPING INSULATION

> A. Install piping insulation in whole sections where possible.
> Otherwise, minimize the number of splices.

B.  Apply insulation with joints tightly butted.

> C. When applying closed cell foam insulation, coat both surfaces of
> butt ends and longitudinal joints with adhesive, allowing it to become
> tacky before joining the surfaces together.
>
> D. Seal all joints in cellular glass insulation with joint sealant
> (low temperature services) or gypsum cement (high temperature
> services).
>
> E. Secure longitudinal flaps on fiberglass insulation jackets with
> adhesive or outward clinching staples (adhesive is required for cold
> services to maintain vapor barrier). Seal butt joints with
> manufacturer\'s standard tape strips.
>
> F. Valves and fittings shall be insulated with preformed fittings,
> mitered sections of pipe insulation, or insulating material built up
> to the required thickness. On fiberglass insulated fittings, provide
> PVC fitting covers. On cold service piping, seal fitting covers with a
> vapor retardant mastic and pressure sensitive tape.
>
> G. Do not insulate pipe unions and steam traps. Insulate valves so as
> not to interfere with their normal operation.
>
> H. Where insulation terminates, it shall be neatly beveled and
> finished.
>
> I. Where insulation passes through a pipe hanger and cannot support
> the piping without being crushed, provide wood blocking or a section
> of rigid insulation in the hanger.
>
> J. Paint closed cell foam insulation with two coats of the
> manufacturer\'s approved finish in the following locations.
>
> 1\. Outdoors
>
> 2\. Indoors where exposed to view in finished areas
>
> K. With the exception of closed cell foam, all above-ground outdoor
> piping insulation shall be provided with aluminum jackets, secured
> with aluminum banding or corrosion resistant screws. Place
> longitudinal jacket joints near the bottom of the piping. Seal butt
> laps with silicone sealant. Deburr all exposed jacket edges.
>
> L. Cover all underground piping insulation with direct-burial
> jacketing. Heat seal longitudinal overlaps. Heat seal butt joints with
> a 4\"-wide strip of the jacketing material.
>
> M. Piping insulation shall be selected from the following schedule,
> unless otherwise noted.

+--------------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+-----------+
| SERVICE            | CLOSED    | F         | CALCIUM   | CELLULAR  |
|                    |           | IBERGLASS |           |           |
|                    | CELL FOAM |           | SILICATE  | GLASS     |
+--------------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+-----------+
| CHILLED WATER      | X         |           |           | X         |
|                    |           |           |           |           |
| Indoors            | X         |           |           | X         |
|                    |           |           |           |           |
| Outdoors           |           |           |           | X         |
|                    |           |           |           |           |
| Underground        |           |           |           |           |
+--------------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+-----------+
| HEATING WATER      | X         | X         | X         | X         |
|                    |           |           |           |           |
| Indoors            | X         |           | X         | X         |
|                    |           |           |           |           |
| Outdoors           |           |           |           | X         |
|                    |           |           |           |           |
| Underground        |           |           |           |           |
+--------------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+-----------+
| POTABLE WATER      | X         | X         |           |           |
+--------------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+-----------+
| COLD CONDENSATE    | X         |           |           |           |
+--------------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+-----------+
| INDUSTRIAL WATER   | X         | X         |           | X         |
|                    |           |           |           |           |
| Indoors            | X         |           |           |           |
|                    |           |           |           |           |
| Outdoors           |           |           |           |           |
+--------------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+-----------+
| REFRIGERANT        | X         |           |           |           |
+--------------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+-----------+
| STEAM &CONDENSATE  |           | X         | X         | X         |
|                    |           |           |           |           |
| Indoors            |           |           | X         | X         |
|                    |           |           |           |           |
| Outdoors           |           |           |           |           |
+--------------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+-----------+

> N. Minimum insulation thickness for piping shall be according to the
> following schedule and notes, unless otherwise indicated.

[MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS, INCHES]{.underline}

[Nominal Pipe Size, Inches]{.underline}

<table style="width:100%;">
<colgroup>
<col style="width: 29%" />
<col style="width: 14%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 11%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 11%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 11%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 11%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 11%" />
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr class="odd">
<td>Service</td>
<td colspan="2"><p>Runouts</p>
<p>(2)</p></td>
<td colspan="2">Up to 1</td>
<td colspan="2"><p>1-1/4</p>
<p>to 2</p></td>
<td colspan="2"><p>2-1/2</p>
<p>to 4</p></td>
<td colspan="2">5 &amp; 6</td>
<td>8 &amp; Up</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td>Chilled Water (1)</td>
<td colspan="2">.75</td>
<td colspan="2">.75</td>
<td colspan="2">1.0</td>
<td colspan="2">1.5</td>
<td colspan="2">1.5</td>
<td>2.0</td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td>Heating Water (1)</td>
<td colspan="2">.5</td>
<td colspan="2">1.0</td>
<td colspan="2">1.0</td>
<td colspan="2">1.5</td>
<td colspan="2">1.5</td>
<td>2.0</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td><p>Potable Water: (1)</p>
<p>Hot</p>
<p>Cold</p></td>
<td colspan="2"><p>.5</p>
<p>.5</p></td>
<td colspan="2"><p>.5</p>
<p>.5</p></td>
<td colspan="2"><p>1.0</p>
<p>.5</p></td>
<td colspan="2"><p>1.5</p>
<p>.75</p></td>
<td colspan="2"><p>1.5</p>
<p>.75</p></td>
<td><p>1.5</p>
<p>.75</p></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td>Industrial Water (1)</td>
<td colspan="2">.5</td>
<td colspan="2">.5</td>
<td colspan="2">.5</td>
<td colspan="2">.75</td>
<td colspan="2">.75</td>
<td>.75</td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td>Cold Condensate (3)</td>
<td colspan="2">.5</td>
<td colspan="2">.5</td>
<td colspan="2">.5</td>
<td colspan="2">-------</td>
<td colspan="2">-------</td>
<td>-------</td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td><p>Refrigerant:</p>
<p>Suction</p>
<p>Hot Gas (4)</p></td>
<td colspan="2"><p>1.0</p>
<p>.5</p></td>
<td colspan="2"><p>1.0</p>
<p>.5</p></td>
<td colspan="2"><p>1.5</p>
<p>.5</p></td>
<td colspan="2"><p>1.5</p>
<p>.5</p></td>
<td colspan="2"><p>1.5</p>
<p>.5</p></td>
<td><p>1.5</p>
<p>.5</p></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td><p>Steam:</p>
<p>Up to 15 PSIG</p>
<p>16 to 58 PSIG</p>
<p>Above 58 PSIG</p>
<p>Steam condensate</p></td>
<td><p>1.0</p>
<p>1.5</p>
<p>1.5</p>
<p>1.0</p></td>
<td colspan="2"><p>1.5</p>
<p>2.0</p>
<p>2.5</p>
<p>1.0</p></td>
<td colspan="2"><p>1.5</p>
<p>2.5</p>
<p>2.5</p>
<p>1.5</p></td>
<td colspan="2"><p>2.0</p>
<p>2.5</p>
<p>3.0</p>
<p>2.0</p></td>
<td colspan="2"><p>2.0</p>
<p>3.0</p>
<p>3.5</p>
<p>2.0</p></td>
<td colspan="2"><p>2.0</p>
<p>3.0</p>
<p>3.5</p>
<p>2.0</p></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>

Schedule Notes:(1) Increase thickness by 1/2 inch for steam, steam
condensate, and water services outdoors.

> \(2\) Runouts are branch lines, not exceeding 12 feet in length, for
> individual pieces of equipment.
>
> \(3\) For cold condensate drains, insulate only the portions of the
> line that will not drain by gravity.
>
> \(4\) Insulate hot gas piping only in conditioned spaces.

3.03 DUCTWORK INSULATION

> A. Externally insulate all unlined supply, return, and outside air
> ductwork and plenums. Insulate exhaust ductwork only where it passes
> through unconditioned spaces.
>
> B. External duct insulation shall be flexible fiberglass wrap or rigid
> fiberglass board.
>
> C. Attach rigid board insulation with adhesive, and with spotter pins
> and clips 16 inches on center. Seal all joints, breaks, and punctures
> in the vapor barrier with pressure sensitive vapor barrier tape.
>
> D. Secure external wrap insulation to ductwork with adhesive applied
> in 6-inch-wide bands, 24 inches on center. Firmly butt circumferential
> joints. Remove insulation from longitudinal joints to provide a
> minimum 2 inch vapor barrier overlap. Secure lap joints with adhesive
> or outward clinching staples 4 inches on center. Seal all longitudinal
> and butt joints with pressure sensitive vapor barrier tape.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15110

VALVES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> This section specifies valves for plumbing, HVAC, and process air and
> gas piping systems.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL VALVE SELECTION CRITERIA

> A. Valve patterns for each installation shall be as indicated
> symbolically on the drawings (i.e. ball valve, gate valve, etc.).
>
> B. Valves shall be selected from the tables in paragraph 2.02 unless
> the drawings indicate a specific type designation, or a valve is
> specified by manufacturer and model number.
>
> C. The working pressure ratings for valves submitted may differ from
> those specified herein, provided they are adequate for the actual
> system operating pressures and temperatures.
>
> D. Flow factors and orifice sizes specified are minimums, unless
> otherwise noted on the drawings.
>
> E. Valves shall be full line size, except where a smaller valve equals
> or exceeds the flow capacity required herein.
>
> D. REFRIGERANT SERVICE
>
> 1\. VALVE TYPE SELECTION

+---------------+------------+------------+------------+--------------+
|               | VALVE TYPE |            |            |              |
|               | DE         |            |            |              |
|               | SIGNATIONS |            |            |              |
+---------------+------------+------------+------------+--------------+
| LINE SIZES    | GLOBE      | CHECK      | BALL       | SOLENOID     |
+---------------+------------+------------+------------+--------------+
| 1/4 TO        | GLV-10     | CHV-12     | BLV-12     | SOV-9        |
|               |            |            |            |              |
| 1-1/8\"       | GLV-11     | CHV-13     |            |              |
+---------------+------------+------------+------------+--------------+
| 1-1/4\" TO    | GLV-12     | CHV-13     |            |              |
|               |            |            |            |              |
| 3-1/8\"       |            |            |            |              |
+---------------+------------+------------+------------+--------------+

> 2\. ADDITIONAL SELECTION CRITERIA
>
> a\. Refrigerant valve selections shall be made in accordance with the
> manufacturer\'s recommendations, based on refrigerant system
> capacities and operating conditions shown on the drawings.
>
> b\. Solenoid and check valves shall be selected by capacity, not by
> line size.

2.03 VALVE TYPE SPECIFICATIONS

> A. GATE VALVE
>
> 1\. [TYPE GTV-1]{.underline}: AWWA approved, iron body, bronze
> mounted, non-rising stem, double disc, parallel seat, 200 psi water
> working pressure, square operator nut, end connections as required;
> Stockham G-700 Series or equal.
>
> 2\. [TYPE GTV-2]{.underline}: Bronze body, rising stem, Class 125,
> solid disc, Stockham Fig. B-100 (threaded), Fig. B-108 (soldered), or
> equal.
>
> 3\. [TYPE GTV-3]{.underline}: Iron body, bronze mounted, rising stem,
> Class 125, flanged, solid wedge disc, OS&Y type; Stockham Fig. G-623
> or equal.
>
> 4\. [TYPE GTV-4]{.underline}: Bronze body, rising stem, Class 150,
> solid disc; Stockham Fig. B-120 (threaded), Fig. B-122 (soldered), or
> equal.
>
> 5\. [TYPE GTV-5]{.underline}: Iron body, bronze mounted, rising stem,
> Class 250, flanged, solid wedge disc, OS&Y type; Stockham Fig. F-667,
> or equal.
>
> 6\. [TYPE GTV-6]{.underline}: Bronze body, rising stem, Class 200,
> threaded, solid disc; Stockham Fig. B-135, or equal.
>
> 7\. Suggested Manufacturers:
>
> a\. GTV-1: Stockham, Mueller, Kennedy, or equal.
>
> b\. GTV-2 thru GTV-6: Stockham, Crane, Nibco, Powell, Milwaukee, or
> equal.
>
> B. GLOBE VALVES
>
> 1\. [TYPE GLV-1]{.underline}: Bronze body and disc, Class 125;
> Stockham Fig. B16 (threaded), Fig. B17 (soldered), or equal.
>
> 2\. [TYPE GLV-2]{.underline}: Iron body, bronze mounted, Class 125,
> flanged, OS&Y type, renewable seat and disc; Stockham Fig. G-512 or
> equal.
>
> 3\. [TYPE GLV-3]{.underline}: Bronze body, Class 150, threaded, plug
> type, renewable stainless steel seat and disc; Crane No. 14-1/2 P or
> equal.
>
> 4\. [TYPE GLV-4]{.underline}: Iron body, bronze mounted, Class 250,
> flanged, OS&Y type, renewable seat and disc; Stockham Fig. F-532 or
> equal.
>
> 5\. [TYPE GLV-5]{.underline}: Bronze body, Class 200, threaded, plug
> type, renewable stainless steel seat and disc; Stockham Fig. B-62 or
> equal.
>
> 6\. [TYPE GLV-6]{.underline}: Bronze body, Class 125, Teflon disc;
> Stockham Fig. B13-T (threaded), Fig. B-14T (soldered) or equal.
>
> 7\. [TYPE GLV-7]{.underline}: Iron body, bronze mounted, Class 125,
> flanged, OS&Y type, renewable bronze trim; Stockham Figure G-512 or
> equal.
>
> 8\. [TYPE GLV-8]{.underline}: 3000 PSIG working pressure, 300 series
> stainless steel body and stem, soft seated, Teflon or KEL-F stem tip;
> NPT, MS, or AN connections; minimum Cv as shown below (unless
> otherwise indicated); Circle Seal MV30 Series or equal.

  ------------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
  LINE SIZE     1/8\"     1/4\"     3/8\"     1/2\"     3/4\"     1\"

  Min. Cv       0.15      0.32      0.73      1.20      5.00      5.00
  ------------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------

> 9\. [TYPE GLV-9]{.underline}:Same construction as GLV-8, 6000 PSIG
> working pressure, minimum Cv as shown below (unless otherwise
> indicated); Circle Seal MV60 Series or equal.

  ------------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
  LINE SIZE     1/8\"     1/4\"     3/8\"     1/2\"     3/4\"     1\"

  Min. Cv       0.22      0.34      1.40      1.40      5.00      5.00
  ------------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------

> 10\. [TYPE GLV-10]{.underline}: Refrigerant service, packless
> diaphragm type, 500 PSIG maximum working pressure, UL listed, brass
> body, solder connections, heat stabilized nylon seat disc, stainless
> steel and phosphor bronze diaphragms, full-size ports, positive
> backseating, guided stem; Henry \"Golden Bantam\" Type 516 or equal.
>
> 11\. [TYPE GLV-11]{.underline}: Refrigerant service, front-seating
> packed stem type, 500 PSIG maximum working pressure, UL listed, brass
> body, solder connections, metal seats; Henry Type 916, Type 926, or
> equal.
>
> 12\. [TYPE GLV-12]{.underline}: Refrigerant service, back-seating
> packed stem type, 450 PSIG maximum working pressure, bronze body,
> solder connections, brass wing cap seal, heat stabilized nylon seat
> disc for liquid service, lead alloy seat disc for hot gas service,
> full-size ports; non-rotating, self-aligning disc; Mueller \"Globe
> Master\" Series, Henry Type 203, or equal.
>
> 13\. SUGGESTED MANUFACTURERS:
>
> a\. GLV-1 thru GLV-7: Stockham, Crane, Nibco, Powell, Milwaukee, or
> equal.
>
> b\. GLV-8 and GLV-9: Circle Seal, Tescom, Whitey, Robbins,
> Anderson-Greenwood, Teledyne Republic, or equal.
>
> c\. GLV-10 thru GLV-12: Parker, Primore, Henry, Mueller, Danfoss, or
> equal.
>
> C. CHECK VALVES
>
> 1\. [TYPE CHV-1]{.underline}: Bronze body and disc, swing type, Class
> 125; Stockham Fig. B319 (threaded), Fig. B-309 (soldered), or equal.
>
> 2\. [TYPE CHV-2]{.underline}: Iron body, bronze mounted, swing type,
> Class 125, flanged; Stockham Fig. G-931 or equal.
>
> 3\. [TYPE CHV-3]{.underline}: Bronze body and disc, swing type,
> Y-Pattern, Class 150, threaded; Stockham Fig. B-321, or equal.
>
> 4\. [TYPE CHV-4]{.underline}: Iron body, bronze mounted, swing type,
> Class 250, flanged; Stockham Fig. F947, or equal.
>
> 5\. [TYPE CHV-5]{.underline}: Bronze body and disc, swing type,
> Y-pattern, Class 200, threaded; Stockham Fig. B-345, or equal.
>
> 6\. [TYPE CHV-6]{.underline}: Bronze body, swing type, Class 125,
> BUNA-N disc; Stockham Fig. B-320B (threaded), Fig. B-310B (soldered),
> or equal.
>
> 7\. [TYPE CHV-7]{.underline}: Bronze body, poppet type, minimum 200
> PSIG operating pressure,bubble - tight shutoff, elastomer seat,
> threaded; Apollo 61-500 series, or equal.
>
> 8\. [TYPE CHV-8]{.underline}: Iron body, bronze mounted, swing type,
> Class 125, flanged, iron/vulcanized rubber disc; Stockham Fig. G-932B,
> or equal.
>
> 9\. [TYPE CHV-9]{.underline}: Poppet type, 3000 PSIG operating
> pressure, bubble - tight shutoff, 316 stainless steel body, Buna-N or
> Viton O-ring seals; NPT, MS, or AN connections; minimum flow
> capacities as shown below (unless otherwise noted); Circle Seal 200
> Series, NUPRO C and CP Series, Check -All Style TCVF, or equal.

  ------------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
  LINE SIZE     1/8\"     1/4\"     3/8\"     1/2\"     3/4\"     1\"

  Min. Cv       0.15      0.35      1.20      1.20      4.00      4.50
  ------------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------

> 10\. [TYPE CHV-10]{.underline}: Same specification as CHV-9 except
> 5000 PSIG working pressure; Parker Hannifin, Check All Style TCVF, or
> equal.
>
> 11\. [TYPE CHV-11]{.underline}: Same specification as CHV-9 except
> 5000 PSIG working pressure; Circle Seal H200 Series Check - All Style
> TCVF, or equal.
>
> 12\. [TYPE CHV-12]{.underline}: Refrigerant service, poppet type, 500
> PSIG maximum working pressure, brass body, extended copper solder
> connections, phosphor bronze spring, neoprene seat, guided disc;
> Mueller \"Checkmaster\" series, Danfoss Type NRV, or equal.
>
> 13\. [TYPE CHV-13]{.underline}: Refrigerant service, globe pattern,
> 450 PSIG maximum working pressure, bronze body, solder connections,
> brass disc holder and guide, Teflon seat disc, phosphor bronze spring,
> neoprene O-ring cap seal; Mueller \"Checkmaster\" series, or equal.
>
> 14\. SUGGESTED MANUFACTURERS:
>
> a\. CHV-1 thru CHV-8: Stockham, Crane, Nibco, Powell, Milwaukee,
> Apollo, or equal.
>
> b\. CHV-9 thru CHV-11: Circle Seal, Parker, Nupro, Teledyne Republic,
> Check - All Valves, or equal.
>
> D. BALL VALVES
>
> 1\. [TYPE BLV-1]{.underline}: Standard port, bronze body, chromium
> plated ball, TFE seats, manual lever, minimum 200 psi w.o.g. and 150
> PSI w.s.p., threaded or soldered ends; Apollo 70-100 series, Watts
> B-6000 Series, or equal.
>
> 2\. [TYPE BLV-2]{.underline}: Same specification as BLV-1 except full
> port; Apollo 77-100 series, Watts B-6080 Series, or equal.
> [Note:]{.underline} [Watts valve has a maximum steam pressure of 125
> PSIG]{.underline}.
>
> 3\. [TYPE BLV-3]{.underline}: Standard port, cast iron or carbon steel
> body, reinforced TFE seats and seals, ANSI Class 150 flanged ends,
> manual lever; Apollo 88-100 Series, Watts CF-1500 Series, or equal.
>
> 4\. [TYPE BLV-4]{.underline}: Full port, cast iron body, reinforced
> TFE seats and seals, ANSI Class 125 flanged ends, manual lever; Watts
> G-4000 Series or equal.
>
> 5\. [TYPE BLV-5]{.underline}: Standard port, 250 PSIG steam service,
> bronze body, 316 stainless steel ball and stem, vented ball,
> multi-filled Teflon seats, manual lever, threaded ends; Apollo
> 70-140-64, Watts B-6400-SS-04, or equal.
>
> 6\. [TYPE BLV-6]{.underline}: Same specification as BLV-5 except full
> port; Watts B-6400-SS-04, or equal.
>
> 7\. [TYPE BLV-7]{.underline}: Standard port, 250 PSIG steam service,
> carbon steel body, 316 stainless steel trim, bronze filled TFE seats,
> ANSI Class 300 flanges, manual lever; Velan SB-300 Standard Bore or
> equal.
>
> 8\. [TYPE BLV-8]{.underline}: Same specification as BLV-7, except full
> port; Velan SB-300 Full Bore, or equal.
>
> 9\. [TYPE BLV-9]{.underline}: 1500 PSIG w.o.g., 316 stainless steel
> body and trim, NPT ends, Teflon seats, manual lever; Parker B Series,
> Whitey 83 Series, or equal.
>
> 10\. [TYPE BLV-10]{.underline}: Standard port, 2000 PSIG w.o.g., 316
> stainless steel body and trim, NPT ends, reinforced TFE seats and
> seals, manual lever; Apollo 76-100 Series, Watts S-8000 Series, or
> equal.
>
> 11\. [TYPE BLV-11]{.underline}: 6000 PSIG w.o.g., 316 stainless steel
> body and trim, NPT ends, KEL-F seats, manual lever; Parker B Series,
> Whitey 83 Series, or equal.
>
> 12\. Suggested Manufacturers for BLV-1 through BLV-11: Stockham,
> Apollo, Watts, Worcester, Velan, Parker, Whitey, or equal.
>
> 13\. [TYPE BLV-12]{.underline}: Refrigerant liquid or hot gas, maximum
> 500 PSI working pressure, UL listed, brass body and ball, extended
> copper solder ends, carbon filled teflon ball seals, Teflon or 0-ring
> stem seals, gasketed cap, blow-out proof stem with nylon thrust washer
> and mechanical stem position stops; Mueller \"Ballmaster\" Series,
> Henry Type 900,Nibco Fig. RBV, Watts Series REB100, or equal.
>
> E. BUTTERFLY VALVES
>
> 1\. Except where otherwise indicated, provide manual detent levers for
> valves up to 8-inch NPS, and manual gear operators for larger sizes.
>
> 2\. [TYPE BFV-1]{.underline}: 350 PSI w.o.g., 29\" Hg vacuum, bronze
> body, stainless steel disc and stem, Viton seals; Milwaukee
> \"Butterball\" Series BB2-100 (threaded), Series BB2-350 (soldered) or
> equal.
>
> 3\. [TYPE BFV-2]{.underline}: 200 PSI CWP, lug or wafer pattern (as
> noted on drawings), cast iron body, aluminum bronze disc,
> phenolic-backed elastomer seat; Stockham LG Series or equal.
>
> 4\. [TYPE BFV-3]{.underline}: Same as BFV-2, with extension stem to
> raise actuator to a minimum of twelve inches above grade, unless
> otherwise indicated.
>
> 5\. [TYPE BFV-4]{.underline}: ANSI Class 150, lug or wafer pattern,
> nickel aluminum bronze body and disc, monel shaft and thrust bearing,
> filled TFE seats and seals; Jamesbury Type 815 or equal.
>
> 6\. [TYPE BFV-5]{.underline}: Same as BFV-4, except ANSI Class 300;
> Jamesbury Type 830 or equal.
>
> 7\. Suggested manufacturers: Crane, Stockham, Jamesbury, Keystone,
> Milwaukee, Grinnell, or equal.
>
> F. NEEDLE VALVES
>
> 1\. [TYPE NV-1]{.underline}: Class 200, bronze body, threaded ends,
> globe pattern; Stockham Fig. B-64 or equal.
>
> 2\. [TYPE NV-2]{.underline}: 3000 PSIG, 316 stainless steel body and
> trim, regulating stem; NPT, MS, or AN connections; flow capacity as
> shown below (unless otherwise specified); Whitey Forged Body Series
> and Screwed Body Series or equal.

  ----------------------- ----------- ----------- ----------- ------------
  LINE SIZE               1/8\"       1/4\"       3/8\"       1/2\"

  Min. Cv                 0.15        0.35        0.70        1.00
  ----------------------- ----------- ----------- ----------- ------------

> 3\. [TYPE NV-3]{.underline}: Same specification as NV-2 except 5000
> PSIG working pressure; minimum flow capacity as shown below (unless
> otherwise indicated); Whitey Union Bonnet Series, Parker V Series, or
> equal.

  ------------------ ------------- ------------- ------------- -------------
  LINE SIZE          1/8\"         1/4\"         3/8\"         1/2\"

  Min. Cv            0.35          0.50          1.00          1.20
  ------------------ ------------- ------------- ------------- -------------

> 4\. [TYPE NV-4]{.underline}: 6000 PSIG, 316 stainless steel body and
> trim, regulating stem, reinforced TFE packing, flow capacities shown
> below (unless otherwise specified on the drawings); NPT, MS, or AN
> connections; Whitey 20 Series, Apollo
>
> 60-600 Series, or equal.

  ------------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
  LINE SIZE     1/8\"     1/4\"     3/8\"     1/2\"     3/4\"     1\"

  Min. Cv       0.15      0.30      0.60      1.00      2.00      2.50
  ------------- --------- --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------

> 5\. Suggested manufacturers:
>
> a\. Type NV-1: Stockham, Crane, Milwaukee, or equal.
>
> b\. Type NV-2 thru NV-4: Apollo, Parker, Whitey, Teledyne Republic,
> Robbins, Anderson-Greenwood, Deltrol, or equal.
>
> G. SOLENOID VALVES
>
> 1\. Valve configurations, electrical requirements, and normal position
> shall be as shown on the drawings.
>
> 2\. Valves specified by model number below are 2-way valves. 3-way and
> 4-way valves for the same applications shall meet the same
> specifications.
>
> 3\. Unless otherwise indicated, the orifice diameters of all solenoid
> valves shall equal or exceed the I.D. of the associated pipe or
> tubing.
>
> 4\. [TYPE SOV-1]{.underline}: 150 PSI w.o.g., slow closing, pilot
> operated, brass or bronze body, NPT connections, Buna-N disc; ASCO
> 8221 Series or equal.
>
> Water hammer characteristics of type SOV-1 valves shall meet the
> requirements of Fluid Controls Institute Standard FCI-82-1, class CC
> (up to 3/4\") or class BB (1\" to 2 1/2\").
>
> 5\. [TYPE SOV-2]{.underline}: 125 PSI steam working pressure, brass or
> bronze body, NPT connections, Teflon disc; ASCO Hot Water/Steam Series
> or equal.
>
> 6\. [TYPE SOV-3]{.underline}: Same as SOV-2, except minimum 200 PSI
> steam working pressure; Atkomatic Series 4000 (up to 1- 1/2\"), or
> equal.
>
> 7\. [TYPE SOV-4]{.underline}: 200 PSI w.o.g., brass or bronze body,
> NPT connections, Viton or Buna-N disc; Atkomatic \"Shorty\" Series or
> equal.
>
> 8\. [TYPE SOV-5]{.underline}: 500 PSI w.o.g., 300 series stainless
> steel body and trim; NPT, MS, or AN connections, Viton or Buna-N disc;
> J.D. Gould Type KS or equal.
>
> 9\. [TYPE SOV-6]{.underline}: Same spec as SOV-5, except 1500 PSI
> w.o.g. rating; Atkomatic \"Dymo\" Series 15,000 or equal.
>
> 10\. [TYPE SOV-7]{.underline}: Same spec as SOV-5, except 3000 PSI
> w.o.g. rating; Atkomatic \"Uramic\" Series 30,000 or equal.
>
> 11\. [TYPE SOV-8]{.underline}: Same spec as SOV-5, except a minimum
> 5000 PSI w.o.g. rating; Atkomatic Series 7004 or equal.
>
> 12\. [TYPE SOV-9]{.underline}: Refrigerant service, direct or pilot
> operated, 500 PSIG maximum operating pressure, brass or ductile iron
> body, extended copper solder connections, stainless steel and brass
> internals, neoprene seats; Parker RA and RB Series or equal.
>
> 13\. Suggested manufacturers:
>
> a\. SOV-1 thru SOV-8: Asco, Atkomatic, J.D. Gould, Magnatrol, Skinner,
> Parker, or equal.
>
> b\. SOV-9: Parker, Sporlan, Alco, Danfoss, or equal.
>
> H. SAFETY/RELIEF VALVES (SRV\'S)
>
> 1\. SRV capacities and set pressures shall be as specified on the
> drawings.
>
> 2\. SRV capacities shall be A.S.M.E. National Board certified.
>
> 3\. SRV\'s shall provide the specified relief capacity with a maximum
> overpressure of 10% for steam and inert gases, and 25% for water
> service.
>
> 4\. Inlet connection sizes shall be determined by required flow
> capacity,not by service line size. Discharge piping shall be the full
> size of the SRV discharge connection, unless the drawings indicate
> larger.
>
> 5\. [TYPE SRV-1]{.underline}: Water and low-pressure inert gas
> services.
>
> a\. Body materials - brass, bronze, iron, or carbon steel.
>
> b\. Trim materials - brass, bronze, or stainless steel.
>
> c\. Seat materials - Neoprene, Buna-N, Viton, EPR, or Teflon soft
> seats.
>
> d\. Connections - NPT or ANSI 150# flanges.
>
> 6\. [TYPE SRV-2]{.underline}: Steam service
>
> a\. Body materials - brass, bronze, iron, or carbon steel.
>
> b\. Trim materials - brass, bronze, or stainless steel.
>
> c\. Seat materials - nonferrous metal seats or Viton, EPR, Teflon, or
> KEL-F soft seats.
>
> d\. Provide manual lift lever for all steam service SRV\'s.
>
> e\. Connections - NPT or ANSI flanges appropriate for the maximum line
> pressure.
>
> 7\. [TYPE SRV-3]{.underline}: Air and inert gas services
>
> a\. Body materials - 304 or 316 stainless steel
>
> b\. Trim materials - 300 series stainless steel
>
> c\. Seat materials - Buna-N, Neoprene, EPR, or Viton soft seats.
>
> d\. Connections - NPT, MS, or AN.
>
> 8\. Suggested manufacturers:
>
> a\. Types SRV-1 and SRV-2: Anderson-Greenwood, Kunkle, Conbraco,
> Watts, Cash/Acme, Crosby, Spirax/Sarco, Armstrong, or equal.
>
> b\. Type SRV-3: Anderson - Greenwood, NUPRO, Circle Seal, Teledyne
> Republic, or equal.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND ACCESSORIES

> A. [Hose Bibbs]{.underline}: Water service, 125 PSI w.o.g., bronze
> body, NPT or solder inlet connection, 3/4-inch hose thread outlet;
> Nibco Figure #46 or equal.
>
> B. [Valve Boxes]{.underline}: Roadway extension box, cast iron, two-
> or three-piece, adjustable, with tee handle valve wrench and drop lid
> with service identification; Kennedy, Mueller, or equal.
>
> C. [Chainwheel Operators]{.underline}: Cast iron construction, stem-
> or handwheel-mounted type, with chain guide, galvanized chain, and all
> required mounting hardware; as manufactured by Babbitt Steam
> Speciality Company or equal.
>
> D. [Hammer-Blow Chainwheel Operators]{.underline}: Ductile or
> malleable iron construction, handwheel-mounted, with sprocket rim,
> hammer-blow mechanism, chain guide, galvanized steel chain, and all
> required mounting hardware; as manufactured by Babbitt Steam
> Speciality Company or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

> A. Provide valves where indicated on the drawings, and as otherwise
> required for proper system operation.
>
> B. Provide shut-off valves (Ball, Butterfly, or Gate) in all branch
> connections to mains, and at each piece of equipment.
>
> C. Install all valves to be accessible for maintenance. Where valves
> are unavoidably concealed in furred spaces, provide maintenance access
> panels.
>
> D. Install valves with stems vertical if possible. Otherwise, mount
> with stems horizontal.
>
> E. Remove internal parts of valves, or otherwise protect them from
> excessive heat during soldering, unless manufacturer's literature
> indicates otherwise.

3.02 SAFETY/RELIEF VALVES (SRV\'S)

> SRV relief pressure settings shall be certified in one of the
> following ways.
>
> A. Submit a manufacturer\'s Factory Test Report (SD-11) verifying
> factory testing and adjustment.
>
> B. Submit an independent agency\'s Test Report (SD-10).
>
> C. Perform a bench test in the presence of the Government Inspector.
>
> 1\. Use a test media that is identical to the contents of the system
> where the valve will be installed.
>
> 2\. Use a calibrated test gage to verify the relief pressure setting.
>
> 3\. Test and adjust the SRV until it consistantly relieves at the
> indicated pressure +/- 5 percent up to 1000 PSIG, and +/- 1 percent
> above 1000 PSIG.
>
> 4\. Submit a Field Test Report (SD-12) signed by the witnessing
> Government Inspector.

3.03 VALVE ACCESSORIES

> A. Provide valve boxes and tee handles for all type GTV-1 gate valves.
>
> 1\. In paved areas, the top of the valve box shall be flush with the
> pavement. Repair surrounding pavement to match existing.
>
> 2\. In unpaved areas, provide a 24 inch square or 24 inch diameter
> round x 4 inch thick reinforced concrete slab around the top of the
> valve box. The top of the valve box and slab shall be approximately
> one inch above finished grade. The slab shall taper down to grade at
> the edges.
>
> B. Chainwheel operators
>
> 1\. Provide chainwheel operators for valves as indicated on the
> drawings.
>
> 2\. Provide hammer-blow type chainwheel operators for gate valves.
>
> 3\. When chainwheels are required for ball or butterfly valves,
> provide valves with manual gear drive operators instead of detent
> levers.

END OF SECTION

<table>
<colgroup>
<col style="width: 10%" />
<col style="width: 10%" />
<col style="width: 4%" />
<col style="width: 2%" />
<col style="width: 2%" />
<col style="width: 1%" />
<col style="width: 1%" />
<col style="width: 2%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 3%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 3%" />
<col style="width: 3%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 2%" />
<col style="width: 2%" />
<col style="width: 2%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 2%" />
<col style="width: 1%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 2%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 3%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 1%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 1%" />
<col style="width: 1%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 1%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 1%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 0%" />
<col style="width: 4%" />
<col style="width: 2%" />
<col style="width: 1%" />
<col style="width: 8%" />
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="3"><strong>2.02 VALVE TYPE SELECTIONS</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
<td colspan="6"></td>
<td colspan="11"></td>
<td colspan="16"></td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td colspan="6"></td>
<td colspan="11"></td>
<td colspan="19"></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="29"><strong>A. WATER SERVICE - POTABLE, CHILLED, HEATING,
AND INDUSTRIAL WATER UP TO 150 PSIG.</strong></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
<td colspan="6"></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td colspan="6"></td>
<td colspan="11"></td>
<td colspan="19"></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td colspan="18"><strong>VALVE TYPE DESIGNATIONS</strong></td>
<td colspan="9"></td>
<td colspan="7"></td>
<td colspan="6"></td>
<td colspan="9"></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td><strong>LINE SIZE</strong></td>
<td><strong>LOCATION</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>GATE</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>GLOBE</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>CHECK</strong></td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>BALL</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>BUTTERFLY</strong></td>
<td colspan="10"><strong>NEEDLE</strong></td>
<td colspan="14"><strong>SOLENOID</strong></td>
<td colspan="11"><strong>RELIEF</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td><strong>UP TO</strong></td>
<td><strong>BELOW GRADE</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>GTV-1</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
<td colspan="10"></td>
<td colspan="14"></td>
<td colspan="11"></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td><strong>2"</strong></td>
<td><strong>ABOVE GRADE</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>GTV-2</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>GLV-1**</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>CHV-1</strong></td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>BLV-1, BLV-2</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>BFV-1</strong></td>
<td colspan="10"><strong>NV-1*</strong></td>
<td colspan="14"><strong>SOV-1</strong></td>
<td colspan="11"><strong>SRV-1</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td><strong>2 1/2" AND</strong></td>
<td><strong>BELOW GRADE</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>GTV-1</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>BFV-3</strong></td>
<td colspan="10"></td>
<td colspan="14"></td>
<td colspan="11"></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td><strong>LARGER</strong></td>
<td><strong>ABOVE GRADE</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>GTV-3</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>GLV-2</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>CHV-2</strong></td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>BLV-3, BLV-4</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>BFV-2</strong></td>
<td colspan="10"></td>
<td colspan="14"></td>
<td colspan="11"><strong>SRV-1</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="25"><strong>*UP TO 3/4" NPT ONLY. **SEE 2.4A FOR HOSE BIBB
SPECIFICATIONS</strong></td>
<td colspan="8"></td>
<td colspan="7"></td>
<td colspan="7"></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
<td colspan="10"></td>
<td colspan="14"></td>
<td colspan="11"></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td colspan="5"><strong>B. STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
<td colspan="7"></td>
<td colspan="10"></td>
<td colspan="10"></td>
<td colspan="8"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
<td colspan="15"><strong>VALVE TYPE DESIGNATIONS</strong></td>
<td colspan="9"></td>
<td colspan="10"></td>
<td colspan="6"></td>
<td colspan="6"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td><strong>MEDIUM</strong></td>
<td><strong>MAX. PSIG</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>LINE SIZE</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>GATE</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>GLOBE</strong></td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>CHECK</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>BALL</strong></td>
<td colspan="10"><strong>BUTTERFLY</strong></td>
<td colspan="14"><strong>NEEDLE</strong></td>
<td colspan="11"><strong>SOLENOID</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>RELIEF</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>UP TO 2"</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>GTV-2</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>GLV-3</strong></td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>CHV-1</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>BLV-1, BLV-2</strong></td>
<td colspan="10"></td>
<td colspan="14"><strong>NV-1*</strong></td>
<td colspan="11"><strong>SOV-2</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td><strong>125</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>2 1/2" AND</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
<td colspan="10"></td>
<td colspan="14"></td>
<td colspan="11"></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>LARGER</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>GTV-3</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>GLV-2</strong></td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>CHV-2</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>BLV-3, BLV-4</strong></td>
<td colspan="10"><strong>BFV-4</strong></td>
<td colspan="14"></td>
<td colspan="11"></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td><strong>STEAM</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>UP TO 2"</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>GTV-4</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>GLV-3</strong></td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>CHV-3</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>BLV-1, BLV-2</strong></td>
<td colspan="10"></td>
<td colspan="14"><strong>NV-1*</strong></td>
<td colspan="11"><strong>SOV-3</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td><strong>150</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>2 1/2" AND</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
<td colspan="10"></td>
<td colspan="14"></td>
<td colspan="11"></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>LARGER</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>GTV-5</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>GLV-4</strong></td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>CHV-4</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>BLV-3</strong></td>
<td colspan="10"><strong>BFV-4</strong></td>
<td colspan="14"></td>
<td colspan="11"></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>SRV-2</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>UP TO 2"</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>GTV-6</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>GLV-5</strong></td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>CHV-5</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>BLV-5, BLV-6</strong></td>
<td colspan="10"></td>
<td colspan="14"><strong>NV-1*</strong></td>
<td colspan="11"><strong>SOV-3</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td><strong>200</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>2 1/2" AND</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
<td colspan="10"></td>
<td colspan="14"></td>
<td colspan="11"></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>LARGER</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>GTV-5</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>GLV-4</strong></td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>CHV-4</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>BLV-7, BLV-8</strong></td>
<td colspan="10"><strong>BFV-5</strong></td>
<td colspan="14"></td>
<td colspan="11"></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td><strong>STEAM</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>UP TO 2"</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>GTV-2</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>GLV-1</strong></td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>CHV-1</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>BLV-1, BLV-2</strong></td>
<td colspan="10"></td>
<td colspan="14"><strong>NV-1*</strong></td>
<td colspan="11"><strong>SOV-2</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td><strong>COND.</strong></td>
<td><strong>125</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>2 1/2" AND</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
<td colspan="10"></td>
<td colspan="14"></td>
<td colspan="11"></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>LARGER</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>GTV-3</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>GLV-2</strong></td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>CHV-2</strong></td>
<td colspan="5"><p><strong>BLV-3,</strong></p>
<p><strong>BLV-4</strong></p></td>
<td colspan="10"></td>
<td colspan="14"></td>
<td colspan="11"></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr class="even">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="9"><strong>*UP TO 3/4" NPT ONLY.</strong></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
<td colspan="8"></td>
<td colspan="11"></td>
<td colspan="14"></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr class="odd">
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td colspan="5"></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td colspan="4"></td>
<td colspan="11"></td>
<td colspan="14"></td>
<td colspan="11"></td>
<td colspan="2"></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>

  --------------- ---------- ---------- ----------- ---------------- -- -------------------- -- -- -- ------------ -- --- -- -- -------------- -- -- -- -- -- -- ------------ -- -- -- -- -- -- ------- -- -- -- ---- --
  **C. AIR AND                                                                                                                                                                                                        
  INERT GASES                                                                                                                                                                                                         
  (NITROGEN,                                                                                                                                                                                                          
  HELIUM,                                                                                                                                                                                                             
  ARGON)**                                                                                                                                                                                                            

                                                                                                                                                                                                                      

                                                    **VALVE TYPE                                                                                                                                                      
                                                    DESIGNATIONS**                                                                                                                                                    

  **PIPING MTL**  **LINE     **MAX      **GLOBE**   **CHECK**           **BALL**                      **NEEDLE**                **SOLENOID**                     **RELIEF**                                           
                  SIZE**     PSIG**                                                                                                                                                                                   

  **COPPER, TYP   **UP TO    **200**                                                                                                                                                                                  
  L**             2\"**                                                                                                                                                                                               

  **CARBON**      **UP TO    **200**    **GLV-6**   **CHV-6, CHV-7**    **BLV-1, BLV-2**              **NV-1\***                **SOV-4**                        **SRV-1**                                            
                  2\"**                                                                                                                                                                                               

  **STEEL PIPE**  **2 1/2\"  **200**    **GLV-7**   **CHV-8**           **BLV-3, BLV-4**                                                                         **SRV-2**                                            
                  & LARGER**                                                                                                                                                                                          

                  **UP TO    **500**                                    **BLV-9, BLV-10**                                       **SOV-5**                                                                             
                  1/2\"**                                                                                                                                                                                             

                             **1500**   **GLV-8**   **CHV-9**                                         **NV-2**                  **SOV-6**                                                                             

                             **2000**                                   **BLV-10**                                                                                                                                    

  **STAINLESS**              **3000**                                   **BLV-11**                                              **SOV-7**                                                                             

  **STEEL**                  **5000**   **GLV-9**   **CHV-10**                                        **NV-3**                  **SOV-8**                        **SRV-3**                                            

  **TUBING**      **3/4\" TO **500**                                    **BLV-9\*,BLV-10**                                      **SOV-5**                                                                             
                  1\"**                                                                                                                                                                                               

                             **1500**   **GLV-8**   **CHV-9**                                                                   **SOV-6**                                                                             

                             **2000**                                   **BLV-10**                    **NV-4**                                                                                                        

                             **3000**   **GLV-9**                       **BLV-11\***                                            **SOV-7**                                                                             

                             **5000**   **GLV-9**   **CHV-11**                                                                                                                                                        

                             **\*UP TO                                                                                                                                                                                
                             3/4\"                                                                                                                                                                                    
                             ONLY.**                                                                                                                                                                                  

                                                                                                                                                                                                                      

                                                                                                                                                                                                                      
  --------------- ---------- ---------- ----------- ---------------- -- -------------------- -- -- -- ------------ -- --- -- -- -------------- -- -- -- -- -- -- ------------ -- -- -- -- -- -- ------- -- -- -- ---- --

SECTION 15125

GAGES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

This section specifies pressure gages and thermometers for mechanical
systems. Gage requirements and locations are indicated on the drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SUGGESTED MANUFACTURERS

Gages and thermometers shall be Ashcroft, Marshalltown, Weiss, Trerice,
U.S. Gauge, Helicoid, Weksler, or equal.

2.02 PRESSURE GAGES

> A. Except as otherwise noted below or on the drawings, select gages so
> that the normal system operating pressure falls near mid-range.
>
> B. Gages for services requiring Class I, II, or III cleaning (ref.
> Section 15215) shall have capillary bleeds for flushing and cleaning.
>
> C. [Type PG-1:]{.underline} Pressure range up to 1000 psig - Phosphor
> bronze bourdon tube, bronze bushed brass movement, adjustable pointer,
> 2-1/2% accuracy, minimum 3 inch diameter dial, black numerals on white
> face, psi/kPa dual scale, shatter-proof lens, rear blow-out panel;
> phenolic, aluminum, or stainless steel case.
>
> D. [Type PG-2:]{.underline} Pressure range above 1000 psig - Same as
> PG-1 except stainless steel bourdon tube.
>
> E. [Type PG-3:]{.underline} Hydronic systems service - Same as PG-1
> except dual scale 0-100 psig/0-231 ft of water; Weksler Type BN14,
> U.S. Gauge Type PA503, or equal.
>
> F. [Type PG-4:]{.underline} Same as PG-1 except with liquid-filled
> case and restrictor orifice to dampen pulsation and vibration.
>
> G. [Type PG-5:]{.underline} Same as PG-2 except with liquid-filled
> case and restrictor orifice to dampen pulsation and vibration.
>
> H. [Type PG-6:]{.underline} Low differential pressure (filter) gages -
> Diaphragm actuated, magnetically operated linkage, 2% full-scale
> accuracy, zero adjustment screw, cast aluminum case, with mounting
> hardware; Dwyer Series 2000 \"Magnehelic\" or equal.

2.03 THERMOMETERS

> A. Except as otherwise noted on the drawings, select thermometer
> scales so that the normal system operating temperature falls near
> mid-range.
>
> B. Provide thermometers for air duct service complete with duct
> mounting flanges and perforated bulb guards.
>
> C. [Dial Type Thermometers]{.underline}: Bimetallic coil element,
> minimum 3 inch diameter dial, 1% accuracy, external adjustment,
> stainless steel case, adjustable angle pivoting dial.
>
> D. [Liquid Filled Thermometers]{.underline}: Industrial type, red
> mercury-in-glass, 6 inch minimum scale length, 1% accuracy, aluminum
> case, adjustable angle body, bronze or brass sensing element.

2.04 GAGE COCKS AND VALVES

> A. [Gage Cocks:]{.underline} For water and gaseous services in carbon
> steel or copper piping - Brass body, tee handle, 1/4" FPT connections;
> suggested make and model as follows:
>
> 1\. Working pressure up to 125 psig - Weksler Type A10 or equal.
>
> 2\. Working pressure 125 to 250 psig - Weksler Type A10E, Ernst Gage
> Co. Figure 123, or equal.
>
> B. [Gage Cocks:]{.underline} For steam and steam condensate service.
>
> 1\. Working pressure up to 75 psig - Brass body, tee handle, 1/4" FPT
> connections; Weksler Type A-10 or equal.
>
> 2\. Working pressure 75 to 300 psig - Bronze body, tee handle, 1/4"
> FPT connections; Ernst Gage Co. Figure 3 or equal.
>
> C. [Gage Valves:]{.underline} For gaseous services in stainless steel
> pipe or tubing - Stainless steel needle valve, 1/4" FPT connections,
> Type NV-2 (up to 3000 psig) or Type NV-3 (3000 to 5000 psig) per
> Section 15110, VALVES.
>
> D. [Trumpet Valves:]{.underline} Brass manifold with push-button
> valves for multiple point pressure readings with a single gage (number
> of connections per drawing); complete with spring-return push-buttons,
> 1/4" o.d. compression connections, mounting bracket, and gage equal to
> Type PG-3 (unless otherwise noted); 200 psig working pressure; Flow
> Conditioning Corp. TV Series or equal.

2.05 SIPHON TUBES

Brass or black iron, 1/4\" MPT ends, minimum rating of 250 psig at
400°F; Weksler type A03B or A03I, Ernst Gage figure 750, or equal.

2.06 THERMOWELLS

Separable well, nonferrous, sized to accommodate thermal sensing
element; Weksler, Trerice, Ernst Gage, or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Install all gages and thermometers where they are readily
accessible for reading and maintenance.

3.02 Provide gage cocks or needle valves for all pressure gages. In
addition, provide siphon tubes for all steam pressure gages.

3.03 Provide thermowells for all thermometers except those in air duct
applications.

3.04 On insulated piping, provide lagging extensions or other stand-off
fittings for all gages and thermometers.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15180

HEATING AND COOLING PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

Work provided under this section includes the following:

A. Hydronic Piping and Specialties

B. Coil Condensate Piping and Pumps

C. Steam Piping and Specialties

D. Steam Condensate Piping, Pumps, and Specialties

E. Refrigerant Piping and Specialties

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 15051 Welding for Mechanical Utility Piping

B. Section 15060 Hangers and Supports

C. Section 15075 Mechanical Identification

D. Section 15080 Mechanical Insulation

E. Section 15110 Valves

F. Section 15125 Gages

G. Section 15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

1.03 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

A.  All work performed under this section shall comply with the SBCCI
    Standard Mechanical Code and ANSI B31.9, \"Building Services
    Piping\".

> B. Work shall not be covered, enclosed, or insulated until it has been
> inspected, tested, and approved. Any work that is covered, enclosed,
> or insulated before such inspection and test shall be uncovered and,
> after it has been inspected and approved, shall be restored to its
> prior condition at no additional cost to the Government.
>
> C. All testing shall be performed in the presence of the Government
> Inspector.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 HYDRONIC PIPING (CHILLED AND HOT WATER)

> A. [Copper Water Tube:]{.underline} Type L hard drawn copper per ASTM
> B88 with wrought copper or cast brass fittings and lead-free,
> tin-silver solder.
>
> B. [Steel Pipe:]{.underline} Schedule 40 black carbon steel per ASTM
> A53 Grade B; Class 150 threaded malleable iron fittings up to 2\" NPS;
> welded fittings or ANSI 150-lb. flanges for 2-1/2\" NPS and larger.

2.02 COIL CONDENSATE PIPING

Coil condensate piping shall be Schedule 40 PVC with solvent welded
fittings.

2.03 STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE PIPING

> A. [Steam, up to 150 psig:]{.underline} Schedule 40 black carbon
> steel, ASTM A53 Grade B; Class 150 threaded fittings up to 2\" NPS;
> welded fittings and 150 lb. flanges for 2-1/2\" NPS and larger.
>
> B. [Steam, 151 to 200 psig:]{.underline} Same as above, except Class
> 300 threaded fittings and 300 lb. flanges.
>
> C. [Steam Condensate:]{.underline} Schedule 80 black carbon steel,
> ASTM A53 Grade B; Class 300 threaded fittings up to 2\" NPS; welded
> fittings and 150 lb. flanges for 2-1/2\" NPS and larger.

2.04 REFRIGERANT PIPING

> A. [Up to 1/2\" O.D.:]{.underline} Same as specified in part B below,
> or annealed Type K copper tubing per ASTM B88 with flared-type
> fittings conforming to SAE J513F. Interior of tubing shall be cleaned
> equal to purity requirements of ASTM B280 and capped prior to
> installation.
>
> B. [Larger than 1/2\" O.D.:]{.underline} Type L or ACR hard-drawn,
> seamless copper tubing, manufactured per ASTM B88, cleaned,
> dehydrated, and sealed per ASTM B280, with wrought-copper socket-joint
> fittings and silver solder.

2.05 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

> A. [Dielectric unions and flanges:]{.underline} Watts, EPCO, Harco, or
> equal.
>
> B. [Threaded outlet fittings:]{.underline} For branch connections to
> existing steel mains -carbon steel, ASTM A105, standard weight, butt
> weld type; Bonney Forge \"Thred-O-Let,\" Anvil Products "Anvilet," or
> equal.
>
> C. [Strainers:]{.underline} Water service, Y-type, iron body, bronze
> cap, 20-mesh monel or stainless steel screen with free area equal to
> five times inlet line, Class 125; Watts 77S Series or equal.
>
> D. [Manual Balancing Valves:]{.underline} Bronze body, threaded, Class
> 125, gage ports with integral check valves, and pre-formed insulation
> kit; Bell & Gossett \"Circuit Setter\" or equal.
>
> E. [Automatic Balancing Valves:]{.underline} Piston type, 2-32 psid
> range unless otherwise noted, factory set for flow indicated on the
> drawings, with stainless steel or nickel-plated brass internals, NPT
> connections, and dual P/T ports; Autoflow BR Series, Griswold 3500 and
> 3600 Series, or equal.
>
> F. [Hydronic Flow Metering Stations:]{.underline} Low loss venturi
> type; steel, iron, or brass body; machined venturi (sheet metal
> inserts not acceptable); +/- 1% accuracy; 250 psi working pressure;
> end connections as required; differential pressure sensing ports with
> valves; Victaulic Style 733, Preso XV Series, or equal. Provide
> extended dp ports for insulated lines.
>
> G. [Automatic Air Vents:]{.underline} Water service, float operated,
> non-ferrous construction, NPT connections, maximum 150 psig at 240
> degrees F; TACO Model 426, Bell & Gossett Model 87, or equal.
>
> H. [Pressure and Temperature (P&T) Test Ports:]{.underline} Brass body
> with dual self-sealing elastomer internal valves, knurled cap, o-ring
> cap seal, cap retainer, and 1/4\" NPT connection. Test ports shall be
> rated for 500 psig service at 275 degrees F, and shall be designed to
> receive 0.156-inch O.D. probes. Test ports for insulated piping shall
> extend beyond insulation; Flow Design Inc. \"Super Seal\" Models SS25
> and SS25L or equal.
>
> I. [P&T Test Kit:]{.underline} Compatible with the P&T test ports
> provided, and consisting of the components specified below.
>
> 1\. Pressure gage - 3-1/2\" dial, aluminum or phenolic case, 0-150 psi
> range, +/- 3% accuracy.
>
> 2\. Thermometer - dial type, bimetallic element, 1-3/4\" dial,
> external adjustment, stainless steel case and stem, 25-125oF range
>
> (0-220oF for heating water), +/- 1% accuracy.
>
> 3\. Adaptor probe for pressure gage, length as required for the P&T
> ports provided.
>
> 4\. Silicone lubricant for P&T probes.
>
> 5\. Form fitting case.
>
> Test kits shall be equal to Flow Systems Inc. Model 300.15.
>
> J. [Pump Suction Diffusers:]{.underline} Iron body, permanent and
> start - up strainers, permanent magnet to capture metallic particles,
> adjustable pipe support foot, flow straightening vanes, and NPT gage
> and blowdown ports; connection sizes and types as indicated on the
> drawings; Bell & Gossett, Armstrong Pump, or equal.
>
> K. [Combination Pump Valves:]{.underline} Combination shut - off, flow
> balancing, and non - slam check valve; iron body, stainless steel stem
> and spring, soft seated, differential pressure measurement ports;
> pattern, size, and connection type as indicated on the drawings; Bell
> & Gossett "Triple Duty" Valve, Armstrong Pump "Flow - Trex" Valve, or
> equal.
>
> L. Flexible Pump Connectors
>
> 1\. [Type FPC-1:]{.underline} Rubber spool type - reinforced rubber
> construction, minimum 150 psig working pressure at 180 degrees F,
> galvanized steel union or flanges ends (or rubber flanges with
> galvanized back-up rings); sizes, connection types, and tie rod
> requirements as indicated on the drawings; MetraFlex, M-G Piping
> Products
>
> "C-Flex," or equal.
>
> 2\. [Type FPC-2:]{.underline} Corrugated metal hose type - bronze hose
> and braid, Schedule 40 steel NPT or 150# steel flanged ends, 150 psig
> working pressure; sizes and connection types as indicated on the
> drawings; MetraFlex, Anaconda Metal Hose, or equal.

2.06 COIL CONDENSATE PUMPS

Coil condensate pumps shall be UL listed, suitable for wall, floor, or
A/C unit mounting, complete with high impact polystyrene tank, ABS cover
and pump, stainless steel shaft, thermally protected motor with 6-foot
cord and plug (voltage as specified on the drawings), snap-acting level
switch, and integral discharge check valve; minimum capacity of 25 gph
at 15 feet of head; Little Giant

> VCM-20UL Series, Beckett CU19 Series, or equal.

2.07 STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES

A. Steam Traps

> 1\. Trap types, sizes, and capacities shall be as indicated on the
> drawings.
>
> 2\. [Float and Thermostatic Traps:]{.underline} Ductile iron body,
> mechanical lever ball float, stainless steel valve mechanism, with
> balanced pressure thermostatic air vent, 232 psig maximum working
> pressure, 392 degrees F maximum working temperature, NPT connections;
> Spirax/Sarco Model FT-550 or equal.
>
> 3\. [Inverted Bucket Traps:]{.underline} Cast Iron body, NPT
> connections, stainless steel internals, 250 psig maximum working
> pressure, 450 degrees F maximum working temperature; Spirax/Sarco Type
> B or equal.
>
> 4\. [Thermodynamic Traps:]{.underline} Stainless steel construction,
> NPT connections, integral seat with hardened disc and seating
> surfaces, 600 psig maximum working pressure, 800 degrees F maximum
> working temperature, complete with stainless steel insulating cap;
> Spirax/Sarco Model TD-52 or equal.
>
> 5\. [Thermostatic Traps:]{.underline} Balanced pressure type, cast
> iron body, welded stainless steel bellows element, 250 psig maximum
> working pressure, 425 degrees F maximum working temperature; Nicholson
> Types B, C, N301, or equal.
>
> 6\. [Orifice Traps, Low Pressure:]{.underline} 25 psig working
> pressure, brass body, union nut integral strainer, stainless steel
> modified venturi nozzle; Engineering Resources "Steamgard System" SG-R
> Series or equal.
>
> 7\. [Orifice Traps, Medium Pressure:]{.underline} 300 Series stainless
> steel body with machined nozzle, Y-strainer with blowdown, and
> integral secondary screen strainer; Engineering Resources "Steamgard
> System" SG-HA (150 psig), SG-HL (250 psig), or equal.
>
> B. [Vacuum Breakers:]{.underline} Brass body and cap, stainless steel
> valve and valve seat, NPT connections, 2 inches w.g. vacuum required
> to open, 210 psig maximum operating pressure, 500 degrees F maximum
> operating temperature; Spirax/Sarco Model VB14 or equal.
>
> C. [Automatic Air Vent:]{.underline} Balanced pressure thermostatic
> type, bellows operated, cast iron body, stainless steel element and
> valve trim, NPT connections, 250 psig maximum operating pressure;
> Spirax/Sarco Model VS204 or equal.
>
> D. [Strainers:]{.underline} Y-type, cast iron body, 20 mesh stainless
> steel screen with free area equal to five times inlet line size;
> Spirax/Sarco Type \"IT\" or equal.
>
> E. Pressure Reducing Valves
>
> 1\. [Direct Acting Type:]{.underline} Bronze body, NPT connections,
> maximum saturated steam pressure 250 psig, 2-25 psig output range
> unless otherwise specified on drawings, hand wheel adjustment,
> stainless steel trim. Spirax/Sarco Model BRV or equal.
>
> 2\. [Pilot Operated Type:]{.underline} Cast iron body, NPT connections
> 2 inch and smaller, flanged connections 2-1/2 inch and larger, maximum
> saturated steam pressure 250 psig, 80-250 psig output range unless
> otherwise specified on drawings, pressure pilot controlled, stainless
> steel trim. Spirax/Sarco Model 25P or equal.
>
> F. [Suggested Manufacturers:]{.underline} Steam and steam condensate
> specialties shall be Spirax/Sarco, Armstrong, Yarway, Nicholson,
> Spence, ITT Hoffman, or equal.

2.08 STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS

[Pressure Powered Pumps:]{.underline} Cast iron body with lift type
inlet and outlet check valves; float-operated, snap-acting mechanism
with stainless steel trim and no external seals or packing; steam
operated to 125 psig; NPT inlet, outlet, and vent connections; sizes and
capacities as specified on the drawings; Spirax/Sarco Model PPC,
Armstrong Series PT-200 or equal.

2.09 REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES

> A. [Thermostatic Expansion Valves:]{.underline} Brass or cast bronze
> body, brass and stainless steel internal parts, replaceable power
> element, stainless steel diaphragm and power element housing, external
> equalizer tube, remote bulb sensor, solder or brazing connections,
> balanced port construction for precise control over wide variations in
> load and/or condensing pressure, sized for coil capacity requirements;
> Parker, Alco, Sporlan, or equal.
>
> B. [Filter-Driers:]{.underline} Sealed type, flared or soldered
> connections as required, properly sized for compressor capacity at 2
> psid; capacities certified in accordance with ARI Standards 710
> (liquid line) or 730 (suction line); Parker, Alco, Sporlan, or equal.
>
> C. [Sight Glasses:]{.underline} Flared or soldered connections,
> replaceable moisture indicator element, full view sight glass. Sporlan
> Type \"SA\" or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 HYDRONIC, STEAM, AND STEAM CONDENSATE PIPING

> A. Provide dielectric unions or flanges wherever dissimilar metals
> subject to galvanic activity are joined together (tank and equipment
> connections, connections between copper pipe and steel pipe, etc.).
>
> B. Route piping approximately as shown on the drawings, and as field
> conditions permit. Install piping so as not to interfere with doors
> and equipment maintenance access.
>
> C. Install unions and flanges to allow servicing and removal of
> equipment without dismantling piping.
>
> D. Install drain and vent connections and suitable valves at all high
> and low points in hydronic systems to permit rapid filling and
> draining for maintenance work. Provide a drain at the base of each
> riser.
>
> E. Install piping to coils, pumps, and other equipment at full size
> indicated on the drawings. Make required line size changes at the
> equipment connections.
>
> F. Hydrostatically test piping at the greater of 1-1/2 times operating
> pressure or 150 psig. If pressure does not hold for 2 hours, repair
> leaks and retest. Conduct tests in the presence of the Government
> Inspector. Test procedure shall be in accordance with ANSI B31.9.
> Remove or isolate any equipment which could be damaged by the test
> pressure. Each system may be tested in sections, or as a whole.
>
> G. Remove and repair defects in welded piping in accordance with ANSI
> B31.9. Drain hydrostatically tested piping with weld leaks to a level
> below the leak before repairing welds.
>
> H. Use soldering and brazing materials and procedures in accordance
> with ANSI B31.9. Provide composition of filler metal and flux in
> accordance with the recommendation of the manufacturer for the metals
> being joined.
>
> I. Flush steam, steam condensate, and hydronic piping systems with
> potable water to remove dirt and debris prior to making final
> equipment connections.

3.02 COIL CONDENSATE PIPING

> A. Provide coil condensate piping for HVAC units as indicated on the
> drawings.
>
> B. Provide a p-trap for each HVAC unit, unless otherwise indicated on
> the drawings or in the manufacturer\'s installation manual.
>
> C. Pitch horizontal piping to drain a minimum of 1/8 inch per foot of
> run.
>
> D. Test piping by plugging the outlet and filling with water. Check
> fittings for leakage after 30 minutes. Repair leaks and retest until
> all leaks are eliminated.

3.03 REFRIGERANT PIPING

> A. Install refrigerant piping per ANSI B31.5.
>
> B. Clean, dehydrate, test, and charge lines per A/C manufacturer's
> installation specifications and the following procedure.
>
> 1\. Charge piping to 150 psig (250 psig for R-22 liquid and hot gas
> lines) with dry nitrogen. Bubble test all joints. Repair leaks and
> retest until pressure holds for one hour. Bleed off test pressure.
>
> 2\. Charge piping with refrigerant to 10 psig. Pressurize piping to
> the test pressure (as specified above) with dry nitrogen. Check for
> leaks with an electronic halogen leak detector. Repair leaks and
> retest until leaks are eliminated.
>
> 3\. Evacuate the system to 500 microns. Equalize the system with dry
> nitrogen.
>
> 4\. Evacuate system to 500 microns. If there is appreciable vacuum
> loss after 12 hours, return to step 2. If vacuum is retained, charge
> system with refrigerant per the A/C manufacturer\'s instructions.

3.04 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

> A. Provide hydronic specialties in the sizes, capacities, and
> locations indicated on the drawings. Install per manufacturer\'s
> recommendations.
>
> B. Provide one P&T Test Kit to the Government for each project where
> P&T test ports are specified.
>
> C. Pipe discharges of all automatic air vents to building drains, or
> to grade outside the building.
>
> D. Remove start-up strainers from pump suction diffusers after
> completion of hydronic system balancing (ref. Section 15950).

3.05 STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS AND SPECIALTIES

> A. Provide steam and steam condensate specialties and pumps in the
> sizes, capacities, and locations indicated on the drawings. Install
> per the manufacturer's recommendations.
>
> B. Unless otherwise indicated, pipe relief valve and air vent
> discharges and condensate pump vents to a safe location outside the
> building.

3.06 REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES

> A. Provide refrigerant specialties as indicated on the drawings.
> Install per the manufacturer's recommendations.
>
> B. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, consult the A/C
> equipment manufacturer's literature for required sizes and capacities.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15210

PROCESS AIR AND GAS PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> A. This section specifies compressed air and gas piping systems up to
> 5000 psig operating pressure. Systems include, but are not limited to,
> shop air, high purity air (a.k.a. missile grade air), breathing air,
> nitrogen, argon, and helium.
>
> B. System working pressures and materials for each specific
> application will be noted on the drawings.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

> A. Section 15051 Welding for Mechanical Utility Piping
>
> B. Section 15060 Hanger and Supports
>
> C. Section 15075 Mechanical Identification
>
> D. Section 15110 Valves
>
> E. Section 15125 Gages
>
> F. Section 15215 Cleaning for Process Piping Systems

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CARBON STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

> A. [Pipe:]{.underline} Seamless, black carbon steel suitable for
> bending and forming, conforming to ASTM A106, Grade B. Piping shall be
> Schedule 40 unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
>
> B. [Threaded Fittings, 1/2\" To 2\" NPS:]{.underline}
>
> 1\. Black malleable iron, conforming to ASTM A197, ANSI B16.3 and ANSI
> B1.20.1. Fittings for Schedule 40 pipe shall be Class 150 unless noted
> otherwise on the drawings.
>
> 2\. Forged carbon steel, conforming to ASTM A105, ANSI B16.11 and ANSI
> B1.20.1. Fittings shall be Class 2000 for Schedule 80 and XS pipe,
> Class 3000 for Schedule 160 pipe and Class 6000 for XXS pipe.
>
> C. [Buttweld Fittings, 1/2\" NPS And Larger:]{.underline} Seamless,
> wrought carbon steel conforming to ASTM A234, Grade WPB, ANSI B16.9
> and ANSI B16.25. Pressure standard shall be equal to piping.
>
> D. [Welded Outlet Fittings:]{.underline} Forged carbon steel
> conforming to ASTM A105, Grade II and ANSI B16.9. Threaded outlet
> connections, up to 2\" NPS, shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1. Buttweld
> outlet connections, 1/2\" NPS and larger, shall conform to ANSI B16.9
> and ANSI B16.25. Outlet connection type shall be as noted on the
> drawings. Fittings shall be reinforced for 100 percent pipe strength
> branch connections per ANSI/ASME B31.1. Bonney Forge \"Thredolet\" and
> \"Weldolet\" fittings or equal.
>
> E. [Flanges:]{.underline} Forged steel welding neck flanges, 1/2\" NPS
> and larger, conforming to ASTM A105, Grade II, ANSI B16.5 and ANSI
> B16.25. Pressure standard shall be 150 lb. unless noted otherwise.
> Flange facings shall be raised face unless noted otherwise. Gasket
> surface finish for raised face flanges shall be spiral, serrated
> finish cut with a round-nosed tool.
>
> F. [Gaskets:]{.underline} Flat ring, nonmetallic below 600 PSI and
> spiral wound metal with nonmetallic filler for 600 PSI and higher,
> unless noted otherwise. Gaskets shall conform to ASME B31.1, Table 112
> and ANSI B16.5, Paragraph 6.10 and Appendix E, Group 1A.
>
> G. [Ring Joint Gaskets:]{.underline} Octagonal cross section, Brinell
> Hardness 131, maximum 1/2% Molybdenum, 5% Chrome. Gaskets shall
> conform to ANSI B16.20.
>
> H. [Stud Bolts:]{.underline} Alloy steel per ASTM A193, Grade B7,
> threaded to conform to ANSI B1.1, Class 2A Unified Screw Threads.
>
> I. [Nuts:]{.underline} Semi-finished, heavy hexagonal, carbon steel
> conforming to ASTM A194, Grade 2H, threaded to conform to ANSI B1.1,
> Class 2B Unified Screw Threads.
>
> J. [Grayloc Connectors:]{.underline} Forged carbon steel hubs per ASTM
> A105 with nickel coated sealing surfaces. Welding bevel and part
> tolerances in accordance with ANSI B16.5. Carbon steel clamps per
> manufacturer\'s recommended ASTM Standard. Alloy steel stud bolts per
> ASTM A193, Grade B7. Carbon steel nuts per ASTM A194, Grade 2 or 2H.
> Seal rings shall be carbon steel with PTFE coating unless noted
> otherwise. Hubs shall match piping pressure standard. Connectors shall
> be Grayloc, Reflange, or equal.
>
> K. [Dielectric Unions and Flanges:]{.underline} Watts, EPCO, Harco, or
> equal.

2.02 COATING SYSTEM FOR BURIED CARBON STEEL PIPING

> A. Provide all buried carbon steel piping with a factory-applied,
> extruded thermoplastic coating system per Federal Standard
>
> L-C-530, or AWWA Standards C215 and C216.
>
> B. The coating system shall extend to a minimum of 3 inches above
> finished grade.
>
> C. The factory-applied coating shall be fault tested at the factory
> with an impressed voltage of 10,000 volts. Sheath breakdown voltage
> shall not be less than 13,000 volts.
>
> D. The coating system manufacturer shall supply heat shrinkable
> sleeves for field joints, and field repair kits for damaged coating.

2.03 COPPER TUBING

> Unless otherwise noted, copper tubing shall be Type L, hard drawn,
> seamless water tube per ASTM B88, with wrought copper fittings and
> 95-5 tin-antimony solder.

2.04 STAINLESS STEEL TUBING

> A. [Tubing:]{.underline} Type 304 or 316 stainless steel, cold drawn,
> seamless, fully annealed, suitable for bending and flaring, conforming
> to ASTM A213. Wall thickness of tubing shall be as specified below,
> unless otherwise specified on the drawings. Wall thicknesses specified
> are [minimums.]{.underline} Heavier wall thicknesses may be
> substituted.

  ------------- ------------ ------ -------- -------- -------- ------ -------- ------ -------- ------ --------
  MAXIMUM                                                                                             
  OPERATING                                                                                           
  PRESSURES,                                                                                          
  PSIG                                                                                                

  TUBING        TUBING WALL                                                                           
                THICKNESS,                                                                            
                INCHES                                                                                

  O.D., IN.     .035         .049            .058     .065            .072     .095                   .109

  1/4           5000                                                                                  

  3/8           3500         4900            5000                                                     

  1/2           2625         3675            4350     4875            5000                            

  3/4                               2450     2900     3250     3600                   4750     5000   

  1                                                   2435     2700                   3560     4085   
  ------------- ------------ ------ -------- -------- -------- ------ -------- ------ -------- ------ --------

> B. [Fittings:]{.underline} 37-degree flare, conforming to applicable
> Military Standards MS-51500 through MS-51534, Type 316 stainless
> steel; Parker \"Triple-Lok\" or equal.

2.05 STAINLESS STEEL BRAIDED TEFLON HOSE

> A. [Hose:]{.underline} Extruded TFE inner tube with 300 series
> stainless steel wire braid outer cover. Maximum working pressures at
> 75 degrees F shall be 625 PSI, size -20, to 3000 PSI, size -4. Service
> temperature range shall be -100 to 450 degrees F. Hose shall be equal
> to Parflex TFE 919 Hose by Parker Hannifin Corp.
>
> B. [Fittings:]{.underline} Reusable or permanent fittings as noted on
> the drawings and specified below. Provide NPT end connections unless
> otherwise noted.
>
> 1\. Reusable, threaded assembly type fittings with 300 series
> stainless steel nipple, socket and ferrule equal to Parflex 90 Series
> fittings by Parker Hannifin Corp.
>
> 2\. Permanent, crimped type fittings with 300 series stainless steel
> nipple, nut and shell equal to Parflex 91 Series fittings by Parker
> Hannifin Corp.

2.06 BREATHING AIR OUTLETS

> Breathing air outlets shall consist of a NIOSH approved, Hansen type
> quick coupling socket with brass body and 3/8 inch MPT connection.
> Sockets shall be 3M Brand Model W-1449-2 to match existing 3M Brand
> respiratory equipment.

2.07 PROCESS GAS REGULATORS

> A. [Type HLR-1:]{.underline} General purpose regulator, hand loaded,
> non-venting type unless otherwise noted, 300 Series stainless steel
> body and trim, 10,000 psig maximum operating pressure, NPT inlet and
> outlet connections unless otherwise noted, 1/4 inch NPT inlet and
> outlet gage ports, bubble-tight shutoff, Cv=.06, outlet pressure range
> as specified on the drawings; Tescom 26-100 Series or equal. Provide
> panel mounting hardware as required.
>
> B. [Type HLR-2:]{.underline} High purity regulator, hand loaded,
> non-venting type unless otherwise noted, 316 stainless steel body,
> diaphragm, and trim, Teflon seat, 3500 psig maximum operating
> pressure, 1/4 inch NPT connections and gage ports, Cv=.06, outlet
> pressure range as specified on the drawings; Tescom 44-2200 Series or
> equal. Provide panel mounting hardware as required.

2.08 SHOP AIR FILTER/REGULATORS

> A. Shop air filter/regulators shall be general purpose, relieving type
> with balanced valve design, 250 psig maximum inlet pressure,
>
> 5-125 psig outlet pressure range, outlet pressure gage and 3/4 inch
> FPT ports. Bowls shall be metal, screw-on type with sight glass and
> liquid level actuated automatic drain, unless otherwise noted.
>
> B. The filter shall be a cleanable, porous polypropylene element to
> filter 50 micron size particles unless otherwise noted. Each shop air
> filter/regulator shall be furnished with a spare filter element.
>
> C. Shop air filter/regulators shall be Norgren Model B12-697-A3LA or
> equal.

2.09 SHOP AIR QUICK COUPLINGS

> A. Shop air quick couplings shall consist of steel couplers and plugs
> rated for 300 psig. Couplers shall be single shut-off type with
> built-in sleeve guard, Buna-N seals and female pipe thread connection.
> Plugs shall have end connections as noted on the drawings. Quick
> couplings shall be equal to Parker 20 Series.
>
> B. Shop air quick couplings shall be \"industrial interchange\" design
> conforming to MIL-C-4109F dimensional specifications.

2.10 SHOP AIR DRAIN VALVES

> A. [Type DV-1:]{.underline} Automatic drip leg drain valve, float
> operated, zinc body, clear polycarbonate bowl with metal guard;
> acetal, nitrile, and stainless steel internals; valve designed to
> drain by gravity in the absence of inlet pressure; 150 psig maximum
> operating pressure, NPT inlet and discharge connections; Norgren Model
>
> 17-016-008 or equal.
>
> B. [Type DV-2:]{.underline} For compressed air receivers and
> after-coolers, automatic float operated, cast iron body, stainless
> steel internals, NPT connections, 150 psig maximum operating pressure,
> 1200 pounds of water per hour discharge capacity; ITT Hoffman Model
> 793 or equal.

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

> A. [Pipe Thread Sealant:]{.underline} Teflon tape, conforming to
> MIL-T-27730.
>
> B. [Leak Detection Solution:]{.underline} Conforming to MIL-L-25567D;
> NUPRO \"Snoop\" or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

> A. Piping and tubing shall be installed and tested in accordance with
> latest edition of ANSI/ASME B31.1, "Code for Pressure Piping."
>
> B. Pipe and tubing ends shall be reamed and deburred before joint
> connections are assembled.
>
> C. When adding to an existing system, match the existing piping
> material and fittings, unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
>
> D. Pipe and tubing inside metal stud walls shall be isolated from the
> studs with plastic or rubber bushings specifically designed for that
> purpose.
>
> E. Install pipe and tubing runs to equipment at full line sizes
> indicated on the drawings, with required size changes made at the
> equipment connections.
>
> F. Seal all pipe thread connections with Teflon tape.
>
> G. Provide unions or flanges at equipment connections for ease of
> removal.
>
> H. Provide dielectric unions or flanges where dissimilar metals
> subject to galvanic activity are connected (equipment connections,
> connections between copper and steel pipe, etc.).
>
> I. Provide all fittings and valves required for testing, cleaning, and
> draining of systems.

3.02 COATING SYSTEM FOR BURIED CARBON STEEL PIPING

> A. Packaging, handling, site storage, and testing of coated steel
> piping shall be in accordance with AWWA C215 and the manufacturer's
> recommendations.
>
> B. After all joints have been coated, and prior to backfilling, all
> underground pipe coating shall be holiday tested at 10,000 volts per
> NACE Standard RP-02-74. All coating system defects and holidays shall
> be repaired using the coating manufacturer's recommended materials and
> procedures; then retested until satisfactory results are obtained.
>
> C. Perform all testing in the presence of the Government Inspector.

3.03 COPPER TUBING

> Soldering and brazing techniques shall be in accordance with the
> Copper Development Association\'s \"Copper Tube Handbook.\"

3.04 STAINLESS STEEL TUBING

> A. Use tubing benders to form all bends. Do not form any bend with a
> radius smaller than that recommended by the tubing manufacturer.
>
> B. Deburr tubing ends prior to flaring.
>
> C. Follow tube fitting manufacturer\'s recommendations for flaring of
> tubing and installation of fittings.

3.05 BREATHING AIR SYSTEMS

> A. Breathing air systems shall be constructed with stainless steel
> tubing and fittings, unless otherwise noted.
>
> B. Clean breathing air systems to Class 1 cleanliness per Section
> 15215.
>
> C. In the presence of the Government Inspector, collect separate
> samples at each breathing air outlet. Clearly label each sample with
> the location and date of sampling.
>
> D. The minimum air quality standard, unless otherwise noted, shall be
> Grade D per Compressed Gas Association Pamphlets G-7-1990,
> \"Compressed Air for Human Respiration\" and G-7.1-1989, \"Commodity
> Specification for Air\".
>
> E. Submit Independent Test Reports, SD-70, regarding the air quality
> at each breathing air outlet. Reports shall list breathing air outlet
> location, specific contaminants, and contamination levels.

3.06 TESTING

> A. Hydrostatically test all air and inert gas systems at 1.5 times the
> maximum operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig. Repair leaks
> and retest until pressure holds for one hour.
>
> B. When piping configuration or cleaning requirements make hydrostatic
> testing impractical, pneumatic testing at 1.2 times operating pressure
> may be substituted, with [prior approval]{.underline} from the A/E.
>
> C. Each system may be tested in sections, or as a whole.
>
> D. After placing systems into operation, bubble check all fittings and
> components at normal system operating pressure with a leak detection
> solution. Repair leaks and retest until all leaks are eliminated.
>
> E. Perform all testing in the presence of the Government Inspector.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15215

CLEANING FOR PROCESS PIPING SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> This section defines four cleanliness classes for piping systems. The
> cleanliness class required for each system or subsystem shall be as
> noted on the drawings, or in other sections of these specifications.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

Provide submittals per paragraph 3.03.

1.03 REFERENCES FOR CLEANING AND INSPECTION PROCEDURES

> A. The following publications contain provisions for cleaning and
> inspection procedures, and are listed for information only. No
> warranty is implied that the procedures contained therein will provide
> the cleanliness levels required by the specifications.
>
> B. NASA Standards
>
> 1\. NPC-200-2, "Quality Program Provisions for Space Systems
> Contractors"
>
> 2\. NPC-200-3, "Inspection System Provisions for Suppliers of Space
> Materials, Parts, Components, and Services"
>
> C. Marshall Space Flight Center Standards
>
> 1\. MSFC-SPEC-164B, "Specifications for Cleanliness of Components for
> Use in Oxygen, Fuel and Pneumatic Systems"
>
> 2\. MSFC-PROC-166, "Procedure for Cleaning, Testing, and Handling of
> Space Vehicle Hydraulic System Components and Hydraulic Fluids"
>
> D. Society Of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Standards
>
> 1\. ARP 598, "Procedure for the Determination of Particulate
> Contamination of Hydraulic Fluids by the Particle Count Method"
>
> 2\. ARP 743, "Procedure for the Determination of Particulate
> Contamination of Air in Dust Controlled Spaces by the Particle Count
> Method"

1.04 DEFINITIONS

> A. Particles - all metallic and non-metallic foreign matter except
> fibers. Dimensions of particles are described in microns (1 micron
> equals 0.001 mm). Unless otherwise stated, particle size limitations
> always refer to the maximum particle dimension.
>
> B. Fibers - all foreign matter having a length greater than 100
> microns and a minimum length-to-diameter ratio of 10 to 1.
>
> C. Significant surfaces - all component surfaces that may come into
> contact with the service medium.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CLEANING AND TESTING MATERIALS

> A. Trichloroethylene Solvent
>
> 1\. Solvent used for testing or for immersion cleaning shall conform
> to Fed Spec O-T-634, Type I or II, except that it shall contain no
> particle over 175 microns, and no more than 5 particles from 100 to
> 175 microns.
>
> 2\. Solvent used for vapor degreasing of stainless steel components
> shall conform to Fed Spec O-T-634, Type II.
>
> 3\. Trichloroethylene shall not be used for vessel cleaning where tank
> entry is required.
>
> B. Trisodium Phosphate shall conform to Fed Spec O-S-642.
>
> C. Nitric Acid shall conform to Fed Spec O-N-350.
>
> D. Citric Acid shall be Industrial Grade.
>
> E. Hydrochloric Acid shall conform to Fed Spec O-H-765.
>
> F. Hydroflouric Acid shall conform to Fed Spec O-H-795.
>
> G. Detergents shall conform to MIL SPEC MIL-D-16791.
>
> H. Deionized Water
>
> 1\. Deionized water shall have a minimum specific resistance of 50,000
> Ohm-cm and a pH factor between 6.0 and 8.0.
>
> 2\. Deionized water used for rinsing and sampling shall be filtered to
> remove all particles larger than 175 microns. In addition, there shall
> be no more than 5 particles between 100 and 175 microns per 500 mL
> sampling.
>
> I. Filter discs for sampling and testing shall be Millipore Mitex Type
> LS or equal.

2.02 DRYING AND PRESERVATION GASES

> A. Gases used in drying and preservation processes shall be filtered
> to a 100 micron level (absolute).
>
> B. The oil content of gases shall not exceed 3 ppm by weight.
>
> C. The dew point temperature of gases shall be -80 degrees F or lower.
>
> D. Nitrogen gas shall conform to Fed Spec BB-N-411, Type I, Class I,
> Grade B, in addition to requirements listed in paragraphs A,B, and C
> above.

2.03 PACKAGING AND PROTECTION MATERIALS

> A. Tape used to secure and reinforce protective covers shall conform
> to Fed Spec PPP-T-60, Type I, Class I.
>
> B. Polyethylene Film shall conform to Fed Spec L-P-378, Type II.
>
> C. ACLAR 33C film shall be as manufactured by Allied Chemical Corp.
>
> D. Aluminum foil shall be common commercial grade.

2.04 GOVERNMENT FURNISHED MATERIALS

> Air, gaseous nitrogen, and deionized water for cleaning and drying of
> piping systems will be furnished by the Government.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL CLEANING REQUIREMENTS

> A. All gross contamination shall be removed by mechanical processes,
> flushing, or high velocity blowdown prior to final cleaning.
> Mechanical and electrical testing shall be accomplished after
> precleaning and before final cleaning. All lengths of pipe, fittings,
> and piping system components shall be precleaned prior to welding and
> assembly.
>
> B. Corrosion resistant (stainless) steel assemblies shall be treated
> (pickling and passivating processes) to prevent contamination or
> latent corrosion.
>
> C. Assemblies not suitable for cleaning as assembled shall have
> component parts cleaned prior to assembly; or shall be disassembled,
> cleaned, and reassembled. This shall apply to assemblies composed of
> materials requiring different cleaning procedures, or assemblies from
> which cleaning solutions cannot be adequately drained.
>
> D. Flanged and flared joints shall be loosened as required during the
> cleaning procedure to assure complete drainage of cleaning and rinsing
> solutions.
>
> E. Components may be provided factory-cleaned if the manufacturer\'s
> cleaning and handling procedures are submitted and approved in
> advance.
>
> F. Air and gaseous nitrogen furnished by the Government will be
> delivered to the job site. Deionized water will be furnished on the
> Center to Contractor tankers. Discharge of the tankers shall meet the
> requirements of paragraph 2.01, H. above. Requests for Government
> furnished materials shall be made at least two working days prior to
> the required delivery time.
>
> G. The Contractor is responsible for maintaining the cleanliness of
> all cleaned systems and components. Any system or component that
> becomes recontaminated shall be recleaned at no additional cost to the
> Government.

3.02 CLEANLINESS CLASSIFICATIONS

> Cleanliness Classes I, II, and III are defined below, based on the
> results of applicable quality assurance tests specified in paragraph
> 3.05. Class IV Cleanliness is defined in terms of cleaning procedures
> to be used. **NOTE:** There is [no]{.underline} correlation between
> cleanliness classes defined by MSFC-SPEC-164B and those defined below.
>
> A. CLASS I CLEANLINESS
>
> 1\. Visual Examination
>
> a\. All significant surfaces shall be free of organic materials such
> as hydrocarbons, paint, crayon, ink, and welding flux.
>
> b\. The presence of visible contamination shall be cause for
> rejection, and shall necessitate recleaning.
>
> c\. Scale-free discoloration due to welding and passivation is
> acceptable.
>
> d\. The presence of any fluorescent particles on any surface shall be
> cause for rejection, and shall necessitate recleaning of the item.
>
> e\. Any component or material from which fluorescence cannot be
> eliminated shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Government.
>
> 2\. pH Test
>
> Internal and external surface pH shall be between 6.0 and 8.0.
>
> 3\. Particle Size Determination
>
> Solid particle contamination per square foot of significant surface
> area shall not exceed the following:
>
> a\. No particles greater than 500 microns.
>
> b\. Five particles between 150 and 500 microns.
>
> c\. One hundred particles between 5 and 150 microns.
>
> d\. Ten fibers.
>
> 4\. NVR Test
>
> Non-volatile residue contamination shall not exceed 0.001 gram per
> square foot of significant surface area.
>
> 5\. Moisture Determination
>
> The dew point of the influent gas at the point of delivery shall be
> between -80 and -75 degrees F. The dew point of the effluent gas shall
> be within 5 degrees F of the influent gas.
>
> 6\. Protection of Cleaned Surfaces
>
> a\. Immediately after precleaning, cleaning and drying, all
> significant cleaned surfaces shall be protected from recontamination
> by covering the surfaces or openings with a minimum of two layers of
> \"ACLAR 33C\" secured and reinforced with tape.
>
> b\. Covers for containers shall be designed to facilitate container
> venting without recontaminating the container.
>
> c\. Each protected component that is not installed shall be placed in
> a clean polyethylene bag. The bag shall be purged with dry, oil-free
> gas (paragraph 2.02), and the ends of the bag shall be heat-sealed to
> assure an inert package during storage. The bagged component, with a
> cleaning certification tag, shall be placed in a second heat-sealed
> and purged polyethylene bag.
>
> d\. Large components and assemblies which cannot be bagged (vessels,
> lines cleaned in place, etc.) shall be sealed with mating fittings or
> flanges and pressurized with purge gas to a minimum of 50% of design
> pressure. The purge pressure shall be monitored, and shall not be
> allowed to drop below 25% of design pressure.
>
> e\. The Contractor may submit alternative preservation procedures for
> approval if safety concerns preclude the use of the procedure
> specified above.
>
> f\. Overpacking to prevent damage shall be provided as necessary.
>
> g\. Protection procedures shall be subject to the approval of the
> COTR.
>
> B. CLASS II CLEANLINESS
>
> 1\. Visual Examination
>
> Visual examination criteria shall be the same as Class I.
>
> 2\. pH Test
>
> Internal and external surface pH shall be between 6.0 and 8.0.
>
> 3\. Particle Size Determination
>
> The limitations for solid particle contamination shall be the same as
> specified for Class I Cleanliness.
>
> 4\. Moisture Determination
>
> The dew point of the influent gas at the point of delivery shall be
> between -80 and -75 degrees F. The dew point of the effluent gas shall
> be within 10 degrees F of the influent gas.
>
> 5\. Protection of Cleaned Surfaces
>
> a\. Immediately after cleaning and drying, all significant surfaces
> shall be protected from recontamination by covering the surfaces or
> openings with a minimum of two layers of polyethylene film or
> precleaned dry covers. Polyethylene film shall be secured and
> reinforced with tape.
>
> b\. Covers for containers shall be designed to facilitate container
> venting without recontaminating the container.
>
> c\. Each protected component that is not installed shall be placed in
> a clean polyethylene bag. The bag shall be purged with dry, oil-free
> gas (paragraph 2.02), and the ends of the bag shall be heat-sealed to
> assure an inert package during storage. The bagged component, with a
> cleaning certification tag, shall be placed in a second heat-sealed
> and purged polyethylene bag.
>
> d\. Large components and assemblies which cannot be bagged (vessels,
> lines cleaned in place, etc.) shall be sealed with mating fittings or
> flanges and pressurized with purge gas to a minimum of 50% of design
> pressure. The purge pressure shall be monitored, and shall not be
> allowed to drop below 25% of design pressure.
>
> e\. The Contractor may submit alternative preservation procedures for
> approval if safety concerns preclude the use of the procedure
> specified above.
>
> f\. Overpacking to prevent damage shall be provided as necessary.
>
> g\. Protection procedures shall be subject to the approval of the
> COTR.
>
> C. CLASS III CLEANLINESS
>
> 1\. Visual Examination
>
> Visual examination criteria shall be the same as Class I.
>
> 2\. Particle Size Determination
>
> Solid particle contamination per square foot of significant surface
> area shall not exceed the following.
>
> a\. No particles greater than 1500 microns.
>
> b\. Fifty particles between 150 and 1500 microns.
>
> c\. Five hundred particles between 5 and 150 microns.
>
> d\. Fifty fibers.
>
> 3\. Moisture Determination
>
> The dew point of the influent gas at the point of delivery shall be
> between -80 and -75 degrees F. The dew point of the effluent gas shall
> be within 20 degrees F of the influent gas.
>
> 4\. Protection of Cleaned Surfaces
>
> Protection shall be the same as for Class II Cleanliness.
>
> D. CLASS IV CLEANLINESS
>
> Class IV Cleanliness is general industrial cleaning, and shall be
> accomplished as follows:
>
> 1\. Preclean piping, tubing, and other components per paragraph 3.01
> to remove loose rust, scale, dirt, and other foreign materials prior
> to assembly.
>
> 2\. After assembly and testing is completed, and prior to placing into
> service, systems shall be cleaned as follows:
>
> a\. Steam and liquid service piping systems, except deionized water,
> shall be flushed with potable water.
>
> b\. Deionized water piping systems shall be flushed with deionized
> water.
>
> c\. Air and inert gas piping systems shall be blown down with the
> service medium. Loosen flanges, unions, or flared fittings as required
> to permit blow-down for all sections of piping and tubing. After
> blow-down, tighten these fittings and bubble check for leakage. Repair
> leaks.

3.03 PROCESS APPROVAL REQUIREMENTS

> The following requirements apply to Cleanliness Classes I, II, and III
> only.
>
> A. Submit written procedures and processes(SD-08) for precleaning,
> cleaning, handling, preservation, and quality control. Procedures and
> processes shall be developed by the Contractor and submitted for
> approval prior to use. Only approved processes shall be used; however,
> utilization of an approved process will not guarantee acceptance of
> the final product. Submittals shall include the following information.
>
> 1\. Processing materials to be used - include trade names,
> manufacturers' names, specifications, and chemical and physical
> properties. This information is contained in applicable Material
> Safety Data Sheets.
>
> 2\. Estimated quantities of each waste material to be generated as a
> result of each process.
>
> 3\. A list of processing equipment to be used for each process.
>
> 4\. Quality Control and Handling Procedures
>
> a\. In-process control procedures to prevent contamination and latent
> corrosion.
>
> b\. Installation procedures for cleaned components in cleaned systems.
>
> c\. Procedures and materials to be used to preserve cleanliness of
> components prior to installation, and clean systems after acceptance.
>
> B. Submit a written plan (SD-08) per paragraph 3.07 for handling and
> disposal of non-hazardous and non-controlled waste generated.

3.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROVISIONS

> A. Applicable quality assurance tests are specified in 3.05 below.
>
> B. The Contractor is responsible for the performance of all inspection
> requirements. Except as otherwise noted, he may use his own, or any
> other, inspection facilities and services approved by the COTR.
>
> C. Records of the examinations and tests shall be kept complete, and
> shall be available for inspection by the COTR.
>
> D. At the completion of the project, submit copies of all inspection
> reports (SD-09) to the COTR for his records.
>
> E. The Government reserves the right to perform any of the inspections
> set forth in this specification where such inspections are deemed
> necessary to insure that the work conforms to the prescribed
> requirements.

3.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTS

> A. Visual Examination
>
> 1\. Surfaces of all cleaned components shall be visually examined
> under a strong white light for the presence of moisture or foreign
> materials such as corrosion, scale, dirt, oil, grease, crayon, etc. A
> flashlight or borescope may be required for examination of internal
> surfaces.
>
> 2\. Surfaces of all cleaned components shall be visually examined
> under an ultraviolet (UV) light for the presence of moisture and
> foreign materials such as corrosion, scale, dirt, oil, grease, crayon,
> etc. The power of the UV light shall be at least 100 watts with a
> wavelength of approximately 3660 Angstrom units.
>
> B. pH Test
>
> 1\. External and internal surfaces of all cleaned and rinsed
> components shall be tested with pH-indicating paper.
>
> 2\. pH-indicating paper shall be sensitive to pH in the range of 6.0
> to 8.0.
>
> 3\. pH testing shall be performed while surfaces are still wet from
> the final rinse, or after wetting the surfaces with a few drops of
> deionized water.
>
> C. Particle Size Determination
>
> The size distribution and quantity of all particles retained on all
> significant surfaces shall be determined by removing and measuring
> particles on a minimum 5 percent representative sample of the total
> surface. The determination shall be made as follows:
>
> 1\. Flush the selected sample surface of measured or estimated area
> with approximately 500 mL of deionized water or trichloroethylene (Fed
> Spec O-T-634, Type I) per square foot.
>
> a\. For individual small components having less than one square foot
> of surface, a minimum of 500 mL of flushing fluid shall be used.
>
> b\. For piping and large components having greater than three square
> feet of surface area, three separate samples shall be collected and
> analyzed.
>
> c\. Piping and piping systems shall be sampled at three locations as
> directed by the Government Inspector. During sampling, the flow
> velocity through the pipe shall exceed 8 feet per second, unless
> otherwise approved.
>
> 2\. Catch the entire quantity of flushing fluid in a precleaned
> container.
>
> 3\. Transfer an equal quantity of unused flushing fluid into a second
> precleaned container.
>
> 4\. Filter both samples of flushing fluid through filter discs, and
> examine the residue under a 10 to 45 power stereomicro-scope. The
> difference in particle count in each size range shall constitute the
> solid particle contamination of the entire surface represented. If the
> allowable limit is exceeded in any range, the entire surface shall be
> recleaned and retested.
>
> 5\. After satisfactory completion of the particle size determination,
> all surfaces shall be dried and protected against corrosion or
> recontamination in accordance with approved procedures, and marked as
> specified in 3.06.
>
> D. Non-Volatile Residue (NVR) Testing
>
> NVR testing and analysis procedures shall be in accordance with
> MSFC-SPEC-164B, paragraph 3.3.3.
>
> E. Moisture Determination
>
> 1\. Small components and assemblies with all significant surfaces
> exposed shall be examined visually for the presence of surface
> moisture.
>
> 2\. Moisture content of surfaces in tanks, piping sections and systems
> shall be determined as follows:
>
> a\. The system shall be under a static lockup for at least 8 hours
> prior to sampling.
>
> b\. Set up a flow of purge gas through the tank or system such that
> the flow contacts all significant surfaces. If necessary, several
> checks may be run covering different portions of the system in order
> to assure the flow of purge gas over all significant surfaces.
>
> c\. Purge gas shall be as specified in paragraph 2.02.
>
> d\. The velocity of flow at any point in the system being checked
> shall not exceed 60 feet per minute.
>
> e\. Measure the moisture content of the influent gas and the effluent
> gas using a dew point meter (Alnor Instrument Company or equivalent).
>
> f\. Moisture vapor level above the specification in any tank, system,
> or subsystem shall be cause for rejection and correction. Correction
> may be achieved by continuing the flow of purge gas, heating the gas
> and system if preferred, until a satisfactory effluent moisture vapor
> level is attained.

3.06 MARKING OF CLEANED COMPONENTS

> A. All Class I, II, and III cleaned systems, assemblies, and
> components shall be fully identified with tags (Fed Spec UU-T-81, Type
> B, Class 1).
>
> B. Tags shall be applied to bagged components as specified in previous
> paragraphs.
>
> C. Systems and components shall, as a minimum, be tagged near each
> sealed opening used in the cleaning procedures.
>
> D. Tags shall contain the following information as applicable:
>
> 1\. Part or identification number.
>
> 2\. Manufacturer\'s serial number.
>
> 3\. Contractor identification.
>
> 4\. Cleaning Class
>
> 5\. Date of cleaning.
>
> 6\. Service medium or intended use.
>
> 7\. Pressurizing medium and initial pressure.
>
> 8\. Title, date and number of this specification.

3.07 DISPOSAL OF CLEANING MATERIALS

> A. All waste fluids and materials generated during cleaning operations
> (except Class IV) shall be collected and stored for testing. Testing
> will be done by the MSFC Environmental Engineering and Management
> Office (EEMO) or their Hazardous Waste Management Contractor. [Waste
> shall not be transported from MSFC prior to Government
> testing]{.underline}.
>
> B. Contractor Responsibilities:
>
> 1\. Coordinate all waste generating activities with the MSFC
> Environmental Engineering and Management Office (EEMO).
>
> 2\. Furnish suitable containers and/or tankage to collect all waste
> generated.
>
> 3\. Transport wastes to Building 4640 and off-load to designated
> tankage.
>
> 4\. Maintain sufficient on-site storage capacity for five working
> days.
>
> 5\. Dispose of all waste determined by the Government to be
> non-hazardous or non-controlled. Disposal shall be accomplished
> off-site, at no additional cost to the Government, and in a manner
> approved by the Government. Disposal of these fluids and materials
> will not be permitted at MSFC or Redstone Arsenal.
>
> 6\. Comply with additional specific waste collection and management
> criteria furnished by the Government prior to the start of work.
>
> C. Government Responsibilities:
>
> 1\. Testing and classification of waste fluids and materials.
>
> 2\. Disposal of all wastes classified as hazardous or controlled at no
> cost to the Contractor.
>
> D. Hazardous or Controlled wastes shall not be transported off MSFC
> property without written authorization from the MSFC Environmental
> Engineering and Management Office. All costs incurred by MSFC due to
> unauthorized removal of said materials shall be paid by the
> Contractor. These costs shall include, but shall not be limited to,
> independent laboratory analysis, transportation, and disposal fees.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15405

PLUMBING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

Work provided under this section includes the following:

A.  Hot and Cold Potable Water Piping

B. Industrial Water Piping

C. Sanitary Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping

D. Plumbing Specialties, Fixtures, and Equipment

E. Emergency/Safety Equipment

F. Plumbing Access Doors

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 02500 Utility Excavation and Backfill

B. Section 15051 Welding for Mechanical Utility Piping

C. Section 15060 Hangers and Supports

D. Section 15075 Mechanical Identification

E. Section 15080 Mechanical Insulation

F. Section 15110 Valves

1.03 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

> A. All work done under this section shall comply with the SBCCI
> Standard Plumbing Code.
>
> B. Work shall not be enclosed, covered, or insulated until it has been
> inspected, tested, and approved. Any work that is enclosed, covered,
> or insulated before such inspection and test shall be uncovered and,
> after it has been inspected and approved, shall be restored to its
> prior condition at no additional cost to the Government.
>
> C. All testing shall be performed in the presence of the Government
> Inspector.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Potable Water Piping

> 1\. [Buried, Exterior (more than 5 feet outside
> building):]{.underline} The Contractor may select either of the
> following materials, unless otherwise specified on the drawings.
>
> a\. Pressure rated PVC, ASTM designation 1120 or 1220, UL Listed,
> minimum 160 psig working pressure with solvent welded or push-on
> elastomeric pressure-seal fittings.
>
> b\. Type K hard drawn copper water tube per ASTM B88, with wrought
> copper or cast bronze fittings and lead-free tin-silver solder.
>
> 2\. [Buried, Below Slab (and to 5 feet outside building):]{.underline}
>
> a\. [2\" NPS and smaller:]{.underline} Type K soft annealed copper
> water tube per ASTM B88. Joints and fittings are not permitted below
> slab.
>
> b\. [2 -1/2\" NPS and larger:]{.underline} Type K hard drawn copper
> tubing per ASTM B88 with wrought copper or cast brass fittings and
> lead-free tin-silver solder.
>
> 3\. [Above Grade:]{.underline} Type L hard drawn copper per ASTM B88
> with wrought copper or cast brass fittings and lead-free tin-silver
> solder.
>
> B. Sanitary Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping
>
> 1\. [Buried, exterior and below slab:]{.underline} Schedule 40 PVC
> with solvent welded or push-on elastomer seal fittings.
>
> 2\. [Above Grade, Interior:]{.underline} PVC pipe, Schedule 40 or DWV
> weight, with solvent welded fittings.
>
> 3\. [No-Hub Connectors:]{.underline} For connection of PVC pipe to
> cast iron pipe or fixture outlets; consisting of a neoprene gasket
> with stainless steel sleeve and worm gear clamps; CLAMP-ALL or equal.
>
> C. Industrial Water Piping
>
> 1\. [Buried, Exterior and Below Slab:]{.underline} Same as potable
> water.
>
> 2\. [Above Grade:]{.underline} Schedule 40 black carbon steel pipe,
> ASTM A53 Grade B; Class 150 threaded fittings up to 2\" NPS; Schedule
> 40 welded fittings and 150# flanges for 2-1/2\" NPS and larger.
>
> D. [Coating System for Buried Water Piping:]{.underline} 50 mil coal
> tar coated wrap, hot applied, with compatible primer, FED SPEC HHT
> 30a; TC Manufacturing Co. \" Tapecoat 20\" with \"TC Primecoat\"
> primer, or equal.

2.02 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

A. Backflow Preventers

> 1\. [Type BFP-1:]{.underline} Hazardous Cross-Connections - reduced
> pressure principle, with integral shut-off valves, ball valve test
> cocks, strainer, and air gap fitting, complying with A.S.S.E. 1013;
> Watts Regulator Series 909-S with Series 909AG air gap fitting, or
> equal.
>
> 2\. [Type BFP-2:]{.underline} Low Hazard Connections - double check
> valve type, with integral shut-off valves, ball valve test cocks, and
> strainers, complying with A.S.S.E. 1015; Watts Regulator Series 709 or
> equal.
>
> 3\. [Type BFP-3:]{.underline} Low Hazard Residential Type - dual check
> valve, poppet type, union body, complying with A.S.S.E. 1024; Watts
> Regulator \"Dual Check\" Series 7 or equal.
>
> 4\. The following requirements apply to all backflow preventers,
> unless otherwise noted:
>
> a\. Full line size.
>
> b\. Minimum 150 PSIG working pressure.
>
> c\. No soldered connections.
>
> d\. Bronze, iron, or stainless steel body construction.
>
> e\. SBCCI listed.
>
> 5\. Suggested Manufacturers: Watts, BEECO, Hersey, FEBCO, Conbraco,
> CLA VAL, ITT Lawler, Rain Bird, or equal
>
> B. [Dielectric unions and flanges:]{.underline} Watts, EPCO, Harco, or
> equal.
>
> C. [Water Hammer Arrestors:]{.underline} Piston or bellows type, with
> precharged air or inert gas cushion; approved per A.S.S.E. Standard
> 1010 and P.D.I. Standard WH-201; Watts, Sioux Chief, Josam, Precision
> Plumbing Products, or equal.
>
> D. Trap Primers
>
> 1\. [Type TP-1:]{.underline} Flow-thru type - bronze body, threaded
> connections, integral vacuum breaker and air gap; tested and approved
> per A.S.S.E. Standard 1018; Watts, Wade, Josam, Zurn, or equal.
>
> 2\. [Type TP-2:]{.underline} End-of-line type - threaded connections,
> integral vacuum breaker and air gap; tested and approved per A.S.S.E.
> Standard 1018; Precision Plumbing Products \"Oregon #1\" or equal. For
> multiple trap applications, provide with trap primer distribution
> units.
>
> 3\. [Type TP-3:]{.underline} Overflow type - consisting of a chrome
> plated cast bronze P-trap with cleanout plug and 1/2\" NPT connection
> for trap primer tubing; Jay R. Smith "Prime-Eze" or equal.
>
> E. [Vacuum Relief Valves:]{.underline} For water heater protection,
> brass body, 250 degree F rated, designed to open on vacuum of not over
> 1/2 inch of mercury, tested and certified per ANSI Z21.22; Watts Model
> N36 or equal.
>
> F. Floor Drains
>
> 1\. [Type FD-1:]{.underline} Body and grate only, bottom outlet; Josam
> Series 30000A or equal.
>
> 2\. [Type FD-2:]{.underline} Side outlet, integral deep-seal trap,
> ball type backwater valve, and cleanout; Josam Series 38150 or equal.
>
> 3\. Floor drains shall have cast iron bodies with loose-set,
> non-tilting, satin finish bronze grates (minimum 8\" diameter), and
> trap primer connections unless otherwise indicated.
>
> 4\. Grates shall have a minimum free area equal to 1-1/2 times that of
> the outlet pipe per ANSI A112.21.1M.
>
> 5\. Suggested manufacturers: Josam, Wade, Zurn, or equal.
>
> G. [Sanitary Floor Sinks:]{.underline} 12 inch square top, 1/2 inch
> Nickaloy grate, 8 inch deep cast iron body with acid-resistant
> interior coating, aluminum domed interior strainer, 3 inch outlet,
> trap primer connection, and cast iron deep seal trap; Josam Type
> 49053-3-55 with Type 88053 trap, or equal.
>
> H. Cleanouts
>
> 1\. [Type CO-1:]{.underline} Floor mount, cast iron body with
> adjustable ABS housing, gasketed ABS plug, and scoriated round
> satin-finish bronze top; Josam series 56000 or equal.
>
> 2\. [Type CO-2:]{.underline} Wall mount, cast iron no-hub cleanout tee
> with bronze plug and stainless steel wall access cover plate with
> center screw; Josam Series 58910 tee with Series 58600 access plate,
> or equal.
>
> 3\. [Type CO-3:]{.underline} Deep seal cast iron trap with adjustable
> height cleanout; Josam Series 88050 or equal.
>
> 4\. Suggested manufacturers: Josam, Wade, Zurn, or equal.

I.  [Air Gap Fittings:]{.underline} Cast iron, with integrally cast air
    ports, FPT inlet connection, and FPT or spigot outlet connection;
    Josam Series 88900 or equal.

```{=html}
<!-- -->
```
J.  [Air Admittance Valves:]{.underline} Automatic pressure sensitive
    valves designed to prevent negative pressure in plumbing vents by
    admitting air, but sealing tightly to prevent escape of odors and
    sewer gases; SBCCI approved; Studor "Mini-Vent" (1-1/4 to 2 inch),
    "Maxi-Vent" (2 to 4 inch), or equal.

> K. [Undersink Insulation Kits:]{.underline} For covering exposed drain
> and supply piping in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities
> Act; molded, closed cell, anti-microbial formula vinyl; removable and
> reusable; white, unless otherwise indicated; Truebro "Handi
>
> Lav-Guard" or equal.

2.03 PLUMBING FIXTURES

> A. Water Closets
>
> 1\. [Type WC-1:]{.underline} Floor mount, flush valve, white vitreous
> china, elongated bowl, 15-inch rim height, 1-1/2 inch top spud, siphon
> jet, 3.5 ( +/- .5) gallons/flush; American Standard \"Madera\" No.
> 221.018 or equal.
>
> a\. Trim: Flush valve - Royal Sloan Model 110-3 or equal.
>
> b\. Seat: White, open front, without cover; Church Model 9500NSSC or
> equal.
>
> 2\. [Type WC-2:]{.underline} Floor mount, flush valve, handicapped,
> white vitreous china, elongated bowl, 18-inch rim height, 1-1/2 inch
> top spud, siphon jet, 3.5 (+/- .5) gallons/flush; American Standard
> \"Cadet\" No. 9468.018 or equal.
>
> a\. Trim: Flush valve - Royal Sloan Model 110-3 or equal.
>
> b\. Seat: White, open front, without cover; Church Model 9500NSSC or
> equal.
>
> 3\. [Type WC-3:]{.underline} Floor mount, flush tank, white vitreous
> china, elongated bowl, 14 inch rim height, siphon jet, 3.5 ( +/- .5)
> gallons/flush, close-coupled tank, with tank/bowl couplings and caps
> for floor bolts; American Standard \" Cadet\" No. 2816.035 or equal.
>
> a\. Trim: Chrome plated stop valve and supply tube.
>
> b\. Seat: White, open front, with cover; Church Model 9200M or equal.

4.  [Type WC-4:]{.underline} Floor mount, flush tank, handicapped; white
    vitreous china, elongated bowl, 18 inch rim height, siphon jet, 3.5
    (+/- .5) gallons per flush, close-coupled tank, with tank/bowl
    couplings and caps for floor bolts; American Standard "Cadet\" No.
    2108.408 or equal.

> a\. Trim: Chrome plated stop valve and supply tube.
>
> b\. Seat: White, open front, with cover; Church Model 9200M or equal.
>
> 5\. [Type WC-5:]{.underline} Wall hung, flush valve, white vitreous
> china, elongated bowl, 1-1/2 inch top spud, siphon jet, 3.5 (+/-.5)
> gallons per flush; American Standard \"AFWALL\" No. 2477.016 or equal.
>
> a\. Trim: Flush valve - Royal Sloan Model 110-3 or equal.
>
> b\. Seat: White, open front, without cover; Church Model 9500NSSC or
> equal.
>
> c\. Carrier: Wade W-300 Series or equal.
>
> d\. Mounting height: Top of seat 16 to 17 inches above finished floor.
>
> 6\. [Type WC-6:]{.underline} Wall hung, flush valve, handicapped -
> same as WC-5 except that mounting height shall be 17 to 19 inches top
> of seat to finished floor.

7\. [Type WC-7:]{.underline} Wall hung, flush tank, close-coupled, white
vitreous china, elongated bowl, 3.5 (+/- .5) gallons per flush; American
Standard "Glenwall" No. 2093.631 or equal.

a.  Trim: Chrome plated stop valve and supply tube.

> b\. Seat: White, open front, with cover; Church Model 9200M or equal.
>
> c\. Carrier: Wade 300 Series or equal.
>
> d\. Mounting Height: Top of seat 16 to 17 inches above finished floor.
>
> 8\. [Type WC-8:]{.underline} Wall hung, flush tank, handicapped - Same
> as WC-7 except that mounting height shall be 17 to 19 inches from top
> of seat to finished floor.
>
> B. Urinals
>
> 1\. [Type UR-1:]{.underline} Wall hung, flush valve, white vitreous
> china, integral flushing rim, integral trap, extended shields,
> 3/4-inch top spud, 1.5 gallons/flush, 2-inch outlet; American Standard
> \"Washbrook\" No. 6501.010 or equal.
>
> a\. Trim: Flush Valve - Sloan Royal Model 186 or equal.
>
> b\. Carrier: Universal Carrier with hanger plate, steel uprights,
> support feet, tie rod, flush valve piping supports, and lower bearing
> plate with studs; Wade Model W-400-AM1-AM11 or equal.
>
> c\. Mounting Height: Top of rim 22 to 24 inches above finished floor.
>
> 2\. [Type UR-2:]{.underline} Wall hung, flush valve, handicapped -
> Same as UR-1, except that mounting height shall be 16 to 17 inches
> from top of rim to finished floor.
>
> C. Lavatories
>
> 1\. [Type LAV-1:]{.underline} Counter set, cast iron, white acid
> resistant enamel finish, self-rimming, front overflow, 20 X 17-inch
> bowl, faucet holes on 8-inch centers; American Standard \"Oval
> Horizon\" No. 3302.015 or equal.
>
> a\. Trim: Combination lavatory faucet, rigid connectors, renewable
> seats, 8-inch centers, 1/2-inch inlets, 4 inch spout with aerator and
> 2.5 gpm restrictor, chrome finish brass crown handles, pop-up drain,
> 1-1/4 inch tailpiece; American Standard \"Heritage\" No. 6801.372H or
> equal.
>
> b\. Provide chromed stop valves and P-Trap with cleanout.
>
> 2\. [Type LAV-2:]{.underline} Counter set, handicapped - same as
> LAV-1.
>
> a\. Trim: Combination lavatory faucet, rigid connectors, renewable
> seats, 8-inch centers, 1/2-inch inlets, 4 inch spout with aerator and
> 2.5 gpm restrictor, chromed 4-inch brass wrist handles with color
> index buttons, pop-up drain, 1-1/4 inch chromed tailpiece; American
> Standard \"Heritage\" No. 6801.372H or equal.
>
> b\. Provide chromed stop valves and P-trap with cleanout.
>
> c\. Accessories: Where trap and supplies are exposed below counter,
> provide undersink insulation kit unless otherwise indicated.
>
> 3\. [Type LAV-3:]{.underline} Wall hung, cast iron, white
> acid-resistant enamel finish, 20 X 18-inch bowl, faucet holes on
> 8-inch centers, front overflow, wall hanger; American Standard
> \"Regalyn\" No. 4867.024 or equal.
>
> a\. Trim: Combination lavatory faucet, rigid connectors, renewable
> seats, 8-inch centers, 1/2-inch inlets, 4 inch spout with aerator and
> 2.5 gpm restrictor, chrome finish brass crown handles, integral
> perforated grid drain, 1-1/4 inch chromed tailpiece; American Standard
> \"Heritage\" No. 6801.372H or equal.
>
> b\. Provide chromed stop valves and P-trap with cleanout.
>
> c\. Mounting Height: Top of rim 31 inches above finished floor, unless
> otherwise indicated.
>
> 4\. [Type LAV-4:]{.underline} Wall hung, handicapped; same as LAV-3.
>
> a\. Trim: Combination lavatory faucet, rigid connectors, renewable
> seats, 8-inch centers, 1/2-inch inlets, 4 inch spout with aerator and
> 2.5 gpm restrictor, chromed 4-inch brass wrist handles with color
> index buttons, pop-up drain, 1-1/4 inch chromed tailpiece; American
> Standard \"Heritage\" No. 6801.372H or equal.
>
> b\. Provide chromed stop valves and P-trap with cleanout.
>
> c\. Mounting Height: Top of rim 34 inches above finished floor.
>
> d\. Accessories: Provide undersink insulation kit unless otherwise
> indicated.
>
> 5\. [TYPE LAV-5:]{.underline} Wall hung, handicapped, white vitreous
> china, 27 x 20 inch overall dimensions, faucet holes on 12 inch
> centers, front overflow, for concealed arm carrier; American Standard
> No. 9140.013 or equal.
>
> a\. Trim: Combination faucet set, renewable seats, 12 inch centers,
> adjustable 10 to 12- inch gooseneck spout, 4-inch wrist handles,
> 1/2-inch inlets, aerator with 2.5 gpm restrictor; American Standard
> \"Heritage\" No. 2238.129 or equal. Drain trim shall be grid drain
> with 4 1/2-inch offset for wheelchair access; American Standard No.
> 7723.018 or equal.
>
> b\. Provide chromed stop valves and P-trap with cleanout.
>
> c\. Carrier: Concealed arm carrier; Wade Model
>
> W520-09-M24 or equal.
>
> e\. Mounting Height: Top of rim 34 inches above finished floor.
>
> d\. Accessories: Provide undersink insulation kit unless otherwise
> indicated.
>
> D. Sinks
>
> 1\. [Type SNK-1:]{.underline} Single compartment, counter set, 25 X 21
> inch, 18 gage 302 stainless steel, self-rimming, recessed compartment
> and faucet deck, coated underside, 3-hole, 4-inch centers, 8-inch-deep
> bowl, 3-1/2 inch drain opening; Elkay \"Lustertone\" Model LR-2521 or
> equal.
>
> a\. Faucet Trim: Two-handle, deck mount, 10-inch-high swing spout with
> aerator, chrome plated wing handles; Elkay Model LK-2442 or equal.
> Provide chromed stop valves.
>
> b\. Drain Trim: Standard strainer for 3-1/2 inch opening, one-piece
> stainless steel conical strainer basket with neoprene stopper, and
> 1-1/2 inch chrome-plated tailpiece; Elkay Model LK-35 or equal.
> Provide chrome plated P-trap with cleanout.
>
> 2\. [Type SNK-2:]{.underline} Two-compartment, counter set, 33 X 22
> inches overall, 18 gage 302 stainless steel, self-rimming, recessed
> compartment and faucet deck, coated underside, 3-hole, 4-inch centers,
> 10-inch-deep bowls, 3-1/2 inch drain openings; Elkay \"Lustertone\"
> Model DLR-3322-10 or equal.
>
> a\. Faucet Trim: Two-handle, deck mount, 10-inch-high swing spout with
> aerator, chrome plated wing handles; Elkay Model LK-2442 or equal.
> Provide chromed stop valves.
>
> b\. Drain Trim: Standard strainer for 3-1/2 inch opening, one-piece
> stainless steel conical strainer basket with neoprene stopper, 1-1/2
> inch chrome-plated tailpiece, and two-sink connector; Elkay Model
> LK-35 with Model LK-53 connector, or equal. Provide chrome plated
> P-trap with cleanout.
>
> 3\. [Type SNK-3:]{.underline} Mop sink, precast terrazzo, one-piece,
> 36 X 36 X 12-inches, 2-inch-wide curb with stainless steel caps, 3\"
> integral drain, stainless steel grid strainer; FIAT Model TSB-500 or
> equal.
>
> a\. Faucet: Service faucet, chrome plated, vacuum breaker, integral
> stops, adjustable wall brace, 8-inch spout with bucket hook and
> 3/4-inch hose thread; FIAT Model 830-AA or equal.
>
> b\. Hose: Heavy duty flexible rubber, 5/8-inch X 30 inches long,
> 3/4-inch coupling on one end, stainless steel hose bracket; FIAT Model
> 832-AA or equal.
>
> c\. Mop hanger: Stainless steel, 24 X 3-inches; FIAT Model 889-CC or
> equal.
>
> 4\. [Type SNK-4:]{.underline} Service sink, wall/trap mounted, cast
> iron, white acid-resistant enamel finish, rim guard, drilled back,
> 18-1/2 X 14 X 10-1/2 inch bowl, 3-inch outlet; American Standard
> \"Lakewell\" No. 7692.049 or equal.
>
> a\. Faucet Trim: exposed dual-control faucet, renewable seats, lever
> handles, vacuum breaker, bucket hook, 1/2-inch inlets on 8-inch
> centers, 3/4-inch hose connection, rough chrome finish; American
> Standard \"Heritage\" No. 8340.242 or equal.
>
> b\. Drain Trim: Cast iron P-trap standard, perforated grid strainer,
> cleanout plug, adjustable floor flange, 3-inch outlet; American
> Standard No. 7798.176 or equal.

5.  [Type SNK-5:]{.underline} Utility sink, wall hung, white enameled
    cast iron, drilled back, 24 x 18 x 6-3/4 inch bowl, 3-1/2 inch
    outlet; Kohler "Sutton" No. K5980 or equal.

> a\. Faucet Trim: Polished chrome finish, with valvet valves, vacuum
> breaker, lever handles, loose key stops, and hose with wall hook;
> Kohler No. K-8928 or equal.
>
> b\. Drain Trim: Standard strainer for 3-1/2 inch opening, one piece
> stainless steel strainer basket with neoprene stopper, 1-1/2 inch
> chromed tailpiece, and chrome plated p-trap with cleanout plug; Kohler
> No. K-8801 strainer with No. K-9000 trap, or equal.
>
> c\. Carrier: Floor mounted, acid-resistant coating, exposed arms; Jay
> R. Smith No. 870 or equal.
>
> d\. Mounting Height: Top of rim 31 inches above finished floor, unless
> otherwise noted.

2.04 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

> A. Electric Water Coolers
>
> 1\. [Type EWC-1:]{.underline} Surface mount, stainless steel top,
> steel cabinet, baked enamel finish, ARI 1010 certified, 14 GPH, 5 year
> refrigeration system warranty, lead-free construction, 120-volts;
> Halsey Taylor Model WM14A-2 or equal.
>
> a\. Trim: P-trap and water supply shut-off valve.
>
> b\. Carrier: Universal carrier; Wade W-400 or equal.
>
> c\. Mounting Height: Top of rim 40 inches above finished floor, unless
> otherwise noted.
>
> 2\. [Type EWC-2:]{.underline} Surface mount, handicapped, stainless
> steel top, vinyl coated steel cabinet, front and side touch-pads, ARI
> 1010 certified, 7.8 GPH, 5 year refrigeration system warranty,
> lead-free construction, 120-volts; Oasis Model OPLF8WMQ or equal.
>
> a\. Trim: P-trap and water supply shut-off valve.
>
> b\. Carrier: Universal carrier; Wade W-400 or equal.
>
> c\. Mounting Height: Spout opening 35 to 36 inches above finished
> floor, unless otherwise noted.
>
> 3\. [Type EWC-3:]{.underline} Free standing, stainless steel top,
> steel cabinet, baked enamel finish, ARI 1010 certified, 9.6 GPH, 5
> year refrigeration system warranty, lead-free construction, 120-volts;
> Halsey Taylor Model S1000-10D or equal. Provide P-trap and water
> supply shutoff valve.
>
> B. Water Heaters
>
> 1\. [Type WH-1:]{.underline} Electric, storage type, UL-listed, with
> glass-lined tank, insulation per ASHRAE 90A, magnesium anode rod,
> drain valve, adjustable thermostat, manual reset overheat safety, and
> properly sized ASME temperature and pressure relief valve; capacities
> and electrical requirements as shown on the drawings; Bradford-White,
> State, Rheem, A.O. Smith, or equal.
>
> 2\. [Type WH-2:]{.underline} Electric, instantaneous point-of-use,
> UL-approved, with flow-switch controller, thermal cut-out safety, and
> in-line restrictor; capacity and electrical requirements as shown on
> the drawings; Chronomite, Controlled Energy Corp., Myson-Santon, or
> equal.
>
> 3\. [Type WH-3:]{.underline} Steam, instantaneous, with counterflow
> copper tube heat exchanger, temperature blending valve, steam control
> valve, adjustable feed-forward temperature controls, pressure gages,
> outlet thermometer, steam traps, and stainers; steam pressure and
> capacity data as shown on the drawings; Leslie \"Constantemp\" or
> equal.

2.05 DRAIN PUMPS

> Drain pumps shall have a 5 gallon (minimum) polyethylene basin with
> gasketed lid; NPT inlet, outlet, and vent connections; float switch
> operated pump with non-clogging impeller, suction strainer, and
> discharge check valve; capacity and electrical requirements as noted
> on the drawings; Zoeller Drain Pump Series or equal.

2.06 EMERGENCY/SAFETY EQUIPMENT

> A. Emergency/safety equipment installations shall meet or exceed all
> requirements of ANSI Z358.1, "Emergency Shower and Eyewash Equipment."
>
> B. Emergency Eye/Face Wash
>
> 1\. [Type EW-1:]{.underline} Twin spray heads mounted in a 12 inch
> diameter bowl receptor, complete with a chrome plated brass stay-open
> ball valve, stainless steel push plate activator, individual balance
> controls, dust caps, and inline strainer; full face flow capacity of 8
> gpm minimum; Speakman Model SE-495 (wall mounted), Model SE-496
> (pedestal mounted), or equal.
>
> 2\. [Type EW-2:]{.underline} Frost-proof emergency eye/face wash -
> pedestal mounted, with twin spray heads, dust caps, stainless steel
> bowl receptor, stay-open frost-proof valve (42 inch burial depth)
> operated by a panic bar handle, and minimum 8 gpm full face flow;
> Western Model 262 or equal.
>
> C. Emergency Showers
>
> 1\. [Type ES-1:]{.underline} Single overhead supply with impeller
> faceplate, minimum 30 gpm flow at 15 psig supply pressure; brass
> stay-open ball valve activated by a rigid stainless steel pull rod
> with a triangular or ring shaped handle. Unit shall be provided with
> all required hardware and accessories for wall, ceiling, or pedestal
> mounting as indicated on the drawings; Speakman Model SE-227, SE-250,
> or equal.
>
> 2\. [Type ES-2:]{.underline} Frost-proof, free-standing - same as ES-1
> except with a frost-proof stay-open valve (42 inch burial depth)
> operated by a panic bar handle; Speakman Model SE-260 or equal.
>
> 3\. [Type ES-3:]{.underline} Walk-through type multiple spray
> emergency shower having 16 spray heads, stay-open ball valve activated
> by a stainless steel push plate handle, and two stainless steel side
> panels painted \"safety\" yellow; Speakman Model SE-340 or equal.
>
> D. Safety Stations
>
> 1\. Safety stations shall be combination eyewash/shower units, and
> shall meet all requirements specified above for individual components.
>
> 2\. [Type SS-1:]{.underline} Freestanding safety station; Speakman
> Model SE-603 or equal.
>
> 3\. [Type SS-2:]{.underline} Freestanding frost-proof safety station;
> Speakman Model SE-609 or equal.
>
> E. Suggested Manufacturers
>
> Emergency/safety equipment shall be as manufactured by Guardian, Haws,
> Speakman, Western, or equal.

2.07 PLUMBING ACCESS DOORS

> Plumbing access doors shall be steel, factory primed and ready for
> painting, with minimum 14 gage door and 16 gage frame, exposed flush
> mounting flange, concealed continuous hinge, and screwdriver operated
> cam latches; Barco Style BAR-100, Karp Model DSC-214M, or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPING

> A. General
>
> 1\. Pipe ends shall be reamed before joint connections are made.
>
> 2\. Threaded joints shall be made up with tetrafluoroethylene joint
> compound or tape. Joint compound or tape shall be applied to the male
> threads only, and care shall be exercised to prevent the compound from
> reaching the interior of the pipe.
>
> 3\. Polyvinylchloride (PVC) pipe ends and sockets shall be cleaned
> with a color coded methyl-ethyl-ketone primer/cleaner before assembly.
> Pipe end shall be rotated 1/4 turn to distribute wet cement in the
> socket, and held firmly in position until cement sets. Primer color
> shall be visible at joints.
>
> 4\. Piping inside metal stud walls shall be isolated from the studs
> with rubber or plastic bushings specifically designed for that
> purpose.
>
> 5\. Install piping to pumps and other equipment at full size indicated
> on drawings with required size changes made at the equipment
> connections.
>
> 6\. Provide unions or flanges at equipment and fixture connections.
>
> 7\. Provide dielectric unions or flanges where dissimilar metals
> subject to galvanic activity are joined together (equipment
> connections, connections between copper and steel pipe, etc.).
>
> 8\. Belled ends of piping shall point upstream unless otherwise
> approved.
>
> 9\. Use the piping manufacturer's recommended lubricant for push-on
> gasketed joints.
>
> 10\. Provide a cast-in-place concrete pier under the base of each
> underground water or sewer riser. Pre-cast blocks are not acceptable.
>
> 11\. Provide all fittings, drain valves, and bleed valves required for
> testing of systems. Each system may be tested in sections, or as a
> whole.
>
> B. Potable and Industrial Water Piping
>
> 1\. For buried water lines with push-on fittings, provide
> cast-in-place concrete thrust blocking at changes of direction and
> branch connections as indicated on the drawings, and as otherwise
> required to prevent separation of joints.
>
> 2\. Provide cast-in-place concrete piers under buried valves to
> prevent shear loading of connected piping.
>
> 3\. Pre-cast concrete piers and thrust blocks are not acceptable.
>
> 4\. Provide bituminous coating system per paragraph 2.01.D for copper
> pipe in contact with soil. Apply the coating system in accordance with
> the manufacturer\'s instructions. Coating shall be continuous and
> uniform, and shall extend a minimum of 6 inches above grade.
>
> 5\. Install piping to allow complete draining of systems. Provide
> drain valves at all low point where fixtures cannot be used to drain
> piping.
>
> 6\. Provide shut-off valves in water systems at each branch from
> mains, and at each fixture or equipment connection. Provide access
> doors as required for maintenance access to concealed valves.
>
> 7\. Hydrostatically test piping at 150 psig. Repair leaks and retest
> until pressure holds for two hours.
>
> 8\. Flush industrial water piping to remove dirt and debris prior to
> putting into service.
>
> 9\. Sterilize potable water piping as follows:
>
> a\. Flush thoroughly with potable water.
>
> b\. Fill entire system with a 100 ppm (minimum) chlorine solution.
> Allow to stand for two hours.
>
> c\. Sample the sterilyzing solution and submit an independent test lab
> report, SD-10, certifying that the minimum required chlorine
> concentration was provided.
>
> d\. Flush system thoroughly to remove chlorine prior to putting into
> service.
>
> C. Sanitary Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping (DWV)
>
> 1\. Prior to beginning installation, verify the exact locations,
> sizes, and depths of existing sanitary waste lines to which new work
> is to be connected.
>
> 2\. Begin installation at the lowest point of the system and work to
> the highest point.
>
> 3\. Pitch DWV piping to drain, a minimum of 1/4 inch per foot for
> piping up to 3 inches, and 1/8 inch per foot for piping larger than 3
> inches.
>
> 4\. Vents through roof shall be a minimum of 3 inches in diameter, and
> shall extend at least 12 inches above the roof.
>
> 5\. Provide reducing fittings where different sizes of piping are
> connected. Bushings may be used in place of reducers only in vent
> piping.
>
> 6\. Make branch drainage connections to horizontal mains with
> combination wye and 1/8 bends. Sanitary tees may be substituted for
> branch connections to vertical soil stacks. Straight tees may be used
> only in vent piping.
>
> 7\. All elbows in drainage systems shall be long sweep type.
>
> 8\. Prior to installation of fixtures, hydrostatically test sanitary
> DWV piping at a minimum of 10 feet of water head ( 5 psig). Repair
> leaks and retest until pressure holds for one hour.

3.02 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

> A. Backflow Preventors:
>
> 1\. Provide backflow preventors where potable water is cross-connected
> with non-potable services, where the potential for back-siphonage of
> contaminants exists, and as otherwise indicated on the drawings.
>
> 2\. Install backflow preventers where they are readily accessible for
> testing and maintenance. Provide access doors as required.
>
> 3\. Reduced pressure principle backflow preventors shall not be
> installed in pits or boxes below grade.
>
> B. Water Hammer Arrestors
>
> 1\. Provide a water hammer arrestor in the hot and cold water supplies
> for each fixture group, and as otherwise indicated.
>
> 2\. The capacity of each arrestor shall meet or exceed the total
> fixture units of the fixture group served.
>
> 3\. All water hammer arrestors shall be accessible for inspection and
> replacement. Provide access doors as required.
>
> C. Trap Primers
>
> 1\. Provide automatic trap primers for all floor drain and floor sink
> traps unless otherwise indicated.
>
> 2\. Trap primers shall be accessible for inspection and replacement.
> Provide access doors as required.
>
> D. Vacuum Relief Valves
>
> 1\. Provide a vacuum relief valve on the cold water supply of each
> storage type water heater.
>
> 2\. Locate and install the valve in accordance with the
> manufacturer\'s instructions.
>
> E. Floor Sinks and Drains
>
> 1\. Provide floor sinks and drains where indicated.
>
> 2\. Tops of floor sinks and drains shall not extend above finished
> floor.
>
> F. Cleanouts
>
> 1\. Provide cleanouts where indicated, and as required by the SBCCI
> Standard Plumbing Code.
>
> 2\. Provide line-size cleanouts for pipe sizes up to 4" NPS. Provide
> 4-inch cleanouts for pipes larger than 4" NPS.
>
> 3\. Locate cleanouts to have adequate clearance for rodding of lines.
>
> 4\. Provide dual-direction exterior cleanouts within five feet of the
> building when adding new sewer service.
>
> 5\. Interior floor cleanouts shall be flush with finished floor.
>
> 6\. Interior wall cleanouts shall be above the flood level of the
> connected plumbing fixtures.
>
> 7\. Provide square or rectangular cover plates for cleanouts in
> ceramic tile or resilient tile finished surfaces.
>
> 8\. Exterior cleanouts in areas other than concrete pavement shall be
> set in 15 x 15 x 6-inch concrete pads flush with finished grade.
>
> 9\. Provide to the Government two removal tools for each type and size
> of cleanout plug provided.
>
> G. Air Admittance Valves
>
> 1\. Provide automatic air admittance valves as indicated. Install so
> as to be readily accessible for maintenance and replacement. Provide
> access doors as required.
>
> 2\. **[Note:]{.underline}** Automatic air admittance devices are
> intended for use with vented sewer systems [only,]{.underline} and
> shall not be used on vents stacks of septic tank systems.

3.03 PLUMBING FIXTURES

> A. Follow manufacturer\'s instructions for installation of plumbing
> fixtures and trim.
>
> B. Install supply stops for all plumbing fixtures, except that stops
> may be omitted on individual fixtures where a group of fixtures within
> one space can be shut off with a single valve.
>
> C. Where backs of wall hung fixtures join finished walls, finish
> joints with white caulking compound.
>
> D. When replacing existing fixtures, provide new fixtures with the
> same rough-in dimensions, if possible, to minimize required plumbing
> modifications.

3.04 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

> A. General
>
> Follow manufacturer\'s instructions for equipment installation.
>
> B. Electric Water Coolers
>
> 1\. Install water coolers with adequate clearances for maintenance
> access.
>
> 2\. Where the backs of wall-hung coolers join finished wall surfaces,
> finish the joints with caulking compound painted to match the wall.
>
> C. Water Heaters
>
> 1\. Provide a T&P relief valve and a vacuum relief valve for each
> storage type water heater.
>
> 2\. Provide relief valves for instantaneous water heaters if
> recommended by the manufacturer.
>
> 3\. Provide a safety pan for each storage water heater per the SBCCI
> Standard Plumbing Code.
>
> 4\. Pipe relief valve discharge to grade outside the building, to an
> open drain, or to the safety pan. Terminate discharge piping 6 to 24
> inches above grade, or 1 to 2 inches above the flood level rim of the
> drain or safety pan.
>
> 5\. Set water heater controls to provide 140oF hot water unless
> otherwise indicated.
>
> D. Emergency/Safety Equipment
>
> 1\. Provide identification signs for all emergency/safety equipment.
> Place signs in a highly visible location adjacent to the equipment.
> The area around and/or behind the equipment shall be painted with
> 4\"-wide green and white stripes per ANSI Z358.1.
>
> 2\. Provide P-traps for emergency/safety equipment if drain outlets
> are to be directly connected to sanitary sewer piping.

3.05 PLUMBING ACCESS DOORS

> A. Provide plumbing access doors as required for maintenance access to
> all concealed plumbing valves and specialties.
>
> B. Access doors shall be adequately sized for maintenance and
> removal/replacement of concealed items. Submittals shall indicate the
> proposed door size for each location.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15720

AIR HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

Work specified in this section includes the following:

A. Central Station Air Handling Units

B. Fan-Coil Units

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 15180 Heating and Cooling Piping

B. Section 15810 Ducts

C. Section 15820 Duct Accessories

D. Section 15900 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls

E. Section 15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS

A. General

> 1\. The terms "air handling unit" and "air handler" are used
> interchangeably in this specification.
>
> 2\. Provide central station type air handling units as scheduled on
> the drawings and specified herein.
>
> 3\. Air handling unit performance shall be certified in accordance
> with ARI Standards 430 and 410, and units shall bear the ARI label.
>
> 4\. Units shall be factory fabricated and shipped fully assembled, or
> in major sections for field assembly.
>
> B. Casing
>
> 1\. Air handling unit casings shall be factory fabricated from
> mill-galvanized or primed and painted carbon steel. Mill-galvanized
> sheet metal shall conform to ASTM A527, and shall be coated with not
> less than 1.25 ounces of zinc per square foot of two-sided surface.
> Mill-rolled structural steel shall be hot-dip galvanized or primed and
> painted. Cut edges, burns and scratches in galvanized surfaces shall
> be corrosion protected. All interior and exterior surfaces, including
> lapped contacting surfaces of black carbon steel, shall be primed and
> painted for corrosion protection.
>
> 2\. Casings shall have air-tight joints, closures, penetrations and
> access openings.
>
> 3\. All fan and coil sections shall be internally insulated with one
> inch thick, 3/4 lb/cf, neoprene coated fiberglass to prevent
> condensation on exterior of casing and shall meet the flame and smoke
> requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B.
>
> 4\. Coil sections shall contain full size integral drain pans. Drain
> pans shall be insulated with foamed-in-place insulation to prevent
> sweating. Coil sections for horizontally split coils shall have
> intermediate drain pans.
>
> 5\. Casing construction shall permit removal of section panels for
> complete access to interior of unit. Casings shall provide for use of
> fan tachometers without disassembly. Provide hinged, gasketed doors to
> permit access for maintenance of drive components and cleaning of
> coils. Filter access doors shall be considered adequate only for
> filter replacement.
>
> C. Coils
>
> 1\. General
>
> a\. Coils shall be sized for the scheduled capacities and conditions.
>
> b\. Coils shall have galvanized steel casings and corrugated aluminum
> plate fins with integral spacing collars covering copper tubes. Tubes
> shall be expanded to form a tight, mechanical bond with fin spacing
> collars. Joints shall be brazed and factory tested underwater at
> minimum 300 psig.
>
> c\. All coil connections shall be located on the same side of the air
> handler,unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
>
> d\. Coil performance shall be certified in accordance with ARI
> Standard 410.
>
> 2\. DX Coils
>
> a\. DX coils shall be matched to the corresponding refrigeration
> equipment, and shall be by the same manufacturer. Coils shall be
> factory dehydrated and sealed.
>
> b\. DX coils shall be counterflow design, staggered tube arrangement,
> with factory mounted brass distributors, and shall be designed for
> similar pressure drop across each circuit.
>
> c\. Coil design shall allow gravity drainage of oil to suction
> connection.
>
> d\. Circuit arrangements for multiple stages of cooling shall be as
> scheduled on the drawings.
>
> e\. DX coils shall be U.L. listed.
>
> 3\. Hydronic (Water) Coils
>
> a\. Water Coils shall be counterflow design with staggered tube
> arrangement.
>
> b\. Coils shall be self-venting, or provided with vent connections.
>
> c\. Coils shall be self-draining, or provided with drain plugs. Coils
> shall drain completely by gravity.
>
> 4\. Steam Coils
>
> a\. Steam Coils shall be non-freeze, distributing tube type with
> concentric steam supply and condensate return tubes. Inner steam
> supply tube shall have orifices for even distribution of steam.
>
> b\. Coils shall drain completely by gravity.
>
> D. Fans
>
> 1\. Fan wheels shall be double width, double inlet, centrifugal type.
> Fans shall be forward curved (FC), airfoil (AF), or backward inclined
> (BI) type as scheduled on the drawings.
>
> 2\. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced after mounting
> on shafts. Maximum fan shaft rpm shall be well below the first
> critical speed. Bearings shall be self-aligning, grease lubricated,
> ball bearing type with 200,000 hour average life.
>
> 3\. Fan drives shall be adjustable sheave, V-belt type sized for 150
> percent of motor horsepower.
>
> 4\. Fan motors shall be 1750 rpm, open drip proof or totally enclosed
> type, with horsepower and electrical requirements as specified on the
> drawings.
>
> 5\. Provide belt guards where fan motors and drives are externally
> mounted.
>
> E. Filters
>
> 1\. Filter sections shall be factory fabricated, with hinged access
> doors on both sides, and shall connect directly to the air handler.
>
> 2\. Filter types, thicknesses, and minimum filter area shall be as
> indicated on the drawings.
>
> F. Mixing Boxes
>
> 1\. Mixing box sections shall be factory fabricated complete with
> control dampers and linkages, and shall connect directly to the air
> handler or filter section.
>
> 2\. Control dampers shall be low leakage type, with blade edge and
> jamb seals. Dampers shall be parallel acting, galvanized steel with
> nylon bushings.
>
> 3\. Top and back mounted dampers shall deflect air toward each other
> for maximum mixing. Top and bottom mounted dampers shall deflect air
> away from coils for maximum mixing.
>
> 4\. Mixing box sections shall have hinged access doors for inspection
> and maintenance of dampers.
>
> G. Filter/Mixing Boxes
>
> Combination filter/mixing box sections shall meet all requirements of
> individual filter and mixing box sections specified above.
>
> H. Vibration Isolators
>
> 1\. Provide manufacturer\'s recommended vibration isolators,
> appropriate for the installation shown on the drawings.
>
> 2\. Isolators shall be spring or rubber-in-shear type.
>
> I. Suggested Manufacturers
>
> Air handling units shall be Carrier, Trane, McQuay, York, or equal.

2.02 FAN-COIL UNITS

> A. General
>
> 1\. Provide blow-thru fan-coil units with configurations, coils, and
> capacities as scheduled on the drawings.
>
> 2\. All units shall be U.L. listed. Unit performance shall be rated in
> accordance with ARI Standard 440, and units shall bear the ARI label.
>
> B. Cabinets
>
> 1\. Unit cabinets shall be constructed of minimum 18-gage galvanized
> steel. Cabinets of exposed and recessed units shall have a baked
> enamel finish.
>
> 2\. Cabinets shall have removable, gasketed panels which provide
> complete access to all parts requiring repair, periodic maintenance,
> or replacement
>
> 3\. Provide cabinets complete with duct collars and/or grilles as
> indicated on the drawings.
>
> C. Coils
>
> 1\. All coils shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically
> bonded to seamless copper tubing. All tubing joints shall be brazed
> with high temperature alloy.
>
> 2\. All coils shall be provided with manual air vents, and shall be
> designed to drain completely when installed in accordance with the
> manufacturers recommendations.
>
> 3\. Coils and condensate drain pans shall be field reversible for
> right or left side connections.
>
> 4\. Coils shall be factory leak tested underwater with air at 300
> psig.
>
> 5\. Coil performance shall be certified in accordance with ARI
> Standard 410.
>
> D. Fans
>
> 1\. Fans shall be direct drive, double width, double inlet, forward
> curved type, dynamically balanced.
>
> 2\. Fan wheels and housings shall be constructed of aluminum or
> galvanized steel.
>
> E. Motors
>
> 1\. Fan motors shall be permanent split capacitor type with built-in
> automatic reset thermal overload protection.
>
> 2\. Motors shall have extended shafts for mounting of fans, with
> permanently lubricated bearings, or sleeve bearings with automatic
> lubrication requiring only seasonal maintenance.
>
> 3\. Motors shall be resiliently mounted, located in the air stream,
> and be easily removable.
>
> 4\. Fan motor horsepower and electrical requirements shall be as
> scheduled on the drawings.
>
> F. Drain Pans
>
> 1\. Fan coil units shall have insulated drain pans fabricated from
> minimum 18 gage galvanized steel, and pitched for positive drainage
> when unit is level.
>
> 2\. Drain pans shall project under the entire length of cooling coils
> including headers, return bends, and internal piping accessories
> subject to condensation.
>
> 3\. Provide secondary drain pans under valves and piping subject to
> condensation, where required by fan coil unit design.
>
> G. Plenums
>
> 1\. Provide plenums for concealed units where indicated on drawings.
>
> 2\. Plenums shall be constructed of minimum 18 gage galvanized steel,
> internally lined with a minimum 1/2 inch of fiberglass, and shall have
> duct collars as required for the configuration shown on the drawings.
>
> H. Suggested Manufacturers
>
> Fan-coil units shall be Carrier, Trane, McQuay, York, or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

> A. Install air handling units and fan-coil units as shown on the
> drawings, and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
>
> B. Check all fans for proper direction of rotation upon initial
> start-up.

3.02 CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS

> A. Required field assembly of air handling units shall be accomplished
> with factory-provided hardware, gaskets, and sealants.
>
> B. Make all ductwork connections to air handling units with flexible
> duct connectors, unless otherwise indicated.

3.03 FAN-COIL UNITS

> A. Provide the following items in each hydronic circuit of each
> fan-coil unit. Hydronic specialties are specified in Section 15180.
>
> 1\. Automatic air vent with stop valve.
>
> 2\. Shut-off valves in supply and return legs.
>
> 3\. Properly sized control valves - type and configuration as
> indicated on the schedule.
>
> 4\. Balancing valve in the return leg.
>
> 5\. T & P test ports in supply and return legs.
>
> B. Hydronic specialties for fan-coil units may be either field
> provided or factory installed.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15730

UNITARY AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> This section specifies unitary (packaged) air conditioners and heat
> pumps for general purpose and computer room applications. It includes
> both self-contained and split systems.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

> A. Section 15180 Heating and Cooling Piping
>
> B. Section 15810 Ducts
>
> C. Section 15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

> A. System types, configurations, capacities, accessories, and
> electrical requirements shall be as indicated on the drawings.
>
> B. Self-contained systems shall be factory assembled, charged, and run
> tested; requiring field connection of power, ductwork, and remote
> thermostats only.
>
> C. Split system component units shall be factory assembled complete
> with all internal wiring and piping, a holding charge of refrigerant,
> and unit control panels with terminal strips. Units shall be shipped
> ready for field connection of power, ductwork, and interconnecting
> control wiring and refrigerant piping.
>
> D. All unitary air conditioners and heat pumps shall be UL listed.
>
> E. Equipment capacities shall be certified in accordance with
> applicable portions of ARI Standards 210/240, 340, 360, and 365; and
> each unit shall bear the appropriate ARI label.

2.02 GENERAL PURPOSE AIR CONDITIONERS AND HEAT PUMPS

> A. System Types
>
> 1\. Unless otherwise indicated, all systems shall be air-to-air direct
> expansion (DX) type.
>
> 2\. Systems shall be either self-contained (single package) or split
> system (separate air handling and condensing units) as indicated on
> the drawings.
>
> B. Equipment Casings and Construction
>
> 1\. Air conditioner and heat pump casings shall be fabricated from
> galvanized steel sheet with baked enamel finish, structural steel
> framing, maintenance access panels, and condenser fan and coil guards.
>
> 2\. Unit evaporator sections shall be internally insulated, with
> insulated coil condensate drain pans, filter rails, and disposable
> fiberglass filters.
>
> C. Fans
>
> 1\. Evaporator (supply air) fans shall be centrifugal type, statically
> and dynamically balanced, with adjustable sheave belt drive.
>
> 2\. Condenser fans shall be direct drive propeller type, statically
> and dynamically balanced.
>
> 3\. Fan motors shall have internal thermal overload protection and
> permanently lubricated sealed bearings.
>
> D. Refrigerant Coils
>
> 1\. DX evaporator and condenser coils shall have aluminum fins
> mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubing.
>
> 2\. Condenser coils shall have integral sub-cooling circuits.
>
> 3\. Evaporator coils shall be factory leak tested at 300 psig.
>
> 4\. Condenser coils shall be factory leak tested at 425 psig.
>
> E. Electric Heating Coils
>
> 1\. Electric resistance heating coils shall have nickel-chromium
> elements, with automatic reset high limit thermal protection.
>
> 2\. Coils shall be UL listed.
>
> F. Compressors
>
> 1\. Compressors shall be direct drive, hermetic or semi-hermetic,
> reciprocating or scroll type.
>
> 2\. Compressors shall be equipped with internal thermal overloads,
> vibration isolators, crankcase heaters, and oil sight glasses.
>
> 3\. Compressor motors shall be refrigerant suction cooled.
>
> 4\. Compressors shall carry a five year manufacturer's warranty.
>
> G. Refrigerant Circuits
>
> 1\. Each refrigerant circuit shall have a fixed orifice or
> thermostatic expansion device, service valves, service pressure ports,
> sight glass with moisture indicator, and liquid line filter/drier.
>
> 2\. In addition, each heat pump refrigerant circuit shall have a
> solenoid heating/cooling changeover valve.
>
> 3\. If specified refrigerant specialties are not factory installed in
> split system units, they shall be field provided per Section 15180.
> Locate sight glasses and filter/driers near the outdoor unit.
>
> H. Controls and Safeties
>
> 1\. All systems shall be provided with the following factory installed
> controls and safeties.
>
> a\. Part winding full voltage or across-the-line starters with
> overload relays.
>
> b\. UL listed control transformer suitable for the specified primary
> voltage.
>
> c\. High and low pressure compressor cutouts.
>
> d\. Low oil pressure cutout.
>
> e\. Low temperature cutout.
>
> f\. Anti-short-cycle timer for each compressor.
>
> 2\. Unless otherwise specified, provide each system with a remote
> heating/cooling thermostat with heat-off-cool and fan on-auto selector
> switches.
>
> I. Electrical Requirements
>
> 1\. All units shall be factory wired with a unit mounted fusible
> disconnect, dual element time delay fuses, and single point power
> connection.
>
> 2\. Unit voltages shall be as indicated on the drawings.
>
> J. Accessories
>
> 1\. Provide system accessories as indicated on the drawings, and as
> specified herein.
>
> 2\. Outdoor Air Accessories
>
> a\. Provide each self-contained unit with a manual outdoor air damper
> unless an economizer is specified. Damper shall be adjustable up to
> 25% outdoor air, and shall be equipped with a rain hood, bird screen,
> and locking quadrant.
>
> b\. Economizer modules shall be complete with low leakage outdoor air
> and return air dampers, barometric relief damper, rain hood, bird
> screen, and modulating solid state dry bulb controls as specified
> below.
>
> 1\. Economizer controls shall have an adjustable potentiometer for
> setting minimum outdoor airflow.
>
> 2\. Controls shall enable the economizer when the outdoor ambient
> temperature is 50 degrees F or below, and the space requires cooling.
>
> 3\. Controls shall modulate the return and outdoor air dampers to
> maintain the conditioned space at design temperature.
>
> 3\. Low ambient head pressure controls shall enable systems to provide
> DX cooling down to 0 degrees F, unless otherwise noted.
>
> 4\. Vibration isolators shall be spring or rubber-in-shear type,
> provided by the equipment manufacturer for the specified installation.
>
> K. Suggested Manufacturers
>
> General purpose air conditioners and heat pumps shall be Carrier,
> McQuay, Rheem, Trane, York, or approved equal.

2.03 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONERS

> A. Indoor Units (Self-Contained and Split System)
>
> 1\. Indoor unit cabinets shall be galvanized steel with baked enamel
> finish, tubular steel framing, 1-inch fiberglass insulation, removable
> service access panels, stainless steel drain pan, and integral filter
> holding frames.
>
> 2\. Supply fans shall be double inlet, double width centrifugal type,
> statically and dynamically balanced, with adjustable sheave belt drive
> and high efficiency motors with thermal overload protection.
>
> 3\. Air filters shall be disposable pleated type, 20% ASHRAE
> efficiency, unless otherwise indicated.
>
> 4\. Cooling Coils
>
> a\. Cooling coils shall be copper tube/aluminum fin, A-frame
> configuration.
>
> b\. Chilled water cooling coils shall be provided with modulating
> 2-way control valves, unless otherwise indicated.
>
> c\. DX coils shall be provided with a thermostatic expansion valve for
> each circuit.
>
> d\. DX coils shall have interwoven refrigerant circuits to utilize the
> full coil surface during single compressor operation.
>
> 5\. Reheat Coils
>
> a\. Unless otherwise noted, DX systems 3 tons and larger shall be
> equipped with hot gas reheat coils with 3-way solenoid control.
>
> b\. Electric reheat coils shall be fin tubular type, low watt density,
> multi-stage, with thermal safety switches.
>
> 6\. Humidifiers
>
> a\. Humidifiers shall be either infrared or steam generator type.
>
> b\. Humidifier functions shall be controlled by the unit
> microprocessor controls.
>
> c\. Infrared humidifiers shall have high intensity quartz lamps,
> stainless steel pan, and adjustable water supply overfeed to prevent
> mineral build-up.
>
> d\. Steam generator humidifiers shall have disposable canisters,
> supply and drain valves, steam distributor, and canister change alarm
> on the unit control panel.
>
> 7\. Controls and Alarms
>
> a\. Unit controls shall be microprocessor based, and shall have the
> following features:
>
> 1\. Temperature anticipation.
>
> 2\. Moisture level humidity control.
>
> 3\. Compressor sequencing and short cycle controls (DX units only).
>
> 4\. Auto restart with sequential load activation.
>
> 5\. Self-diagnostics
>
> 6\. Auto shutdown by smoke detector signal.
>
> b\. Audible/Visual Alarms
>
> 1\. High and low temperature.
>
> 2\. High and low humidity.
>
> 3\. Loss of airflow.
>
> 4\. Humidifier malfunction.
>
> 5\. Smoke detected in airstream.
>
> 6\. Filter change needed.
>
> 7\. Loss of power.
>
> 8 High compressor head (DX only)
>
> 9\. Low suction pressure (DX only).
>
> c\. Each unit shall have a front mounted display panel for indication
> of room conditions, set points, diagnostics, and alarm conditions.
>
> d\. Unless otherwise noted, dual source system controls shall be
> factory set to utilize chilled water as the primary cooling source,
> and to activate DX cooling only when chilled water is unavailable or
> insufficient to meet demand.
>
> 8\. Accessories
>
> a\. Unless otherwise noted, all units shall have the following
> accessories;
>
> 1\. Non-locking electrical disconnect switch.
>
> 2\. Ionization type smoke detector.
>
> b\. When specified on the drawings provide:
>
> 1\. Floor stand - welded tubular steel construction with adjustable
> legs and vibration pads; height to match specified raised floor
> height.
>
> 2\. Turning vane - galvanized steel construction, factory fabricated,
> designed for field installation under the floor stand.
>
> 3\. Coil condensate pump - unit mounted, with integral reservoir and
> float switch; approximate capacity of 145 gph at 20 feet of head.
>
> B. DX Cooling Systems
>
> 1\. Systems up to 5 tons shall have high efficiency scroll or hermetic
> reciprocating compressors with vibration isolators, thermal overloads,
> crankcase heaters, and high and low pressure compressor cutout
> switches.
>
> 2\. Systems larger than 5 tons shall have dual semi-hermetic
> compressors with vibration isolators, thermal overloads, oil sight
> glass, high and low compressor cutouts switches, suction line
> strainers, and forced lubrication.
>
> 3\. Each refrigerant circuit shall have a liquid line filter/drier,
> sight glass with moisture indicator, externally equalized thermostatic
> expansion valve, liquid line solenoid valve, and service valves.
>
> 4\. If split system component units do not have the specified
> refrigerant specialties factory installed, they shall be field
> provided per Section 15180.
>
> 5\. Single compressor systems shall have hot gas bypass or other means
> to accommodate low load conditions.
>
> 6\. When specified on the drawings, dual compressor systems shall have
> unloading valves and controls to provide 4-step capacity control.
>
> C. Air Cooled Condensers and Condensing Units
>
> 1\. Units shall be fabricated from aluminum or painted galvanized
> steel, with maintenance access panels and condenser fan guards.
>
> 2\. Condenser coils shall be copper tube/aluminum fin with integral
> sub-cooling circuits, and shall be factory leak tested at 300 psig.
>
> 3\. Unless otherwise indicated, condenser fans shall be vertical
> discharge, direct drive, propeller type.
>
> 4\. Units larger than 5 tons shall have multiple fans with full width
> separation baffles.
>
> 5\. Condenser fans shall have variable speed controls to provide
> cooling down to -20 degrees F ambient temperature.
>
> 6\. Each unit shall have a factory installed disconnect switch and
> single point power connection.
>
> D. Suggested Manufacturers
>
> Computer room air conditioning equipment shall be Liebert, Airflow, or
> approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Follow manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.02 Provide clearances as specified by the manufacturer for maintenance
access and proper air circulation.

3.03 Mount packaged air conditioners and air cooled condensing units
(except roof mounted units) on concrete pads per Section 15060.

3.04 Adjust system controls to maintain design conditions as specified
on the drawings.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15750

HUMIDITY CONTROL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

This section specifies duct mounted and area type humidifiers.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

> A. Section 15180 Heating and Cooling Piping
>
> B. Section 15405 Plumbing
>
> C. Section 15810 Ducts
>
> D. Section 15900 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

> A. Humidifier types, capacities, accessories, controls, and electrical
> requirements shall be as indicated on the drawings.
>
> B. Humidifiers shall be UL listed.

2.02 ELECTRONIC STEAM GENERATOR HUMIDIFIERS

> A. Steam generator humidifiers shall have the following components and
> features.
>
> 1\. Wall or floor mounted locking steel cabinet with a baked enamel
> finish.
>
> 2\. Disposable steam generator cylinders, or reusable cylinders with
> replaceable electrodes.
>
> 3\. Water supply connection with integral air gap.
>
> 4\. Drain connection.
>
> 5\. Fill and drain solenoid valves
>
> 6\. Single point power connection with power disconnect switch.
>
> 7\. Unit mounted controls as specified below.
>
> a\. Controls shall be microprocessor based, with proportional plus
> integral functions which optimize water level and conductivity, while
> maintaining 90 percent of steam output capacity during drain and fill
> cycles.
>
> b\. Controls shall accept input signals from on/off humidistats or
> modulating humidity controllers with remote setpoint adjustment.
>
> c\. Control system shall include an alphanumeric display, built-in
> diagnostics, and status lights.
>
> B. Humidifier steam output capacities shall be field adjustable from
> 20 to 100 percent of full output.
>
> C. Duct mounted steam distributors shall be designed to separate steam
> and condensate, distribute the steam evenly across the duct section,
> and drain the condensate back to the humidifier. Provide flexible
> steam hose of sufficient length to connect the steam distributor to
> the humidifier.
>
> D. Area type humidifiers shall be provided with a remote or unit
> mounted blower assembly with integral steam distributor.
>
> E. Provide one set of spare replacement cylinders or electrodes for
> each humidifier.
>
> F. Electronic steam generator humidifiers shall be Nortec NHMC,
> Armstrong Series EHU-700, or equal.

2.03 STEAM-TO-STEAM HUMIDIFIERS

> A. Steam-to-steam humidifiers shall include the following components
> and features.
>
> 1\. Evaporation chamber - welded 18 gage 304 stainless steel
> construction with removable covers, quick-release latches, and 3/4
> inch rigid foam insulation with foil facing.
>
> 2\. Steam heat exchanger - constructed of 304 stainless steel tubing
> welded to box type stainless steel headers. Exterior of heat
> exchangers shall be Teflon coated to shed scale.
>
> 3\. Drain Valves
>
> a\. Unless otherwise noted, provide a brass or stainless steel manual
> drain valve.
>
> b\. If noted on the drawings, provide automatic controls for an
> adjustable, timed, drain/flush cycle to reduce the frequency of
> cleaning.
>
> 4\. Steam control valves - Modulating type with electric, electronic,
> or pneumatic actuator (as specified on the drawings) and inlet
> strainer.
>
> 5\. Steam traps - float and thermostatic or inverted bucket type.
>
> 6\. Water Level Controls
>
> a\. Unless otherwise noted, provide a solid-state control module with
> teflon coated stainless steel water conductivity probe and solenoid
> actuated fill valve.
>
> b\. If noted on the drawings, provide a stainless steel, float
> operated, water make-up valve and low water cut off switch in lieu of
> electronic level controls.
>
> 7\. Steam dispersion tubes - duct-mounted, full-width, with flexible
> steam supply hose. Dispersion tubes shall be designed to separate the
> steam and condensate, distribute steam evenly across the duct section,
> and drain condensate back to the humidifier. Dispersion tubes shall
> have removable nylon inserts with calibrated orifices for proper steam
> distribution and rapid absorption.
>
> B. Steam-to-steam humidifiers shall be Dri-Steem Model STS, Armstrong
> Series CS-10, or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

> A. Install humidifiers in accordance with drawing details and the
> manufacturer\'s instructions. Installation shall allow adequate
> clearances for maintenance and repair.
>
> B. Interlock duct mounted humidifiers with high limit humidistats and
> airflow switches to prevent excessive humidification of the supply air
> stream.
>
> C. Placement of duct mounted steam distribution/dispersion tubes shall
> be in accordance with the manufacturer\'s recommendations for proper
> steam absorption and condensate drainage.
>
> D. Support flexible steam supply hoses to prevent trapping of
> condensate.
>
> E. Provide an access door downstream of each duct mounted steam
> distributor per Section 15820.

3.02 ELECTRONIC STEAM HUMIDIFIERS

> Adjust capacity controls to provide the humidification capacity
> indicated on the drawings.

3.03 STEAM-TO-STEAM HUMIDIFIERS

> A. Install humidifier evaporation chamber level and rigidly supported
> to assure correct operation of water level controls.
>
> B. The humidifier drain shall be trapped to the depth specified by the
> manufacturer for the humidifier capacity and duct static pressure.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15765

ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

This section specifies electrical resistance heating coils for mounting
in HVAC ductwork.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

> A. Electric duct heaters shall be UL-listed for zero clearance to
> combustible surfaces, and shall meet all applicable provisions of the
> National Electrical Code (NEC).
>
> B. Duct heater capacities, types, configurations, sizes, and
> electrical power requirements shall be as specified on the drawings.

2.02 DUCT HEATER CONSTRUCTION

> A. Heaters shall be suitable for mounting in both unlined duct and
> duct with 1\"-thick ductliner.
>
> B. Duct heater frames shall be fabricated from aluminized steel,
> reinforced with corner braces.
>
> C. Open coil heating elements shall be 80/20 nickel/chromium
> resistance wire.
>
> D. Finned tubular elements shall consist of 80/20 nickel/chromium wire
> encased in a steel tube with magnesium oxide filler and copper-plated
> steel fins.
>
> E. Heating elements shall be supported with corrosion-resistant steel
> supports and ceramic bushings as required to prevent sagging and
> deflection.
>
> F. The duct side of heater terminal boxes shall be factory-insulated.
>
> G. Heaters for round duct installation shall be UL listed for that
> purpose, and shall have an integral round duct adaptor plate.

2.03 CONTROLS, INTERLOCKS, AND SAFETIES

> A. Capacity control shall be of the type specified on the drawings.
>
> B. Provide each duct heater complete with the following control,
> interlock, and safety devices, unless otherwise noted.
>
> 1\. 2 automatic reset thermal cutouts.
>
> 2\. 1 manual reset thermal cutout.
>
> 3\. Differential pressure airflow switch.
>
> 4\. Magnetic contactors.
>
> 5\. Locking disconnect.
>
> 6\. 24-volt control transformer.
>
> 7\. Power and control circuit fusing per the NEC.
>
> 8\. Pilot lights to indicate power on, each stage on, airflow loss,
> and over-temperature alarm.
>
> C. When duct heaters with remote control panels are specified, the
> thermal cutouts and airflow switch shall be mounted in the heater
> terminal box. All other control, interlock, and safety components
> shall be mounted in the control panel.

2.04 SUGGESTED MANUFACTURERS

Electric duct heaters shall be Indeeco, Brasch, Valley Industries,
Electric Heaters, Inc., or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

> A. Install electric duct heaters per the design drawings and the
> manufacturer\'s recommendations.
>
> B. Install ductwork as required to provide the minimum airflow
> velocity and upstream and downstream clearances recommended by the
> duct heater manufacturer.
>
> C. When installing heaters in existing lined ductwork, remove
> ductliner as required to provide the manufacturer's required upstream
> and downstream clearances from combustibles. Secure cut edges of liner
> to duct with adhesive. Provide metal nosing on leading edge of liner
> downstream of the heater.
>
> D. Provide a duct access door on the downstream side of each duct
> heater per section 15820, \"Duct Accessories\".
>
> E. Provide electrical disconnecting means at, or within sight of, the
> heater control panel.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15810

DUCTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> This section specifies rigid and flexible ductwork for HVAC and
> industrial exhaust systems.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

> A. Section 15080 Mechanical Insulation
>
> B. Section 15820 Duct Accessories
>
> C. Section 15850 Air Outlets and Inlets

1.03 STANDARDS

> Ductwork materials, construction, and installation shall comply with
> all applicable provisions of the following standards, except where
> more stringent requirements are specified.
>
> A. SMACNA \"HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal And Flexible\"
>
> B. SMACNA \"Round Industrial Duct Construction Standard\"
>
> C. SMACNA \"Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standard\"
>
> D. SMACNA \"Thermoplastic Duct (PVC) Construction Manual\"
>
> E. ACGIH \"Industrial Ventilation, A Manual Of Recommended Practice\"

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

> A. With the exception of PVC ductwork, all ductwork products and
> materials shall have maximum flame spread and smoke development
> ratings of 25 and 50, respectively. Ratings shall be certified in
> accordance with ASTM E84.
>
> B. HVAC ductwork products and materials shall meet all applicable
> requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B.

2.02 HVAC SHEET METAL DUCTWORK

> A. HVAC ductwork shall be fabricated from lock-forming quality
> galvanized steel sheet per ASTM A525 or ASTM A527, G90 coating
> designation. Ductwork noted on the drawings to be painted shall have a
> paintable galvanized finish.
>
> B. Single wall round duct smaller than 12 inch diameter may be either
> shop fabricated longitudinal seam type, or factory fabricated spiral
> type as specified below.
>
> C. Single wall round duct, 12 inch diameter and larger, shall be
> factory fabricated with spiral lockseams; United McGill "Uni-Seal" or
> equal.
>
> D. Double wall round duct shall be factory fabricated, consisting of a
> spiral seam outer wall, 1 inch thick fiberglass insulation, and a
> perforated spiral seam inner wall.
>
> 1\. The maximum thermal conductance of the duct shall be 0.27
> Btu/hr./sq. ft./degree F.
>
> 2\. The acoustical properties of the duct shall be published by the
> manufacturer.
>
> 3\. The duct shall be rated for an airflow velocity of 4000 fpm per
> U.L. Standard 181.
>
> 4\. Ductwork shall be United McGill "ACOUSTI-K27" or equal.

2.03 DUCT LINER AND ASSOCIATED PRODUCTS

> A. Duct liner shall be 1 inch thick, 1.5 pounds/cubic foot, bonded
> fiberglass blanket; maximum \"k\" value = 0.28 at 75 degrees F;
> factory coated to prevent fiber erosion, and rated for air velocities
> up to 6000 fpm; Certainteed, Knauf, Owens-Corning, or equal.
>
> B. Spotter pins shall be welded steel equal to Duro-Dyne PN-250, with
> spotter clips equal to Duro-Dyne PC-1.
>
> C. Duct liner adhesive shall be non-flammable, quick-setting,
> rubber-based; Foster \"Spark-Fas\" or equal.

2.04 PREFAB JOINT SYSTEMS FOR GALVANIZED STEEL DUCTWORK

> A. Joint System for Rectangular Ductwork
>
> 1\. Joint system shall consist of flanges, corner pieces, gaskets,
> cleats, and corner clips, and shall be similar to SMACNA Type T-24,
> Formed Flange.
>
> 2\. Flanges shall be roll formed galvanized steel with integral,
> non-hardening, mastic sealant.
>
> 3\. Flanges shall be 26 gage, comparable to SMACNA Class F joints, or
> 20 gage, comparable to SMACNA Class J joints.
>
> 4\. Corner pieces shall be minimum 16 gage galvanized steel, and shall
> permit connection with bolts or corner clips.
>
> 5\. Gaskets shall be extruded butyl, unless otherwise noted.
>
> 6\. Cleats shall be minimum 20 gage roll formed galvanized steel.
>
> 7\. Corner clips shall be minimum 16 gage galvanized steel.
>
> 8\. System shall be Ductmate Industries "Ductmate 25", "Ductmate 35",
> "DM Ripple 25", "DM Ripple 35", or equal.
>
> B. Joint System for Round Duct
>
> 1\. Joint system shall consist of inner ring flanges, gasket, and a
> closure ring.
>
> 2\. Inner ring flanges shall be minimum 24 gage roll formed galvanized
> steel with integral, non-hardening, mastic sealant.
>
> 3\. Gaskets shall be extruded butyl, unless otherwise noted.
>
> 4\. Closure rings shall be minimum 24 gage roll formed galvanized
> steel, with brackets and tightening bolt.
>
> 5\. Joint system shall be Ductmate Industries "Spiralmate", or equal.

2.05 DUCT SEALANTS

> A. Duct sealants shall be U. L. classified and labeled, and shall
> contain no asbestos or PCB\'s. Solids content of sealants shall be
> between 65 and 80 percent.
>
> B. Sealants shall be approved by the manufacturer for use on round and
> rectangular ductwork, SMACNA Pressure Classes 1/2 to 10 inches w. c.,
> and SMACNA Seal Classes A, B and C.
>
> C. Duct sealant for indoor ductwork shall be a water based, vinyl
> acrylic sealant, and shall be non-flammable wet or dry; United McGill
> "Uni-Grip" or equal.
>
> D. Duct sealant for outdoor ductwork shall be a rubber and solvent
> based sealant, with a service temperature range which includes -20 to
> 150 degrees F; United McGill "United Duct Sealer" or equal.

2.06 INSULATED FLEXIBLE HVAC DUCT

> A. Insulated flexible HVAC duct shall be U.L. Listed, Class 1 air duct
> per U.L. Standard 181.
>
> B. Inner duct shall be constructed of CPE permanently bonded to a
> coated spring steel wire helix, and shall be rated for -1/2 to +6
> inches w.c. Service temperature range shall be 0 to 200 degrees F.
> Velocity rating shall be 4000 FPM.
>
> C. Duct shall be insulated with a fiberglass blanket for a maximum
> thermal conductance, \"C\", of 0.23 BTU/hr./sq. ft./ degree F at 75
> degrees F mean temparature.
>
> D. Unless otherwise noted, the outer vapor barrier shall be
> polyethylene with a maximum permeance of 0.2 perm per ASTM E96.
>
> E. Insulated flexible HVAC duct shall be Flexible Technologies
> "Thermaflex G-KM," Owens-Corning "Valuflex," or equal.

2.07 INDUSTRIAL SHEET METAL EXHAUST DUCTWORK

> A. The minimum standard for industrial sheet metal exhaust ductwork
> shall be SMACNA Material Handling Class 2 (a.k.a. Class B), and 0 to
> -10 inches w. c. negative pressure, unless otherwise noted.
>
> B. Ductwork shall be factory fabricated, round, with spiral lockseams
> or continuously welded longitudinal seams. Unless otherwise noted,
> duct and fitting material shall be galvanized steel. Galvanized
> ductwork noted on the drawings to be painted shall have a paintable
> galvanized finish.
>
> C. Sheet metal gages for spiral lockseam ductwork shall be equal to
> United McGill "Uni-Seal" Industrial Duct for the applicable material
> handling class and negative pressure.
>
> D. Sheet metal gages for continuously welded longitudinal seam
> ductwork shall be as required by the SMACNA Round Industrial Duct
> Standard.
>
> E. Sheet metal gages for fittings shall be one even gage number
> heavier than the downstream duct section.
>
> F. Duct connections for dust collection systems shall be made with
> material handling couplings or Van Stone flanges. Connections for fume
> and vapor exhaust systems may be made with slip couplings, unless
> otherwise noted.
>
> G. Elbows shall be factory fabricated, with multiple gores and
> continuously welded joints. The minimum centerline radius shall be 1.5
> times the duct diameter.
>
> H. Laterals shall be factory fabricated, with 30 degree angle between
> main duct and branch duct centerlines. Tapered body laterals shall be
> used for duct size transitions.
>
> I. Blast gates shall have minimum 18 gage fabricated frames, minimum
> 16 gage blades, and steel set screws; United McGill "GS" or equal.
>
> J. Material handling cut-offs shall be half-frame type with cast
> aluminum bodies, minimum 16 gage slide gates, and steel set screws;
> United McGill "COH" or equal.
>
> K. Floor sweep fittings shall be factory fabricated, with hinged door
> and duct connection as indicated; United McGill "FS" or equal.
>
> L. Exhaust duct access doors shall be hinged type with quick-release
> latches or clasps, and shall, as a minimum, be fabricated from the
> same gage material as the ductwork; United McGill "ASHXFSDC" or equal.
>
> M. Vertical stackhead fittings shall be factory fabricated, with
> discharge stack one inch larger than duct diameter, and stack height
> above duct outlet equal to four duct diameters; United McGill "WV" or
> equal.
>
> N. Suggested manufacturers: United McGill, Kirk & Blum, Steelcraft,
> Semco, or equal.

2.07 FLEXIBLE EXHAUST DUCT

> A. [Type FH-1:]{.underline} Dust exhaust and similar applications -
> double ply, triple overlap construction of neoprene impregnated nylon
> fabric, with enclosed steel wire helix; Flexaust Type CWY or equal.
>
> B. [Type FH-2:]{.underline} Wood chip exhaust and similar
> applications - four ply, triple overlap construction of neoprene
> impregnated nylon fabric, with enclosed steel wire helix; Flexaust
> Type LN or equal.
>
> C. [Type FH-3:]{.underline} Metal chip exhaust and similar
> applications - double ply, triple overlap construction of neoprene
> impregnated nylon fabric, with enclosed steel wire helix and 1/8 inch
> thick rubber liner; Flexaust "Duraflo" or equal.
>
> D. [Type FH-4:]{.underline} Fume exhaust and similar applications -
> chemical resistant PVC wall, reinforced with fully enclosed spring
> steel wire helix. Minimum wall thickness shall be as follows:

[Duct Diameter]{.underline} [Min Wall Thickness]{.underline}

1-1/4\" to 3-3/4\" 0.045\"

4\" to 5-1/2\" 0.050\"

6\" to 8\" 0.057\"

9\" to 16\" 0.074\"

> Type FH-4 duct shall be Flexaust R-3 or equal.
>
> E. [Type FH-5:]{.underline} Extreme temperature or corrosive fume
> exhaust service - single ply, helically corrugated, with four ply
> seams folded flat and crimped, semi-rigid, self-supporting, bendable
> by hand; aluminum or 304 stainless steel as indicated; Flexaust
> "Bendway" Type A (aluminum), Type S (stainless steel), or equal.
>
> F. Suggested Manufacturers: Flexaust, Hi-Tech Hose, Uniflex, or equal.

2.08 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) EXHAUST DUCTWORK

> A. The basic plastic compounds for PVC duct, fittings and accessories
> shall be Class 12454-B or Class 12454-C per ASTM D1784-90 (formerly
> Type I, Grade 1 and Type I, Grade 2 respectively per ASTM D1784-65T).
>
> B. Rigid PVC sheets used in the fabrication of duct, fittings and
> accessories shall be manufactured from basic plastic compounds noted
> above, and shall meet the requirements of ASTM D1927-81.
>
> C. Duct may be either extruded, or thermally formed with butt welded
> longitudinal seams. The minimum nominal wall thickness shall be per
> SMACNA standards for the specified pressure class.
>
> D. Fittings for round duct shall be factory fabricated and shall have
> flanged, butt welding, or bell & spigot end connections. Wall
> thickness of fittings shall be same as ductwork, as a minimum.
>
> E The minimum centerline radius of round elbows shall be 1.5 times the
> duct diameter, unless otherwise noted.
>
> F. PVC solvent cement shall be the heavier grade formulated for
> Schedule 40, 80 and 120 pipe.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

> A. Ductwork shall be fabricated, installed, and supported in
> accordance with applicable SMACNA duct construction standards.
>
> B. If noted on the Schedule Of Submittals, the Contractor shall submit
> ductwork shop drawings for approval.
>
> C. Ductwork shall be supported from the building structure; not from
> piping, conduit, or other ductwork. Double nuts and lock washers shall
> be used on threaded rod supports.
>
> D. Where obstructions prohibit installation of ductwork as designed,
> the Contractor shall notify the Government Inspector and request
> direction from the A/E.
>
> E. Ductwork shall be isolated from vibrating equipment with flexible
> connections.
>
> F. Supplemental reinforcement shall be provided as required to prevent
> sagging and drumming of ductwork.

3.02 HVAC SHEET METAL DUCTWORK

> A. Ductwork pressure/velocity classification shall be + 1 inch w.g.
> static pressure at 2500 fpm, unless otherwise indicated.
>
> B. Duct systems shall be sealed to meet SMACNA seal Class C unless
> otherwise noted. Use SMACNA recommended methods with duct sealant or
> duct sealant plus tape and gasketing, as appropriate.
>
> C. Rectangular ductwork shall be fabricated with cross-breaks in each
> side over 10 inches in width.
>
> D. Rectangular branch duct connections to rectangular trunk ducts
> shall be made with 45 degree branch tees.
>
> E. Round branch duct connections to rectangular trunk ducts shall be
> made with round takeoff fittings per Section 15820.
>
> F. When installing branch connections, provide at least one branch
> duct width or diameter clearance downstream of elbows.
>
> G. Elbows for rectangular ductwork shall be one of the following
> types:
>
> 1\. Curved elbow without vanes, centerline radius equal to 1.5 times
> the duct width.
>
> 2\. Curved elbow with 6 inch throat radius and two splitter vanes per
> SMACNA duct construction standards.
>
> 3\. Square, mitered elbow with double thickness turning vanes per
> Section 15820.
>
> H. Elbows for round ductwork shall be constructed with a minimum
> centerline radius equal to the duct diameter.
>
> I. The angle between opposite sides of concentric transitions shall
> not exceed 45 degrees for diverging transitions or 60 degrees for
> converging transitions. The angle between opposite sides of eccentric
> transitions shall not exceed 30 degrees.

3.03 LINED DUCTWORK

> A. Duct dimensions shown on the drawings are inside clear dimensions,
> unless otherwise noted. Lined ductwork shall be fabricated with
> allowance for the liner thickness to maintain inside clear dimensions
> indicated.
>
> B. Liner shall be attached to ductwork with welded spotter pins and a
> continuous coating of adhesive. Maximum spacing of spotter pins shall
> be 18 inches longitudinally and 12 inches laterally. Secure liner to
> spotter pins with clips.
>
> C. Seal all edges of duct liner with adhesive. Provide metal nosing at
> upstream edges where air velocity exceeds 4000 FPM.

3.04 INSULATED FLEXIBLE HVAC DUCT

> A. Flexible duct shall be cut to the correct length to prevent sagging
> between supports, yet allow a full radius bend at diffuser
> connections. Duct that is too long shall be shortened.
>
> B. Duct that is too short shall be replaced with longer duct, or a
> sheet metal elbow shall be provided at the diffuser.
>
> C. The maximum length of insulated flexible duct shall be 8 feet,
> unless otherwise noted.
>
> D. Flexible duct shall be connected to takeoff fittings and diffusers
> with steel worm gear type hose clamps. After making the duct
> connection, secure the insulation with a plastic strap and seal the
> vapor barrier with duct tape.
>
> E. Support flexible duct with duct straps at a maximum spacing of 6
> feet on center.
>
> F. Where possible, support horizontal flexible duct branches to
> diffusers and grilles a minimum of 18 inches above ceilings. Flexible
> duct shall never be supported by laying directly on suspended ceiling
> tiles.

3.05 INDUSTRIAL SHEET METAL EXHAUST DUCTWORK

> A. Transverse duct joints shall be secured with sheet metal screws at
> a maximum 6 inches on center, minimum of three screws per joint. Seal
> with duct sealant specified herein.
>
> B. Provide blast gates or cutoffs for flow balancing of each branch
> duct unless otherwise indicated. Ductwork shall be rigidly supported
> at blast gates and cutoffs to withstand opening and closing forces.
>
> C. Ductwork shall be beaded at connections to flexible duct.

3.06 FLEXIBLE EXHAUST DUCT

> Flexible exhaust duct connections shall be secured with stainless
> steel worm drive clamps and sealed air-tight.

3.07 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) EXHAUST DUCTWORK

> A. Transverse joints for round duct, 12 inch diameter and smaller,
> shall be one of the following types:
>
> 1\. Solvent welded bell & spigot joint.
>
> 2\. Solvent welded sleeve joint.
>
> 3\. Butt welded joint.
>
> 4\. Flanged joint.
>
> B. Solvent welded joints required to be liquid tight shall be hot
> gas/filler rod back welded.
>
> C. Transverse joints for rectangular duct, and for round duct larger
> than 12 inch diameter, shall be one of the following types:
>
> 1\. Hot gas/filler rod welded bell & spigot joint.
>
> 2\. Hot gas/ filler rod welded sleeve joint.
>
> 3\. Butt welded joint.
>
> 4\. Flanged joint.
>
> Solvent cement shall not be used.
>
> D. Elbows for rectangular ductwork shall be fabricated from sheet
> stock with hot gas/filler rod welded joints. Square mitered elbows
> shall have turning vanes. The minimum centerline radius of curved
> elbows shall be 1.5 times the duct width.
>
> E. Reinforcement of ductwork shall be constructed with hot gas/ filler
> rod welded joints.
>
> F. Submit the following for approval:
>
> 1\. Details of all hot gas/filler rod welded joint configurations and
> filler rod materials.
>
> 2\. Qualifications and experience record of PVC welders.
>
> G. Butt weld joints of any type shall [not]{.underline} be solvent
> welded.
>
> H. Provide expansion joints as required to prevent excessive duct
> movement or damage to ductwork and supports.
>
> I. Provide drains at all low points of ductwork, as indicated on the
> drawings.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15820

DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

This section specifies ductwork accessories for HVAC duct systems with
the exception of control dampers, which are specified in Section 15900.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

> A. Section 15810 Ducts
>
> B. Section 15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 STEEL SHEET

> Steel sheet for fabrication and installation of duct accessories shall
> be flat prime quality, galvanized both sides, gages as indicated.

2.02 ROUND TAKEOFF FITTINGS

> Round takeoff fittings shall be factory fabricated, galvanized steel,
> riveted construction, with mounting flange, adhesive backed neoprene
> gasket, beaded connection for flexible branch duct, crimped connection
> for sheet metal branch duct, and locking damper (if indicated on the
> drawings); Rainaire products \"Air Tite\" models 84AT and 84ATD or
> equal.

2.03 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

> Duct access doors shall be U.L. labeled, galvanized steel, double
> panel construction, internally insulated with minimum 1-inch-thick
> fiberglass insulation, removable; complete with gaskets and
> quick-opening locking devices; Ductmate, Duro-Dyne Model IAD,
> Nailor-Hart Series 0800, or equal.

2.04 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS

> A. Flexible duct connectors shall be U.L. listed, and shall comply
> with NFPA 90A.
>
> B. Flex connector shall be constructed of fire retardant, neoprene
> coated, woven glass fiber fabric (minimum density 20 oz. per square
> yard), secured to galvanized steel edging strips (24-gage minimum)
> with ship locks.
>
> C. Suggested Manufacturers: Duro-Dyne, Vent Fabrics, U.S. Rubber, or
> equal.

2.05 TURNING VANES

> Turning vanes shall be galvanized steel, double thickness, air-foil
> shape, with side rails, and shall be fabricated as recommended in the
> SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards; Duro-Dyne, Barber-Colman,
> Titus, Airturns, or equal.

2.06 EXTRACTORS

> Extractors shall be fabricated from galvanized steel with curved
> parallel blades, and factory installed screw driver operator; Carnes
> Model RXVA, Barber Coleman, Titus, or equal.

2.07 DAMPER QUADRANTS

> Damper quadrants shall be locking type, with indicator markings
> showing damper position, and shall be as manufactured by Duro-Dyne,
> Vent Fabrics, or equal.

2.08 SPLITTER DAMPERS

> Splitter dampers shall be fabricated from minimum 16-gage galvanized
> steel with a hemmed leading edge. Trailing edge shall be pivoted on a
> rod or hinges. Secure adjustment rod to leading edge of damper and
> extend rod through side of ductwork using a ball joint bracket with
> set screw (Ventlok #603 or equal).

2.09 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

> A. Dampers in rectangular ductwork of 12 inch depth or less shall be
> single blade type with extended shaft.
>
> B. Dampers in rectangular ductwork of greater than 12 inch depth shall
> be opposed blade type, with tie rods and extended shaft. Blades shall
> be 6 inch width, maximum.
>
> C. Dampers in round ductwork shall be single blade type, with 20 gage
> X 10 inch long galvanized steel frames and 14 gage galvanized steel
> blades. Frames shall be flanged or beaded on each end. Blades shall
> have full circumference neoprene or urethane edge seals. Shafts shall
> be 1/2 inch diameter, mounted with bearings, and extending 6 inches
> beyond frame.
>
> D. Suggested Manufacturers: Ruskin, Louvers and Dampers, Arrow, or
> equal.

2.10 FIRE DAMPERS

> A. Fire dampers shall be factory assembled, and shall bear the U.L.
> label for the fire resistance rating required at each location.
>
> B. Fire dampers shall be curtain type, with interlocking galvanized
> steel blades folded out of the airstream.
>
> C. Dampers intended for horizontal mounting shall have stainless steel
> negator springs for positive closure, and a latch mechanism to
> maintain the closed position until manually reset.
>
> D. Fusible links shall separate at 160 degrees F, unless otherwise
> indicated.
>
> E. Provide Type C low resistance frames, with free area equal to, or
> exceeding, that of the connecting ductwork. Frame style shall be as
> required for duct shape and system velocity.
>
> F. Suggested Manufacturers: Ruskin, Louvers and Dampers, Vent
> Products, Prefco, or equal.

2.11 BACKDRAFT AND RELIEF DAMPERS

> A. [Type BD-1]{.underline}: Galvanized steel frame (minimum 16 gage)
> and linked parallel blades of galvanized steel or aluminum
> construction (minimum 22 gage) with felt blade edge seals; Airline
> Products Type FBD-12 or approved equal.
>
> B. [Type BD-2]{.underline}: Same construction as type BD-1, with
> adjustable closure spring or counterweights; Airline Products Type
> CBD-19 or equal.
>
> C. [Type BD-3:]{.underline} Galvanized steel frame, neoprene coated
> fiberglass fabric blades, aluminum or galvanized expanded metal rear
> grille, 60% free area; Ruskin NMS-2, Louvers & Dampers FRD, or equal.
>
> D. Suggested manufacturers: Airline Products, Arrow, Louvers and
> Dampers, Penn, Ruskin, Vent Products, or approved equal.

2.12 VARIABLE VOLUME ZONE AND BYPASS DAMPERS

> A. Dampers shall consist of a short section of rigid round duct and an
> aerodynamic damper blade, galvanized or aluminized steel construction,
> with metal-to-metal shutoff seal, and actuator as specified below.
>
> B. Damper actuators shall have positive positioning worm gear drive
> with end switches to prevent stalled motor operation, 90 degree
> rotation, approximate one minute drive time, and DDC control module
> (24 volts A.C.).
>
> C. When specified, provide a wall mounted DDC zone temperature sensor
> with external set-point indication and adjustment.
>
> D. When specified, provide a damper mounted duct temperature sensor
> for automatic heating/cooling changeover capability.
>
> E. Variable volume zone and bypass dampers shall be Trane "VariTrac"
> or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

> A. Provide duct accessories as indicated on the drawings, and as
> specified herein.
>
> B. Install duct accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's
> recommendations, drawing details, and applicable requirements of the
> following standards.
>
> 1\. NFPA 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
> Ventilating Systems.
>
> 2\. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards for Metal and Flexible
> Duct.
>
> 3\. SMACNA Fire, Smoke, and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for
> HVAC Systems.

3.02 ROUND TAKEOFF FITTINGS

> Provide duct takeoff fittings for all round branch duct connections
> (rigid and flexible) to rectangular ducts.

3.03 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

> Provide access doors of suitable size and shape for maintenance access
> to all fire dampers, coils, humidifiers, and other equipment installed
> in ducts, and not readily accessible through other openings.

3.04 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS

> Provide flexible duct connectors for all fan and air handler duct
> connections.

3.05 TURNING VANES

> A. Install turning vanes in all square mitered elbows and tees, and
> where otherwise indicated on the drawings.
>
> B. Vanes shall extend across the full diagonal dimension of the turn,
> and be securely attached to the side rails.
>
> C. Rivet the turning vane assembly to the ductwork, and install to be
> permanently rattle-proof.

3.06 EXTRACTORS AND SPLITTER DAMPERS

> Provide where indicated on the drawings, and as otherwise required for
> proper air balancing.

3.07 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

> A. Provide where indicated on the drawings, and as otherwise required
> for proper air balancing.
>
> B. Provide locking damper quadrants for all manual volume dampers.

3.08 FIRE DAMPERS

> Provide duct access doors where fire damper fusible links are not
> accessible through other openings. Location and size shall be
> sufficient for resetting fire dampers and replacing fusible links.

3.09 BACKDRAFT AND RELIEF DAMPERS

> Adjust Type BD-2 dampers to relieve at the pressures indicated on the
> drawings.

3.10 VARIABLE VOLUME ZONE AND BYPASS DAMPERS

> A. Provide zone and bypass dampers with control accessories as
> indicated on the drawings.
>
> B. Provide a 24 volt A.C. control transformer for damper control
> power.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15830

FANS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> Work specified in this section includes propeller fans, centrifugal
> fans, and fan accessories for exhaust and ventilation applications.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 15810 Ducts

B. Section 15820 Duct Accessories

C. Section 15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

> A. Fan types, sizes, performance, horsepower, and electrical
> requirements shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
>
> B. Fan air performance ratings shall be certified in accordance with
> AMCA Standard 211, and shall be based on standard sea level
> conditions.
>
> C. Fan sound performance ratings shall be certified in accordance with
> AMCA Standard 311. Sound levels shall not exceed specified level at
> specified air delivery conditions.
>
> D. Fans shall be U.L. listed and bear the AMCA seal for air and sound
> performance.
>
> E. Fan wheels, housings, and supports not of aluminum or stainless
> steel shall be factory primed inside and outside for corrosion
> protection.
>
> F. Fans shall be capable of accommodating static pressure variations
> of plus or minus 10 percent from the design value.
>
> G. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced to minimize
> vibration and noise generation.
>
> H. Fan motors shall have internal thermal overload protection and
> permanently lubricated, sealed ball bearings.
>
> I. Belt driven fans shall have heavy duty, permanently lubricated,
> sealed ball bearings and variable pitch cast iron sheaves. Sheaves
> shall be selected to operate near the mid-point of their adjustment
> range at design conditions. Belt drives shall be designed for a
> minimum 140% of input power (120% for fractional horsepower motors).
>
> J. Provide belt guards on belt driven fans with exposed drives.
> Provide safety screens or guards where fan inlets or outlets are
> exposed.
>
> K. Provide all fans with unit-mounted electrical disconnects, unless
> otherwise noted.

2.02 PROPELLER WALL FANS

> A. Fan mounting panels shall be constructed of heavy gage steel with
> prepunched mounting holes, factory formed flanges, and deep spun
> venturi inlet.
>
> B. Motors and drives of fans 24 inch diameter and larger shall be
> supported by steel angle or formed structural shapes.
>
> C. Steel panels and framing shall be factory primed and painted.
>
> D. Propeller fan blades shall be constructed of die formed aluminum or
> steel. Steel fan blades shall be welded to steel hubs.
>
> E. Propeller wall fans shall be Penn "Breezeway" or "Breezebuilder"
> Series or equal.

2.03 CENTRIFUGAL FANS

> A. [Type CF-1:]{.underline} In-line Centrifugal Fans
>
> 1\. Housings shall be constructed of galvanized steel panels with
> structural framing for rigidity. Housings shall have inlet and outlet
> duct connection flanges, deep spun venturi inlet, and access panels
> for full access to all internal components.
>
> 2\. Direct drive fans shall have motor, fan wheel, and inlet venturi
> mounted on a swing-out panel for easy access.
>
> 3\. Belt drive fans shall have drive components isolated from the
> airstream, with externally mounted motors.
>
> 4\. Fan wheels shall be constructed of aluminum, statically and
> dynamically balanced, and shall be backward curved, non-overloading
> type.
>
> 5\. Provide fan manufacturer's standard vibration isolators for the
> type of installation indicated on the drawings.

6.  Type CF-1 fans shall be Penn "Centrex In-Liner," Greenheck SQ and
    BSQ Series, or equal.

> B. [Type CF-2:]{.underline} Room Exhaust/Cabinet Fans
>
> 1\. Housings shall be constructed of galvanized steel panels with
> structural framing for rigidity. Housings shall have inlet and outlet
> duct connection flanges, acoustical insulation, and access panels for
> full access to all internal components.
>
> 2\. Room exhaust fans shall be field convertible for either ceiling or
> wall mounting, and shall be furnished with white eggcrate intake
> grille, resiliently mounted motor, and integral backdraft damper.
>
> 3\. Cabinet fans shall be field convertible for either in-line or
> right angle configurations.
>
> 4\. Provide manufacturer's standard mounting hardware and vibration
> isolators for the type of installation indicated on the drawings.
>
> 5\. Type CF-2 fans shall be Penn "Zephyr" Series or equal.
>
> C. [Type CF-3:]{.underline} Utility Fan Sets
>
> 1\. Scroll housings shall be constructed of heavy gage galvanized or
> painted carbon steel sheet, with spun venturi inlet, steel angle
> bracing and base, inlet duct collar, and slip joint or flanged outlet.
> Housings shall be field adjustable for rotation to eight standard
> discharge positions.
>
> 2\. Fan motor and drive components shall be mounted on a structural
> steel frame, rigidly attached to the scroll housing.
>
> 3\. Fan motors for outdoor installations shall be TEFC type, or shall
> be provided with vented weatherproof housings.
>
> 4\. Fan wheels shall be forward curved, non-overloading backward
> inclined, or airfoil type, as specified on the drawings. Fan wheels
> shall be constructed of welded steel or aluminum unless otherwise
> noted.
>
> 5\. Provide fan manufacturer's standard spring or rubber-in-shear
> vibration isolators for the type of installation indicated on the
> drawings.
>
> 6\. Type CF-3 fans shall be Trane, Penn "Dynamo" Series, or equal.
>
> D. Wall and Roof Mounted Centrifugal Exhausters
>
> 1\. [Type CF-4:]{.underline} General Purpose Exhausters
>
> a\. Housings shall be constructed of heavy gage, spun aluminum with a
> rolled bead and removable motor/drive cover.
>
> b\. Curb caps (roof models) and mounting rings (wall models) shall be
> one-piece aluminum with integral, deep spun venturi inlet.
>
> c\. Fan wheels shall be of non-sparking aluminum construcition, and
> shall be backward curved, non-overloading type.
>
> d\. Motor/drive mounting plates shall be isolated from fan housings
> with rubber vibration isolators.
>
> e\. Motor/drive compartments shall be isolated from the exhaust air
> stream and force cooled with fresh air.
>
> f\. Type CF-4 fans shall be Penn "Domex" Series or equal.
>
> 2\. [Type CF-5:]{.underline} Exhausters for Heavily Contaminated Air
>
> a\. Fans shall be top discharge type, designed to project the exhaust
> airstream away from the building for effective contaminant dispersal.
>
> b\. Fan housings shall be constructed of heavy gage spun aluminum with
> a rolled bead, removable motor/drive housing, and integral water
> drains.
>
> c\. Base plates shall be one-piece galvanized steel or aluminum, with
> integral deep spun venturi inlet. [Note:]{.underline} Base plates of
> spark-proof fans shall be aluminum.
>
> d\. Fan wheels shall be of non-sparking aluminum construction,
> backward curved, non-overloading type, with integral cooling fan.
>
> e\. Motor/drive mounting plates shall be isolated from fan housings
> with rubber vibration isolators.
>
> f\. Motor/drive compartments shall be isolated from exhaust air
> stream, and shall be force cooled with fresh air drawn from outside
> the fan housing through breather tubes.
>
> g\. Type CF-5 fans shall be Penn "Fumex" or equal.
>
> E. [Type CF-6:]{.underline} Laboratory Fume Hood Exhaust Fans
>
> 1\. Type CF-6 fans shall be modular, roof mounted, constant volume,
> direct drive, vertical discharge; designed for fresh air entrainment
> in the exhaust plume to produce an effective stack height as specified
> on the drawings.
>
> 2\. Modules shall have flanged joints with PTFE gaskets and 316
> stainless steel hardware.
>
> 3\. All steel and aluminum components shall be blasted or chemically
> etched, then protected with an 8 to 10 mil epoxy coating.
>
> 4\. The complete fan assembly shall be designed to mount on a
> conventional roof curb without requiring guy wires.
>
> 5\. The fan manufacturer shall provide certification that fan
> performance data includes adjustment for system effects caused by the
> specified accessories.
>
> 6\. Base/Impeller Shroud Module
>
> a\. Base/impeller shroud module shall be constructed of continuously
> welded steel, with a bolted access door for impeller inspection.
>
> b\. Impeller inlet bell shall be aluminum, and shall meet AMCA "C"
> sparkproof requirements.
>
> 7\. Motor/Impeller Module
>
> a\. Motor/impeller module shall be constructed of continuously welded
> steel, with internal lifting lugs and internal drains to prevent rain
> water entry into ductwork.
>
> b\. Module shall include the motor, impeller, and stationary discharge
> guide vanes.
>
> c\. Fan motor shall be TEFC mill and chemical duty type, with 1.15
> service factor and L-50 bearing life of 200,000 hours. Motor
> horsepower and voltage shall be as indicated on the drawings.
>
> d\. Motor shall be isolated from the exhaust air stream, and shall be
> visible and accessible from the fan exterior for inspection and
> maintenance.
>
> e\. Module shall include an externally mounted, factory wired, NEMA 3R
> non-fused disconnect.
>
> f\. Impeller shall be a combination of axial and backward curved
> blades, of welded steel construction, and shall be directly mounted to
> the motor shaft.
>
> g\. Impeller shall be dynamically balanced, with a maximum 0.5 mil
> peak-to-peak vibration at operating speed.
>
> h\. Impeller shall have non-stall and non-overloading characteristics
> for stable operation at any point on the fan curve.
>
> 8\. Discharge Nozzle/Windband Module
>
> a\. Module shall have twin venturi nozzles with motor access between.
> Nozzles shall be constructed of chemical and UV resistant FRP.
> Windband shall be steel.
>
> b\. Module shall be designed to provide secondary induction of outdoor
> air into the exhaust air stream. Outdoor air induction shall be
> approximately 160% of exhaust airflow.
>
> 9\. Mixing Box Plenum Module
>
> a\. When specified on the drawings, the manufacturer shall provide a
> mixing box plenum module. Module shall be constructed of continuously
> welded steel, suitable for roof curb mounting, and designed to support
> the exhaust fan without guy wires or external supports.
>
> b\. Plenum shall have hinged access doors, internal drains, and safety
> screens over air inlets.
>
> c\. Air inlet sizes and orientations shall be as shown on the
> drawings.
>
> d\. Air inlets shall be equipped with manual, adjustable barometric,
> or low leakage control dampers as indicated. Outdoor air intakes shall
> be equipped with rain hoods.

10. Type CF-6 fans shall be Strobic Air "Tri-Stack" or equal.

2.04 FAN ACCESSORIES

> A. Unless otherwise indicated, all accessories shall be provided by
> the fan manufacturer.
>
> B. [Roof Curbs:]{.underline} Curbs shall be fabricated from aluminum
> or galvanized steel with mitered and welded corners, pressure treated
> wood nailer, integral cant, and rigid fiberglass insulation; suitable
> for roof type and slope; curb size and height as specified on the
> drawings.
>
> C. [Backdraft Dampers and Shutters:]{.underline} Aluminum or
> galvanized steel construction, equal to Type BD-1 per Section 15820.
>
> D. [Wall Sleeves:]{.underline} For propeller wall fans - fabricated
> from galvanized or painted steel sheet, with reinforced corners and
> mounting flanges for fan guards and shutters.

2.05 SUGGESTED MANUFACTURER'S

Fans and accessories shall be Acme, Aerovent, Buffalo Forge, Carnes,
Greenheck, Loren Cook, Penn, Trane, or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

Provide fans and fan accessories as indicated on the drawings, and in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.02 VENTILATING AND EXHAUST FANS

> A. Install fans so that all components are readily accessible for
> inspection and maintenance.
>
> B. Provide flexible connectors on inlet and outlet duct connections of
> all ducted fans, unless otherwise indicated.
>
> C. Verify correct direction of rotation for all fans upon initial
> start-up.

3.03 FAN ACCESSORIES

> A. Install roof mounted fans on roof curbs, unless otherwise
> indicated.
>
> B. Install wall mounted propeller fans in wall sleeves, unless
> otherwise indicated.
>
> C. Provide flashing for roof curbs and wall sleeves as indicated, and
> as otherwise required for a weather-tight installation.
>
> D. Use cadmium plated (or other corrosion resistant) hardware for
> exterior fan mounting.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15850

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> This section specifies air distribution devices for HVAC systems, and
> includes grilles, registers, diffusers, and louvers.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

> A. Section 15810 Ducts
>
> B. Section 15820 Duct Accessories
>
> C. Section 15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

> A. Air outlet and inlet types, face and neck sizes, throw patterns,
> mounting types, and performance requirements shall be as indicated on
> the drawings.
>
> B. Performance ratings for grilles, registers, and diffusers shall be
> ADC (Air Diffusion Council) certified. Louver performance ratings
> shall be AMCA (Air Movement and Control Association) certified.
>
> C. Construction and mounting of air distribution devices shall
> preclude flutter, rattle, and vibration.
>
> D. Provide all modifications, accessories, and hardware necessary to
> mount devices in specified or indicated surface construction.

2.02 SUPPLY DIFFUSERS

> A. Unless otherwise noted, all supply diffusers shall be of steel
> construction with white enamel finish.
>
> B. Unless otherwise noted, provide face operable opposed blade dampers
> for all supply diffusers. Dampers shall be equal to Carnes Model KXKA
> (square and rectangular neck) or Model KXMB (round neck).
>
> C. [Type SD-1:]{.underline} Louvered face, fixed pattern, surface
> mounting frame; Carnes Model SKSA or equal.
>
> D. [Type SD-2:]{.underline} Louvered face, fixed pattern, exposed duct
> mounting frame; Carnes Model SKEA or equal.
>
> E. [Type SD-3:]{.underline} Louvered face, fixed pattern, T-bar
> mounting frame; Carnes Model SKTA or equal.
>
> F. [Type SD-4:]{.underline} Louvered face, adjustable 4-way pattern,
> surface mounting frame; Carnes Model SKBA-40 or equal.
>
> G. [Type SD-5:]{.underline} Louvered face, adjustable 4-way pattern,
> exposed duct mounting frame; Carnes Model SKPA-40 or equal.
>
> H. [Type SD-6:]{.underline} Louvered face, adjustable 4-way pattern,
> T-bar mounting frame; Carnes Model SKCA-40 or equal.
>
> I. [Type SD-7:]{.underline} Hinged perforated face, 4-way fixed
> pattern, round neck, surface mounting frame; Carnes Model SPCB, with
> Style 2 frame, or equal.
>
> J. [Type SD-8:]{.underline} Hinged perforated face, 4-way fixed
> pattern, round neck, T-bar mounting frame; Carnes Model SPCB, with
> Style 4 frame, or equal.
>
> K. [Type SD-9:]{.underline} Hinged perforated face, adjustable
> pattern, surface mounting frame; Carnes Model SPAB (round neck) or
> SPDB (square or rectangular neck) with Style 2 frame, or equal.
>
> L. [Type SD-10:]{.underline} Hinged perforated face, adjustable
> pattern, T-bar mounting frame; Carnes Model SPAB (round neck) or SPDB
> (square or rectangular neck) with Style 4 frame, or equal.

2.03 SUPPLY GRILLES AND REGISTERS

> A. Unless otherwise noted, supply grilles and registers shall be of
> steel construction, with white finish and flanged frame for wall or
> ceiling mounting.
>
> B. Supply Grilles
>
> 1\. [TYPE SG-1:]{.underline} Single deflection, adjustable vertical
> front bars (unless otherwise noted); Carnes Model RSSA or equal.
>
> 2\. [TYPE SG-2:]{.underline} Double deflection, adjustable vertical
> front bars and horizontal rear bars (unless otherwise noted); Carnes
> Model RSDA or equal.
>
> C. Supply Registers
>
> 1\. [TYPE SR-1:]{.underline} Type SG-1 grille with opposed blade
> damper; Carnes Model RTSA or equal.
>
> 2\. [TYPE SR-2:]{.underline} Type SG-2 grille with opposed blade
> damper; Carnes Model RTDA or equal.
>
> 3\. [TYPE SR-3:]{.underline} Computer room floor register - aluminum
> construction, satin brushed aluminum finish, load bearing, 8 X 12 inch
> neck, 15 degree louver deflection, with opposed blade damper; Carnes
> Model CCKBD or equal.

2.04 RETURN AND EXHAUST GRILLES AND REGISTERS

> A. Unless otherwise noted, grilles and registers shall have a white
> finish.
>
> B. Return and Exhaust Grilles
>
> 1\. [TYPE RG-1:]{.underline} Steel, hinged perforated face, T-bar
> mounting frame; Carnes Type SPRB (round neck) or SPJB (square neck)
> with Style 4 frame, or equal.
>
> 2\. [TYPE RG-2:]{.underline} Steel, hinged perforated face, surface or
> exposed duct mounting, flanged frame; Carnes Type SPRB (round neck) or
> SPJB (square neck) with Style 2 frame, or equal.
>
> 3\. [Type RG-3:]{.underline} Aluminum, 1/2 X 1/2 X 1/2-inch eggcrate
> face, T-bar mounting frame; Metalaire Model CC5-TB or equal.
>
> 4\. [Type RG-4:]{.underline} Aluminum, 1/2 X 1/2 X1/2-inch eggcrate
> face, flanged surface mounting frame; Metalaire Model CC5-PF or equal.
>
> 5\. [TYPE RG-5:]{.underline} Steel, fixed horizontal curved face
> blades, flanged surface mounting frame; Carnes Model RSLA or equal.
>
> 6\. [Type RG-6:]{.underline} Steel, perforated face, non-ducted panel,
> T-bar mounting; Carnes Model SPHB or equal.
>
> 7\. [Type RG-7:]{.underline} Aluminum, 1/2 X 1/2 X 1/2-inch eggcrate
> face, non-ducted panel, channel frame for T-bar mounting; Metalaire
> Model CC5-TB-Core Only, or equal.
>
> 8\. [Type RG-8:]{.underline} Filter/grille - Aluminum, 1/2 X 1/2 X
> 1/2-inch hinged eggcrate face, flanged surface mounting frame, holding
> frame for 1-inch disposable fiberglass filter; Titus Model 50FF with
> Type 1 border, or equal.
>
> 9\. [Type RG-9:]{.underline} Filter/grille - Aluminum, 1/2 X 1/2 X
> 1/2-inch hinged eggcrate face, T-bar mounting frame, holding frame for
> 1-inch disposable fiberglass filter; Titus Model 50FF with Type 3
> border, or equal.
>
> 10\. [Type RG-10:]{.underline} Filter/grille - Aluminum, horizontal
> face louvers, 40 degree deflection, surface mounting frame, holding
> frame for 1-inch disposable fiberglass filter; Tuttle & Bailey Model
> A70DFB or equal.
>
> C. Return and Exhaust Registers
>
> 1\. [Type RR-1:]{.underline} Type RG-1 grille with opposed blade
> damper.
>
> 2\. [Type RR-2:]{.underline} Type RG-2 grille with opposed blade
> damper.
>
> 3\. [Type RR-3:]{.underline} Type RG-3 grille with opposed blade
> damper; Metalaire Model CC5D-TB or equal.
>
> 4\. [Type RR-4:]{.underline} Type RG-4 grille with opposed blade
> damper; Metalaire Model CC5D-PF or equal.
>
> 5\. [Type RR-5:]{.underline} Type RG-5 grille with opposed blade
> damper; Carnes Model RTLAH or equal.

2.05 DOOR GRILLES

> Door grilles (a.k.a. door louvers) shall be of aluminum construction,
> satin brushed aluminum finish, double flange frame, chevron blade,
> \"sight-tight\", 80% free area; Carnes Model RFJAD or equal.

2.06 WALL LOUVERS

> A. All louvers shall have flanged frames unless otherwise indicated.
>
> B. [Type WL-1:]{.underline} Stationary, 4-inch frame depth, minimum 20
> gage galvanized steel frame and blades, riveted or welded
> construction, drainable blades, dual downspouts, removable 1/2 inch
> galvanized mesh bird screen; water penetration and air performance
> certified per AMCA Standard 500; Louvers and Dampers Model IFL-47 or
> equal.
>
> C. [Type WL-2:]{.underline} Same as WL-1 except fully adjustable, with
> neoprene blade seals, self-lubricating sintered bronze bearings, and
> concealed linkage; Louvers and Dampers Model AIEL-4-164 or equal.
>
> D. [Type WL-3:]{.underline} Stationary, 4-inch frame depth, minimum
> .081 inch thick aluminum frame and blades, welded construction,
> drainable blades, dual downspouts, removable 1/2 inch galvanized mesh
> bird screen; water penetration and air performance certified per AMCA
> Standard 500; Louvers and Dampers Model IEL-47 or equal.
>
> E. [Type WL-4:]{.underline} Same as WL-3 except fully adjustable, with
> neoprene blade seals, self-lubricating sintered bronze bearings, and
> concealed linkage; Louvers and Dampers Model AIEL-4-364 or equal.

2.07 SUGGESTED MANUFACTURERS

> A. Diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be Carnes, Hart and Cooley,
> Krueger, Metalaire, Titus, Tuttle and Bailey, or equal.
>
> B. Wall louvers shall be Arrow, Carnes, Louvers and Dampers,
> Ruskin,Vent Products, or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Install air distribution devices where indicated on the drawings,
and in accordance with manufacturer\'s installation instructions.

3.02 Provide manufacturer's standard round neck adapters for connection
of insulated flex duct to square neck diffusers.

3.03 Flash and seal around wall louvers per the drawing details, and as
otherwise required to provide a weather-tight installation.

3.04 Provide one box of replacement filters for each return air
filter/grille installed.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15900

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

This section specifies pneumatic and electric control components and
systems for HVAC control. Direct Digital Controls (DDC) are specified in
Section 15901.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Controls shall be installed by individuals with a minimum of five
years experience in the installation and service of similar controls.
Submit a list of projects, dates and control descriptions as proof of
experience installing similar controls. Installers may be employed by
the HVAC system installer unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

B. If noted on the drawings, the controls installer shall be an
independent company licensed by a controls manufacturer. The company
shall employ factory trained installation and service technicians and
maintain a stock of service parts. The principal business of the company
shall be the design, installation and service of HVAC controls.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

Products specified on the drawings shall take precedence over products
specified herein.

2.02 PNEUMATIC DEVICES

A. Thermostats

Room Thermostats shall be horizontal, surface mounted, proportioning,
two-pipe relay type with pneumatic feedback, a volume amplifier and
output test connection. Sensing elements shall be bimetallic type.
Heating-Cooling thermostats shall have dual elements, dual setpoints and
an adjustable deadband. Sensitivity shall be factory set at 2.5
PSI/Degree F and be field adjustable. Thermostats shall be direct-acting
or reverse-acting as required. Setpoint adjustments shall be concealed.
Covers shall be blank and be secured with allen head screws. Johnson
Controls H-4000 Series or equal.

B. Temperature Transmitters

Room Temperature Transmitters shall be horizontal, surface mounted,
proportioning, two-pipe relay type with pneumatic feedback, a volume
amplifier and output test connection. Sensing elements shall be
bimetallic type. Sensitivity shall be factory calibrated and fixed.
Linearity shall be within plus or minus one percent of full span
throughout the scale range. Transmitters shall be direct-acting. Covers
shall be blank and be secured with allen head screws. Johnson Controls
H-5002 Series or equal.

C. Humidistats

Room Humidistats shall be horizontal, surface mounted, proportioning,
two-pipe relay type with pneumatic feedback, a volume amplifier and
output test connection. Sensing elements shall be cellulose acetate
butyrate (CAB). Sensitivity shall be factory set at 2.5 PSI/1% RH and be
field adjustable. Humidistats shall be direct-acting or reverse-acting
as required. Setpoint adjustments shall be concealed. Covers shall be
blank and be secured with allen head screws. Johnson Controls H-4100
Series or equal.

D. Humidity Transmitters

Room Humidity Transmitters shall be horizontal, surface mounted,
proportioning, two-pipe relay type with pneumatic feedback, a volume
amplifier and output test connection. Sensing elements shall be
cellulose acetate butyrate (CAB). Sensitivity shall be factory
calibrated and fixed. Linearity shall be within plus or minus one
percent of full span throughout the scale range. Transmitters shall be
direct-acting. Covers shall be blank and be secured with allen head
screws. Johnson Controls H-5100 Series or equal.

E. Receiver - Controllers

Receiver-Controllers shall be single input or dual input type with
proportional or proportional plus integral control as indicated on the
drawings. Units with proportional plus integral control shall have an
adjustable integral time and automatic integral cutout at system startup
to prevent control instability. All units shall have adjustable local
setpoint, local/remote setpoint selection, adjustable gain,
direct/reversing action selection, multiple pressure test connections
and an output pressure gauge. Dual input units shall have
direct/reversing readjustment selection and adjustable ratio. Johnson
Controls T-5800 Series or equal.

F. STATIC PRESSURE SENSING TIPS AND FITTINGS

> 1\. Angled metal pressure sensing tips with 4 inch insertion depth and
> four 0.040 inch diameter, radially drilled pressure sensing holes.
> Tips shall be designed for mounting in a 3/8 inch diameter hole with
> access to both sides. Dwyer Instruments Model A-301 with compression
> fitting for 1/4 inch O.D. tubing or Model A-302 with barbed end for
> 3/16 inch and 1/8 inch I.D. plastic or rubber tubing.
>
> 2\. Metal fitting for sensing the static pressure at the surface of
> low velocity systems. Fittings shall be designed for mounting in a 3/8
> inch diameter hole with access to both sides. Dwyer Instruments Model
> A-307 with compression fitting for 1/4 inch O.D. tubing or Model A-308
> with barbed end for 3/16 inch and 1/8 inch I.D. plastic or rubber
> tubing.
>
> 3\. Flange for surface mounting static pressure sensing tips and
> fittings without access to both sides of mounting hole. Flange shall
> include gasket and sheetmetal screws. Flange shall accept Dwyer
> Instruments Models A-301, A-302, A-307, and A-308 static pressure
> sensing tips, fittings, and pitot tubes. Dwyer Instruments Model
> A-345.

2.03 ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC DEVICES

A. Thermostats

> 1\. Duct Mounted Low Limit Thermostats (Freezestats) shall be provided
> for every 20 square feet of coil surface area. Thermostats shall have
> a manual reset, snap-acting, SPDT switch and a thermal capillary. The
> switch shall open on a drop in temperature. Minimum length of the
> capillary shall be 20 feet. The lowest temperature across any 12
> inches of the capillary shall be sufficient to trip the switch.
> Barber-Colman Model TC-5141 or equal.
>
> 2\. Duct Mounted High Limit Thermostats (Firestats) shall have a
> manual reset, snap-acting, SPST switch and a helical, bimetallic
> sensing element. The switch shall have an adjustable setpoint with a
> dial range of 75 to 135 degrees F and a fixed differential of 10
> degrees F. The switch shall open on a rise in temperature. The switch
> shall be rated for 16 amps at 120 VAC. Barber-Colman Model TA-3432.

B. Temperature Transmitters

Temperature Transmitters shall be as indicated on the drawings.

C. Humidistats

Duct Mounted High Limit Humidistats shall have nylon sensing elements,
15% to 95% RH range, 5% RH differential and snap-acting SPDT switch.
Switch voltage rating shall be as indicated on the drawings.
Barber-Colman Model HC-201 or equal.

D. Humidity Transmitters

Humidity Transmitters shall be as indicated on the drawings.

E. Differential Pressure Switches

Differential Pressure Switches for airflow confirmation shall be U.L.
approved, diaphragm type with a SPDT snap-acting switch rated for 15
amps at 120-480 VAC, adjustable setpoint, 1/8 inch FNPT pressure
connections, mounting bracket, and NEMA 1 switch enclosure. Unit shall
be rated for 45 inches W.C. Setpoints available shall range from 0.07 to
20.0 inches W.C. Dwyer Instruments Model 1910-0 or equal.

F. Flow Switches

1\. Hydronic Flow Switches shall be U.L. listed, vane type with brass
body, stainless steel vane, SPDT snap-acting switch and magnetic
actuation without mechanical linkage. Size 2\" NPS and smaller:

W.E. Anderson Model V6 or equal. Size 2 1/2\" and larger: W.E. Anderson
Model V4 or equal.

2\. Airflow Switches shall be U.L. listed, sail type with polyester film
sail and SPDT snap-acting switch with 75 FPM and 250 FPM make/break
points. Honeywell Model S688A or equal.

2.04 CONTROL VALVES

> A. Control valves, size 2 inch and smaller, shall have bronze bodies
> with screwed connections. Control valves, size 2 1/2 inch and larger,
> shall have cast iron bodies with flanged connections. Valve ratings
> shall meet all pressure and temperature requirements of the
> application. Valve trim shall be replaceable. Unless indicated
> otherwise, stems shall be stainless steel, seats shall be bronze,
> plugs shall be brass, discs, as applicable, shall be teflon or
> composition and cages, as applicable, shall be brass. Stems shall be
> top and bottom guided for size 2 1/2 inch and larger valves. Packing
> shall be teflon \"V\" rings, graphite or synthetic elastomer \"U\"
> cups. Packing shall be spring loaded or adjustable, manually loaded.

B. Control valves for modulating flow of steam and chilled water shall
have linear flow characteristics. Control valves for modulating flow of
heating water shall have equal percentage flow characteristics.

C. Control valves shall be two-way, three-way mixing, or three-way
diverting type as indicated on the drawings.

D. Two-way control valves for steam and heating water shall be normally
open and three-way valves normally open to the heat exchanger. Two-way
control valves for chilled water shall be normally closed and three-way
valves shall be normally closed to the heat exchanger and open to the
bypass connection.

E. Steam control valves with inlet pressures of 50 PSI or higher shall
have stainless steel plugs and seats hardened to not less than 500
Brinell.

F. Hydronic control valves for modulating flow through coils shall have
a minimum pressure drop of 5 PSI, plus or minus 1 PSI, at the maximum
design flow. Steam control valves shall have a minimum pressure drop of
1/2 the inlet steam pressure.

2.05 CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Control dampers for ductwork shall be as specified below. Control
dampers furnished as an integral part of air handling unit mixing boxes
shall be as specified in SECTION 15720, AIR HANDLING UNITS.

B. Outside air and relief air control dampers shall be ultra low leakage
control dampers. All other control dampers shall be standard control
dampers. Two-position control dampers shall be parallel blade or opposed
blade type. Modulating control dampers shall be opposed blade type.

C. Ultra low leakage control dampers shall have AMCA certified data
showing leakage less than 10 CFM/SF at 4 inches W.C. differential
pressure. Frames shall be constructed of 1/8 inch thick extruded
aluminum hat channel with staked reinforcing braces at each corner.
Blades shall be extruded aluminum, airfoil type with 6 inch maximum
width and integral structural reinforcement running full length of each
blade. Blade edge seals shall be field replaceable, extruded vinyl,
double edge design to enable the air pressure to assist sealing. Jamb
seals shall be compression type with flexible aluminum seals. Linkages
shall be concealed inside frames. Axles shall be 1/2 inch plated steel
hex for a positive connection to blades. Control shaft shall be 1/2 inch
diameter and extend 6 inches beyond the frame. Bearings shall be
non-corrosive, two piece molded synthetic. Ruskin Model CD-50 or equal.

D. Standard control dampers shall have frames constructed of 16 gage
galvanized steel hat channel with corner bracing. Blades shall be
constructed of roll-formed, 16 gage galvanized steel with 6 inch maximum
width. Blade edge seals shall be polyurethane foam. Linkages shall be
concealed inside frames. Axles shall be 1/2 inch plated steel hex for a
positive connection to blades without screws or welds. Control shaft
shall be 1/2 inch diameter, extend 6 inches beyond the frame and have an
additional outboard support bearing. Bearings shall be non-corrosive,
two piece molded synthetic. Ruskin Model CD35 or equal.

2.06 CONTROL VALVE & CONTROL DAMPER ACTUATORS

A. Control valve and control damper actuators shall be electric,
electronic or pneumatic type as indicated on the drawings and as
specified herein. Actuator control method shall be two-position,
proportional or proportional with positive positioning as indicated on
the drawings and as specified herein. Actuators shall have return
springs and SPDT auxiliary switches unless indicated otherwise.
Actuators shall be provided with mounting brackets, crankarms, pushrods
and other components specified herein and as required for a complete
working installation.

B. Actuators shall be sized by the controls installer for a minimum of
150 percent of the required force. Actuators for two-way valves, outside
air dampers and relief air dampers shall have return springs and motors
or pistons sized to provide tight shutoff against system operating
pressures. Actuators shall return valves and dampers to the normally
open or normally closed position as specified herein or as indicated on
the drawings.

C. Control valve actuators shall be supported from and located directly
above the valve body. Actuators shall be one of the following types as
indicated on the drawings.

> 1\. Pneumatic diaphragm type with concentric pushrod and diaphragm
> plate or piston.
>
> 2\. Electric/Electronic type with oil-filled gear box, rotating
> horizontal shaft, crankarm, and pushrod.
>
> 3\. Electric/Electronic type with rack and pinion gearing and vertical
> pushrod.

Actuator pushrods shall be directly connected to valve stems to push and
pull along the valve stem axis to fully stroke the valve. Actuators
shall have valve position indicators with \"Open\" and \"Closed\"
labels.

D. Control valve pneumatic actuators shall be provided with positive
positioners as listed below.

> 1\. Control valves, all sizes, sequenced for proportional control of
> heating and cooling.
>
> 2\. Control valves, size 2 1/2 inch and larger, used for proportional
> control of hydronics and low pressure steam.
>
> 3\. Control valves, all sizes, used for proportional control of steam,
> 60 PSI or greater.

E. Control damper actuators shall be mounted to the duct and located
outside the air stream. Actuators shall be one of the following types as
indicated on the drawings.

> 1\. Pneumatic diaphragm type with concentric pushrod and piston.
>
> 2\. Electric/Electronic type with oil-filled gear box, rotating
> horizontal shaft, crankarm, and pushrod.
>
> 3\. Electric/Electronic type with slip-on, gear driven socket for
> damper shaft/duct mounting.

Actuator linkage shall not \"bridge\" flexible duct connections.
Actuators shall have damper position indicators with \"Open\" and
\"Closed\" labels.

F. Control damper pneumatic actuators shall be provided with positive
positioners as listed below.

> 1\. Outside air dampers where control dampers are sequenced for
> proportional control of outside air and return air.
>
> 2\. Outside air and relief air dampers where control dampers are
> sequenced for proportional control of outside air, return air and
> relief air.
>
> 3\. Control dampers, size 36 square feet and larger, used for
> two-position or proportional control of air flow.
>
> 4\. Large multiple section or single section control dampers with
> multiple actuators used for two-position or proportional control shall
> have a positive positioner on one actuator.

2.07 SOLENOID VALVES

Solenoid Valves shall conform to SECTION 15110, VALVES, of these
specifications.

2.08 DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTORS

Duct Mounted Smoke Detectors shall be U.L. listed, ionization type with
molded plastic housing, normally open SPST alarm contacts, SPDT
auxiliary contacts rated for 10 amps at 120 VAC and metal sampling tube.
Sampling tube length shall equal duct width. Provide remote test/reset
stations for detectors located more than 7 feet above floors. Detector
power voltage shall be as indicated on the drawings. Honeywell Model
TC805B or equal.

2.09 ENCLOSURES

Enclosures shall be UL listed, constructed of minimum 14 gage sheet
metal with spot welded joints and enamel finish. Doors shall have a full
length piano hinge and keyed lock. Doors shall be convertible to right
hand or left hand hinge. Windows, when specified, shall be of Lexan
polycarbonate. All enclosures shall be keyed alike.

2.10 CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION TUBING

A. Copper tubing shall be Type M hard copper with wrought copper
fittings with solder joints or Type M soft copper with brass fittings
with compression joints. Tool-made bends may be used in lieu of
fittings.

B. Polyethylene tubing shall be black, virgin polyethylene meeting
stress crack tests per ASTM D-1693 and be self-extinguishing per ASTM
D-635. Fittings shall be brass or plastic with barbed connections.

C. Type EMT conduit and fittings shall be in accordance with DIVISION
16, ELECTRICAL, of these specifications.

2.11 CONTROL WIRING

Conduit, wiring and other control wiring products shall conform to the
National Electric Code as a minimum standard and DIVISION 16,
ELECTRICAL, of these specifications.

2.12 FLOW MEASURING STATIONS (FMS)

Flow measuring stations shall consist of the housing, a straightener/
equalizer and pressure sensors. Housings shall be welded, 14 gage
galvanized steel with 1-1/2 inch flanges for duct mounting. Size and
shape of housings shall be as noted on the drawings. The airflow
straightener/ equalizer shall be an aluminum \"honeycomb\" with 3/8 x3
inch cells. The maximum pressure drop shall be 0.085 inches w.c. at 2000
FPM. The pressure sensors shall be copper tubes arranged for equal area
sensing and symmetrical averaging of total and static pressures.
Stations of four square feet and less area shall have sensing ports for
every 16 square inches. Larger stations shall have sensing ports for
every 36 square inches. Self-generated sound shall be less than NC40.
Accuracy shall be two percent from 1000 FPM to 4000 FPM. Stations shall
be equal to \"Fan-Evaluator\" model by Air Monitor Corporation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. All control products shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer\'s instructions.

B. Main air to receiver-controllers shall not be valved. Main air to
receiver-controllers shall not be cycled On/Off by the controls.

3.02 CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION TUBING

A. The control and instrumentation tubing shall be designed by the
controls installer so that the maximum pressure drop at any main or
branch is not greater than 0.5 PSI at maximum air consumption.

B. Tubing in concealed, accessible locations may be soft copper or
polyethylene.

C. Tubing in concealed, inaccessible locations may be soft copper, or
polyethylene in conduit.

D. Tubing in exposed locations may be polyethylene in conduit or hard
copper.

E. Hard copper tubing and conduit shall be rigidly supported from the
structure at regular intervals. Hard copper tubing and conduit shall not
be supported from piping, ductwork or equipment. Multiple runs shall be
neatly nested.

F. Polyethylene tubing exiting conduit shall be protected from chafing
with smooth, chamfered bushings or plastic strain relief bushings.
Polyethylene tubing shall be protected from tight bends and pinching
with springs.

G. After installation, all tubing shall be purged of all impurities with
dry, oil-free compressed air before making connections to control
instruments.

H. The complete tubing system shall be tested at 30 PSI for 8 hours. The
pressure loss after 8 hours shall not exceed 2 PSI.

3.03 CONTROL WIRING

Control wiring shall conform to the National Electric Code as a minimum
standard and DIVISION 16, ELECTRICAL, of these specifications.

3.04 CONTROL VALVES

A. Control Valves shall be furnished by the controls installer and
installed by the HVAC systems installer in accordance with the
requirements specified herein.

B. Control valves shall be installed with the stem in the vertical,
upright position. Valves shall be installed with adequate clearance for
easy service and replacement of valves and actuators.

3.05 CONTROL DAMPERS

Control dampers specified by this section shall be furnished by the
controls installer and installed by the HVAC systems installer. Dampers
shall be installed without twisting or binding to allow smooth, free
operation through the full range of movement.

3.06 DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTORS

A. Duct Mounted Smoke Detectors shall be furnished by the controls
installer and installed by the HVAC systems installer. Power and fire
alarm interlocks shall be connected by the electrical installer. Control
interlocks shall be connected by the controls installer.

B. Duct Mounted Smoke Detectors shall be mounted in Supply Air trunk
ducts upstream of the first branch duct connections and be interlocked
with fan motor starters.

3.07 ENCLOSURES

Enclosures shall be installed in accordance with the National Electric
Code as a minimum standard and DIVISION 16, ELECTRICAL, of these
specifications.

3.08 VIBRATION ISOLATION

Controllers and other devices sensitive to vibration shall be isolated
by location or by mounting devices to prevent vibration.

3.09 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION

The sequences of operation shall be as indicated on the drawings.

3.10 CONTROL SYSTEM DRAWINGS

A. Provide a control drawing of each control system unless indicated
otherwise. Each drawing shall include a system diagram with all
components identified, a list of all components with manufacturer and
model number, locations of equipment and sequences of operation.
Drawings shall also list all spring ranges, pressure switch settings,
temperature switch settings, sensor sensitivity settings, control
setpoints, minimum and maximum design flows, system design capacities,
etc.

B. Frame each control drawing under glass and locate near controlled
equipment, as directed by the COTR.

3.11 TESTING, CALIBRATION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. After completion of control systems installation, all control systems
shall be tested and adjusted in terms of function and performance in
preparation for control systems acceptance tests. Data showing set
points and final adjustments of all controls shall be provided.

B. The controls installer shall conduct a thorough test in the presence
of the Government Inspector, demonstrating all system performance
features.

C. After control systems have been tested in the presence of the
Government Inspector, the systems shall be operated in normal service
for two weeks. After two weeks, all instruments and devices shall be
checked. Items found to be out of order shall be corrected. When all
control systems meet specified operating conditions and when all other
pertinent specification requirements have been met, systems will be
accepted.

3.12 SPECIAL TOOLS

Special tools shall be provided as required for the operation and
adjustment of controllers, instruments, or other control system devices.

3.13 FLOW MEASURING STATIONS

A. Flow measuring stations shall be furnished by the controls installer
and installed by the HVAC systems installer in accordance with the
manufacturer\'s instructions.

B. Flow measuring stations shall be externally insulated by the HVAC
systems installer with flexible fiberglass blanket insulation per
SECTION 15080, MECHANICAL INSULATION.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15901

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS / UTILITY CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> This section specifies Direct Digital Controls (DDC) for HVAC systems,
> and work required to incorporate them into the existing Utility
> Control System (UCS).

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 15900 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls

B. Section 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods

C. Section 16120 Conductors and Cables

D. Section 16130 Raceways and Boxes

1.03 DEFINITIONS

> A. Utility Control System (UCS)
>
> The MSFC Utility Control System is a computer based monitoring and
> control system, with the central Hewlett Packard computer and operator
> terminals located in Room 29 of Building 4250. The operating software
> is a Dorsett Infoscan system. Typically, the central computer
> communicates with Field Interface Devices in various buildings via a
> modem and telecommunication line.
>
> B. Application-Specific Controller
>
> An application-specific controller, also called a "smart card," is a
> solid state electronic control board designed to control the functions
> of a specific piece of mechanical equipment (air handler, chiller, VAV
> box, etc.).
>
> C. Field Interface Device (FID)
>
> A FID, also called an interface card or interface device, is a solid
> state electronic device with supporting software which provides an
> interface and permits communication between DDC controllers and the
> UCS.
>
> D. Field Devices
>
> The term field devices refers to sensors, switches, actuators, and
> other DDC system components used to monitor and control the function
> of a mechanical system.
>
> E. Termination Unit (TU)
>
> A Termination Unit is a panel in which all field device wiring
> terminations are made.
>
> F. Report by Exception
>
> Report by exception is a mode of operation used to minimize data
> traffic on telecommunication lines and to the system disk or disk
> emulator. In this mode, the FID reports the status of a system data
> point to the central UCS computer only if it changes by an amount
> equal to, or exceeding, its assigned "delta value."

1.04 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

> Unless otherwise noted, all work under this section shall be performed
> by a Contractor who is factory authorized by the manufacturer of the
> DDC controls system.

1.05 TELECOMMUNICATIONS

> A. The Contractor is responsible for coordination of telecommunication
> requirements with Government telecommunication personnel to insure
> that system compatibility and proper data communication are achieved.
>
> B. Telecommunication arrangements must conform to the MSFC Network
> Architecture. Contact the Chief of the MSFC Telecommunications Systems
> Engineering Branch for further information.
>
> C. RS485 data communication is not supported by the existing
> underground cable plant at MSFC.
>
> D. Telecommunication installation required to link FID's with the
> central UCS computer will be provided by the Government. The
> Contractor, through the Government Inspector, shall request
> Telecommunications support at least two weeks prior to actual need
> date.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

> A. Prior to beginning work, provide the following submittals, unless
> otherwise indicated on the Schedule of Submittals.
>
> 1\. Proof of Controls Contractor factory authorization from the
> control system manufacturer.
>
> 2\. Manufacturer's Catalog Data for all system components and
> materials.
>
> 3\. Control schematics, wiring diagrams, and sequences of control for
> each mechanical system to be controlled. Control drawings shall
> identify all system components, control setpoints, minimum and maximum
> design flows, etc.
>
> B. At the completion of the job, provide the following submittals,
> unless otherwise noted.
>
> 1\. As-built control schematics, wiring diagrams, and sequences of
> control for each mechanical system. One copy shall be enclosed in
> laminated plastic and mounted near the controlled equipment as
> directed by the COTR.
>
> 2\. CAD drawing files for schematics and wiring diagrams in Intergraph
> Microstation or DXF format, on disk or diskette.
>
> 3\. Operation and Maintenance Manuals for all system components.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 General Requirements

> A. Each control and interface component shall bear the manufacturer's
> name, address, part number, and serial number. The nameplate of a
> distributing agent is not sufficient.
>
> B. All equipment shall be designed for continuous, 24 hour per day
> operation.
>
> C. All alarm, status, and analog inputs shall be provided with
> over-voltage protection capable of withstanding 130 volts a.c. rms or
> 180 volts d.c. with no equipment damage other than blown fuses.
>
> D. Except as otherwise noted, all devices for interior installation
> shall be rated for a minimum ambient temperature range of 32 to 120
> degrees F. The ambient operating range for outdoor devices shall be
> -22 to 140 degrees F.

2.02 DDC Control Systems

> A. DDC system components shall be standard products of Honeywell,
> Dorsett, Johnson Controls, Staefa, or equal.
>
> B. System hardware and software shall be selected to provide a
> completed system which is totally compatible with the existing Dorsett
> Infoscan A Series System. Compatibility entails the following
> requirements.
>
> 1\. All Infoscan software programs must operate normally through the
> selected DDC equipment (via an interface device, if required) to
> perform all required functions and operations. This will require that
> Infoscan-compatible protocol be used to achieve full functionality.
>
> 2\. UCS operator/technicians must be able to set up or input all data
> for the system from the UCS central computer terminals, or from hand
> tool or lap top devices at controller and field device locations.
>
> 3\. UCS operators must be able to perform all application software
> programming and operator functions through the existing UCS central
> computer terminals.
>
> 4\. Analog values must be displayable at the UCS terminals in terms of
> standard engineering values. Conversions for all values exchanged
> between the UCS and DDC systems must be compatible. These standard
> conversions must allow operators to input all values in engineering
> units, and common engineering units must
>
> 5\. Each point used in the control process algorithm must be
> displayable and accessible through a normal Infoscan point review.
> This includes all set points, pseudo points, message points, etc. When
> these points are represented as displayed values on Infoscan computer
> graphic displays, the operator shall be able to retrieve data within
> ten seconds by touching the display value with a light pen.
>
> 6\. All functions monitored and controlled, either as analog or
> digital operations, must be capable of responding to the UCS central
> computer within 20 seconds. For example, a graphic display with over
> 100 dynamic points must completely report to a UCS terminal within 20
> seconds of an operator request.
>
> C. In some instances, the design drawings will specify that the local
> DDC control system is not to be interfaced with the UCS. However, the
> system must still be compatible in order to provide future
> connectivity to the UCS.

2.03 FIELD INTERFACE DEVICES (FID's)

> A. FID software shall make use of software control blocks which
> resemble control hardware devices such as receiver/controllers,
> gradual relays, higher or lower of two pressures relays, time delay
> relays, etc. The Contractor shall configure these software blocks to
> attain the specified sequence of control.
>
> B. FID software shall permit UCS operators to add, delete, or modify
> control blocks on-line.
>
> C. Software blocks shall provide all necessary mathematics, logic,
> utility, and control functions necessary for the specified sequence of
> control. These functions shall be available in any combination for
> field programming through RAM memory. The software blocks shall also
> provide programming functions for application-specific controllers. As
> a minimum, these routines shall include the following:
>
> 1\. PI - Proportional-Integral Control
>
> 2\. ASEL/FLORS - Select Largest/Smallest of Five Values
>
> 3\. BINM - Output Binary Mode Control
>
> 4\. ECON - Damper Economizer
>
> 5\. ENTH - Compute Enthalpy
>
> 6\. Summer/Winter - Change Set Points Base on Input Value
>
> 7\. AVE - Average of Five Inputs
>
> 8\. CONV - Convert Counts to Engineering Units
>
> 9\. Time of Day - Execute Command as a Time of Day Function
>
> 10\. NWS - Maintain Day/Night/Weekend Setback Temperatures in selected
> zones.
>
> 11\. OSS - Optimized Start/Stop
>
> D. The FID shall function on a "Report by Exception" basis.
>
> E. Each FID shall be equipped with battery back-up which will enable
> it to continue normal function for a minimum of thirty minutes
> following a loss of commercial power.
>
> F. New FID's must be acquired from Dorsett's, Inc. of Yadkinville,
> North Carolina.

2.04 APPLICATION-SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS

> A. Controllers shall be designed specifically for the intended
> application. For example, a card used to control a VAV box must be
> designed as a VAV card. A generic controller card customized for the
> application is not acceptable.
>
> B. Each controller shall be equipped with battery back-up which will
> enable it to continue normal function for a minimum of thirty minutes
> following a loss of commercial power.

2.05 TERMINATION UNITS (TU's)

> A. TU's shall be designed for operating environments from 20 to 120
> degrees F with relative humidity from 10 to 99%.
>
> B. TU's may be either fabricated in accordance with standard details
> provided on the design drawings, or purchased from Dorsett's, Inc. of
> Yadkinville, North Carolina.

2.06 CONTROL VALVES AND VALVE ACTUATORS

> A. Control valves shall be as specified in Section 15900.
>
> B. Valve actuators shall operate by 0-5 volt, 0-10 volt, or 0-20 amp
> phase cut signal. Three point floating or pulse width modulation
> devices shall not be used. Output point type shall be analog.

2.07 CONTROL DAMPERS AND DAMPER ACTUATORS

> A. Control dampers shall be as specified in Section 15900.
>
> B. Damper actuators shall be direct mounting, electronic, rotary drive
> type, for modulating or two-position control as indicated.
>
> C. Actuators shall have spring return, and shall fail to their normal
> positions upon a loss of power. Exceptions may be made for terminal
> unit and zone dampers.
>
> D. Actuators shall have damper position indicators with open and
> closed positions labeled, and external adjustable stops to limit
> stroke in both directions, and auxiliary end switches.
>
> E. Where required, actuators shall be capable of operating in
> sequence.
>
> F. Actuator control method shall be proportional, with signal types
> same as specified for valve actuators. Stepping-motor type actuators
> shall not be used.
>
> G. Actuators shall be sized for 120% of power output required to fully
> close dampers. The design of the actuator shall incorporate a
> protection mechanism to prevent damage if damper sticks, stalls, or is
> mechanically impeded.

2.08 SENSORS

> A. Temperature Sensors
>
> 1\. Except as noted below, temperature sensors connected directly to
> Infoscan hardware shall be 1000 Ohm platinum Resistive Temperature
> Devices (RTD's). Sensors connect directly to the DDC device without
> the use of transmitters.
>
> 2\. RTD's shall be used for temperature sensing in air handlers and
> ductwork. Sensors for supply air and mixed air streams shall have
> averaging elements of sufficient length to provide an accurate
> reading.
>
> 3\. Room sensors shall be provided with a high impact plastic cover
> and an access port through which a hand held or lap top device can be
> connected to the application-specific controller. Through this port,
> the UCS technician shall be able to query or view the system
> operation, and modify set points as required.
>
> 4\. Thermistors may be used in controlling variable volume, constant
> volume, and fan terminal units.
>
> B. Relative Humidity Sensors
>
> Humidity sensors installed in air handlers or ductwork for use in the
> control process shall be solid state, with +/- 3% accuracy over a
> range of 30 to 80%.
>
> C. Combination Temperature and Humidity Sensors
>
> 1\. This type of sensor is typically used for monitoring of critical
> zones such as computer rooms, and is an exception to the requirement
> for RTD sensors.
>
> 2\. Sensor temperature and relative humidity ranges shall be 14 to 140
> degrees F and 0 to 100%, respectively, with an accuracy of 2%.
>
> 3\. Sensor output signal shall be 4 to 20 milliamps.
>
> 4\. Combination T/H sensors shall be General Eastern Model 891 or
> equal.
>
> D. Air Differential Pressure Switches
>
> Differential pressure switches for proving air flow shall be Dwyer
> Model 1910-0 or equal.
>
> E. Liquid Differential Pressure Switches
>
> Differential pressure switches for proving water flow shall be
> Barksdale Model EPD1H-AA40 or equal.
>
> F. Velocity Pressure Transducers
>
> Velocity pressure transducers shall have 0 to 0.1" w.c. range
> (unidirectional), +/- 2% full scale accuracy, over-pressure rating of
> 10 times full scale, and temperature effect +/-0.8% full scale between
> 60 and 80 degrees F; Setra or equal.

2.09 CONTROL WIRING AND CABLE

> A. Sensor and field device cable shall be 2 or 4 conductor as
> required, tinned copper, PVC insulated twisted pairs, belfold
> aluminum-polyester shield, with each pair having a 22 AWG stranded
> tinned copper drain; overall jacketed sheath, PVC or Teflon as
> required.
>
> 1\. Single pair wire shall be 22-gage stranded (7 X 30), black/red.
> Plenum-rated wire shall be Accutech Part \# 3EE-2001V or equal.
> Non-plenum-rated wire shall be Belden Part \# 9462 or equal.
>
> 2\. Two pair wire shall be 20-gage stranded (7 X 28), black/red,
> green/white. Plenum-rated wire shall be Accutech Part \# 3EE-2002V or
> equal. Non-plenum-rated wire shall be Belden Part \# 9402 or equal.
>
> B. Interconnecting cable between FID's and TU's shall be 44-pair,
> minimum 20-gage (7 X 30) stranded tinned copper, with twisted pair
> configuration, aluminum mylar shield with drain wire over each pair,
> and vinyl jacket overall. Cable shall conform to the following color
> code.
>
> Pair #1 White/Black/Sh Pair #23 Orange/Red/Sh
>
> Pair #2 Red/Black/Sh Pair #24 Blue/Red/Sh
>
> Pair #3 Green/Black/Sh Pair #25 Brown/Red/Sh
>
> Pair #4 Orange/Black/Sh Pair #26 Gray/Red/Sh
>
> Pair #5 Blue/Black/Sh Pair #27 Yellow/Red/Sh
>
> Pair #6 Brown/Black/Sh Pair #28 Purple/Red/Sh
>
> Pair #7 Gray/Black/Sh Pair #29 Tan/Red/Sh
>
> Pair #8 Yellow/Black/Sh Pair #30 Pink/Red/Sh
>
> Pair #9 Purple/Black/Sh Pair #31 Orange/Green/Sh
>
> Pair #10 Tan/Black/Sh Pair #32 Blue/Green/Sh
>
> Pair #11 Pink/Black/Sh Pair #33 Brown/Green/Sh
>
> Pair #12 Red/White/Sh Pair #34 Gray/Green/Sh
>
> Pair #13 Green/White/Sh Pair #35 Yellow/Green/Sh
>
> Pair #14 Orange/White/Sh Pair #36 Purple/Green/Sh
>
> Pair #15 Blue/White/Sh Pair #37 Tan/Green/Sh
>
> Pair #16 Brown/White/Sh Pair #38 Pink/Green/Sh
>
> Pair #17 Gray/White/Sh Pair #39 Blue/Orange/Sh
>
> Pair #18 Yellow/White/Sh Pair #40 Brown/Orange/Sh
>
> Pair #19 Purple/White/Sh Pair #41 Gray/Orange/Sh
>
> Pair #20 Tan/White/Sh Pair #42 Yellow/Orange/Sh
>
> Pair #21 Pink/White/Sh Pair #43 Purple/Orange/Sh
>
> Pair #22 Green/Red/Sh Pair #44 Tan/Orange/Sh

2.10 LABELING MATERIALS

> A. Labels for sensors and control devices shall be typed on 2-1/4 X
> 15/16 inch mylar adhesive labels, silver background with blue border;
> Seaton Name Plate Company Part #CPT-100 or equal.
>
> B. Wire labels shall be heat-shrink type with legend printed
> electronically or typographically; W.H. Brady, Inc., Products Division
> Part #HCPS 1.9-2508W-B321 or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

> A. Provide DDC control/UCS systems to operate mechanical systems in
> accordance with the sequences of control indicated on the drawings.
>
> B. Where existing mechanical systems are to be demolished, UCS
> hardware shall be removed and maintained in good condition. If
> appropriate, it may be re-used in the new installation. If not, it
> shall be turned over to the Government for return to inventory.
>
> C. Electronic devices stored in unheated or open areas during
> construction shall be tightly sealed and packed with a moisture
> absorbing desiccant material.
>
> D. Damper actuator linkages shall not "bridge" flexible duct
> connectors.

3.02 CONTROL AND POWER WIRING

> A. All work shall comply with applicable requirements of the NEC and
> Division 16 of these specifications.
>
> B. All wiring shall be installed in EMT conduit, except that
> plenum-rated cable may be used in low voltage runs in concealed, but
> accessible, ceiling and raised floor areas.
>
> C. A.C. power wiring shall not be run in the same conduit with low
> voltage D.C. signal wiring.
>
> D. Wiring for sensors and other field devices shall not be spliced.
>
> E. Provide a power disconnect switch for each electronic card used in
> the control system, including all application-specific controller
> cards.
>
> F. Provide power for combination temperature/humidity sensors from the
> nearest available 110-volt panelboard. Power shall be provided by a
> dedicated circuit, with the breaker labeled accordingly.
>
> G. Wiring terminations in FID's and TU's shall be made with
> crimped-on, insulated, open ended spade lugs.

3.03 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION

> A. Each wire pair shall be labeled at FID and TU terminations. Labels
> shall bear the Infoscan point name for the pair.
>
> B. Each sensor and each control device shall be labeled with the
> Infoscan database point name that identifies it.

3.04 UCS DATABASE UPDATING

> Unless otherwise noted, all updating of the UCS central computer
> database to incorporate new data points, software programming, and
> graphic displays will be performed by UCS personnel.

3.05 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

> At the completion of installation, the Contractor, in conjunction with
> UCS personnel, shall perform a point by point checkout of the new
> systems. All deficiencies shall be corrected to provide a complete and
> operational system.
>
> END OF SECTION

SECTION 15950

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> This section applies to all testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) of
> HVAC systems.

1.02 STANDARDS

> A. TAB work shall be performed in accordance with the following
> reference standards.
>
> 1\. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC), \"AABC National
> Standards.\"
>
> 2\. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
> Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE), \"1995 HVAC Applications Handbook\", Chapter
> 34; \"Testing, Adjusting and Balancing\".
>
> 3\. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), \"NEBB Procedural
> Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental
> Systems.\"
>
> 4\. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association,
> Inc. (SMACNA), \"HVAC Systems -Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.\"
>
> 5\. SMACNA, \"HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.\"

1.03 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

> If noted on the drawings, the work shall be performed by an
> independent firm specializing in TAB work and certified by AABC or
> NEBB. All work performed by the TAB Contractor shall be under the
> direct field supervision of a certified test and balance technician,
> unless otherwise noted.

1.04 CALIBRATION OF INSTRUMENTS

> All instruments used for testing and balancing shall have been
> calibrated within 6 months, and shall be checked for accuracy prior to
> start of work. The Government reserves the right to require
> recalibration of any, or all, instruments in accordance with the
> frequency recommended by the manufacturer, or when reasonable doubt of
> accuracy exists.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

> A. If the requirements of paragraph 1.03 are noted on the drawings,
> provide the following submittals.
>
> 1\. Submit a copy of the firm\'s AABC or NEBB certificate to show
> compliance with paragraph 1.03.
>
> 2\. Submit a list of project experience within the past three years,
> and provide brief descriptions of system types.
>
> 3\. Submit a list of personnel, with descriptions of TAB education,
> certification, and experience.
>
> 4\. Submit the TAB procedures proposed to be used for each system, and
> the intended order of TAB work.
>
> B If required by the Schedule of Submittals, the TAB field supervisor
> shall review the drawings and specifications and submit a Plan Review
> Report (SD-09). Report shall contain design changes recommended for
> the proper testing, adjusting and balancing of all systems.
> Recommendations might include piping or ductwork modifications, and
> addition or relocation of dampers, balancing valves, P/T test ports,
> flow measuring devices, gages, and access doors.
>
> C. If required by the Schedule of Submittals, the TAB field supervisor
> shall submit a Preliminary TAB Report (SD-09). The report shall
> include single line diagrams of all air systems and piping systems,
> data reporting forms for all systems and equipment, and a list of all
> TAB instrumentation with scale ranges and dates of latest calibration.
> Diagrams and data reporting forms shall include design values and
> other data to the extent possible.
>
> D. Submit a Final TAB Report (SD-12) as described below.
>
> 1\. Provide a cover letter signed by the TAB field supervisor. The
> cover letter shall clearly and specifically note any unresolved
> deficiencies. Data shall be reported on AABC, NEBB or SMACNA report
> forms.
>
> 2\. Provide a complete list of instruments used. Describe instruments,
> applications and dates of latest calibration. Instrument descriptions
> shall include manufacturer, model and serial number.
>
> 3\. If required by the Schedule of Submittals, provide schematic
> diagrams of all duct systems. Diagrams shall include trunk and branch
> ducts with sizes, design air flows and velocities, fans, coils,
> filters, control dampers, manual volume dampers, fire dampers, smoke
> dampers, louvers, pitot traverse locations, flow measuring stations,
> duct heaters, air terminal units, and air outlets. Air terminal units
> shall be labeled with inlet sizes, design air flows and ID numbers.
> Air outlets shall be labeled with design air flows and ID numbers.
>
> 4\. If required by the Schedule of Submittals, provide schematic
> diagrams of all HVAC piping systems. Diagrams shall include main and
> branch piping with sizes, design flows, pumps, strainers, balancing
> valves, coils, heat exchangers and flow measuring devices.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NONE)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

> A. Perform all TAB work in accordance with the practices, methods and
> standards referenced. Final flow rates shall be adjusted to within +/-
> 10 percent of design flow rates unless noted otherwise.
>
> B. Inspect systems to verify correct installation and proper operation
> of all balancing devices. Verify access to all balancing devices.
> Report all deficiencies to the Government Inspector before balancing
> systems.
>
> C. Except as otherwise specified, do not proceed with TAB work until
> all systems have been cleaned, flushed, lubricated, and made fully
> operable. TAB work shall not begin until initial equipment startup and
> checkout have been successfully completed.
>
> D. All testing shall be witnessed by the Government Inspector. All
> test reports shall be signed by the Government Inspector.

3.02 AIR SYSTEMS

> A. General Requirements
>
> 1\. Air systems shall be balanced with all doors in the conditioned
> area closed.
>
> 2\. After final balancing of air systems, tighten set screws on all
> manual balancing dampers and permanently mark settings.
>
> B. Fans
>
> 1\. Verify correct direction of rotation for all three phase fan
> motors.
>
> 2\. Adjust rpm of fans to provide the design airflow. Measure and
> record the rpm of fans and fan motors. Measure and record the static
> pressure at the inlet and outlet of each fan.
>
> 3\. Measure and record the voltage and amp draw on each phase of all
> fan motors.
>
> 4\. Record nameplate data for each fan and fan motor.
>
> C. Heating and Cooling Coils
>
> 1\. Inspect air system coils to establish that finned surfaces are
> clean and straight.
>
> 2\. Measure and record the static pressure upstream and downstream of
> each coil. Record the number of rows and fins per inch.
>
> 3\. Measure and record the airflow through each coil. Measure the
> entering and leaving dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures of all cooling
> coils. Measure the entering and leaving dry bulb temperatures of all
> heating coils.
>
> D. Filters
>
> 1\. Inspect all air filters, verify that all required air filters are
> installed, clean, and intact.
>
> 2\. Measure and record the static pressure upstream and down-stream of
> each bank of filters.
>
> E. Duct Systems
>
> 1\. Total supply and outdoor airflows for air systems handling 3,000
> CFM or greater shall be balanced to within five percent of design
> values.
>
> 2\. Air systems with economizer cycles shall be balanced at both
> minimum outdoor air and 100 percent outdoor air conditions.
>
> 3\. All ductwork constructed to 4\" w.g. static pressure class and
> higher shall be tested for leakage. Ductwork constructed to a lower
> pressure class shall be tested only if specifically noted on the
> drawings. Test leakage in accordance with referenced SMACNA standards.
> Total leakage from any air system shall not exceed 2 percent of the
> total design airflow in that air system. Ductwork failing the test
> shall be sealed and retested until a successful test is completed.
>
> 4\. Provide static pressure profiles of all duct systems.
>
> F. Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers
>
> 1\. Test operation of all fire dampers. Remove access doors and
> fusible links. Verify that fire dampers close smoothly and completely.
> Reset the fusible links and close access doors.
>
> 2\. Test operation of all smoke dampers. If possible, smoke damper
> testing should be performed in conjunction with testing of the fire
> alarm system. Remove access doors and activate smoke dampers. Verify
> that smoke dampers close smoothly, quickly, and completely. Reset, and
> verify that smoke dampers open completely. Close access doors.
>
> G. Flow Measuring Stations
>
> 1\. Conduct a pitot tube traverse at each flow measuring station.
> Calculate and record the airflow.
>
> 2\. Measure and record the pressure signals at the high and low
> pressure connections of each flow measuring station. Calculate and
> record the velocity pressures and airflows.
>
> H. Air Terminals
>
> 1\. Adjust air outlets to provide air distribution patterns and throws
> required.
>
> 2\. With all air outlet dampers fully open, airflows to outlets shall
> be balanced to within 20 percent of design using only dampers in trunk
> ducts and at branch duct take-offs. Outlets shall then be balanced to
> within 10 percent of design airflow using outlet dampers. Where
> dampers are not provided at outlets, outlets shall be balanced with
> dampers at branch duct take-offs.
>
> I. Fume Hoods
>
> 1\. Balance fume hoods to provide a minimum average face velocity of
> 100 feet per minute (fpm) unless otherwise noted. Velocity at any
> point shall not be less than 90 fpm nor greater than 120 fpm.
>
> 2\. Fume hood face velocities shall be measured with a hot wire
> anemometer supported by a rigid stand. Points of measurement shall be
> evenly spaced, a maximum of 6 inches on center, and a maximum of 3
> inches from the edge of the sash opening. Locations of each point of
> measurement shall be diagrammed, dimensioned, and numbered. The
> diagram shall include the dimensions of the sash opening. Provide a
> numbered table of velocity measurements to indicate location of each
> measurement.
>
> 3\. Fume hood face velocities shall be measured and recorded with sash
> openings of 12 inches and 100 percent.
>
> 4\. Measure and record the static pressure at the fume hood duct
> connection with sash openings of 12 inches and 100 percent.

3.03 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

> A. General Requirements
>
> 1\. After final balancing of hydronic systems, adjust and tighten set
> screws, memory stops, etc. of all balancing valves and permanently
> mark the setting.
>
> 2\. Measure and record the concentration of glycol in systems with
> water/glycol mixtures. Note percent by volume or percent by weight.
>
> B. Pumps
>
> 1\. Verify correct direction of rotation for each three phase pump.
>
> 2\. Measure, balance, and record flow through pumps. Measure flow with
> calibrated flow measurement devices that have been installed per
> manufacturer\'s instructions. [Pump curves shall not be used to
> measure flow]{.underline}.
>
> 3\. Measure and record the voltage and amp draw on each phase of all
> pump motors.
>
> 4\. Record the nameplate data for each pump and pump motor.
>
> C. Strainers and Filters
>
> 1\. Confirm that all strainers, pump suction diffusers, and other
> hydronic filters have been removed, cleaned, and visually inspected
> immediately before balancing of any hydronic system.
>
> 2\. After completion of hydronic TAB work, verify that disposable
> start-up strainers have been removed from all pump suction diffusers.
>
> D. Coils
>
> 1\. Vent air from coils. Measure, balance, and record flows through
> coils. Measure flow with calibrated flow measurement devices. [Coil or
> control valve pressure drops shall not be used to measure
> flow]{.underline}.
>
> 2\. Measure and record the coil pressure drop.
>
> 3\. Measure and record entering and leaving fluid temperatures.
>
> E. Piping Systems
>
> 1\. Hydronic systems shall be balanced by direct flow measurement with
> factory calibrated balancing devices. [Hydronic systems shall not be
> balanced by temperature difference or head loss at coils and other
> heat exchangers]{.underline}.
>
> 2\. Verify that make-up water pressure regulators are set for a
> minimum pressure of 12 PSIG above the system static head.
>
> 3\. Verify that all high points of piping systems are equipped with
> air vents. Verify that valves at automatic air vents are open. Operate
> each manual air vent before balancing hydronic systems.
>
> 4\. Verify the correct water level in plain steel type expansion
> tanks. Vent excess air or drain excess water as required.
>
> 5\. Verify the correct air pressure in bladder type expansion tanks.
> Increase or decrease pressure as required.
>
> 6\. Verify that all check valves, control valves, and hydronic
> specialties are properly oriented for direction of flow.
>
> F. Chillers
>
> 1\. Vent air from evaporators and condensers of all chillers. Measure,
> balance, and record flows through evaporators and condensers. Measure
> flow with calibrated flow measurement devices. [Evaporator and
> condenser pressure drops shall not be used to measure
> flow]{.underline}.
>
> 2\. Measure and record water pressure drops of all evaporators and
> condensers.
>
> 3\. Measure and record entering and leaving fluid temperatures at
> evaporators and condensers.
>
> 4\. Measure and record the voltage and amp draw on each phase at full
> load. Record the nameplate data.
>
> G. Cooling Towers
>
> 1\. Balance flow to each cell of towers with multiple cells. Measure
> and record entering and leaving water temperatures.
>
> 2\. Verify correct operation of water level controls on cooling towers
> and evaporative condensers.
>
> 3\. Measure and record voltage and amp draw on each phase of all
> cooling tower fan motors. Record fan motor nameplate data.

3.04 STEAM SYSTEMS

> A. Test the operation of all steam pressure reducing valves. Record
> valve tag number (if any), valve size, and inlet and outlet pressures.
>
> B. Test steam coils for proper draining of condensate. Measure and
> record inlet and outlet piping surface temperatures to verify that
> coils are not waterlogged. Record steam coil number or location.
>
> C. Test the operation of all steam traps. Measure and record inlet and
> outlet piping surface temperatures at each trap. Record trap type,
> size, and tag number (if any).
>
> D. Test the operation of condensate return pumps. Test duplex pump
> alternating controls. Verify correct direction of rotation for all
> pumps. Measure and record voltage and amp draw on each phase of all
> pump motors. Record nameplate data for each pump and motor.

3.05 REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS

> A. Measure and record voltage and amp draw on each phase of all
> compressor and condenser fan motors. Record compressor and condenser
> fan motor nameplate data.
>
> B. Verify that compressor crankcase heaters are operating.

3.06 CONTROL SYSTEMS

> A. Test the operation of all high and low limit temperature switches
> and duct mounted smoke detectors.
>
> B . Test the calibration of at least 10 percent, and a minimum of
> three, pneumatic thermostats. Record controlled temperature, setpoint,
> and output pressure of each device.
>
> C. Test the operation of air handling unit economizer cycle controls.
> Cycle the controls and check the control dampers for binding and loose
> linkages.
>
> D. Verify that outdoor air dampers close tightly when air handling
> systems are shut down by any control device.
>
> E. Verify the correct operation and application of direct acting and
> reverse acting thermostats.
>
> F. Verify proper operation of all interlocks between mechanical
> equipment.

3.07 TAB VERIFICATION

> A. If noted on the drawings, data reported in the Final TAB Report
> shall be re-checked. Data to be re-checked will not exceed 10 percent
> of measurements reported in the Final TAB Report.
>
> B. If 20 percent of re-checked values differ from reported values by 5
> percent or more, an additional 10 percent of all measurements shall be
> re-checked at no additional expense to the Government.
>
> C. If 20 percent of the additional re-checked values differ from
> reported values by 5 percent or more, then systems shall be rebalanced
> as directed by the A/E, at no additional expense to the Government.
>
> D. All TAB verification work shall be witnessed by the Government
> Inspector.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16050

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> A. This section applies to basic requirements of electrical work
> included in the Contract. The contract shall include furnishing of all
> labor, equipment and materials necessary to install and make ready for
> use a complete Electrical System as indicated on the drawings and/or
> specified herein.

B. All provisions of the contract apply to work specified in each
section of Division 16.

C. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including general and
supplementary conditions of the contract shall apply to work of this
section.

> D. All work shall be done by electricans properly qualified to perform
> the work required.
>
> E. All work shall be done in accordance with manufacturer\'s
> instructions and recommendations, except where the drawings,or these
> specifications, specifically indicate other instructions.

1.02 ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS

> A. The electrical drawings are intended to be diagrammatic and are
> based on one manufacturer\'s equipment. They are not intended to show
> every detail in its exact location, the exact dimensions, or all the
> details of the equipment. The Contractor shall verify the actual
> dimensions of the equipment proposed to assure himself that the
> equipment will fit in the available space.

B. Installation shall be within the limitations imposed by
architectural, structural, and mechanical requirements, with adequate
space for maintenance.

> C. The Contractor shall field coordinate the planned location of all
> equipment before roughing-in as the final location may differ from
> that shown on the drawings. Device outlets, panelboards, disconnect
> switches, fixtures, etc. improperly placed because of failure to
> obtain this information shall be relocated and reinstalled at no
> additional cost to the Government.
>
> D. Mounting heights, as shown on the drawings shall be from finished
> floor to center line of device boxes unless noted otherwise.
>
> E. The Government reserves the right to change without additional
> cost, the location of any outlet shown on the drawings provided such
> change in location is not greater than 6\' - 0\" and is ordered
> changed before the rough-in work is installed.
>
> F. Riser and other diagrams are schematic only and do not necessarily
> show the physical arrangment of the equipment. They shall not be used
> to obtain quantities or lineal runs of conduits.
>
> G. All working measurements and site conditions shall be taken from
> the building, checked with those shown on the drawings and if they are
> found to vary from the latter, Contractor shall report to the Engineer
> for adjustment before he proceeds with his work. Should he fail to
> comply with the above instructions, he shall alter his work at his own
> expense as directed by the Engineer. No extra payments will be allowed
> where obstruction in the work of other trades or work in this
> contract, requires revisions to electrical work.
>
> H. The drawings and specifications are complimentary and everything
> called for in either is as binding as if called for in both.

1.03 JOB-SITE COPY OF DOCUMENTS

> A. Maintain at the site, one copy of all drawings, specifications,
> addenda, approved shop drawings, change orders and other
> modifications, in good order.
>
> B. As work progresses, maintain a complete and separate set of
> blackline prints of contract drawings to record work completed and
> changes from contract documents.
>
> C. At completion of work, Contractor shall furnish to the Government
> marked prints showing an accurate record of as-built condition for
> acceptance. The Contractor shall accurately locate and dimension all
> raceways for future use.

1.04 CODES AND PERMITS

> A. All work shall comply with the current requirements of all
> applicable codes, rules and regulations in effect at the site of the
> work at the date of the contract.
>
> B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to fully inform
> himself of all such requirements.

C. If any conflict occurs between these rules and the drawings and
specifications, the rules are to govern. This does not relieve the
Contractor of complying with any requirements of the drawings and
specifications which are in excess of the codes and regulations.

1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS

> A. In order to establish a basis of quality, certain materials or
> articles are specified by designating one or more manufacturer\'s
> names, brands, or numbers. It is not the intent of these
> specifications to exclude other materials or articles that are equal
> to those specified. If the Contractor wishes to utilize materials,
> equipment, or processes other than those specified, he must obtain
> written approval from the Engineer.

B. All material substitutions are subject to final review for compliance
with the specifications and shall be equal to the standards of those
specified.

> C. The Contractor shall be responsible for checking equipment
> dimensions of proposed substitute equipment and be responsible for its
> fitting the spaces allowed.
>
> D. The cost of any redesig caused by a substitution shall be borne by
> the Contractor.

1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCTS DATA

> A. The burden of proof of equality for substitute equipment or
> materials and of specifications compliance, rests with the Contractor.
>
> B. Before ordering any materials or equipment, the Contractor shall
> submit data for [all]{.underline} materials and equipment he proposes
> to use and furnish.

C. The submittal data shall be as per the Schedule of Submittals.

> D. Where indicated in these specifications, submittals shall include a
> copy of the appropriate specifications with each sub-paragraph noted
> with the comment, \"compliance,\" \"deviation,\" or \"alternate.\"

By noting the term \"compliance,\" it shall be understood that the
Contractor is in full compliance with the item specified and will
provide exactly the same with no deviations.

By noting the term \"deviation,\" it shall be understood that the
Contractor prefers to provide a different component in lieu of that
specified. Contractor shall indicate all deviations.

> By noting the \"alternate,\" it shall be understood that the
> Contractorproposes to provide the same operating function but prefers
> to do it in a different manner. Any alternate shall be fully described
> as to what the Contractor proposes to provide.
>
> E. When approved, such submittal shall be an addition to these
> specifications and shall be in equal force in that no variation shall
> be permitted except with the written approval of the Engineer. The
> Engineer\'s approval of equipment shall not relieve the Contractor\'s
> responsibility for errors, as said approval is only general and is not
> intended to serve as a check and does not relieve the Contractor from
> furnishing materials and performing the work as required by the
> contract documents.

F. Contractor shall maintain, in neatly indexed form, a notebook
containing approved submittal data at the jobsite. Data shall be
available for use during complete construction period.

1.07 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION

A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work of all trades doing work on
the building.

> B. The Contractor will not be paid for cutting, patching, wiring,
> finishing or any other work required for relocation of work installed
> due to interferences between work of the various trades.

1.08 EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. Existing equipment, conduit runs and wiring are shown only as a
guide, and may vary from that shown on the drawings.

1.09 INSPECTION

A. All work and materials shall be subject to the inspection of the
Government Inspector or Engineer at any and all times.

B. The Contractor shall give the inspectors all necessary assistance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

> A. All materials and equipment used on this project shall be new, in
> an unused condition when delivered to the site, and be approved for
> use by the Engineer.
>
> B. All equipment and materials are required to bear the U.L. label. If
> UL approved equipment is not available, equipment shall be used which
> has ,been manufactured to recognized standards such as those of the
> National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). If neither UL
> or other recognized equipment is not available, the equipment used
> must be approved by the Engineer.

2.02 GOVERNMENT FURNISHED EQUIPMENT (GFE)

A. Receive and install the government-furnished equipment, if any, in
accordance with the contract drawings, specifications and
manufacturer\'s installation manual.

> B. Connect all designated equipment, motor and control equipment
> furnished by the Government requiring an electric power supply. The
> Contractor shall provide all interconnecting control and annunciation
> circuits as indicated on the equipment vendor shop drawings and
> installation instructions.
>
> C. Government-furnished equipment will be delivered to the Contractor
> at proper time as per construction schedule. Installation drawings
> shall be provided with the equipment, but Contractor shall arrange
> with the manufacturer of the government furnished equipment for
> installation guidance, start-up and instructional services. These are
> required to validate the manufacturer\'s warranty.

2.03 APPROVED EQUAL CLAUSE

> A. Where one or more products are named in the Specifications and the
> phrases \"or equal,\" or \"approved equal,\" or their equivalent,
> accompanies the listing, requests for approval of substitute products
> will be considered after award of contract only. Requests shall be
> made in writing including all information, such as delivery dates and
> descriptive data, and all samples required by the Engineer for such
> substitution. Decisions of the Engineer as to whether a product
> proposed for substitution is fully equal will be final and not subject
> to arbitration.
>
> B. When any specified item or \"approved equal\" item of equipment or
> material is submitted which requires changes or additions to the
> designed structure, finish or plumbing, heating, ventilating and/or
> electrical services because its requirements exceed or are different
> from those shown on the Contract Documents, such changes shall be made
> at no additional cost, and shall be itemized in writing and attached
> to the submittal. No changes shall be made without approval in writing
> from the Engineer. The requirements of this paragraph apply also when
> no manufacturer is named and when more than one manufacturer is listed
> as acceptable.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.01 SITE INSPECTION

> A. Before making his bid, the bidder [must]{.underline} examine the
> site of work and ascertain for himself, all physical conditions in
> relation to the work.

3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. The Contractor shall do all cutting,drilling and patching that must
be done in order that his work is properly installed. All work of this
nature is subject to the following conditions.

> 1\. All disturbed construction or finish must be repared to original
> condition.
>
> 2\. Structural work shall not be disturbed, except on approval of the
> Engineer.
>
> 3\. In general, cutting through floors, walls and partitions is to be
> avoided and only where absolutely necessary will be permitted. When
> necessary, it shall be done by the Contractor in a careful manner and
> the opening filled around conduits as directed by the Engineer. Holes
> through concrete or masonry shall be made only with a core drill.

4\. All masonry or other finish damaged or cut into during the
installation of this work shall be replaced or repaired with materials
of like kind and quality as the original materials by skilled labor
experienced in that particular building trade.

3.03 PAINTING

A. Paint all exposed conduits, raceways, multi-outlet assemblies and
panelboard trim as directed by the Engineer.

B. Painting shall be done by a qualified licensed Painting Contractor.

C. Conduits, raceways, multi-outlet assemblies and panelboards in
electrical equipment rooms, electrical closets and other \"authorized
personnel only\" areas shall not be considered as exposed for the
purpose of the above paragraph A.

3.04 TESTS

> A. All work shall be complete in every respect, tested and approved
> satisfactory to the Engineer with the regulations governing the
> installation.
>
> B. The Contractor shall be responsible for making any and all tests
> necessary to insure against concealment of defective materials and/or
> workmanship.
>
> C. The Contractor shall determine, by test, that all wiring and
> connections are free from shorts between wires and shorts to ground
> and that all circuits have proper continuity.

D. All defects shall be corrected and retested before installation of
fixtures and equipment.

E. All miscellaneous systems shall be tested for conformity to
specifications and for proper operation.

F. The Contractor shall test all three phase wiring systems for proper
phase rotation.

> G. The Contractor shall provide all equipment, materials and labor for
> the tests and shall make all tests determined necessary by the
> Engineer.

H. The Contractor shall provide a resistance test of the ground source
and all cables and bus work to ground.

> I. All feeders and branch circuits rated below 600 volts shall be
> megger- tested between phase conductors and between phase conductors
> and ground, using a 1000 V megger. Tests shall be made upon completion
> of all connections and splices and insertion of all overcurrent
> devices. Tests shall indicate freedom from short circuits and ground.
>
> J. All circuits, which under any circumstances could be paralleled,
> shall be tested for proposed phasing using hot-phasing or other
> approved techniques.
>
> K. The full load running current of all motors shall be recorded.
> Overload heaters shall be inspected to verify that they are properly
> sized.

L. Full load current of all feeders serving single phase loads shall be
measured. If necessary, branch circuits shall be reconnected to achieve
a good load balance on each phase.

M. Proper operation of all control and alarm circuits shall be
demonstrated.

> N. All protective devices shall be set, tested and calibrated in
> accordance with the approved coordination study.

3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION

A. The Contractor shall place the entire electrical system, including
lighting, power, and miscellaneous systems in initial operation.

> B. The Contractor shall demonstrate, by actual usage, the proper
> operation of each and all portions of the various systems to the User
> or his appointed representative. Follow-up instructional periods shall
> be provided as required in individual system\'s specifications.

3.06 RECORDS AND OPERATIONS DATA

A. Prepare one set of as-built drawings specified in 1.03.C.

> B. Record the following information for each motor and equipment item
> [connected]{.underline} under this contract:

1\. Nameplate data (volts, amps, phase).

> 2\. Actual current drawn by each equipment item and each motor larger
> than 1/3 HP when operating at or near normal load.

3\. Rating and catalog number of each thermal overload device finally
selected for each motor over 1/3 HP.

> C. Submit copies of the above data to the Engineer before final
> inspection is requested.

3.07 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

> A. Following completion of the Contract and prior to the instructional
> period and final acceptance of the Contract, the Contractor shall
> prepare Operation and Maintenance Manuals describing the electrical
> systems and equipment supplied by him, including the
> government-furnished equipment, if any.
>
> B. Data included in the manuals shall include, but not be limited to,
> the following:
>
> 1\. Copies of all data submitted under "Shop Drawings and Product
> Data\".
>
> 2\. Copies of all data required by \"Records and Operational Data\".

3, Test results for all testing conducted.

> C. Manuals shall be of the loose-leaf type, in heavy-duty binders with
> a master index and plastic tab sheets indicating system or equipment
> described.

D. Manuals shall be submitted to the A/E prior to the project acceptance
for his approval.

3.08 GUARANTEE

> A. The Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of all
> material and equipment installed under the Contract, except as stated
> herein, and shall repair or replace, to the satisfaction of the
> Engineer, any defective material, equipment or workmanship, which may
> become evident within one year from the date of final acceptance. This
> shall include fluorescent and high-intensity lamps. Exception:
> Incandescent lamps shall be guaranteed for a period of two months from
> the above date.

3.09 ELECTRICAL POWER SHUTDOWN

> A. The Contractor shall plan work in such a way that shut-down of
> electrical power is kept to a minimum. The Contractor shall coordinate
> with the Government Inspector for shut-down of electrical power.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16060

GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> This section applies to low-voltage equipment grounding as indicated
> on the drawings and specified herein.

1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS

> Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and
> standards, except where more stringent requirements are specified:

[National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard:]{.underline}

70-96 National Electrical Code (NEC)

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Provide only grounding products of the firms regularly engaged in the
manufacture of grounding and bonding products (of types and ratings
required) and ancillary grounding materials (including stranded cable,
copper braid and bus, grounding electrodes and plate electrodes) and
bonding jumpers, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 5 years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING

> A. The Contractor shall provide electrical grounding systems and
> equipment as shown on the drawings including all materials, cable,
> connectors, welds, terminals, rods, electrodes, and bonding jumpers
> required for a complete system.
>
> B. Grounding cable and bonding jumpers shall be copper unless
> otherwise noted.
>
> C. Grounding cable sizes for service entrance and building steel
> grounding shall be minimum size as shown on the drawings.

D. Grounding rods shall be 3/4" x 10' in length unless otherwise noted.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GROUNDING

> A. Provide a complete equipment safety grounding system ("green wire"
> ground) for the entire electrical system as required by Article 250 of
> the NEC, and as specified herein.
>
> B. Provide additional grounding as indicated on the drawings for an
> equi-potential ground plane system (ground grid) for the raised floor
> areas.

C. All grounding wire, lugs, jumpers and bus shall be copper.

> D. All feeder and branch circuits shall contain an equipment ground
> wire. No flexible metal conduit of any kind or length shall be used as
> the equipment grounding conductor.
>
> E. Equipment grounding conductors and straps shall be sized in
> accordance with the NEC. Refer to feeder schedules for ground wire
> requirements which may exceed the NEC. All equipment grounding
> conductors shall be provided with green insulation equivalent to the
> insulation on the associated phase conductors.
>
> F. The equipment grounding system shall be installed so all metallic
> structures, enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes,
> cabinets, machine frames and portable equipment frames operate
> continuously at ground potential and provide a low impedance path for
> ground fault currents. The system shall comply with the National
> Electrical Code.
>
> G. Where parallel feeders are used, each raceway shall contain an
> equipment ground conductor sized in accordance with NEC 250-95 for the
> combined parallel circuit amperage.

H. Grounding conductors shall be continuous and no splicing shall be
allowed.

> I. Receptacles shall be bonded to their outlet boxes with #12 copper
> straps.

[EXCEPTIONS]{.underline}

> 1\. Isolated ground receptacles shall have a dedicated equipment
> grounding conductor connected at the point where the grounded circuit
> conductor is connected to the grounding electrode.

2\. Straps may be omitted if self-grounding devices are utilized.

> J. Bond all separately derived power sources in accordance with NEC
> 250-26. In addition, equipment within a computer room shall be bonded
> to the equi-potential ground plane.
>
> K. For computer equipment, installed on raised floor, provide flexible
> grounding jumpers between each piece of computer equipment and the
> raised floor. Provide two grounding jumpers per cabinet, attached at
> opposite corners. If several cabinets are bolted together in a string,
> only the jumper at each end of the string is required. Solidly bolt
> each end of the grounding jumper. At the computer cabinet end, bolt to
> a metal frame member. At the raised floor end, bolt to a stringer or
> pedestal. Do not use stringer bolt for attaching grounding jumper.
> Grounding jumper shall be #8 stranded copper.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16070

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

This section applies to hangers and supports for installation of
electrical raceways, boxes, lighting fixtures etc. from the building
structure as required by the National Electrical Code and as shown on
the drawings.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

> A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and
> installation of the electrical supporting devices.
>
> B. ANSI/NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of
> ANSI/NEMA Std. Pub No. FB1, "Fittings and Supports for Conduit and
> Cable Assemblies".
>
> C. NECA Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Contractors
> Association's Standard of Installation: pertaining to anchors,
> fasteners, hangers, supports, and equipment mounting.
>
> D. UL Compliance: Provide electrical, components which are UL-listed
> and labeled.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PROHIBITED MATERIALS

A. Nails, wires, perforated tape or plumber's tape are unacceptable for
support or securing of conduits.

> B. Power actuated "Stud Gun" driven anchors are unacceptable unless
> specifically allowed by the engineer.

2.02 MATERIALS

> A. General: Provide supporting devices; complying with manufacturer's
> standard materials, design and construction in accordance with
> published product and as herein specified. Where more than one type of
> device meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option.
>
> B. Galvanized steel channels and associated support rods shall be
> selected to accommodate weight of associated raceway and wire.
> Manufacturers shall be of the following:
>
> 1\. B-Line Systems, Incorporated

2\. Elcen Metal Products Company

3\. Greenfield Manufacturer Company, Incorporated

4\. Midland-Ross Corporation

5\. Power-Strut Division; Van Huffel Tube Corporation

6\. Unistrut Division; GTE Products Corporation

7\. Or approved equal.

> C. Lighting fixture supports shall be as recommended by the
> manufacturer. T-bar type fixtures shall be supported from standard
> T-bar accessories as manufactured by the A&G Co. or equivalent.
>
> D. Anchors of adequate size to support the load, and of a type
> compatible with the construction method encountered shall be provided.
> Anchors shall be expansion or toggle bolt type, and be supplied by one
> of the following manufacturers:

1\. Ackerman Johnson Fastening System Incorporated

2\. Elcen Metal Products Company

3\. Ideal Industries, Incorporated

4\. McGraw Edison Company

5\. Rawlplug Company, Incorporated

6\. Star Expansion Company

7\. Or approved equal

2.04 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:

> 1\. Sheet-Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube
> closed with snaplock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded
> longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the following gages: 3 inches and
> smaller, 20 gage; 4 inches to 6 inches, 16 gage; over 6 inches, 14
> gage.
>
> 2\. Steel-Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe;
> remove burrs.
>
> 3\. Iron-Pipe: Fabricate from cast-iron or ductile-iron pipe; remove
> burrs.
>
> 4\. Plastic-Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 and Schedule 40 PVC
> plastic pipe; remove burrs.
>
> B. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals from sleeves located in
> foundation walls below grade, or interior/exterior walls of one of the
> following:

1\. Lead and Oakum: Caulked between sleeve and pipe.

PART 3 EXECUCTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

> A. Install hangers, anchors, sleeves and seals as indicated, in
> accordance with manufacturer's written instruction and with recognized
> industry practices to insure supporting devices comply with
> requirements. Comply with requirements of NECA, NEC and ANSI/NEMA for
> installation of supporting devices.
>
> B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring
> work, as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices
> with other work.
>
> C. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support
> piping, properly, from building structure. Install supports within
> maximum spacings indicated by N.E.C. or on drawings.
>
> D. Individual conduits shall be secured with steel pipe straps or
> lay-in pipe hangers.
>
> E. Multiple rows of suspended conduit shall be supported from trapeze
> style hangers.
>
> F. Multiple runs of conduit on ceiling or wall surfaces shall be
> mounted on flush, or surface, steel channels.
>
> G. Ceiling support wires shall not be used for support of conduits.
>
> H. Do not support lay-in lighting fixtures from the ceiling support
> sytem. Provide separate support wires from building structure to
> lighting fixture. Lighting fixtures shall also be fastened to ceiling
> frames per N.E.C. Article 410-16(C).
>
> I. Tighten sleeve seal nuts until sealing grommets have expanded to
> form watertight seal.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16075

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> A. This section applies to identification of electrical materials and
> equipment as indicated on the drawings and other sections of this
> specification
>
> B. Types of electrical identification specified on this section
> include the following:

1\. Exposed conduit

2\. Feeder conductor identification

3\. Operational instructions and warnings

4\. Danger signs

5\. Equipment/ system identification signs

6\. Receptacles and switches

7\. Overhead luminaries

8\. Junction boxes

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General

> 1\. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard
> products of categories and types required for each application. Where
> more than single type is specified for an application, selection is
> Installer's option, but provide single selection for each application.

B. Color-Coded Conduit Markers

> 1\. General: When indicated on drawings, provide manufacturer's
> standard pre-painted, flexible semi-rigid, permanent, plastic-sheet
> conduit markers, extending 360 degrees around conduits; designed for
> attachment to conduit by adhesive, adhesive lap joint of marker,
> matching adhesive plastic tape at each end of marker, or pretensioned
> Snap-On. Except as otherwise indicated, provide lettering which
> indicates voltage of conductor(s) in conduit. Provide 8 inch minimum
> length for 2 inch and smaller conduit, 12 inch length for larger
> conduit.

A. Colors: Unless otherwise indicated or required by governing
regulation, provide orange markers with black letters.

C. Feeder Conductor Identification

Identify electrical feeder conductors at all pull boxes, splice boxes,
junction boxes, manholes, handholes, and other similar locations, for
characteristics and functions. Tags for feeders shall by Thomas and
Betts "Ty-Rap" white nylon straps. Provide Ty-Rap cable markers for
identification purposes. In normal environment conditions mark with ink.
In other than normal environment (including hazardous, wet, dust, etc.)
marking shall be done with heat stamping machine be Thomas and Betts.
Tag markings shall include: number of conductors, type of insulation,
wire gauge, starting and termination points.

D. Plasticized Tags

> 1\. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-painted or partially
> pre-painted accident-prevention and operational tags, of plasticized
> card-stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately 3-1/4"
> x 5-5/8", with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate
> pre-painted wording including large-size primary wording (as examples;
> DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE).

E. Self-Adhesive Plastic Signs

1\. General: Provide Manufacturer's standard, self-adhesive or
pressure-sensitive, pre-printed, flexible vinyl signs for operational
instruction or warnings; of sizes suitable for application areas and
adequate for visibility, with proper wording for each application (as
examples: 208V, EXHAUST FAN, RECTIFIER).

a\. Colors: Unless otherwise indicated or required by governing
regulations, provide orange signs with black lettering.

F. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs

> 1\. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate in
> sizes and thickness indicated, engraved with engraver's standard
> letter style of sizes and wording indicated, black with white core
> (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical
> fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of
> substrate.

A. Thickness: 1/16", for units up to 20 sq. inch or 8 inch length; 1/8
inch for larger units.

> B. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type
> permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate
> substrate.
>
> 2\. Wherever engraved plates are noted on the drawings, such labels
> shall be engraved directly into the metal or plastic plate, dead
> front, or other material.
>
> Engraved letters shall be 1/4 inch or 3/8 inch high, filled with black
> enamel, and read as directed.

G. Schedules:

> 1\. Provide typewritten directory for each panel, on heavy card stock,
> showing all circuit numbers.

H. Receptacles and Switches:

> Provide self-adhesive, pre-printed, flexible vinyl label for all
> receptacles and wall switches identifying its power source indicating
> panel and circuit numbers. For electrical items requiring device
> plates, such as a fan speed controller, special receptacles, light
> switches, switches for special circuits, and pilot lights, provide
> engraved device plates.

I. Overhead Luminarie:

> For positive identification of overhead luminaries, use self-sticking
> plastic color/number coded film applied to luminarie with weather
> resistant adhesive.

J. Junction Boxes:

> Where junction boxes are installed in hung ceiling spaces, the covers
> of the junction boxes shall be permanently marked with the
> identification of all circuit wiring in the box.

2.02 Lettering and Graphics

> A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations
> used in electrical identification work, with corresponding
> designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering
> and wording as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper
> identification and operation/maintenance of electrical systems and
> equipment.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General Installation Requirements

> 1\. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces
> which require finish, install identification after completion of
> painting.

2\. Regulations: Comply with governing regulations and requests of
governing authorities for identification of electrical work.

> B. Install nameplates on all Switchboards, Motor Control Centers,
> Starters, panel boards, telephone cabinets, disconnect switches, and
> miscellaneous systems junction boxes and cabinets installed under this
> contract.

C. Provide new nameplates as required for existing equipment, if any.

> D. Install plates with engraved labels at all control switches noted
> on the drawings.

E. Install bakelite nameplates at each protective device in all
switchboards showing circuit service.

F. Nameplate Mounting:

> 1\. Panelboards: Mount inside door, on dead front, above circuit
> breakers, unless panelboard is located in a utility-type room, then
> install nameplate above door on outside of panelboard.
>
> 2\. Disconnect Switches, Relays, Contractors, Time Clocks: Mount
> nameplate on outside of cabinet, near top.
>
> 3\. Control Switches: Install nameplate in location as directed near
> switch. Nameplate is required unless engraved labels are specified.

G. Install circuit directories in all panelboards, affected by this
contract.

> 1\. Panelboards: Mount in frame under plastic cover, on back side of
> door. Schedule shall show circuit service for each circuit breaker.
>
> 2\. Existing Panelboards: Revise existing schedules to reflect current
> circuit configuration. Retype on new schedules, showing new and
> existing circuits.
>
> H. Where electrical conduit is exposed in spaces with exposed
> mechanical piping which is identified by a color-coded method, apply
> color-coded identification on electrical conduit, in a manner similar
> to piping identification. Except as otherwise indicated, use orange as
> coded color for conduit.
>
> I. Apply cable/conductor identification on each cable and conductor in
> each box/enclosure/cabinet where wires of more than one circuit or
> communication/signal system are present, except where another form of
> identification (such as color-coded conductors) is provided. Match
> identification with marking system used in panelboards, shop drawings,
> contract documents, and similar previously established identification
> for project electrical work.
>
> J. Wherever required to ensure safe and efficient operation and
> maintenance of electrical systems, and electrically connected
> mechanical systems and general systems and equipment, including
> prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized
> personnel, install self-adhesive plastic signs or similar equivalent
> identifications, instruction or warnings on switches, outlets and
> other controls, devices and covers of electrical enclosures. Where
> detailed instructions or explanations are needed, provide plasticized
> tags with clearly written messages adequate for intended purposes.
>
> K. Install sign at locations indicated. Where not otherwise indicated,
> install at location for best convenience of viewing,without
> interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure to
> substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners should
> not, or cannot, penetrate the substrate.
>
> L. Warning signs shall be installed at the entrances to rooms and
> spaces in which electrical conductors or equipment are installed.
>
> END OF SECTION

SECTION 16080

ELECTRICAL TESTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

This section applies to requirements for acceptance testing and
inspection by an independent testing organization for electrical power
distribution equipment and systems as called for on the drawings or in
the equipment/system specification.

1.02 REFERENCES

The latest editions of the publication listed below form a part of this
specification to the extent referenced and have the same force and
effect as if bound into the contract documents.

A. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)

NETA ATS Acceptance Testing Specification for Electrical Power
Distribution Equipment and Systems.

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES

> A. The Contractor shall engage the services of a qualified testing
> organization to provide final inspection, testing, calibration and
> adjusting on the electrical distribution system as defined in this
> contract. The organization shall be independent of the supplier,
> producer or installer of the equipment.
>
> B. Testing, inspection and calibration shall be performed by an
> Engineering Technician, certified by a national organization, with a
> minimum of 5 years of experience in inspecting, testing and
> calibrating electrical distribution equipment, systems and devices.
> Information on the testing organization and qualifications of the
> Certified Engineering Technician shall be submitted to the engineer
> for approval prior to the start of work.
>
> C. The Contractor shall supply to the testing organization: complete
> sets of approved shop drawings, coordination study, settings of all
> adjustable devices and other information necessary for an accurate
> inspection and evaluation of the system prior to the performance of
> any tests.
>
> D. The testing organization shall submit a test procedure for each
> item of equipment to be tested on this project for approval after the
> evaluation of the system and equipment has been determined. No testing
> shall be performed until after the test procedures have been submitted
> to, and approved by, the Engineer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Appliable

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 An inspection of the installed equipment shall be performed by the
testing organization to verify that the distribution equipment
installed, and to be tested, is the equipment as denoted on the approved
shop drawings. The inspection shall check the equipment designations,
device characteristics, special installation requirements, applicable
code of requirements and other conditions which may effect the
successful, safe performance and operation of the system.

3.02 The installed equipment shall be compared to the approved shop
drawings and a report developed stating any discrepancies after the
installation.

3.03 The testing organization shall perform tests on each item of
distribution equipment contained in this contract in accordance with the
latest edition of the National Electrical Testing Association's (NETA),
Acceptance Testing Specification for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment and Systems.

3.04 Field Acceptance Testing shall be accomplished on each item of
electrical distribution equipment installed or connected to a part of
this contract. This shall include but is not limited to:

a\. All power and distribution transformers

b\. All medium voltage circuit breakers, switches and assemblies.

c\. All adjustable trip low voltage circuit breakers

d\. All metal enclosed switchgear and switchboard assemblies

> e\. All protective relays and associated current and potential
> transformers
>
> f\. All switchgear metering instrumentation devices and associated
> current and potential instrumentation transformers

g\. All interconnection cables rated over 600 volts

h\. Grounding systems

i\. Ground fault systems

> j\. Automatic transfer switches and other emergency connected devices

k\. Generators

l\. Low voltage power busway

m\. UPS system

n\. Power Distribution Units

o\. Variable frequency drives

3.05 Systems shall be energized, or otherwise placed in service, only
after completion of all required tests and an evaluation of the test
results have been completed.

3.06 Each system provided in this contract, and covered by this section
of specifications, shall be function tested to ensure total system
operation. The Contractor shall verify that all systems interface
correctly with all related systems.

3.07 After the manufacturers complete their individual start-up checks,
services and testing, the Contractor shall provide a total power system
load test, if specified on drawings.

3.08 Load banks shall be provided with a minimum rating which equals or
exceeds the redundant rating of the system. The load banks shall be
capable of continuous operation in the environment where it will be
located. The load bank shall be provided with integral overcurrent and
over temperature alarms. Controls shall be provided to select load
levels of 0%, 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% of the ratings specified without
de-energizing the load bank. All cables and connectors shall be provided
to connect the load bank to the output switchboard. The contractor shall
be responsible for connecting the load bank.

3.09 Recording type test equipment shall be connected to the output of
the system during the entire load test. Three phase output voltage and
output frequency shall be monitored. Recorded test data shall indicate
all voltage and frequency deviations from nominal values. The test data
shall be summarized, certified, and provided to, the engineer at the
conclusion of the load test. All cables, sensors and accessories shall
be provided to accurately measure the specified parameters. The test
equipment shall bear valid calibration data for the test equipment to
the engineer for approval prior to the system load test.

3.10 A service representative of the manufacturer of the system shall be
present during the system load test. The representatives shall be
qualified to service the equipment and make necessary checks and
adjustments to ensure proper operation of their respective system.

3.11 The system load test shall be conducted at the direction of the
engineer.

3.12 Any failure during the system load test shall be corrected
immediately. The test procedure in progress at the time of failure shall
be restarted and successfully completed before additional tests are
conducted.

3.13 The engineer reserves the right to accept or reject test data which
does not conform to the manufacturer's data or is not obtained in
accordance with these specifications.

3.14 Provide three bound copies of certified test reports for review and
approval. Copies of the approved report shall be included in the manuals
required in Section 16050, paragraph 3.07

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16120

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

This section applies to wires and cables as indicated on the drawings
for application not more than 600 volts.

1.02 REFERENCES

The latest editions of the publications listed below form a part of this
specification to the extent referenced and have the same force and
effect as if bound into the contract documents.

A. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

> ASTM B173 Standard specification for rope-lay-stranded copper
> conductors having concentric -standard members for electrical
> conductors.
>
> ASTM B3 Standard specification for soft or annealed copper wire.

B. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

> NEMA WC5 Thermoplastic - Insulated wire and cable for transmission and
> distribution of electrical energy

C. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 70-96 National Electrical Code (NEC)

D. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, INC. (UL)

UL 1581 UL Standard for Safety-

Reference standard for electrical wires, cables, and flexible cords.

> UL 83 UL Standard for Safety- Thermoplastic-Insulated wires and cables

E. FEDERAL SPECIFICATION (FS)

J-C-30A Cables and wire, electrical

(power, fixed installation)

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WIRES AND CABLES

> A. All wires and cables shall be copper unless specifically noted
> otherwise. All wires and cables shall conform to NFPA 70, UL 1581 and
> FS J-C- 30A.
>
> B. Building Wires: Building wires for use in conduits, raceways, and
> wireways shall be single conductor, 600 volt, heat and moisture
> resistant, and suitable for use in wet and dry locations. Building
> wires shall be selected as follows:
>
> 1\. Wire size 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid Conductor with THHN,
> or THWN, insulation. Wire size 8 AWG and large shall be stranded with
> XHHW insulation.
>
> 2\. Minimum wire size shall be 12 AWG for power wiring, and 14 AWG for
> control wiring, unless noted otherwise.

C. Lighting-Fixture Wiring

> Lighting-fixture wire for outlet-box connection to
> incandescent-fixture lampholders shall be flexible seven-strand copper
> wire with insulation conforming to NFPA 70.

D. Switchboard Wire

> Switchboard wire used for instrument and control wiring on the back of
> switchboards and hinged-front instrument panels shall be single-
> conductor, 600 volt, flame and heat resistant insulated wire not
> smaller than No. 14 with a minimum temperature rating of 90 degrees C.
>
> Conductor rigidly mounted on the back of switchboards and instrument
> panels shall be solid round, soft or annealed, copper wire conforming
> to ASTM B3. Hinge connections shall be rope-lay-stranded copper
> conductors, Class H, conforming to ASTM B173. All wires shall conform
> to ASTM B 3 for soft or annealed copper wire, before stranding.

Switchboard wire shall be Type SIS with cross-linked thermosetting
polyethylene insulation.

E. Cable Tray Wire

> Power and control wire installed in cable trays shall be Type TC cable
> 600 volts, with current carrying capacity as determined by NFPA 70.
> Cable shall also comply with UL 83 and IEEE Std. 383.

F. Standard Flexible Cable

> Flexible multiconductor cable shall conform to UL 1581 for control and
> power below 600 volts, noninstrumentation type. Cable shall contain
> one (green) grounding conductor and shall utilize a thermosetting or
> thermoplastic overall jacket (Type SJ, SJO, SO, STO, etc.), as
> specified in NEMA WC 5. A white conductor shall be included for the
> power neutral or grounded current-carrying conductor. Cable conductor
> insulation shall conform to NEMA WC 5.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

> A. Wires shall be pulled in such a manner as to avoid kinking or
> abrasion to the insulation. Only approved lubricants shall be used.
> Oil or grease shall not be used to lubricate wire.
>
> B. Make sure that all couplings and conduit connectors have
> pre-insulated bushings in place before pulling wires.
>
> C. Where more than three current carring conductors are installed in a
> single raceway, the minimum wire size shall be increased to comply
> with NEC 310-16, Note. 8. Where the distance from the overcurrent
> device to the first outlet exceeds 100 feet, the minimum wire size
> shall be 10 AWG (120 volt circuits only).

D. Wiring shall be arranged as shown on the drawings. Combining of
homeruns will not be allowed except as shown.

> E. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable or rope which cannot
> damage, raceways or cables. Where pulling machines are used, use
> tension gages, do not exceed manufactureres conductor tension
> allowances.
>
> F. Install exposed cable parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or
> exposed structural members and follow surface contours, where
> possible.
>
> G. Keep conductor splices to a minimum. All circuit conductors for
> feeders shall be installed without splices.
>
> H. Molded connectors (wire nuts) may be used for splicing size 10 AWG
> or smaller wires on lighting and receptacle circuits only. All other
> wiring shall be spliced only with lugs and terminal blocks.
>
> I. Terminal lugs shall be mechanical clamp or compression type unless
> part of a circuit breaker or switch assembly. Set-screw type lugs in
> which the set-screw bears directly on the conductor shall not be used.
>
> J. Install splices and tapes which have mechanical strengths and
> insulation ratings which are equivalent, or better than, those of
> conductors.
>
> K. Use splices and tape connectors which are compatible with conductor
> material. Copper-to-copper wire splices shall use copper connectors.
>
> L. Size all branch circuit and subdistribution circuits according to
> equipment nameplate rating and NEC.
>
> M. The maximum voltage drop on any branch circuit shall not exceed 3%
> of the circuit supply voltage when measured at the load termination of
> the circuit.
>
> N. Provide a separate ground bonding conductor inside of all flexible
> conduit (and liquid tight flexible conduit) in addition to integral
> bonding tape. Bonding conductor should run full length of flexible
> conduit.
>
> O. Except where conductor sizes are indicated on the drawings, the
> following schedule shall be adhered to:

CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT

[DEVICE RATING\_\_\_]{.underline} C[ONDUCTOR SIZE]{.underline}

20 amperes or less 12

30 amperes 10

40 amperes 8

50 amperes 6

60 amperes 6

70 amperes 4

80 amperes 4

90 amperes 2

100 amperes 2

> P. Conductor length, size and type for parallel feeders, shall be
> identical.

Q. Color code the entire power wiring system as follows:

[208Y/120 Volt System]{.underline} [480Y/277 Volt System]{.underline}

Phase A - Black Phase A - Brown

Phase B - Red Phase B - Orange

Phase C - Blue Phase C - Yellow

Neutral - White Netural - White

Ground - Green Ground - Green

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

> A. Prior to energization, test cable and wire for continuity of
> circuitry, and for short circuits. Correct malfunctions when detected.
>
> B. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and
> demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16130

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

PART 1. GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section applies to raceways and boxes required for routing,
splicing, termination, and connection, of wires and cables indicated on
the drawings and specified herein.

B. The scope of work shall include furnishing and complete installation
of the equipment and materials covered by this section, with all
auxiliaries, ready for use.

1.02 REFERENCES

> The latest editions of the publications listed below form a part of
> this specification to the extent referenced and have the same force
> and effect as if bound into the contract documents.

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

ANSI C80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit

ANSI C80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing

ANSI C80.5 Rigid Aluminum Conduit

B. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

C. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

> NEMA FB1 Fittings, cast metal boxes and conduit bodies for conduit and
> cable assemblies.

NEMA RN1 Polyvinyl- Chloride (PVC), externally coated galvanized rigid
steel conduit, and intermediate metal conduit.

NEMA TC3 PVC fittings for use with rigid PVC conduit and tubing.

NEMA 250 Enclosures for electrical equipment.

D. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 70-96 National Electrical Code (NEC).

E. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. (UL)

UL 1 UL Standard for Safety-

Flexible metal conduit.

UL 1242 UL Standard for Safety -

Intermediate Metal Conduit.

UL 6 UL Standard for Safety -

Rigid Metal Conduit.

UL 651 UL Standard for Safety schedule 40 and 80

rigid PVC conduit.

UL 50 UL Standard for Safety

\- Cabinets and boxes

UL 514A UL Standards for Safety

-Metallic outlet boxes

UL 514B UL Standard for Safety fittings for conduit

and outlet boxes.

UL 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing

> UL 870 UL Standard for safety wireways, auxiliary gutters, and
> associated fittings.
>
> UL 884 UL Standard for safety underfloor Raceways and fittings.

F. FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FS)

W - F- 406D Fittings for cable, power, electrical and conduit, metal,
flexible.

W-F-408E Fittings for conduit, metal, rigid (thick-wall and thin-wall
(EMT) type)

WW-C-540C Conduit, metal, rigid; and coupling, elbow and nipple,
electrical conduit; aluminum.

WW-C-566C Conduit, metal, flexible.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUIT AND CONDUIT FITTINGS.

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid steel conduit including couplings, elbows,
bends and nipples shall conform to the requirements of UL6, ANSI C80.1
and FS WW-C-540C. Steel fittings shall be galvanized by the hot-dip
process. Where indicated, in corrosive areas or in direct contact with
earth, rigid steel conduit shall be PVC coated and conform to NEMA RN 1,
Type 20.

B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: Rigid aluminum conduit including couplings,
elbows, bends and nipples shall conform to the requirements of UL 6,
ANSI C80.5 and FS WW-C-540C.

Fittings for rigid aluminum conduit shall be threaded, and shall conform
to NEMA FB 1 and FS W-F-480E.

C. Electrical Metallic Tubing: EMT shall be rigid metallic conduit of
the thinwall type in straight lengths, elbows, or bends and shall
conform to ANSI C 80.3 and the requirements of UL 797.

Couplings and connectors shall be hex-nut expansion-gland type, Zinc or
Calminum plated. Crimp, spring or setscrew type fittings are not
acceptable. Where EMT enters outlet boxes, cabinets or other enclosures,
connectors shall be the insulated-throat type, with a locknut. Fittings
shall meet the requirements of NEMA FB 1 and FS W-F-480E.

D. Rigid Plastic Conduit: PVC conduit shall not be lighter than schedule
40. Rigid PVC shall be the slip-joint solvent-weld type, and fittings
shall be unthreaded solid PVC. Conduits and fittings shall conform to UL
651 and NEMA TC3.

E. Flexible Metallic Conduit: Flexible Metallic Conduit shall meet the
requirement of UL 1 and FS WW-C-566C.

Liquid-tight flexible metallic conduit shall be provided with a
protective jacket of PVC extruded over a flexible interlocked galvanized
steel core to protect wiring against mositure, oil, chemicals and
corrosive fumes.

Fittings for flexible metallic conduit shall meet the requirements of UL
514B. Type I (box connector, electrical), Type III (coupling, electrical
conduit, flexible steel) or Type IV (adapters, electrical conduit).

Fittings for liquid-tight flexible metallic conduit shall meet the
requirements of UL 514B. Type I (box connector, electrical), Class 3
liquid-tight flexible metallic conduit connectors.

Flexible metallic conduit fittings shall conform to FS W-F-460D.

2.02 WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

Wireways and auxiliary gutters for use in exposed, dry locations shall
be prefabricated channel-shaped sheet metal trough with hinged or
removable covers, associated fittings, and supports for housing, and
protecting electrical wires and cables in accordance with UL 870.

Straight sections of trough, elbows, tees, crosses, closing plates,
connectors and hanging brackets shall be constructed from sheet steel of
commerical quality no less than 16 gage. Sheet metal component parts
shall be cleaned, phosphatized, and coated with a corrosion-resistant
gray paint.

2.03 SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS

Surface metal raceways shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 70. The
minimum size shall equal or exceed the capacity of 1/2 inch trade size
conduit.

2.04 BOXES

A. Boxes shall have sufficient volume to accommodate the number of
conductors entering the box in accordance with the requirements of NFPA
70 and UL 514A.

B. Interior outlet boxes shall be fabricated from galvanized flat rolled
sheet steel, not less than 14 gage.

C. Outlet boxes at outdoor locations shall be fabricated from corrosion
resistant cast metal face plates with spring-hinged waterproof caps
suitably configured for each application, including face plate gaskets
and corrosion resistant fasteners.

D. Junction boxes and pull boxes shall have screw-on covers or locking
hinged covers. NEMA 1 boxes will be used indoors, NEMA 3R boxes or
better shall be used outdoors.

E. Floor boxes shall be cast-iron, waterproof, adjustable type, with
threaded conduit hubs and vertical adjusting rings, gaskets,
floor-plates and screw-on covers. All conduit connectors and entry hubs
shall be insulated or shall have insulated bushings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Conduit shall be 3/4 inch diameter minimum, except where specified
otherwise on the drawings.

3.02 Rigid steel conduits shall be used in outdoor locations, and in
indoor exposed locations subject to damage, or below 6 feet in vehicle
or cart traffic areas.

3.03 Rigid aluminum conduit is permitted in lieu of rigid steel conduit
in sizes 2 inches and large in indoor locations.

3.04 PVC conduits shall not be used except in concrete enclosed
underground duct or specifically shown on underground duct.

3.05 Electrical raceway connections to vibrating equipment and machinery
such as A.C. units, condensors, fans, dry type transformers, etc., shall
be made with flexible metal conduit (liquid-tight in outdoor or
underfloor locations). Flexible connections to motors shall contain a 90
degree bend.

3.06 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall be used in all indoor
locations except where indicated otherwise.

3.07 Surface metal raceways shall be used only in finished areas and
only where specifically noted on the drawings.

3.08 All new conduits in finished area shall be concealed unless
specifically noted otherwise.

3.09 Grout around all conduits at ceiling, floor, and wall penetrations
to provide air-tight seal. All floor slab, and fire-rated, wall
penetrations shall be sealed with fireproof compound.

3.10 Group together exposed conduits in so for as possible. Install all
conduits parallel or prependicular to the building surfaces. Mount on
channel strut supports.

3.11 All conduits shall be rigidly supported to the building structure.
The maximum spacing of support shall be as follows:

A. Vertical Runs- 10 Foot

B. Horizontal Runs- 8 Foot

C. Below Raised Floor- 5 Foot

> D. Flex Below Raised Floor- Support Not Required
>
> Conduits shall not be supported from suspended ceiling support wires.

3.12 All conduit bends shall be made with an approved conduit bender and
no bend shall have a centerline radius less than six times the diameter
of the conduit.

3.13 The electrical contractor is responsible for maintaining the
structural integrity of all floors and walls after core drills for
conduits are made.

3.14 Provide bonded expansion fittings across building expansion joints,
in floors and ceiling to ensure good continuity.

3.15 Use stuff boxes and cork fittings to prevent entrances of water and
debris during construction prior to completion of conduit installation.

3.16 Coat rigid steel conduit in direct contact with earth with an
approved asphalthum compound.

3.17 Install boxes and fittings where indicated. Complying with the
manufacturer's instructions applicable requirements of the NFPA 70, and
recognized industry practice.

3.18 Pull boxes that are not specifically shown on the drawings but are
required for proper installation of the electrical system shall be
installed by the electrical contractor.

3.19 Outlet boxes shall be rigidly supported from the building
structure. Junction, and pull boxes, must also be independently
supported unless all connecting conduits are rigidly supported within 3
ft. of the box.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16140

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 This section applies to wiring devices, such as wall switches,
receptacles, floor outlets, weatherproof outlets and device plates.

1.02 REFERENCES

> The latest editions of the publications listed below form a part of
> the specification to the extent referenced and have the same force and
> effect as if bound into the contract documents.

A. [National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)]{.underline}

> NEMA PR 4 Plugs, Receptacles and cable connectors of the pin and
> sleeve type for industrial use.

NEMA WD 1 General requirements for wiring devices.

> NEMA WD 6 Wiring Devices- Dimensional requirements

B. [National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)]{.underline}

NFPA 70-96 National Electrical Code

C. [Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)]{.underline}

> UL 20 UL Standard for Safety-General use snap switches
>
> UL 486A UL Standard for Safety Wire Connectors

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Wall Switches

> Snap switches installed for the control of incandescent, mercury, and
> fluorescent lighting fixtures shall be heavy-duty, general-purpose,
> non-interchangeable devices conforming to UL 20 and NEMA WD 1, as
> indicated.
>
> Snap switches shall be the toggle type: Single-two-position devices
> rated 20 amperes at 277 volts, 60 hertz, AC only,and meet the
> requirements of UL 20.

All snap switches shall be made by the same manufacturer.

> Where two or more snap switches are to be installed at the same
> location, they shall be mounted in one-piece ganged switch boxes, with
> a gang cover plate.
>
> Combination snap switch and single or duplex receptacles shall be
> mounted in two-gang switch boxes, with a combination two-gang cover
> plate.
>
> Combination snap switch and flush pilot light shall be interchangeable
> devices mounted in a one-gang switch box with a one-gang, two-opening
> cover plate.

B. Receptacles.

> Receptacles shall be 20 ampere, 125-volt, ac, 2-pole, 3-wire, duplex
> grounded, conforming to NEMA PR 4, NEMA WD 1 and to the 5-20R
> configuration in NEMA WD 6 unless indicated as special purpose outlet.
>
> Bodies of 20-ampere receptacles shall be phenolic compound supported
> by a mounting yoke having plaster ears. Contact arrangement shall be
> such that contact is made on two sides of an inserted blade. Each
> receptacle shall be side wired with two screws per terminal, provided
> with a third grounding pole, and shall be capable of receiving 2-wire,
> 3-pole parallel-blade caps. Third grounding pole connected to locking
> receptacles shall conform to NEMA WD 6. One plug shall be furnished
> with each locking receptacle. Receptacles shall meet the requirements
> for retention of plugs, overload, temperature, and assembly security
> in accordance with NEMA WD 1.

C. Floor Outlets

> Convenience outlets installed in floors for connection to 120-volt ac
> single-phase circuits shall consist of single or duplex receptacles
> enclosed in floor boxes with cover plates especially approved for this
> purpose.

D. Weatherproof Outlets

> Convenience outlets installed in outdoor damp, or wet locations for
> connection to 120-volt, ac single-phase circuits shall consist of
> single or duplex receptacles enclosed in weatherproof outlet boxes,
> with gasketed cast-aluminum plates and spring-loaded hinged lift
> covers. Springs and hingle pins shall be corrosion-resistant steel.
> Screws and spring covers shall be chromium or cadmium plated brass.
> Rubber or neoprene gaskets shall provide a positive seal against the
> weather.

E. Device Plates

> Wall plates for flush snap switches and receptacles shall be the
> appropriate type and size and shall match the wiring devices for which
> they are intended. Dimensions for openings in wall plates shall be in
> accordance with NEMA WD 1. Wall plates for flush snap switches and
> receptacles shall be corrosion-resistant steel, not less than
> 0.040-inch thick, with beveled edges, and a brushed satin finish.
> Mounting screws shall be corrosion-resistant steel with oval
> countersunk heads finished to match the plate.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES

> A. Install wiring devices and accessories as indicated, and in
> accordance with manufacturer's written instruction, applicable
> requirements of NEC, and recognized industry practices to fulfill
> project requirements.
>
> B. Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical boxes
> and wiring installations, as necessary to interface installation of
> wiring devices with other work.
>
> C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean;
> free from building materials, dirt, and debris.
>
> D. Install galvanized steel wallplates in unfinished spaces.
>
> E. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed.
>
> F. Install wall plates after painting work is completed.
>
> G. Install telephone/power service poles in accordance with final
> furnishings arrangement plan: plumb, true, and secure.
>
> H. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in
> accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening
> values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements
> are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with
> tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A. Use properly scaled
> torque indicating hand tool.
>
> I. Receptacles shall be mounted with the bottom of the receptacle 18
> inches above the finished floor unless otherwise noted.
>
> J. Switches shall be mounted vertically with the top of the switch 48
> inches above the finished floor unless otherwise indicated. Notify
> engineer of any discrepancies before roughing in outlet and obtain a
> new location. Gang multiple switches at one location under a single
> multi-gang plate. Locate switches on strike side of door between 6
> inch and 12 inches from edge of door frame.
>
> K. Label all receptacles and switches indicating the source from which
> they are energized.

3.02 PROTECTION

> Protect installed components from damage. Replace damaged items prior
> to final acceptance.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

> A. Testing: Prior to energizing circuits, test wiring for electrical
> continuity, and for short-circuits. Ensure proper polarity of
> connections is maintained. Subsequent to energizing, test wiring
> devices and demonstrate compliance with requirements, operating each
> device at least six times.
>
> B. Test ground fault interrupter operation with both local and remote
> fault simulations in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16410

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> This section applies to motor and circuit disconnects as indicated on
> the drawings and specified herein.

1.02 REFERENCE

> The latest editions of the publications listed below form a part of
> this specification to the extent referenced and have the same force
> and effects as if bound into the contract documents.

A. [National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)]{.underline}

[Publications.]{.underline}

1\. KS 1 Enclosed Switches

2\. ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls

and Systems

3\. 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

(1000 Volts Maximum)

B. [Federal Specifications (FS)]{.underline}

WW-C-375B Circuit Breakers, Molded Case,

Branch Circuit and Service

1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS

> Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications, and
> standards, except where more stringent requirements and specified.

[National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard]{.underline}

70-96 National Electrical Code (NEC)

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Each major component of equipment shall have, as a minimum, the
manufacturer's name, address, and catalog or style number on a nameplate
securely attached to the item of equipment. Nameplates for individual
items of electrical equipment shall be as specified in referenced
publications and shall be provided on each item of equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DISCONNECTS

Provide Type 3R enclosure for outdoor installations and Type 1 enclosure
for indoor installations, in accordance with NEMA ICS 6 and NEMA 250,
surface-mounted, Type HD in accordance with NEMA KS 1. Voltage rating
shall be 600 V unless otherwise noted. Current rating shall be as shown
on the drawings.

2.02 All switches shall be provided with ground lugs.

2.03 Provide solid neutral where shown on drawings.

2.04 FUSES

Fast-acting, one-time, current limiting, 200,000 asymmetrical
interrupting capacity (AIC), Class RK1, 600V, sized as shown

2.05 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

FS WW-C-375B

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Locate each disconnecting device so it is easily accessible to, and
visible from, the equipment serviced.

3.02 Mount motor and circuit disconnects in accordance with Articles
110-13 (a) and 300-11 of the NEC.

3.03 Ground motor and circuit disconnects in accordance with Article 250
of the NEC.

3.04 Identify the disconnect with an engraved laminated plastic
nameplate (white letters on black background) permanently attached to
the front of the cover. Letters shall be 3/4-inch high and legend shall
describe the equipment served and fuse size (when applicable).

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16420

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

Motor control devices as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

1.02 REFERENCE

The latest editions of the publications listed below form part of this
specification to the extent referenced and have the same force and
effect as if they were bound into the contract documents.

[National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
Standard:]{.underline}

250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

(1000 volts maximum)

1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS

Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications, and
standards, except where more stringent requirements are specified.

[National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard]{.underline}

70-96 National Electrical Code (NEC)

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MOTOR STARTERS

Rated in accordance with Article 440 of the NEC for hermetic motors and
in accordance with Article 430 of the NEC for non-hermetic motors;
UL-listed line voltage magnetic type, with thermal overload, low voltage
protection, auxiliary interlocks, NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures,
conforming to NEMA 250. Combination starters of the fusible disconnect
type may be used.

2.02 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS

Manually-operated toggle switch equipment with one thermal overload
relay mounted in NEMA 1 enclosure.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Provide each motor with an individual motor starter unless the
application is specifically excepted by Articles 430 and 440 of the NEC.

3.02 Install motor starters in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.

3.03 Install suitable sized thermal units in all motor starters. Do not
jump or bypass thermal overloads.

3.04 Identify each motor starter with an engraved laminated plastic
nameplate (1/4-inch white letters on background) permanently attached to
the front of the cover with a legend describing the equipment served
(Example: Air Handling Unit No. 1 Motor).

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16440

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

> This section applies to panelboards as indicated on the drawings and
> specified herein.

1.02 REFERENCE

> The latest edition of the publications listed below form a part of
> this specification to the extent referenced and have the same force
> and effect as if bound into the contract documents.

[Federal Specification (FS)]{.underline}

W-P- 115B Panel, Power Distribution

1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS

> Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications, and
> standards, except where more stringent requirements are specified.

[National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard]{.underline}

70-96 National Electrical Code (NEC)

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

> A. The panelboards shall conform to FS W-P-115B, Type 1, Class 1 as
> shown on the drawing and as specified herein.
>
> B. Cabinet and trim shall be of code gauge steel (minimum) with 4 inch
> (minimum) wiring gutter all around. All panelboards shall be equipped
> with a hinged, locking door. Two keys shall be furnished with each
> cabinet, and all locks on all cabinets shall be keyed alike.
>
> C. Where panels occur adjacent to one another, cabinets and doors for
> each panel shall be of the same height.
>
> D. Panelboards shall be painted with gray lacquer over rust
> preventative primer. Sides and top of surface mounted panels shall be
> painted to match fronts.
>
> E. Panels shall be of the circuit breaker type, and shall have
> capacity and arrangement as shown on the panel schedules or one-line
> diagram.
>
> F. Branch circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type and shall be of the
> ambient compensated, thermal magnetic type, which will provide inverse
> time delay overload, and instantaneous short circuit protection.
> Branch circuit breakers shall have one, two, or three poles as
> designated on the panel schedule. No circuit breakers utilizing handle
> ties for two or three pole operation will be acceptable. Voltage and
> current ratings shall be as indicated on the drawings.
>
> G. Refer to panel schedules on drawings for exact circuit breaker
> arrangements and interrupting capacities.
>
> H. Provide a typewritten directory for each panel, placed inside the
> panel door.

I. Each panel shall be equipped with a ground lug for feeder ground.

> J. Each panel and cabinet and the units comprising same shall bear the
> manufacturer's nameplate and the U.L. label.
>
> K. All three-phase, four-wire panels shall be equipped with a fully
> rated neutral bar.

L. All bus shall be 1000 ampere per square inch (APSI) copper.

2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

> A. Panelboards shall be Square "D" Company, G.E., Westinghouse,
> Siemens, or approved equal.

B. Breakers shall be manufactured by the respective panelboard
manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Mount panels in locations shown, making sure that code-required
clearances exist.

> B. Where cabinets cannot be set fully flush due to shallowness of
> partition, trim protruding sides with approved metal or hardwood
> molding, fasten to cabinet so as to conceal intersection of wall and
> cabinet.
>
> C. If panel is damaged during shipping or installation, damaged
> portion shall be sanded smooth and entire panel repainted.

D. Install panelboard in accordance with NEC 384.

> E. Identify panelboards with an engraved laminated plastic nameplate
> (1/4- inch white letters on black background) permanently attached to
> the front of the cover identifying panel name, voltage, amp rating,
> and power source from which it is energized. Example:

PANEL KDX, 208Y/120V, 100A

FED FROM PANEL VC

F. Provide and install schedule giving circuit number, amperage, and
equipment served.

G. Where modification to an existing panelboard is required, update
panelboard schedule to reflect work performed.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16460

LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

This section applies to low voltage distribution transformer 500 KVA or
less with primary and secondary voltages less than 600 volts as
indicated on the drawing and specified herein.

1.02 REFERENCES

> The latest edition of the publications listed below form a part of
> this specification to the extent referenced and have the same force
> and effect as if bound into the contractor documents.

[National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)]{.underline}

[Publication]{.underline}

ST-20 Dry Type Transformers for General

Applications

1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS

Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications, and
standards, except where more stringent requirements are specified:

[National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard:]{.underline}

70-96 National Electrical Code (NEC)

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Transformers shall conform to NEMA ST-20. Size and rating of the
transformers are shown on the drawings.

> B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
> manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work
> include:

1\. Hevi-Duty

2\. General Electric

3\. Sorgel/Square D

4\. Westinghouse

5\. Or approved equal

> C. All transformers shall be factory-assembled, general-purpose,
> air-cooled, dry-type. The transformers shall have, as a minimum, four
> 2-1/2 percent taps, 2 above and 2 below rated primary volts.
>
> D. The insulation system shall have a 220° C rating, with a 115° C
> temperature rise above 40° C ambient. The insulation system shall be
> capable of carrying a 15 percent overload without exceeding a 150° C
> rise in ambient temperature. The maximum temperature of the top of the
> enclosure shall not exceed a rise of 35°C above 40°C ambient
> temperature.
>
> E. Provide terminal enclosure, with cover, to accommodate primary and
> secondary coil wiring connections and electrical supply raceway
> terminal connector. Equip terminal leads with connectors installed.
> Limit terminal compartment temperature to 75°C when transformer is
> operating continuously at rated load with ambient temperature of 40°C.
> Provide wiring connectors suitable for copper wiring. Cushion-mount
> transformers with external vibration isolation supports; Sound-level
> ratings not to exceed 50 db. Electrically ground core and coils to
> transformer enclosure by means of flexible metal grounding strap.
> Provide transformers with fully-enclosed sheet steel enclosures. Apply
> manufacturer's standard light gray indoor enamel over cleaned and
> phosphatized steel enclosure. Transformers rated 3-15 kVA shall be
> suitable for wall mounting.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

> A. Mount each transformer in the location shown in accordance with
> manufacturer's written instruction, applicable requirements of NEC and
> in accordance with recognized industry and in accordance with
> recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill
> requirements.
>
> B. Transformers shall not be in physical contact with walls, ductwork,
> piping, or other building elements except for base and flexible
> conduit connection.
>
> C. Mount each unit on pad type vibration isolators. Select isolators
> to match unit weight.
>
> D. All conduit connections at the transformer end shall be of the
> flexible type. Minimum flexible conduit length is 24 inches and
> maximum 72 inches.
>
> E. Coordinate transformer installation work with electrical raceway
> and wire/cable work as necessary for proper interface.

3.02 GROUNDING

> A. Provide Equipment grounding connections, to assure permanent and
> effective ground, for transformers in accordance with NEC, Article
> 250-42.

B. Ground the secondary neutral of the transformers to the grounding
electrode system per NEC, Article 250-26.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16500

LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY.

This section applies to lighting fixtures, complete with lamps and
hangers as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS.

Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications and standards,
except where more stringent requirements are specified:

[National Fire Protection Associates (NFPA) Standard]{.underline}:

70-96 National Electrical Code (NEC).

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE.

Each major component of equipment shall have, as a minimum, the
manufacturer\'s name, address, and catalog or style number on a
nameplate securely attached to the item of equipment. Nameplates for
individual items of electrical equipment shall be as specified in
referenced publications and shall be provided on each item of equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 LAMPS:

Of the wattage and type listed (General Electric, Westinghouse,
Sylvania, or equal), high-efficiency, low-wattage, T8 fluorescent lamps
unless otherwise shown.

2.02 FIXTURES:

Of the wattage and type listed on the drawings, suitable for the exact
type of ceiling in which installed (General Electric, Westinghouse,
Sylvania, or equal).

2.03 BALLAST:

Equip all fluorescent fixtures with CBM and ETL approved, Class P, high
efficiency, low harmonic (less than 10% THD) electronic ballast unless
shown otherwise.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Structurally support all lighting fixtures. Suspend pendant
mounting fixtures from bar joists or other structure using channel
and/or anchors and threaded rod. Support lay-in fixtures on each corner
with hanger wire. Install all fixtures at the height indicated on
drawings. Provide fixture studs as necessary. Secure surface mounted
fixtures to masonry walls with bolts and lead anchors or to dry-wall
partitions and ceilings with sheet metal screws into metal or wood
studs.

3.02 Route conduit for lay-in fixtures so as not to interfere with
ceiling tile removal.

3.03 Flexible metal conduit may be used from J boxes to fixture or from
fixture to fixture with lengths as permitted by the NEC.

3.04 1/2\" conduit may be used for switch legs only.

3.05 Provide mounting bracket for emergency lighting fixtures.

3.06 Provide an unswitched circuit to all emergency and exit light
fixtures.

3.07 Install lights in accordance with the NEC.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16921

FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY.

This section applies to fire-alarm and detection systems, or components
thereof, as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

1.02 REFERENCES.

The latest editions of the publications listed below form a part of this
specification to the extent referenced and have the same force and
effect as if bound into the contract documents.

A. [National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)]{.underline}

1\. 70-96 National Electrical Code

2\. 72 National Fire Alarm Code

3\. 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

4\. 92A Smoke Control Systems

5\. 101-88 Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings

and Structures

B. [Underwriter\'s Laboratories (UL) Standards]{.underline}

1\. UL 38 Standard for Safety Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes

2\. UL 268 Standard for Safety Smoke Detectors

3\. UL 464 Standard for Safety Audible Signal Appliances

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE.

The equipment to be provided shall be the standard catalog product of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of fire-alarm
equipment that meets the requirements specified herein. Fire-alarm
equipment shall be the latest standard design and approved by
Underwriter\'s Laboratories and/or Factory Mutual. Devices shall be
approved by the control panel manufacture and fire alarm authority
having jurisdiction for use with the new or existing panel.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. The fire alarm system shall contain the
following components as indicated on the drawings.

1\. Alarm control units

2\. Emergency battery and charger unit

3\. Devices required for remote report

4\. Combination fixed temperature and rate-of-rise detectors

5\. Product-of-combustion detectors including air handling unit (AHU)
duct detection

6\. Rate compensation detectors

7\. Manual alarm stations

8\. Alarm horn

9\. Alarm horn/visual indicators

10\. Revolving beacons/strobes

11\. Water-flow switches

12\. Annunciation panels

13\. Auxiliary components switches, relays, dampers, etc.

14\. Raceways, wiring, and associated circuitry for a complete fire
alarm system, including connections to auxiliary

devices, such as water pressure switches, air handler controls, and
ventilating system control

2.02 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. The fire-alarm system shall be nominal 24 dc, and noncoded. The
system shall comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 90A and NFPA 101.

B. System component installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 70,
Article 500 in hazardous facilities.

C. All fire alarm circuits shall be electrically supervised, Style B
(Class B) for initiating circuits and Style 3 (Class B) for indicating
circuits.

D. The fire-alarm system shall be compatiable with the existing MSFC
Central Fire Alarm System, Simplex 2120.

2.03 ALARM CONTROL UNIT.

The alarm control unit shall be non-addressable type unless indicated
otherwise in the drawing. The alarm control unit shall be of modular
design, for ease of future extension or modification, or both. The front
of the panel shall have steady "power on " (green) "alarm" (red) and
"trouble" (amber) indicating lights. In addition, each zone shall have
separate "alarm" and "trouble" indicating lights.

A. Indicating lights shall be visible when the cabinet is closed. The
unit shall also contain the following switches accessible only by
unlocking and opening the unit:

1\. Alarm Silence

2\. Trouble Silence

3\. Power On-Off

4\. Alarm/Trouble Reset

B. The alarm control unit shall function when a detector or manual alarm
station or water-flow switch connected to the unit is

activated. The fire-alarm indicator and alarm-control circuits shall
energize and activate the external audible and visible signal and
auxiliary devices, providing zone indication and sending an alarm signal
to the remote central station fire monitoring system.

C. The control unit shall contain components and circuitry to operate a
local annunciator and auxiliary devices such as air handlers,
ventilating fans, damper solenoids, and magnetic door holders.

D. The unit shall report the following conditions as trouble: open
supervised circuits, ground faults, loss of primary power, power supply
anomalies, low battery voltage, loss of battery voltage, and activation
of the alarm silence switch. These troubles shall activate the trouble
indicator and a trouble buzzer located within the cabinet, provide zone
indication, and send a trouble signal to the central station fire
monitoring system.

E. System Power Switch: The on-off switch shall disconnect all power
sources to the control panel (120V AC and 24V DC).

F. System Reset Switch: The alarm/trouble reset switch shall reset the
detector system in alarm or trouble. Trouble signals shall not be
self-restoring without activating the reset switch.

G. Alarm and Trouble Silence Switch: The alarm and trouble silence
switches shall silence the alarm and trouble audibles. Either switch
placed in other than the normal position shall provide the following:

1\. Report as a trouble to the central station fire monitoring system.

2\. Transfer audible noise to a panel lamp visual indication.

3\. Re-ring the trouble audible if the problem has been cleared but the
switch has been left in the silence position.

H. When the alarm silencing switch is in the silence position,
subsequent alarms in other zones shall operate the alarm-sounding
devices.

I. The alarm-control unit shall be approved for use with the detectors
and manual alarm stations and other fire alarm devices.

J. Relays shall be supervised, continuous duty, have self-cleaning
contacts of silver or an alloy of equivalent performance, and be UL/FM
approved for system use. Supervisory relays shall be protected against
dust by individual covers. Relays that provide zone and external
functions such as remote reporting, control device activation, signal
lights, and bells shall have at least one set of spare contacts. Relays
shall be permanently marked with the coil resistance, operating-current
range, and internal pin connections identified by standard pin numbers.

K. The control-unit cabinet shall be steel and shall be provided with a
hinged cover and an integral pin-tumbler cylinder lock that will accept
the key presently in use with other control units existing in the area.
Locks for panels to be installed in control panels are available from
ESP LOCK CORP. of Leominster, MA, 01453. The cabinet shall be painted
with a prime coat and one or more finish coats of scratch-resistant
baked red enamel.

L. An etched metal or engraved laminated-plastic identification plate
shall be affixed to the cabinet door of the alarm-control unit to
identify the cabinet as a fire-alarm cabinet.

M. The alarm control panel shall have a supervised, normally closed,
dry, single pole double throw (SPDT) contact that opens for trouble
conditions and a normally open, dry, SPDT contact that closes for alarm
conditions. Conductors shall be installed from these contacts as shown
on the drawings to a new four-point terminal strip in the indicated
telephone terminal cabinet (TTC).

N. Control units shall be provided with a battery backup,

automatically switched, alternative power source. Interruption of
primary power shall cause the unit to switch automatically to the
secondary power source and initiate a trouble signal.

O. The backup battery shall be capable of operating the alarm control
unit in normal supervisory condition for 24 hours, minimum. An alarm
signal receipt during battery backup operation shall cause an alarm
signal to be sent via the remote report circuit and shall sound the
local alarm-signaling appliances for 15 minutes, minimum.

P. The alarm control unit shall be capable of operating on facility
power when the backup batteries are disconnected for any reason. A
system trouble signal shall be sent if the battery is disconnected or
has low voltage.

2.04 HEAT-ACTUATED DETECTORS.

A. Heat-actuated detectors (HADs) shall be rated 136 degrees F fixed
temperature and 15 degrees F per minute rate-of-rise. HADS shall be
self-restorable for the rate-of-rise feature and nonrestorable for fixed
temperature.

B. Non restorable detectors shall have a visual identifier to show when
device has been expended to facilitate replacement.

2.05 PRODUCT-OF-COMBUSTION DETECTORS.

A. Detectors shall operate on the ionization or the smoke obscuration
principle, or both, and shall be activated by the presence of combustion
gases, invisible particles, or visible smoke particles. The detectors
shall include a molded base, detector head, and locking means. Smoke
detectors shall conform to UL 268.

B. The detector head shall be a plug-in unit and shall contain no moving
parts. It shall require no replacements or readjustments to restore it
to normal operation after an alarm has been given. The sensitivity shall
be adjustable to compensate for ambient operating conditions.

C. The base shall have terminals for making connections and shall
incorporate a light emitting diode or neon indicator that shall provide
a visual indication when the detector initiates an alarm. The base shall
contain the receptacle for the plug-in detector head. Components of the
detectors shall be rust and corrosion resistant.

2.06 MANUAL ALARM STATIONS.

A. Manual alarm stations shall be break-glass alarm-initiating devices
designed in accordance with UL 38 for use with automatic and manual fire
alarm systems.

B. The door shall have a protected, pull-down operating lever with
finger grip that does not project out from the front of the case.
Terminal blocks shall be readily accessible from station front.

C. Stations shall be the noncoded type which, when operated, break a
glass rod, close one or more sets of contacts and lock the contacts in
the operated position until reset. Stations with a pushbutton that
depend upon a spring-loaded device to close the contacts when the handle
is pulled are not acceptable. Stations shall not be resettable without
the use of a key or a wrench. Exposed metal surfaces of enclosing cases
shall be painted with a prime coat and one or more finish coats of red
enamel to produce a smooth, hard, durable finish. Identification and
directions for operating manual-alarm stations shall be provided on the
cover in raised or depressed white-enameled letters. Plastic or
composite material is not acceptable.

D. Surface-mounted stations shall be furnished with matching cast-iron
or cast-aluminum back boxes with top and bottom threaded-conduit
connections.

E. Manual alarm stations shall be positioned so that they are readily
accessible. Locations shall comply with NFPA 101 and NFPA 72.

F. A flush pin-tumbler cylinder lock and key shall be provided on
general alarm type stations to sound the general alarm for fire drill or
test without breaking the glass rod in the latching mechanism. Locks on
manual alarm stations shall be keyed alike and shall accept the keys
presently in use with other manual alarm stations at the installation.

2.07 ALARM HORN

A. Fire-alarm horns shall be designed in accordance with UL

464\. The horn shall produce at least 86 Db at 10 feet and shall conform
to NFPA 72.

B. Horns shall be in red with white "Fire" lettering.

C. Surface-mounted alarm horns installed in unfinished areas with
conduit exposed shall be secured to surface-mounted back boxes. Back
boxes shall be cast iron or cast aluminum, with 3/4-inch threaded
conduit connections. Surface-mounted alarm bells installed outdoors
shall be weatherproof with a neoprene gasket and shall be protected
against corrosion.

D. Exposed metal surfaces shall be factory painted with a prime coat and
one or more finish coats of red enamel to provide a smooth, hard,
durable finish.

2.08 WIRING AND RACEWAY

A. Wiring materials shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 70,
Article 760.

B. All wiring must be appropriately must be color coded,and permanent
wire markers must be used to identify the terminals for each zone at the
control panel. All junction boxes that are visible or accessable must be
painted red.

C. All wiring must be in metal conduits and copper conductors must be
used.

D. Initiating device or indicating appliance circuits must not be
included in raceways containing ac power or ac control wiring.

2.09 POWER SOURCE

A. The normal power for the local systems for all purposes shall be 120
volts, 60 hertz. The system shall operate when supplied with 85 to 110
percent of normal voltage.

> B. The fire-alarm-system disconnect and protective device shall be a
> circuit breaker or fused siwthc and shall be red with a factory
> finish. In addition, the device shall be marked FIRE-ALARM DISCONNECT
> with 1/2 inch high letters in white paint or engraved phenolic
> identification plate fastened to the device.

2.10 STROBE LIGHTS.

Strobe lights shall conform to NFPA 72 and shall be capable of accepting
Xenon type flash tube rated at 70,000 to 250,000 candle power in excess
of 1,000 hours of operation at 1 to 2 flashes per second.

Actuated by solid state trigger circuity enclosed in Laxan, or approved
equal, lens. Units utilized for direct current applications shall be
polarized for supervision purposes. Strobe lights in combination with
alarm horn shall be provided where indicated on the drawing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SERVICES OF A FIRE-ALARM SPECIALIST.

A. The services of a qualified specialist thoroughly experienced in the
work shall be provided to supervise the installation, make adjustments,
and perform test on the fire-alarm system at the site.

B. The specialist for this service shall be one who can present evidence
of experience in system coordination and testing of the kind specified
herein. Work shall be done by or under the direct supervision of this
specialist. Evidence of these qualifications shall be submitted to the
Contracting Officer.

3.02 SYSTEM SEQUENCE OF OPERATION.

A. Normal operation

All switches shall be in the normal position. The available power lamp
shall be ON and the trouble and detector identification lamps shall be
OFF. All circuits shall be electrically supervised.

B. Alarm condition

Detectors, manual alarm stations, water flow switches or other

alarm devices shall close a contact that activates the appropriate alarm
control unit. The alarm control unit shall

transmit a signal to the remote reporting device of the base fire alarm
system, activate the building alarm bells provide zone indication when
used, control air-handling and ventilating units, provide an input to
remote annunciators when used and provide indication or control to other
devices.

C. Trouble condition

System conditions, identified in the paragraph entitled \"Alarm-Control
Unit\", that will transmit a trouble signal to the remote

reporting device of the base fire alarm system, shall provide zone
indication (when used), activate a trouble signal in the alarm-control
unit, and provide input to remote annunciators (when used). The trouble
signal in the alarm-control unit shall be comprised of a trouble lamp
and buzzer.

3.03 INSTALLATION.

A. Alarm-control units

An alarm-control unit, complete with accessories and devices, shall be
installed in each protected building.

B. Heat-actuated detectors (HAD)

HADs shall be provided and installed as specified by analysis and
calculations required by NFPA 72.

C. Product-of-combustion detectors

Product-of-combustion detectors shall be installed in accordance with
applicable NFPA standards. Smoke detectors shall be installed after the
work of other trades has been accomplished.

D. Manual alarm stations

Manual stations shall be mounted 54-inches above the finished floor
level.

E. Horns/strobes/beacons

Horns, strobes, and beacons shall be mounted 7-feet above the

finish floor level and below the bottom surface of the ceiling.

F. Wiring

Wiring shall be No. 14 for lights, beacons, indicator circuits and fire
alarm detection circuits (HADs, ionization detectors, flow switches,
etc.). Wiring for fire alarm signal circuits (bells, horns, etc.) shall
be No. 12 . Conductors shall be continuous from terminal point to
terminal point. Splices are not permitted.

Fire alarm system conductors shall be contained in a separate raceway
system.

Fire-alarm-circuit wiring shall be continuous from terminal point to
terminal point. Splices are not permitted.

G. Power source

There shall be two protected phase wires and a solid grounded neutral.
The operating power for the system shall be obtained from the grounded
neutral and one phase wire; the supervisory power shall be obtained from
the grounded neutral and the other phase wire.

H. Color codes

The signal-initiating and alarm detector circuit shall have one black
loop and one blue loop. Alarm-bell signal-sounding circuits wired in
series shall have both wires colored red. Alarm-bell signal-sounding
circuits wired in parallel shall have a red wire for the positive
conductors and an orange wire for the negative conductor. Lights,
beacons, and indicator circuits shall have brown wires. Each circuit
shall maintain the same color code throughout its length.

I. Installation in cabinets and boxes

Wiring in control cabinets and boxes shall be installed with wires
properly grouped parallel and perpendicular to the major axis of the
building and shall be supported and identified. The control wiring shall
be continuous from terminal point to terminal point with no splices.
Wires entering or leaving control cabinets and boxes shall be
permanently marked and terminated on screw terminals.

J. End-Of-Line Resistor

The End-Of-Line Resistor shall be installed in an accessible location to
facilitiate maintenance and inspection. The exact location of
End-Of-Line Resistor shall be clearly marked on "As-Built" drawing.

3.04 TEST REQUIREMENTS

A. The following tests shall be performed on the external wiring of the
system before connection to the control panel:

1\. The resistance of each zone circuit shall be checked with an
ohmmeter. Temporary jumpers shall be inserted in

appropriate sockets of missing detectors and the end-of-line resistor
shall be installed when this test is performed. Resistance reading for
each zone circuit shall be the value of the end-of-line resistor, plus
or minus 10 percent.

2\. The resistance of supervised bell-circuit wiring shall be checked
with the resistor connected to the last alarm bell in the circuit.
Resistance shall be the value of the end-of-line resistor, plus or minus
10 percent.

3\. Each wire shall be checked for ground with a 500-volt DC insulation
resistance test set. Resistance to ground shall be not less than 20
megohms.

B. Field Testing

1\. After complete installation of the equipment and at such time as
directed by the Contracting Officer, tests shall be conducted to
demonstrate that the installation requirements of this specification
have been met and that the sequential functions of the system comply
with the requirements specified herein. The following tests shall be
performed:

a\. Preliminary (prior to final acceptance): This \"in house\" test
shall verify the systems and components. The preliminary test shall be
performed as many times as necessary to perform one full test without
malfunction.

b\. Final acceptance: After successful completion of the preliminary
testing, the systems shall be fully tested in the presence of the
Contracting Officer and fire authority for final acceptance.

2\. On both preliminary and final tests, the following test procedure
shall be followed. Provide one copy of the test procedures and recording
forms for the preliminary tests. For the final acceptance tests, provide
10 copies of the

test procedures and recording forms for approval 30 working days prior
to system testing.

C. Fire alarm system preliminary tests

After completion of the above test, the external wires of the system
shall be connected to the appropriate terminals in the control panel and
the following test shall be performed:

1\. Each manual alarm station shall be activated to demonstrate proper
operation.

2\. Each product-of-combustion detector shall be activated in accordance
with the manufacturer\'s recommendations to demonstrate proper
operation.

3\. One lead on each product-of-combustion detector, manual pull
station, HAD, or other input device shall be removed to simulate the
trouble condition.

4\. Leads at each alarm-initiating and indicating device shall be
removed to verify trouble and then alarm over trouble.

5\. The rate-of-rise function on each HAD in each zone shall be tested
by application of heat from heat lamp. The HADs shall alarm the system.
HADs shall sustain repeated tests of the rate-of-rise function without
damage or destruction of the fixed temperature element. HADs reacting to
body heat shall be replaced.

6\. Each alarm-initiating circuit shall be demonstrated to operate its
associated alarm-control unit.

7\. Each alarm-control unit shall be demonstrated to operate in all
modes.

8\. Interconnections with fire-protection systems and motor controllers
shall be demonstrated to operate as specified herein.

D. Final fire alarm system acceptance test

After preliminary testing, perform final system acceptance testing.
Testing shall include preliminary functional test

and requirements defined in NFPA 72. Testing shall further demonstrate
device and equipment functions.

E. Existing system tests

1\. Prior to any work, the existing fire alarm devices, including those
at the point of connection and those that are electrically on both sides
of the point of connection shall be functionally tested.

2\. Upon completion of the modification, the newly installed devices and
the devices that are electrically on both sides of the point of
connection shall be functionally tested.

3\. Reproducible copies of the test results shall be furnished to the
Contracting Officer.

F. Test procedures and test record forms

Use the following test procedure to conduct fire alarm systems tests.
Record the results in the inspection and testing form per Article 7-5.1
of NFPA 72. Final acceptance test shall be witnessed by the COTR.

1\. [Prior to test, verify the following]{.underline}:

a\. Contracting Officer has been notified and attendees present.
(Notification required 5 working days prior to test.)

b\. Low voltage wiring continuity and 500 Vdc insulation resistance
tests have been performed.

c\. Record test results on Fire Alarm Test Log.

2\. [Preliminary test]{.underline}:

a\. Power On - Apply power to fire alarm control panel and verify that
\"Power On\" lamp illuminates. All switches should be in normal
position. All other lamps should be off. If other lamps are on, depress
reset button for 3 seconds.

b\. Lamp Test - Depress lamp test button and verify all zone alarm and
trouble lamps on. The trouble signal will sound during lamp test.

3\. [Trouble test]{.underline}:

Remove one lead at a time from each alarm initiating and signaling
device, including HADs, product-of-combustion detectors, manual stations
and flow switches, to simulate trouble condition. Verify trouble lamp
comes on for each zone, trouble buzzer, remote report signal at TTC,
trouble silence, trouble ringback, reset.

4\. [Alarm test]{.underline}:

Activate each alarm initiating device in accordance with paragraph
entitled \"Fire Alarm System Acceptance Test\". Coordinate flow switch
activation with water flow test.

a\. For each of the alarm initiating devices, verify the following:

b\. Fire alarm bells ring. (Depress \"Push to Silence Alarm Signals\"
pushbutton.)

c\. Zone alarm lamp is on.

d\. Alarm signal at TTC.

e\. Shut-down of air-handling units

f\. Verify alarm signal over trouble condition for each loop and ground.

Note: Deactivate alarm device. Reset system by depressing reset button
on control panel for 10 seconds. Verify alarm lamps are off and absence
of alarm signal at TTC.

5\. [Ground detection test]{.underline}:

Connect temporary jumper from ground to each initiating and signal
circuit and to each zone circuit conductor at a terminal in panel or at
a device.

a\. Verify trouble buzzer and trouble lamp are on and verify remote
recording.

b\. Remove the temporary jumper and verify trouble buzzer is off. Verify
lamps off except \"Power On\" lamp.

6\. [Standby power test]{.underline}:

a\. Place system on standby power by turning off 120V primary power.
Verify trouble lamp indication is on.

b\. Initiate an alarm. Verify fire alarm bells, alarm signal at TTC, and
air-handling units shutdown.

c\. Reset system.

d\. Reapply 120V primary power and verify \"Power On\" lamp is on.

With batteries fully charged, turn off 120V primary power. Upon
completion of 24 hours of operation on battery, place the system in
alarm and verify operation of all alarm devices for 15 minutes,
recording battery voltage under no load conditions.

7\. [Installation tests: (For Acceptance)]{.underline}:

a\. All alarm initiation devices shall be tested on completion of the
installation.

b\. Where such tests would destroy the device, other means of testing
shall be provided.

c\. Where local energy is used, tests shall be made using both primary
and secondary power.

d\. The master box or other connection shall be tested at least once on
each circuit.

3.05 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION

A. The Contractor must provide the three copies of following:

1\. As-built wiring and conduit layout diagrams, incorporating wire
color code and/or label numbers, showing the inter-connections in the
system.

2\. As-built schematic wiring diagrams of all control panels, modules,
annuniciators, and communication panels.

3\. Copies of the manufacturer's technical literature on all major parts
of the system, including detectors, manual stations, signaling
appliances, alarm panels and supplies.

B. The Contractor shall provide three copies of Operation and
Maintenance Manual. The Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be of the
loose-leaf type in heavy duty binder which can be retained for future
reference. The Operation and Maintenance Manual shall include the
following:

1\. Manufacturer's instruction of operation and maintenance of the
system.

2\. Approved copies of catalog cuts of the components

3\. Technical literature of major components provided.

4\. Approved as-built drawings.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16922

COMBUSTIBLE GAS DETECTION & OXYGEN DEFICIENCY MONITORING SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

This section applies to oxygen deficiency monitoring system as indicated
on the drawings and specified herein.

1.02 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
basic designation only.

A. Factory Mutual Approval Guide (FMS) (1976. Supp. I, March 76, Supp.
II, June 76)

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards, No. 70-1996,
National Electrical Code (NEC)

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Each major component of equipment shall have, as a minimum, the
manufacturer\'s name, address, and catalog or style number on a
nameplate securely attached to the item of equipment. Nameplates for
individual items of electrical equipment shall be as specified in
referenced publications and shall be provided on each item of equipment.
It is required that statements signed by responsible officials of a
manufacturer of a product, system, or material attesting that the
product, system or material meet specified requirements. The statements
must be dated after the award of this contract, name the project, and
list the specific requirements which it is intended to address.

1.04 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

The equipment shall be properly installed completely interconnected and
placed in working order. The system shall provide electrically
supervised detection of the non-coded type as indicated on the drawings
and as specified herein. Operation of any detection device shall result
in the automatic tripping of the control unit relays for activating both
the remote horns and lights.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Materials and equipment shall be new standard products of the
manufacturer\'s latest design, and suitable to perform the functions
intended. Where two or more pieces of equipment must perform the same
functions, they shall be duplicates produced by one manufacturer. The
name of the manufacturer and the serial numbers shall appear on all
major components.

2.02 COMBUSTIBLE (HYDROGEN SPECIFIC) & OXYGEN DEFICIENCY DETECTING
EQUIPMENT

This equipment shall be as specified on the drawing or equal as approved
by the Contracting Officer. Detector circuit design shall be suitable
for the types and numbers of detectors, as approved, and shall limit
detector circuit current not to exceed ratings of the detectors and
associated relays.

2.03 OXYGEN DEFICIENCY DETECTOR

Detection is by an electrochemical cell in which oxygen produces a
chemical reaction directly proportional to the oxygen content of the
atmosphere surrounding the detector. A definite current, produced by
this reaction, is amplified and used to trip an alarm circuit at a
pre-set point. Minimum shelf life of the detectors shall be six months.

A. Control Unit

Control unit shall be installed as part of the system in each protected
building. The control unit(s) shall be located where indicated and shall
be housed in an enclosure suitable for wall mounting. The control unit
shall include a suitable means for testing the system and shall have an
indicating meter that will show at all times the current passing through
each detector circuit. The unit shall be arranged so as to operate the
alarm relays in the event of activation and to continue operation until
silenced by a switch within the unit cabinet. Operation of the silencing
switch shall light an indicator lamp. Meter and indicator lamp shall be
plainly visible when the cabinet of the control unit is closed. Relays
shall be of the plug-in type.

B. The control panel shall have adequate high pass RF filter traps on
the input leads of all appropriate operational amplifiers such to permit
the system to function normally when subjected to radio frequency in the
range of 164 to 175 megacycles. The Contractor shall furnish
certification of satisfactory compliance with the above requirement.

The front panel indicator lamps shall be color coded as follows:

Oxygen Detection Pilot light, green LED type, to show that module is in
normal operation.

Alarm light, red LED type, to show that oxygen concentration at detector
location has dropped below alarm level. Actuation level fully
adjustable, initially set at 19.0 percent oxygen.

2.04 POWER SUPPLY

A. Primary power supply shall be a 120-volt AC source. Battery back-up
is required. Rectifiers shall be of the solid state type.

B. Power-Supply wiring shall be installed in intermediate metallic
conduit or electrical metallic tubing in accordance with the drawings.
Transformer, rectifier, resistor(s), charger, batteries and other
required power-supply components shall be incorporated in the control
unit, or a separate power-supply unit may be furnished and installed if
approved for the application. A battery-test switch and light shall be
provided in each control unit.

C. The Master Control Unit shall be provided with an integral 12 to 32
Volt DC Power Supply, equipped as required to act as a standby power in
event of primary power failure. Standby power shall be capable of
sustaining unit for a minimum of 10 minutes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION AND WIRING

System components shall be securely fastened to their supports
independently of the wiring. Runs of conduit, tubing, wire, and cable
shall be straight, neatly arranged, properly supported, and parallel or
perpendicular to walls and partitions. Circuits and apparatus installed
in hazardous locations shall conform to the National Electrical Code.

3.02 QUALIFICATION OF INSTALLER

The system shall be installed by an experienced firm regularly engaged
in the installation of combustible gas detection and alarm systems in
accordance with NFPA standards. The Contracting Officer may reject any
proposed installer who cannot show evidence of such qualifications.

3.03 TOOLS, SPARE PARTS, AND OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Special tools necessary for the maintenance of the equipment shall be
furnished. One spare set of fuses of each type and size required shall
be furnished. A hydrogen gas calibration unit shall be provided. Three
sets of operations and maintenance manuals shall be provided.

3.04 REPAIR OF EXISTING WORK

The work shall be carefully laid out in advance. Cutting, channeling,
chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings or other
surfaces as necessary for the proper installation support, or anchorage
of the conduit or other work shall be carefully done. Damage to
buildings, piping, or equipment shall be repaired and refinished by
skilled mechanics of the trades involved.

3.05 TESTS

After complete installation of the equipment, and at the time as
directed by the Contracting Officer, the Contractor shall conduct tests
to demonstrate that operating and installation requirements of this
specification have been met. [Each]{.underline} detector shall be
activated by a hydrogen gas bottle representing the adjusted LEL. Also,
the malfunction feature shall be tested for each control unit.
Contracting Officer shall document results of test and place in file for
future records.

END OF SECTION